Home

Sound Forge Pro 11.0 User Manual

Contents

1. Files to Convert Process Metadata Save Status Add File Add Folder Remove File Folder Size KB Modified Musicbed pca C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 485 1 26 2009 3 04 PM Select a combination of files processes metadata and save options then click Run Job 2 Open the batch job that you want to run If you re not using a saved batch job continue to step 3 a Click the Open Job button 3 The Open dialog is displayed b Browse to the folder where your batch job bj file is saved c Select a batch job and click the Open button 3 Select the Files to Convert tab and add the files that you want to process All data windows that were open in the Sound Forge workspace when you started the Batch Converter are automatically included in the list e Click the Add File button on the toolbar browse to a file and click the Open button to add individual files e Click the Add Folder button on the toolbar select a folder and click the OK button to add all files within a folder Only the contents of the folder you select are added subfolders are not included Drag files from the Windows Explorer to the Files to Convert tab 4 Select the Process tab and verify the processing settings For more information see Creating or editing a batch job on page 256 If you re simply converting to another file format continue to step 5 Tip When you convert files to a compressed
2. To delete an envelope point click it with the right mouse button or double click it with the left mouse button e To move all envelope points press Ctrl A and drag when the envelope has focus the cursor will be displayed as a d You can create up to 16 envelope points Note Click the Reset Envelope button to reset the graph Changing the data window selection You can adjust the selection to be processed by changing the selection in the data window or using the controls at the bottom of the processing dialog Tip Right click the processing dialog and choose acommand from the shortcut menu to change the selection quickly Choose Select Original to restore the selection that existed when you first opened the processing dialog Choose Select All to select all data in the current window Click the More button in the processing dialog Selection and gain controls are displayed at the bottom of the dialog 2 Type a value in the Start box or use the spinner if you want to change the beginning of the selection Click the Lock Start button of if you want to preserve the selection start when adjusting the Length or End settings Note When using the Event tool the Start box is automatically locked Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the beginning of the selection in the data window Lal k 00 00 05 3 Type a value in the End box or use the spinner if you want to change the end of the selection Note
3. D Drum Fill koba B Drum Fill Ecza Selection box spans the height of the window The selection is time zoomed Zooming the level ruler with the Magnify tool 1 Drag the Magnify tool on the waveform to make a small selection box 2 Toggle click the mouse until the selection box is the full width of the data window 3 Drag the Magnify tool to create a level zoom selection and release the mouse button The zoom ratio of the selection increases Drum Fill ole B Drum Fill ba lm lt i lt K 41 gt Pi m gt 00 00 00 000 1 434 1 WH 41 gt gt PI m gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 434 Selection box spans the width of the window The selection is level zoomed Zooming both time and level with the Magnify tool 1 Drag the Magnify tool on the waveform to make a small selection box 2 Toggle click the mouse until the selection appears as a box 3 Drag the Magnify tool to create a time level zoom selection and release the mouse button The level zoom and time zoom of the selection increase BB Drum Fill o 8 Drum Fill 2 8 WH 41 gt gt PI Em gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 434 K 41 gt PI m gt 00 00 00 000 Selection displays as a box The selection time and level are zoomed NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 97 Selecting audio using start and end values You can select audio by dragging the mouse or by using keyboard shortcuts For more information see
4. cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeees 277 Creating a SUSTAINING IOOP 0 ccc cece eee eee eee eee eee e eee eeeeees 277 Creating a sustaining loop with a release lOOP 6 ccc cece cece eee e ee eeees 278 Looping tech gU S eerren renra pE EEEE ESETET TERATE TEE ORES ET 279 Match endpoint amplitudes 2 0 0 ccc ccc cece eee eee eee een eee eneeeeeeeeeee 279 Match endpoint waveform slope 6 ccc cece eee ee eee e eee een e eee eeeeeeees 279 Match endpoint sound levels ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee cece eee e seen nee eeeeeeenes 279 Avold verny SINGIN IOO0S 20 04 4550 sscands dues aeeeieawasewnsdenened AAE 279 ECHEIMGIOODS vavcnuynercurewsseusneeeeeecegnseanuheeuehearershcuseswesecuireieane 279 Editing a loop without the Loop Tuner 66 ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee eee e eee ee eens 279 Editing a loop with the Loop Tuner ccc ccc cece eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 279 Crosstading OO 0S iscsi vane eeaneevateeseeerst bennett seneonss bensnsuveneoueeeeoar 282 Using the Crossfade Loop tool sccccitcsctsaweaadeeshitwaeeteaciadusetedeestewsaaasawwaaens 282 Creating loops for ACID software 0 kc ccc cece cece ete eee ene nese eeeeeeeeees 283 Creating an ACID one shot file oan etioaquiidwsede pices cea digiw eee resid talent elansecedtin 283 Creating an ACID loop file s 00cssiiestowadmesiediewedhe dius dees deeewasaamednewedd ein sanedh 283 20 TABLE OF CONTENTS Creating an ACID beatmapped file 0 0 ccc cece cece eee e eee eee eneee
5. 320 CHAPTER 23 Printing track lists 1 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Print Track List from the submenu The Print Track List dialog is displayed Tip Right click the Track List window and choose Print Track List from the shortcut menu Print Track List Format for track list output Cue sheet for replication show absolute times SSS CD liner notes show times relative to track 1 L_ Cancel OK Indude summary information with track list output 2 Choose the format you want to apply to your track list information Cue sheet for replication The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the beginning of the CD This is the preferred format for CD replication houses CD liner notes The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the first track on the disc 3 Select the Include summary information with track list output check box if you want to include UPC MCN title engineer and comment information with the track list 4 Click OK to send the track list information to your printer Adding CD Text to disc at once CDs When you add CD Text to your disc title and artist information will be displayed when your CD is played on a CD player that supports CD Text Notes When you create a track using a media file that includes title and artist metadata this information will be added to the Track List window as CD Text In order to burn valid
6. Displays the current playback position of an audio file being played from the playlist Right clicking this box displays a shortcut menu that allows you to specify a new format Sync Status display Allows you to monitor the status of incoming outgoing MIDI commands Insert toolbar The Insert toolbar contains buttons corresponding to all commands located in the Insert menu Py Gi Insert Marker Inserts a marker at the cursor location For more information see Using markers on page 119 Insert Region Inserts region tags at the beginning and end of the current selection For more information see Using regions on page 121 Insert Sample Loop Inserts sustaining loop tags at the beginning and end of the current selection For more information see Creating a sustaining loop on page 277 Insert Command Inserts a command marker at the cursor location For more information see Using commands on page 127 Insert CD Track Inserts a CD track using the current selection as the track length For more information see Creating and editing tracks for disc at once CDs on page 310 Insert CD Index Inserts a CD index marker at the cursor location For more information see Creating and editing tracks for disc at once CDs on page 310 Insert Volume Envelope Adds a volume envelope to the active data window For more information see Adding a volume or panning envelope on page 223 Insert Pan Envelope Adds a panning envelope to the
7. If you re using your Windows sound card perform the following steps to open the recording controls a Double click the speaker icon 49 in your system tray to open the Volume Control window From the Options menu choose Properties Click the Recording radio button and click OK Select or unmute the device from which you want to record oan F Adjust the Volume faders for the selected device and for the Master Record level while monitoring the recording meters in the Sound Forge Record dialog For example if you want to record from an audio CD in your CD ROM drive the CD Mute check box should not be selected and the CD and Master Record Volume faders must be adjusted so Sound Forge receives a strong signal with no clipping Adjusting for DC offset Sound Forge Pro software can automatically adjust for any DC offset produced by your audio hardware during the recording process Perform the following steps before you start recording 1 From the View menu choose Record Options to open the Record Options window 2 Select the DC adjust check box 3 Click the Calibrate button Note f you change sound cards or are recording from different digital sources or at different sample rates you should recalibrate the DC offset before recording Recording multichannel audio If you have an audio device that supports multiple inputs you can use Sound Forge to perform multichannel recording Tips Sound Forge is not a multitrack
8. METADATA WINDOWS 55 Inserting metadata objects If the data you want to edit is not displayed in the window you can right click the window choose Insert from the submenu and then choose a metadata object from the submenu You can choose to add all BWF BEXT iXML objects at once or you can choose commands from the submenus to insert individual objects Deleting metadata objects Right click the window choose Delete from the submenu and then choose a metadata object from the submenu You can choose to delete selected objects all BWF BEXT iXML objects or you can choose commands from the submenus to delete individual objects Changing the BWF version for saved metadata If you want to change the version of BWF metadata that is saved in your file click the Value column in the BWF Version row and choose Version 0 Version 1 or Version 2 from the menu e Version 1 expands on the Version 0 metadata set by adding SMPTE UMID e Version 2 expands on the Version 1 metadata set by adding loudness metadata CD Information window Ctrl Alt M 5 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose CD Information from the submenu to display the CD Information window where you can view and edit information about a disc at once audio CD Item Description Universal Product Code Universal product codes UPC or media catalog numbers MCN can be written to a Media Catalog Number CD as a means of identification However not all CD
9. ssssssessseressserssseeesserersssrerseeersssrersseresseo 180 PROCESSING AUO s ereer EEE E E E E EE 181 PO DIVING DhESCCS rese irens i ronn rrr a EEEE EEE ETEEN 181 Sieh DIESES are er ere ee EEA E AERE EEE AEE er ree 181 CTE ARING Diesels anny ure oreo he ENEE EEEE EE ea odes Aiea ERAEN EEE EEA EEE EEEE 182 DEIETING JOFESelS aaraa tend E 4e0bossetneicetendesen tee E A E E 182 Resetting parameters sssessssssssossssssesoossssesosoessressoceererssseroeesseeso 182 Monading DIE ES sariren drant EENET ETERA IEEE ESTRA 183 Previewing processed AUCIO ccc ccc cc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeenes 183 Setting custom preview parameters cece cece eee eect eee eee e teense eeteeeeees 183 Bypassing a process while previewing cece ccc cece eee een ee een e eee teen eeeneees 183 Adjusting the data window selection ccc cece cece eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeeneees 184 Sound Forge PrOCeSSeS 6 cece cece cece eee eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeaeeees 185 PCO Ta GUO Anca ees eave a emus e ee ones Sewn eee eerste ee ee ee es 185 TABLE OF CONTENTS 15 Bit Depth CONVENE xiaasovdsasatendadderaedetoesereekeestein iad hie dntaeeeeersatiakevees 186 OODE MBNERDIMIED nromertineduae mucin E E E arses ens 188 Channel Converter seresierisrtiy urit areara ANNEE EA E R ET beaeene ees anes 189 DCOM OL Seara a EEEE cote EEE ae eee phone E EA TEES 191 S E EEEE EEE E EE E A E E E 192 Fade Graphic Fade sssrrsrererresia
10. BURNING CDS 307 Burning track at once TAO CDs You should always save your audio files prior to writing them to CD 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn Track at Once Audio CD The Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog is displayed The bottom of the dialog displays the length of the current audio file and the amount of time remaining on the CD currently in the CD R RW Note f there is no CD in the current drive only the Drive and Speed drop down menus and the Close button are available in this dialog If you insert a disc or select a different drive after this dialog is displayed it takes amoment to recognize the disc and make all options available Burn Track at Once Audio CD Action Burn audio a Start Buffer underrun protection Cl Erase Aw disc before burning Close diec when done burning Eject disc when done Burn selection only Drive E SONY DYD AW DW O1 204 Prsa Speed Max Eject Time needed for audio 45 minute s 11 second s Time available on disc 9 minute s 59 second s 2 Choose a setting from the Action drop down list Setting Description Burn audio Begins recording audio to your CD when you click the Start button You will need to close the disc before it can be played in an audio CD player Test then burn audio Performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns Recording begins after the test if it is su
11. K gt Ee efe 00 00 00 709 00 00 01 419 00 00 00 709 1 153 The left pane lists the banks instruments note ranges and recorded samples in the instrument file Click a bank or sample to select it in the waveform display Markers Jf represent each sample in the waveform display Opening musical instrument files You can open musical instrument files just like any other file type e Drag a musical instrument file to the workspace From the File menu choose Open and then use the Open dialog to browse to the file you want to open e Double click an instrument file in the Sound Forge Explorer window The following musical instrument file formats are supported e dls DLS level 1 0 and 2 0 e sf2 SoundFont version 2 0 e gig GigaSampler GigaStudio version 1 2 3 Important Compressed and encrypted GigaSampler GigaStudio samples are not supported SAMPLING 263 If you want to open a sample s audio data browse to an instrument file in the Explorer window Click the down arrow next to the Views button and choose Region View from the menu Each wave is then displayed at the bottom of the Explorer window You can double click a wave to open it as a wave file Exploring G Media DLS Sets J DLS Sets B Ala gt u OSs al_ E Z2 Desktop ja Euro Lead dls ka HiHats Collection dls a Computer al Fairy Bells dls al Hip Hop Kit O1 dls ucla Floppy Disk Drive A ka Finga Bass dls a Hip Hop Kit 02 dls aa
12. More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 e Resampling to a lower sample rate results in less frequent samples and a decreased file size but adds aliasing noise to the audio For more information see Apply an anti alias filter during resample on page 201 e Resampling to a higher sample rate results in extra samples being created through interpolation and an increased file size Like increasing bit depth up sampling does not improve the quality of an audio file but permits subsequent audio processing to be performed with greater precision Downsampling audio 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 Right click the data window and choose File Properties from the shortcut menu The File Properties window is displayed Notice that this file has 44 100 Hz sample rate and a file size of 0 48 MB 3 Click OK 4 From the Process menu choose Resample and then choose Resample from the submenu The Resample dialog is displayed 5 From the Preset drop down list choose Resample to 8 000 Hz with anti alias filter and click OK The audio is resampled at 8 000 Hz 6 From the File menu choose Save As Save the resampled file with a new name and close it Open the resampled file and view its File Properties window The sample rate is lower 8 000 Hz and the file size is smaller 8 Play the file Notice the obvious decrease in audio quality Note Use this new file to perform the following up sampling procedure Upsampli
13. Select the Pre roll check box and type a value in the edit box to set the amount of time before the selection that you want to play when recording 144 CHAPTER 10 Select the Post roll check box and type a value in the edit box to set the amount of time after the selection that you want to play when recording Click the OK button When performing punch in recording recording occurs underneath the pre and post roll If your subject starts early for example you can adjust the event to uncover the recording You can use the Event Tool 4 to slip or trim the edges of the recorded event to expose the recorded pre and post roll For more information see Editing events on page 173 During recording the Record status value in the Record Options window indicates that recording is armed in pre roll recording or in post roll The meters in the Record Options dialog monitor the level from your recording input Setting a prerecord buffer A prerecording buffer helps to ensure you won t miss a perfect take when you re recording When the prerecording buffer is enabled sound data is written continuously to the buffer after you click the Arm button When you start recording the sound data in the buffer is committed to disk After you finish recording the buffer is not displayed in the window but you can use the Event Tool to slip or trim the left edge of the recorded event to expose the buffer For more information see Editing eve
14. The Sound Forge FM Synthesis feature can be used to create complex sounds from simple waveforms using frequency modulation FM In frequency modulation the frequency of a waveform carrier is modulated by the output of another waveform modulator to create a new waveform If the frequency of the modulator is low the carrier is detuned slowly over time If the frequency of the modulator is high the carrier is modulated so quickly that numerous additional frequencies or sidebands will be created Using the FM Synthesis tool up to four waveforms operators can be used in a variety of configurations Depending on the configuration a waveform can be a carrier a modulator or a simple unmodulated waveform Generating a waveform 1 From the Insert menu choose Synthesis and choose FM from the submenu The FM Synthesis dialog appears Tip You can also click the FM Synthesis button on the Insert toolbar FM Synthesis Example music bed Preset Untitled Hx OK Total output waveform length cancel 0 001 to 600 0 seconds 1 000 eee es Preview Insert waveform at End of file a Configuration LJ E Current operator 1 7 3 4 100 1o DI 6 25 12 Operator shape Sine me Frequency 0 00 to 22 050 Hz 440 00 il Feedback 0 to 100 LJ 0 0 Amplitude Inf to 0 dB _Reset_ 2 Specify the length in seconds of the generated waveform in the Total output waveform length box
15. Adding regions to the Playlist using commands 1 Selecta region in the Regions List 2 From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and choose Add from the submenu or right click a region in the Regions List window and choose Add to Playlist from the shortcut menu The region is added to the Playlist Adding regions to the Playlist using drag and drop 1 Selecta region in the Regions List 2 Drag the region into the Playlist 3 Release the mouse button Arranging the Playlist Moving regions After you have added regions to the Playlist you can arrange them using drag and drop 1 Silence 00 00 00 00 742 00 00 742 None i CS 00 00 00 000 1 Wow lone C5 00 00 00 000 1 Sound editing just gets easier O00 00 OL 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 es 00 00 00 000 And easier 00 00 03 539 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 ey E Replicating a region in the Playlist A major advantage of arranging the Playlist is the ability to repeat a region in multiple places without actually copying the audio data This feature is called replicating 1 Right click the region to be replicated and choose Replicate from the shortcut menu The region is replicated in the Playlist 2 Drag the replicated region to its new position in the Playlist Deleting a region from the Playlist You can delete regions from the Playlist without affecting the audio file 1 Select the region that you would like to delete 2 From the Edit menu
16. Adjust the ut color intensity Tip This function may be fairly slow if you do not have a palletized driver or if Video for Windows is not installed Synchronizing sonograms in a multichannel file When viewing a sonogram for a multichannel file an individual graph displays for each channel Click the Sync button to synchronize the displays so you can view the same region of the FFT in all channels Returning to a spectrum graph To return to the spectrum graph click the Normal Display button la in the toolbar Printing the sonogram Click the Print button 4 to print the contents of the Spectrum Analysis window including the sonogram and statistics data 302 CHAPTER 21 Adjusting Spectrum Analysis settings From the Spectrum Analysis toolbar click the Settings button E amp x to display the Spectrum Settings dialog The following table explains the role of each control in audio spectrum analysis FFT size 2 048 Cancel FFT overlap 0 to 99 75 Save As Smoothing window Blackman Harris Delete Slices displayed 1 to 64 1 6 Forward Backward Set sonogram resolution 1 to 10 000 samplings Display Range Channel Mono Sync graphs Logarithmic graphing Normal display only gt Freq Min 0 to 95 9 kHz O Max 0 001 to 96 kHz 22 050 Ceiling 149 to 0 dB 0 Floor 150 to 1 dB 150 Monitor Settings Hold peaks during monitoring 1 to 60 seconds 3 0 Ma
17. Saving the settings from an individual plug in as a preset Saving a preset for an individual DirectX plug in 1 Click the effect s button to display the effect s parameters in the Apply Plug In Chain window 2 Typeaname in the Preset box 3 Click the Save Preset button Apply Plug In Chain One of These Days Chain Oae x m x Cancel A eik Pewew Preview o F Wave Hammer Preset Untitled a x Bypass Real time lt Saving a preset for an individual VST plug in 1 Click the VST effect s button to display the effect s parameters in the Apply Plug In Chain window 2 Click the Save VST Preset As button Chain I x Apply Plug In Chain One of These Days eet afe i o Wave Hammer _ vST Plug in Preview i El Bypass Preset Untitled amp e G W Real time The Save VST Preset dialog is displayed 3 Browse to the folder where you want to save the fxp file and type a name in the File name box 4 Click the Save button The current plug in settings are saved in the fxp file Saving a bank of VST plug in presets 1 Click the VST effect s button to display the effect s parameters in the Apply Plug In Chain window 2 Click the Save VST Bank As button gi Chain i x Apply Plug In Chain One of These Days Cancel oi Bypass Preset Untitled Ba ge 7 C Bypass W Real time
18. T Ber Script area Splitter panel Output area Script area Displays the current scripts written code e Output area Displays text results for the current script e Splitter panel Allows you to adjust the size of the output area window by dragging it up or down USING SCRIPTING 249 The Script Editor toolbar is displayed by default when you open the Script Editor window Open Opens the Open Script dialog New Script Template Opens a basic C JScript or VBScript template needed to write a Script Save Saves the current script DEP Run Script Runs the current script Ea Save As Saves the current files with a new 2 Compile Script Compiles and tests your name or format script Opening and running a script You can open and run a script that has already been developed Warning Scripts can pose a security risk to your computer A script has the power to delete files read files write files execute programs access the Internet access files on your network and so on Always examine the contents of a script before running it If you don t understand the script do not run it unless it comes from a trusted source In general take the same precautions you would take for any program you download from the Internet or receive in an e mail attachment Running a script from the Script Editor window a ae Click in the data window where you want to apply the script to establish focus From the View menu
19. Table of Contents roau e eer Re TE R EE E Getter E cuss quien On pnoen ares ques 25 Introducing Sound Forge Pro software s sssusussssssesesresesreressererrrseere 25 SCE SEa ATEN E E A A E S A E E EO ec s4Gse 25 Techmical SUPPO eeriss rident EnEn EAN EAEE A EENE EEEE 25 GEA NEID 22 earar rr tases EEEE E E E EEEIEE EEE ENEE 26 E E ETE E E E E E T EE E E E E E E E E E E bee 4aedtatoes cas 26 Interactive TUTONIOIS ac suecais cu rer EOE EEEN O RAEN E EEr 26 PENON NEN a a a E EEE E E E E S A E 26 Learning the Sound Forge Pro Workspace cece cece cece eee eee cece eeeeees 27 WSN NEMOS E c 6s 9an note a e oheed aeaedeeend obese ean eedasrcansenneder ans 27 Using the mouse wheel 0 ccc ccc eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeees 27 The mahn WINDOW x 500 4 2ea004 tances thate dt eS4 b bine EEE E R A EENET 28 Main window components cece ccc cece eee e eee eee sete teen eeneeeees 28 Floating and docking windows ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eee eeeneeeees 29 Hiding the window docking areas cece cc ccc cece eee e eee ee ee eeeeeees 30 Explorer window Alt 1 sccocceeedd orders scuvdeeadesasavicoseasenaedeeseeseosuddetsensousaes 30 File Properties window AIt 2 2 0 0 cece cc ccc cee ete een teense eeeeeeeeeees 30 Video Preview window Alt 3 2 6 ccc ccc ccc ccc cece een e eee e eee eeeeeeenees 30 Time Display window AIt 4 0 0 ccc ccc cee eee eee eee e eee eee eee eee e eee eeenaes 30 Channel Meters window
20. The Save VST Preset Bank dialog is displayed 3 Browse to the folder where you want to save the fxb file and type a name in the File name box 4 Click the Save button All presets for the current plug in are stored in the bank WORKING WITH EFFECTS 217 Using processing dialogs In previous versions of Sound Forge processing dialogs were modal after opening a processing dialog you couldn t adjust the selection in the data window You can move freely between processing dialogs and data windows to adjust your selection fade in and out and gain levels All processing dialogs share common controls along the right hand side of the dialog Use these controls to save and delete custom presets preview your changes and modify the selection Cancel Preview Bypass V Real time More Item Description OK Closes the dialog and processes the dialog settings Cancel Closes the dialog without making changes Preview Click to begin previewing the processed sound file Bypass Select this check box and click Preview to hear the unprocessed audio This is a useful feature when comparing the affected and unprocessed signal Real time When this check box is selected Sound Forge will try to preview the plug in in real time If your computer can not keep up clear the check box When the check box is cleared the maximum preview length is determined by the Limit non realtime previews to setting on the Previews tab of the Prefere
21. This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors as is and any express or implied warranties including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed In no event shall the foundation or contributors be liable for any direct indirect incidental special exemplary or consequential damages including but not limited to procurement of substitute goods or services loss of use data or profits or business interruption however caused and on any theory of liability whether in contract strict liability or tort including negligence or otherwise arising in any way out of the use of this software even if advised of the possibility of such damage Gracenote CD and music related data from Gracenote Inc copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote Gracenote Software copyright 2000 2008 Gracenote This product and service may practice one or more of the following U S Patents 5 987 525 6 061 680 6 154 773 6 161 132 6 230 192 6 230 207 6 240 459 6 330 593 and other patents issued or pending Services supplied and or device manufactured under license for following Open Globe Inc United States Patent 6 304 523 Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote The Gracenote logo and logotype MusiclD and the Powered by Gracenote logo are trademarks of Gracenote LPEC LPEC is a trademark of Sony Corporation Microsoft DirectX
22. Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically Arrange Icons Maximize All Minimize All Restore All Close All Window List 38 CHAPTER 2 Description Creates a new data window Arranges all open data windows so they overlap with the title bar of each window remaining visible Arranges all open data windows top to bottom with no overlapping This command affects only non minimized windows Arranges all open data windows left to right with no overlapping This command affects only non minimized windows Arranges minimized data windows at the bottom of the workspace Maximizes all open data windows Tabs for each data window also appear if the Tabs for maximized data windows setting is set to Top or Bottom For more information see Display tab on page 333 Minimizes all open data windows Restores all minimized windows to their previous window size and position Closes all open data windows Displays a list of all open data windows Choose a window from the menu to switch focus to that data window Toolbars Sound Forge toolbars contain buttons used to quickly perform many of the program s commands and functions Toolbars can be dragged throughout the workspace docked resized hidden and customized You can use the Toolbars tab in the Preferences dialog to specify which toolbars you want to display Perform either of the following actions to display this tab e From the Options menu choose Preferences When the Preferences d
23. Turning input monitoring on or off Choose On Off or Auto from the Monitor drop down list to toggle record input monitoring When Auto is selected the input is monitored during pre post roll and during recording only Monitoring your recording input through the Plug In Chain Select the Monitor input through Plug In Chain check box if you want to monitor the selected channels from your recording input through the Plug In Chain Notes On or Auto must be selected in the Monitor drop down list to enable input monitoring e This setting is used for monitoring only the Plug In Chain is not applied to the recorded data Monitoring unselected channels when recording Select the Play unselected channels when recording check box to if you want to monitor additional channels while recording e When the check box is selected all unselected audio channels will play when you re recording into the selected channels This setting is useful when you re recording to backing tracks For example if you have a four channel audio file you could place backing tracks on channels 1 and 2 and record into channels 3 and 4 Select channels 3 and 4 and select the Play unselected channels when recording check box When you start recording your audio is recorded into channels 3 and 4 and you ll be able to monitor channels 1 and 2 while recording e When the check box is cleared unselected audio channels will play only during pre post roll R
24. e To remove a window from the docking area or a floating dock click the Close button x Sound Forge Pro Dock Close window Expand window 1 00 Handle Wow 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 None Sound editing just gets eas 00 00 01 476 00 00 03 640 00 00 02 164 None And easier 00 00 03 640 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None Ir Playlist Regions List Explorer Plug In Manager Time Display You can dock several windows in the same area of the screen and the windows will be layered Click a window s tab to bring it to the top LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 29 Hiding the window docking areas You can double click the separator between the workspace and window docking area to hide the docking area You can also use the following shortcut keys to manage the workspace Note These shortcuts do not apply to floating docks Shortcut key Description F11 Show hide windows docked at bottom of workspace Shift F11 Show hide windows docked on left right sides of workspace Ctrl F11 Show hide all docked windows Explorer window Alt 1 The Explorer window is used to find preview and open media files From the View menu choose Explorer to show or hide the Explorer window For more information see Using the Explorer window on page 63 File Properties window Alt 2 The File Properties window is used to view or edit information saved in the active file From the View menu choose File Properties to show
25. 189 stereo to mono 190 swapping stereo channels 190 channel meters changing display resolution 137 384 INDEX customizing 137 mono compatibility meters 139 overview 135 peak range 137 phase scopes 139 resetting clipping indicators 136 routing channels to hardware outputs 116 137 showing hiding 136 turning off 325 VU PPM meters 138 139 window 30 channels converting mono stereo 111 intermixing 190 previewing in multichannel files 52 repairing 164 166 routing to hardware outputs 116 137 swapping in stereo files 190 Chorus effect 45 227 Clear Undo Redo History command 87 Click and Crackle Removal button 46 clipboard copying current video frame to 290 copying Cutlist to 134 copying events to 173 copying file properties to 107 copying metadata to 53 copying Playlist to 134 copying Regions List to 130 copying track lists to 320 cutting events to 173 mixing audio from 84 pasting events from 173 playing contents 79 recycling contents 79 viewing content details 79 Clipboard Contents window 79 clipped audio detecting 120 marking 120 resetting indicators 136 Clipped Peak Restoration button 46 closing CDs 309 cmdtemp xml 128 command line 250 command markers cmdtemp xml 128 deleting 128 editing properties 128 inserting 127 moving cursor to 128 saving properties as template 128 commands customizing shortcut assignments 346 347 des
26. 227 Simple Synthesis button 43 using 169 single session CD burning See disc at once CD burning sliders resetting 48 shortcuts 48 using 48 slipping events 175 slip trimming events 175 Smooth Enhance process 44 203 SMPTE 30 button 42 SMPTE Drop button 42 SMPTE EBU button 42 SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps button 42 SMPTE Non Drop button 42 SMPTE timecode 361 Snap Edge to Grid command 102 Snap Edge to Zero command 103 Snap to Grid command 102 Snap to Zero command 103 Snap to zero crossing slope preference 98 snapping See also Quantize to Frames disabling at high magnifications 101 enabling 100 selections 101 104 to events 101 180 to grid 100 to markers 101 to whole time divisions 100 to zero crossings 101 snapshots erasing 300 showing hiding 299 taking 299 viewing statistics of 300 sonograms adjusting color intensity 302 displaying 300 displaying frequency and amplitude values 301 displaying notes 301 displaying statistics 301 improving contrast 302 improving frequency resolution 302 printing 302 reducing processing time 302 smoothing display 302 synchronizing for multichannel file 302 tuning 302 updating 301 SoundFont files 263 266 SpectraLayers Pro 46 305 Spectrum Analysis See also sonograms changing graph type 298 changing spectrum graph zoom level 298 displaying frequency and amplitude values 297 displaying graph 296 displaying notes
27. 228 CHAPTER 14 Displaying the waveform Choose a command from the Show wave drop down list if you want to display the waveform in the envelope graph If you re working with a multichannel file you can choose to view individual channels or the mixed waveform Note The waveform is unavailable when the selection is greater than 300 000 samples Flange Wah Wah From the Effects menu choose Flange Wah Wah to apply flanging phasing and wah wah effects to a sound For information about using the Flange Wah Wah effect click the Help button E in the Sony Flange Wah Wah dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Gapper Snipper From the Effects menu choose Gapper Snipper to cut chunks from the sound file or insert silence in the sound file periodically at a set frequency For information about using the Gapper Snipper effect click the Help button E in the Sony Gapper Snipper dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Noise Gate From the Effects menu choose Noise Gate to remove signals below a specified threshold This effect is used to remove noise from silent breaks in a sound file For information about using the Noise Gate effect click the Help button E in the Sony Noise Gate dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Pitch From the Effects menu choose Pitch an
28. 3 Use the Configuration slider to configure the arrangement and number of operators used to generate the waveform For more information see Specifying the number and arrangement of operators on page 168 4 Modify individual operators as needed For more information see Modifying an operator on page 168 5 From the Insert waveform at drop down list choose a position to determine where the generated waveform is placed in the file 6 Click OK EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 167 Specifying the number and arrangement of operators Dragging the Configuration slider changes the graphical representation of the arrangement and number of operators used to generate the waveform When configuring your waveform keep the following guidelines in mind e The outputs of horizontally joined operators are simply mixed The outputs of the bottom operators are mixed to form the final output Mixing unique simple waveforms is referred to as additive synthesis e Operators joined vertically are FM carrier modulator pairs The bottom operator is the carrier and the top operator is the modulator e Operators without other operators directly above are simple waveform generators e When three or more operators are stacked the top operator modulates the operator below it which modulates the following operator and so on Modifying an operator 1 Select the Current operator radio button corresponding to the operator to be modified 2
29. AIt 5 0 ccc cece cece cece cence eens esse eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 30 Loudness Meters window AIt 6 2 0 0 ccc ccc cece ee ee eee eee eee e eee eeeneenes 30 Hardware Meters window AIt 7 2 0 cc cece ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee eee een eee ennnnes 30 Undo Redo History window Alt 8 1 0 cece ccc cc eee eee e eee e eee eect eeennees 30 Spectrum Analysis window AIt 9 2 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee e nent eee eeeeeeeeeeees 31 Plug In Chain window Ctrl Alt 0 2 0 ccc ccc ccc eer ee eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 31 Plug In Manager window Ctrl Alt 1 0 ccc ccc cc ccc cece teen eee en ee ennees 31 Keyboard window Ctrl Alt 2 2 0 0 ccc ccc cece eee nent eee e eee nee eeennees 31 Script Editor window CtrltAlt 3 2 0 0 ccc cece eee eee e eee e enn eeeeeeeeeeeeeenes 31 Loop Tuner window Ctrl Alt 4 0 eee ee eee eee eee eee eee ennnnes 31 Record Options window Ctrl Alt 5 2 0 0 cc ccc cece ee cece eee e tense eee ee eeeeeeees 31 Data WINGQOW Sve c 00s05nv0p nn ewes Have eens oe Weta ENEN EEEO ESE E EEE 32 WIRIE D ae E E esa serosa E OE aeatdneoneneiietyeas 32 OVV DA ea re E A A EEEE A A AERE EAEE 33 WIQCO SEND r eE EEEE EEEE E E E bie erowe 34 TOTO eee a EAEE EEE NN E EEE EE E E EEEE 34 Next Edit TOO DUON csrerrors suss aos te ESEE EESTE E ERN S 34 Minimize channel height s0000 0sene sevewreworns cerned ewowss dan odadewts aeedeewouts baveeweedes 34 LEVOT AT cae tatak is heads ound bak ota ood Oe bode eee bid ae ed
30. C Funk Bass dls la Hip Hop Kit 03 dls ka Harps O Space dls ka Hip Hop Kit 04 dls ka High Rez dls ka Hip Hop Kit 05 dls 4 eer Blue Audio 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono 15 waves 00 00 05 722 DLS Instrument Ghost ei Media Wave Format Sa Length 100 Unnamed TI E i LEE 16 bits mono 00 00 00 330 di 6Ch_Demo_frg gt d a f Anoir Miami Funk Pop G1 16 mono 00 00 00 268 m And Easier frg Funk Slap A 1 16 bits mono 00 00 00 411 B Audo Files Funk Pop C2 16 bits mono 00 00 00 290 Funk Slap C2 16 bits mono 00 00 00 320 Funk Slap D2 16 bits mono 00 00 00 570 Funk Pop F3 16 bits mono 00 00 00 292 Funk Slap G3 16 bits mono 00 00 00 612 Previewing samples Playback for musical instrument files behaves slightly differently than playback in a normal data window e Ifno samples are selected click Play All to play all samples in the data window Click Play to play all samples from the cursor position to the end of the data window e Ifyou have samples selected click Play All 1 to play all selected samples in the data window Click Play to play all selected samples from the cursor position to the end of the data window Selecting samples Each sample in an instrument file is contained within an event in the data window The data window selection determines which parts of the waveform will be processed Event positions are locked You cannot move events within
31. CHAPTER 2 gi a a0 SMPTE EBU Changes the status format to SMPTE EBU 25 fps SMPTE Non Drop Changes the status format to SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Drop Changes the status format to SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps Video SMPTE 30 Changes the status format to SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio Audio CD Time Changes the status format to Audio CD Time Edit Tempo Calculates the musical tempo beats per minute based upon the current selection Regions Playlist toolbar The Regions Playlist toolbar contains the Regions List and Playlist buttons as well as buttons corresponding to synchronization commands and status displays L Te Regions List Displays the Regions List For more information see Using the Regions List on page 129 Playlist Displays the playlist For more information see Using the Playlist on page 130 Trigger from MIDI Timecode Configures the software to be triggered by MIDI commands received through the MIDI input port The MIDI input port is specified on the MIDI Sync tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Triggering from MIDI timecode on page 271 Playlist Position display Generate MIDI Timecode Configures the software to send MIDI timecode through the MIDI output port The MIDI output port is specified on the MIDI Sync tab of the Preferences dialog Pre Queue for MIDI Timecode Opens the wave device and preloads data for the next region to be played from the playlist
32. Comments Tutorial sound file for Sound Forge C Append to current data window Open as CD tracks tracks C Merge L R to stereo Sony Perfect Clarity Audio 00 00 05 000 File information Video No Video Length Select to automatically Unity note Loops 7 SMPTE Rgns Play Cmds Yes No No preview files ACID No More The Open dialog contains several features that allow you to locate and open audio files These features are detailed below Feature Files of type Recent Open as read only Auto play Append to current data window 62 CHAPTER 4 Description Use this drop down list to specify the file format displayed in the system A variety of file formats are supported Tip Choose the CD Audio cda option from this list to extract audio tracks from a CD Use this drop down list to locate recently accessed folders Select this check box if you want to open sound files but you do not want to alter the data in the files This feature is useful if you only need to play the file or copy sections from the file You can still change the Regions List Playlist and summary information for the file but these changes must be saved to a new file Select this check box to automatically preview files as you select them in the Open dialog If you have multiple files selected you can select the Append to current data window check box to add the selected files to the end of the current data w
33. Extract Audio from CD Action Read by track Ok Tracks to extrac Cancel Track Type Start End Lengh e 01 Shine Audio 00 02 00 03 34 70 0332 7 Refresh 02 Play Audio 0334 70 OF 05 27 0330 4 03 One of These Daye Audio 07 05 27 11 50 17 O4446 Play 04 White Audio 11 50 17 15 32 58 0342 4 05 Synergy Audio 1532 58 19 25 26 03 524 MusiclD 0E 100 Unnamed Things Audio 19 25 26 2330 21 0404 7 E Ci vom a f A Li aS e a O O a M d i Caa Co Info Create regions for each track Create markers for each index change Create CD tracks from full subcode scan Drive E SONY DVD Rw Dw 01204 PY S3 Speed Max Configure Eject Selected length 00 00 00 3 From the Action drop down list choose the method you want to use for extracting the CD audio Method Description Read by track Use this option to select the tracks you want to extract from the CD Each track is extracted into a unique data window Read entire disc Use this option to automatically extract all tracks on the disc The entire CD is extracted into a single data window Read by range Use this option to extract audio from a specified range of time Type appropriate values in the Start and End or Length boxes The range of audio is extracted into a single data window 4 Ifyou choose Read by track or Read by range from the Action drop down list select the tracks or time range you want to extract Note Click Play to prev
34. Help button in the plug in window c Repeat steps 3a and 3b as necessary to create your effects list d If you need to change an effect s preset select the effect in the list and click the Change Preset button e If you need to change an effect s position in the list select it and click the Move Up or Move Down button 4 Select the Metadata tab and type values for any metadata file information that you want to save in the output files If the Overwrite check box is not selected and the destination file already includes information for a metadata item the existing information is preserved keywords however will be appended If the Overwrite check box is selected and the destination file already includes information for a metadata item the existing information is overwritten with the information from the Metadata tab existing information will be erased if the box is blank If a metadata type is not supported by the output format it will be ignored 5 Select the Save tab to choose file output settings for rendered files Note f you don t specify save options the settings on the Process and Metadata tab will be applied to your source files but the modified files will not be saved Click the Add Save Option button to create a new setting or select an existing setting and click the Change Save Options button The Output Options dialog is displayed If you want to convert to multiple formats at once click the Add
35. If you dick Cancel you will lose your edits and undo history Your media files will remain unchanged Deleting recovered files Click the Cancel button to delete the temporary files The original media files remain unchanged GETTING STARTED 89 90 CHAPTER 4 Chapter 5 Navigating Zooming and Selecting This chapter introduces some of the Sound Forge Pro navigation and selection features Setting the cursor position While you can click anywhere in thie waveform to position the cursor there are times when you may need to position the cursor more precisely You can use the Go To dialog to move the cursor to a specific point in an audio file and center it in the data window Tip You can also use a variety of keyboard shortcuts to position the cursor For more information see Cursor movement shortcuts on page 352 1 Choose Go To from the Edit menu The Go To dialog appears Tip You can also use the following methods e Right click the waveform choose Cursor and choose Go To from the submenu e Press Ctrl G Go To Example music bed Go To OK Custom T Cancel Position 00 00 00 000 hr mn sc xxx Input format Time 2 Set the cursor position using one of the following methods From the Go To drop down list choose a preset From the Input format drop down list choose a format and type an appropriate value in the Position box 3 Click OK The cursor is placed at the specifie
36. Number of beats Double click to edit the length of the file Selecting a value that does not match the actual file will cause ACID to play the loop at a different speed than normal For example specifying a length of 8 beats for a 4 beat loop will cause the loop to play at half speed at any given tempo Choose ACID Beatmapped if you want to add key and tempo information to along audio file By default ACID will start the Beatmapper Wizard for files longer than 30 seconds Root note for transposing Click the down arrow and choose a note from the drop down list to set the base note for tracks that you want to conform to the project key If you do not want a track transposed to the project key a track that contains a drum sample for example choose Don t transpose e Tempo Double click to edit the original tempo of the clip e Downbeat offset samples Double click to edit the location in samples of the track s first downbeat Broadcast Wave window CtrI Alt M 4 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Broadcast Wave from the submenu to display the Broadcast Wave Information window where you can view and edit information about a Broadcast Wave Format BWF file Tips Ifyou want to sort the contents of a metadata window you can click a column heading to sort in ascending or descending order Ifyou want to sort iXML and BEXT BWF metadata objects click the Type column to sort by metadata type If yo
37. Playing a file from a specified POINT 6 ccc cece cee nent e nese eeeeeteeeees 67 Playing in Loop Playback mode wiss snes cccdwsw sewed eeovew sow evasewse downs beenes deeuenw ines 67 Playing a SClOCIION syaani antiin EEA pene AN ETEEN ane haat ect ADA A 68 Viewing selection StatUS 2 0 ccc ccc cc cee en nee Rr EEEE EETA 68 Viewing Selection statistics 2 0 0 ccc cc cc cece eee ee ee eee eee eee eee e eee e ee eeeeeeenes 68 Creating data WIMGOWS i 2 404050056n ristit estint KEN Aur ENE EENE EE esneaa arses 71 Active data windows vs inactive data WINdOWS sssssessesesesersesoseesesesoeseseeeo 71 Copying data to a new file nunnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnensosnrnrorrsusesososororororerseseso 71 WV ORRIN WN TeS conc nda cdices oteumtesndteoeweweeaese EA EA E AEEA 72 SAVING Gille TEE E EN E EE E E EE EE E E 72 Using the Save As Render AS dialog cece cece ccc eee eee e enn e nent eee eennees 72 Creating CUSTOM templates ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee e esse eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 74 Creating Custom rendering settings ccc cece cece eee e eens nese eee eeeeeeeanees 74 Copy rendering templates between computers or user ACCOUNTS cece cece eee eee 75 SaViNG all open audio TICS visctsceusscetdeedanddes Ceeusdv idee ETENEE A ETN ETAN 75 Saving files as a workspace ssesesusssesesuesesesessesesreresesrrrrrrrreresrrreserees 75 Extracting audio from CDS sesssuesusuesesussesrererrererreresrerrsrere
38. Right click the graph and choose Normalize dB to set the Spectrum Graph amplitude range equal to the maximum and minimum values in the graph Synchronizing graphs in a multichannel file When viewing a spectrum graph for a multichannel file an individual graph displays for each channel Click the Sync button amp to synchronize the displays so you can view the same region of the FFT in all channels Updating a spectrum graph Select the Auto Refresh button 2 if you want the Spectrum Analysis display to refresh automatically updated when you change your selection in the data window When the button is not selected the display is not updated until you click the Refresh button 2 If you want the graph to refresh automatically during playback or input monitoring select the Real Time Monitoring button 298 CHAPTER 21 Viewing multiple spectrum graphs Once you create a selection in the data window you can display up to 64 individual spectrum graphs each representing a specific point in time 1 Open an audio file 2 From the View menu choose Spectrum Analysis The Spectrum Analysis window appears 3 Click the Settings button The Spectrum Settings dialog appears For more information see Adjusting Spectrum Analysis settings on page 303 4 Typeanumber in the Slices displayed box The Forward and Backward radio buttons activate 5 Select either the Forward or Backward radio button Selecting the F
39. Select from the cursor to the previous sample Select 10 samples past the current cursor Select 10 samples prior to the current cursor Snap to grid Snap edge to grid Snap to next zero crossing Snap edge to next zero crossing Switch the selection through the channels in a multichannel file Shift current selection to the left by the length of the selection Shift current selection to the right by the length of the selection Cut the current selection length in half Double the current selection length Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl Shift D Shift Right Left Arrow Shift Ctrl Alt Right Left Arrow Shift Alt Right Left Arrow ShifttHome Shift End Ctrl ShifttHome Ctrl Shift End Shift Page Up Shift Page Down Shift Ctrl Page Up Shift Ctrl Page Down Ctrl Shift Right Arrow Ctrl Shift Left Arrow Shift numeric keypad Shift numeric keypad Shift Ctrl numeric keypad Shift Ctrl numeric keypad T Shift T Z Shift Z Tab Shift Tab lt gt I SHORTCUTS 353 Command Rotate audio Restore previous five time selections Toggle last selection cursor position Create a loop from the current selection Create a loop from the current selection without displaying the Sampler Loops window Navigation and playback shortcuts Command Save a view in cell lt Number gt where lt Number gt ranges from 1 to 8 Restore a view using cell lt Number gt where lt Number gt ranges from 1 to 8 Move cursor to correspo
40. Show wave Mono source kd Reset Envelope i More 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 PROCESSING AUDIO 183 Adjusting the data window selection You can easily adjust your data window selection from within most processing dialogs by clicking the More button on the right side of the dialog and specifying the selection parameters explained below Bit Depth Converter Exarnple music bed Preses ux SSS Cancel Bit depth 16 bit Dither Mone r Preview Noise shaping off m ypas Less Clicking the More button displays additional information you can use to adjust your data Start 00 00 00 000 ef End 00 00 03 666 window selection To hide this information Length 00 00 03 666 af Channels 1 of click the Less button 00 00 00 000 00 00 03 666 00 00 03 666 Control Start End Length Channels Go to Previous Event Go to Next Event 184 CHAPTER 13 Description Determines the starting point for your selection in the data window The Length field adjusts automatically according to your input in this box Click the Lock Start button if you want to preserve the selection start when adjusting the Length or End settings Note When working with the Event tool x the Start box is automatically locked Determines the ending point for your selection in the data window The Length field adjusts automatically according to your input in this box Note Wh
41. Verify that the Voiceover pca data window is active and choose Undo Redo History from the View menu The Undo Redo History window appears If you have performed the previous procedures the window should look like the figure below Undo Redo History Undo H Undo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 H Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Notice that the Mix operation appears at the top of the Undo pane The most recent operations always appear at the top of the appropriate list In the Undo pane click the Play button corresponding to the Mix operation The audio file plays without the drum track Undo Redeo History Undo Undo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Select the Mix operation and choose Undo from the Edit menu The drum track is extracted from the Voiceover pca data window and the Mix operation moves to the Redo pane w Undo Mix Alt Back Ctrl Can t Redo Ctrl Shift 2 gt Repeat Mix Replace Ctrl F4 Undo Redo History Undo H Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Redo H Redo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 In the Redo pane click the Play button corresponding t
42. When using the Event tool the End box is not available Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the end of the selection in the data window F k 100 4 Type a value in the Length box or use the spinner if you want to specify the length of the selection The beginning of the selection remains fixed Click the Lock Selection Length button if you want to preserve the selection length when adjusting the Start or End settings Note When using the Event tool the Length box is automatically locked 5 Type a value in the Channels box to change the current channel selection You can separate individual channels with commas or use hyphens to indicate channel ranges Click the Lock Channels button if you want to lock the channel selection For example type 1 3 6 8 to select channels 1 3 6 7 and 8 Changing this setting has the same effect as holding Ctrl while clicking channels in the data window Note When using the Event tool the Channels box is automatically locked processing dialog to navigate events when multiple events are selected WORKING WITH EFFECTS 221 Changing the wet dry mix and fade in out You can adjust the wet dry mix and fade in out by changing the envelopes in the data window or using the controls at the bottom of the processing dialog If you want to change the default fade values you can use the Editing tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Editing t
43. choose Script Editor to display the Script Editor window if it isn t already displayed Click the Open button E3 in the Script Editor toolbar The Open Script window is displayed Select the script file vb js cs or dll that you want to run The script data is displayed in the top portion of the Script Editor window If you need to pass an argument to the script type it in the Script Args box Arguments are specified as follows ArgName ArgValue amp ArgName2 ArgValuez2 For example a script that uses an argument to indicate where files should be saved could use the following argument to save files to a ScriptOutput folder on your D drive dir d ScriptOutput If your script can create a log file to record the results of a scripting operation you could append that argument as follows dir d ScriptOutput amp logFileName myLog txt In this example the ampersand amp separates the two arguments The first argument sets the save folder and the second argument sets the file name for the log file For more information see Script arguments on page 251 Click the Run Script button Running a script from the Scripting menu Click in the data window where you want to apply the script to establish focus From the Tools menu choose Scripting Choose a script from the submenu or choose Run Script from the submenu to browse to the script file vb js cs or dll that you want to run Running a script from the command l
44. configuring audio event locator 93 Normal Rate indicator 92 on timeline 92 with audio event locator 93 with keyboard 92 with scrub control slider 92 SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI 259 SCSI SMDI hardware setup 269 troubleshooting 269 Seconds button 42 Seek Cursor on Playback command 67 68 selecting events 179 regions 122 Selection Grid Lines option 100 selection status bar 37 selections adjusting from process dialogs 184 adjusting with keyboard 99 adjusting with mouse 99 creating data windows from 163 creating using start and end values 98 deleting all markers and regions within 120 122 during playback 99 muting 195 on the fly 99 playing 68 restoring 99 shifting left right 285 Snapping 100 104 Statistics 68 status boxes 68 sending samples 262 Set button 42 104 Set Grid Divisions command 100 Set Selection dialog 98 setting volume 204 Sfk files 66 sfl files 113 Sfw files 75 Shift Selection Left button 42 Shift Selection Right button 42 shifting selections left right 285 shortcuts creating new 346 customizing 346 347 deleting keyboard maps 347 drag and drop 357 editing 346 importing keyboard maps 347 keyboard 349 356 mouse 358 renaming keyboard maps 347 resetting default keyboard map 347 saving keyboard maps 347 Show shuttle controls on Data Window transport preference 332 Show ToolTips preference 47 silence inserting 159 Simple Delay effect 45
45. display options e From the Options menu choose Channel Meters and then choose a command from the submenu e Right click the meters and choose a command from the shortcut menu Command Description Expand Meters Toggles expanded width meters Turning off expanded meters can conserve screen space Interleave Meters Toggles interleaved or stacked display of VU PPM meters with the corresponding channel meters Show Labels Toggles the meter level labels on and off Hold Peaks When selected the highest peak levels are represented by a thin line on the meter Hold Valleys When selected the lowest peak levels are represented by a thin line on the meter To change the layout of the meters in the Channel Meters window right click the meters choose Layout from the shortcut menu and then choose a command from the submenu Command Description Horizontal Vertical Auto Choose a command to change the orientation of the meters in the Channel Meters window Stretch to Fit Stretches the meters to fit the window Narrow Width Toggles narrow or normal width meters Using narrow meters can conserve screen space Interleave Peak VU Toggles interleaved or stacked display of VU PPM meters with the corresponding channel meters Routing channels to hardware outputs You can change channel assignments from the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or the Channel Meters window Changing the setting in either location updates your preferences and affec
46. displayed Specify the number of beats the loop represents in the Selection length in beats box Click the mouse pointer in the Tempo in beats per minute box The loop tempo is calculated and displayed Saving loop points To save loop information with the file select the Save metadata with file check box in the Save As dialog For more information see Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 72 LOOPING 287 288 CHAPTER 19 Chapter 20 Working with Video Sound Forge Pro software supports opening and saving Microsoft Audio and Video Interleave AVI Windows Media Video WMV QuickTime MOV and MPEG video files You can edit a video file s audio track with single frame accuracy Viewing video You can view the video portion of a file in the data window s video strip and in the Video Preview window You can also view video on an external monitor Using the video strip Though Sound Forge software does not perform video editing the video strip display allows you to navigate video files Right click the Edit Tool Selector to view the video strip a Moon mov a Gr w i A Vi a W Loot B Moon mov deo we v as strip a v Time Ruler a a pe pe Time Zoom E3 Ke 5 a E A ae g i yi Vv Overview FN z i z and V Video Strip SS a l l 00 04 a ee v Level Ruler N rar ona ak Small triangle indicates vV Scrollbar Mdi daah lakha dl A
47. drifting from real wall clock time The time is adjusted forward by two frames on every minute boundary except 0 10 20 30 40 and 50 For example when SMPTE Drop time increments from 00 00 59 29 the next value is 00 01 00 02 SMPTE Non Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Non Drop Frame timecode runs at a rate of 29 97 fps This leads to a discrepancy between real wall clock time and the SMPTE time because there is no compensation in the counting system as there is in SMPTE Drop Frame SMPTE Non Drop format is used for NTSC D1 video projects that are recorded on master tapes striped with Non Drop timecode SMPTE 30 30 fps Audio SMPTE 30 is an audio only format and runs at exactly 30 fps SMPTE 30 is commonly used when synchronizing audio applications such as multitrack recorders or MIDI sequencers This format is not used when working with video SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps The SMPTE Film Sync time format runs at 24 fps frames per second This frame rate matches the standard crystal sync 16 33 mm film rate of 24 fps SMPTE TIMECODE 361 362 APPENDIX C Appendix D Using CSOUND MTU IRCAM BICSF and EBICSF Files Although Sound Forge Pro software supports a large number of sound file formats directly it does not support the CSOUND MTU IRCAM BICSF or EBICSF file types However you can use the Sound Forge Raw File Type capabilities to extract sound data from these file types About IRCAM files The
48. must support CD Text The following information will be written Item Source Disc Title Name Title CD Text box in the CD Information window Disc Artist Artist CD Text box in the CD Information window Track Title Title CD Text column in the Track List window Track Artist Artist CD Text column in the Track List window Notes In order to burn valid CD Text you must specify a title for the disc and for each track on the disc artist information is optional If the Title box in the CD Information window or Track List window is left blank a warning will be displayed before burning so you can choose to write the disc without CD Text or cancel burning and add title information as needed e You can write a maximum of 5000 characters as CD Text 10 Click OK to start burning BURNING CDS 323 324 CHAPTER 23 Chapter 24 Optimizing Sound Forge Pro Software This chapter contains information about configuring your system to maximize Sound Forge Pro performance Defragmenting your hard drive With time and usage hard drives become fragmented leading to discontiguous files and slow access This is particularly true for older hard drives Because Sound Forge Pro software is hard drive intensive faster disk access equates better performance Therefore the initial step in improving system performance is hard drive defragmentation The Windows Disk Defragmenter should be run prior to using Sound Forge Pro software Incr
49. protecting CDs 319 publishing files to Web 40 89 Q subcode 319 quantization errors defined 108 minimizing 109 110 Quantize to Frames 104 rapid sound attacks 123 receiving samples 262 Record button 35 41 Record Options window 31 150 recording Acoustic Mirror test tone 239 at cursor position 146 automatically 148 DC adjust 152 154 input monitoring 151 into selection 146 methods 150 MIDI timecode 149 modes 151 monitoring unselected channels 151 multichannel audio 154 156 multiple takes 147 new recording 143 options 150 over a set threshold 148 post roll 144 prerecord buffer 145 pre roll 144 reviewing recordings 145 147 setting up hardware 152 triggering with MIDI timecode 272 using atimer 150 recovering files after crash 89 Rectangular dither 187 Red Book CD burning See disc at once CD burning Redo button 40 redoing operations 85 87 refreshing Spectrum Anaylsis graphs 298 regions building using current tempo 124 clearing from file 127 copying to clipboard 126 creating CD tracks from 312 deleting 122 125 deleting all 122 deleting all within a selection 120 122 editing default names 337 extracting to new files 124 importing from external file 126 inserting based on musical time intervals 124 inserting based on rapid sound attacks 123 locking lengths 127 moving 122 naming 122 previewing 122 renaming 122 replicating 125 saving to external file 126 sele
50. see Mono Compatibility Meter on page 139 Resetting clipping indicators When audio levels are too high clipping can occur A red indicator appears at the top of the meter to show when audio is clipping Do any of the following to reset the indicator e From the Options menu choose Channel Meters and then choose Reset Clip from the submenu e Click to reset the indicator or right click the meters and choose Reset Clip from the shortcut menu Channel E Channel E Click the clipping indicator to reset it Clipping indicator You can also detect and mark clipped audio using the detect clipping tool For more information see Detecting and marking clipping on page 120 136 CHAPTER 9 Changing the meters display resolution The peak meters display levels in dB FS To change the resolution of the meters do either of the following e From the Options menu choose Channel Meters choose Peak Range from the submenu and then choose a display range e Right click the channel meter choose Peak Range from the submenu and then choose a display range Note Choosing a wide range allows you to see low level signals at the expense of precision display at high levels Changing the meters display options You can choose whether labels peaks and valleys are displayed in the meters and whether the meters are displayed on top of other windows when they are not docked Do either of the following to change the meters
51. timing spikes are lost in the recording or if you are certain that the play and record clocks are synchronized such as when using an ADAT USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 237 Creating impulse files You can obtain impulse responses from anything that accepts test tone input and supports recording the output This includes physical spaces as well as electronic audio equipment Creating custom impulse files requires planning work and additional audio equipment Note mpulses derived from electronic devices that produce nonlinear effects such as overdrives distortion pedals pitch shifters harmonic enhancers chorus pedals or flange pedals cannot be modeled using the Acoustic Mirror tool While they produce interesting effects the acoustic signature cannot be correctly replicated What you need to create custom impulses The equipment required to create custom impulses depends upon whether you want to create the impulse from a physical acoustic space or from a piece of equipment Regardless of the method you need a playback device that reproduces test tones and a recording device that has microphone or line level inputs Be aware that the quality of the impulse is directly affected by the quality of your playback and recording devices The flatter your system s response the more accurate the impulse response Recovering an impulse from an acoustic space To recover an impulse from an acoustic space you need the following equip
52. which can be an easier way to edit edges and fades and lay out tracks for disc at once CDs Notes Events do not loop and cannot exceed the start end or channels of the underlying media For example you cannot trim an event past its right edge to insert silence e To preserve events in a file after saving use a Sound Forge Pro project file For more information see Working with projects on page Wf Creating events Events are created when you cut copy paste sound data split events drag sound data to existing data windows or process selections Creating events by cutting copying or pasting sound data Cutting copying pasting or mixing sound data will create events in a data window After performing one of these edits select the Event tool to work with the new event Splitting events From the Edit menu choose Event and then choose Split from the submenu or press S to split one or more selected events at the current cursor position For more information see Splitting events on page 174 Creating events by dragging files from the Explorer You can create events in a data window by dragging files from the Explorer window or Windows Explorer Tip The Always open dropped files in new window check box on the General page of the Preferences dialog must be cleared if you want to create events with drag and drop operations When the check box is selected dropping a file on the Sound Forge workspace always creates a n
53. 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None Pe e F New region is added to the Cutlist 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 4 Click the Play Cutlist button on the data window s playbar The file plays with the Cutlisted region omitted Creating a new file from the Cutlist Once all superfluous regions are placed in the Cutlist you can create a new audio file and Regions List from the remaining region From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and choose Convert to New from the submenu or right click the Cutlist and choose Convert to New from the shortcut menu Deleting all Cutlist regions 1 Select a region in the Playlist Cutlist window If the window is not visible press Ctrl Alt M 1 2 From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and then choose Delete from the submenu or press Delete Reverting to Playlist function To use the Cutlist as a Playlist again right click the Cutlist and choose Treat as Cutlist from the shortcut menu The check mark is cleared from the corresponding command in the shortcut menu and the Playlist function is restored USING MARKERS REGIONS AND COMMANDS 133 Saving a Playlist Cutlist file You can save a file s Playlist Cutlist to an external file This offers the flexibility of using multiple Playlists for the same file 1 From the Edit menu choose Regions List or Playlist Cutlist and choose Save As from the submenu or right click the Playlist Cutli
54. 00 00 06 6 0 nf 6 0 COON AP h Be ai 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 859 1 512 Zoom out Changing the level zoom To edit the level ruler zoom use the Zoom In Out spinner control located above the playbar e Clicking the plus minus buttons increases decreases the level ruler zoom by single step increments e Dragging the spin control increments the level ruler zoom quickly in the corresponding direction At high zoom levels only low level samples are visible because the peaks of the waveform move beyond the vertical scope of the data window Consider the following data windows BB Example music bed elle BB Example music bed o een a i j00 00 00 070 i a 00 00 00 070 i 0 0 se ee ee ee 3 6 0 ae ii lt i t o i e o S a n la O K A gt gt Ee 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 859 1 1 OOnKdHP aA ee YY 00 00 00 028 00 00 09 859 1 1 Level zoom out maximum Level zoom in maximum Both data windows display the same audio file at a 1 1 zoom ratio The window on the left shows the level ruler zoomed to its maximum out position The window on the right shows the level ruler zoomed to its maximum in position Notice that wave peaks clearly visible in the left window are out of display range in the right window Using zoom level commands If you prefer using commands you can control the level magnification from the View menu The following table briefly describes the three available zoom level
55. 00 02 h 00 00 04 f 00 00 06 6 0 4 0 Inf 4 Inf 4 6 0 6 0 4 Po 4b 4 l roe o K gt i E gt of p Rate 0 00 00 00 00 000 1 256 kK gt i E P gt p Rate 0 00 00 00 00 000 1 256 al lt lt K Pl E gt of ps Rate 0 00 gt A r O 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 101 00 00 02 101 1 256 BB voices Pad SCE B Voices Pad o 6 E Sustaining Loop Sustaining Loop y z NI a K AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 00 00 06 ella lt lt K gt i E P gt ob p Rate 0 00 Poe o 7 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 101 00 00 02 101 1 256 K gt E gt p 286 CHAPTER 19 Rate 0 00 SA 4 05 A Inf 4 4 o 00 00 02 890 00 00 06 644 00 00 03 753 B Voices Pad n BB Voices Pad babada eee EEE 7 Sustaining Loop A Sustaining Loop y a 5 00 00 00 00 00 02 amp AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 all lt lt K gt i E P gt t pl Rate 0 00 roe o nak 00 00 02 890 00 00 06 644 00 00 03 753 1 256 Setting loop tempo You can calculate and if necessary edit the tempo of your loops Loop tempo is especially important if the loop will be used for building a project in any ACID product For more information see Creating loops for ACID software on page 283 Calculating loop tempo 1 2 Select the loop From the Options menu choose Status Format and then choose Edit Tempo from the submenu The Edit Tempo dialog is
56. 1 534 t Gain ae inf to 20 dB More 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 lt 4 mob me im aD K gt ob 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 1 534 Audio following volume increase Note When audio data is clipped it cannot be restored by performing a second Volume operation The initial Volume operation must be undone Volume control The Volume dialog contains only one control Gain The Gain fader determines the new volume of a selection Negative decibel values decrease the selection s volume while positive decibel values increase the selection s volume Note A value of Inf corresponds to mute 0 204 CHAPTER 13 Chapter 14 Working with Effects Effects or plug ins can be used to improve the quality of the audio or to create special artistic effects Additional DirectX and VST plug in effects both from Sony and other third party vendors can also be used Adding effects You can choose an effect from the Effects menu to apply to a file or just a portion of a file If you ve added an effect to the FX Favorites menu you can select it from that location as well For more information see Organizing effects in the FX Favorites menu on page 208 Applying an effect 1 Select the data you want to process If no data is selected the effect is applied to the entire file If you re using the Event tool select the events you want to process For more information see Selec
57. 256 metadata 256 BICSF 363 bit depth decreasing 108 defined 108 increasing 108 Bit Depth Converter 44 186 187 bonus tracks 314 Broadcast Wave window 55 Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog 46 322 323 Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog 46 308 309 burning CDs See disc at once CD burning track at once CD burning INDEX 383 bypassing processes while previewing 183 calculating loop tempo 287 CALM Act 140 CD index markers 311 CD information editing 65 submitting to Gracenote 65 window 56 CD layout bar deleting CD tracks 316 end of disc indicator 315 hiding 316 pause time 316 reordering CD tracks 315 trimming CD tracks 315 CD Text editing for disc at once CDs 318 321 322 obtaining from Gracenote 65 submitting to Gracenote 65 CD tracks bonus tracks 314 creating from events 311 creating from files 312 314 creating from regions 312 deleting 316 inserting 311 locking to audio 315 pause time 316 318 reordering 315 318 trimming 315 318 CDs See also disc at once CD burning track at once CD burning 307 closing 309 extracting audio from 65 76 77 pre emphasis boost 319 protecting 319 Q subcode 319 Center Release End button 42 Center Release Start button 42 Center Sustaining End button 42 Center Sustaining Start button 42 changing sample rate 107 Channel Converter button 44 dialog 191 intermixing channels 190 mono to multichannel 189 mono to stereo 189 overview 112
58. 4 GB Warn when metadata cannot be saved in the file Automatically reopen file after Save As Prompt to open new file after Save As Allow Undo past Save Show shuttle controls on Data Window transport Show record controls on Data Window transport Show waveform while recording Show free storage space on Status Bar Spacebar and F12 Play Pause instead of Play Stop Default to slow scroll when drag selecting Allow Ctrl drag style cursor scrub in data windows Allow Ctrl drag style zoom in data windows 332 CHAPTER 25 Description Select this check box to enable support for WAV files up to 4 GB Clear the check box for compatibility with other software applications Select this check box if you want to be prompted to save metadata to a separate file if it cannot be saved within the media file When the check box is cleared metadata will automatically be saved to a separate file if necessary Select this check box if you want to automatically reopen files when you save to a different format Changes in bit depth channels or compression format will result in reopening and will allow you to listen to any changes in sound quality Clear the check box and select the Prompt to open new file after Save As check box if you want to be prompted to open the saved file in a new data window When both check boxes are cleared Sound Forge software does nothing after saving to a different format If you re saving a fil
59. 4 69 169 72472 75475 alie a in Wb mil lfm fap 78 78 81481 O K gt E gt Rate 0 00 lt r 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 1 244 EEJ i Example music bed Wow sound editing Drum Fill 8 x mai 7 End 1 x Sart ona Lengi off 000 AcousticGre v Note 1 f s 4 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None 22 an 127 2 Wow 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 None v 1 C5 3 Sound editing just gets easier 00 00 01 476 00 00 03 640 00 00 02 164 None X 1 c5 4p And easier 00 00 03 640 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None v 1 c5 Docked windows with Docked keyboard tabs Playlist Regions List Explorer Plug In Manager Time Display 3 4 5 6 44 100 Hz 16bit Mono 00 00 05 000 213 790 8 MB e To dock a window drag it to a floating dock or to any edge of the Sound Forge workspace e To undock a window click the handle and drag it out of the docking area or floating dock e To prevent a window from docking when you drag it hold the Ctrl key Note When the Allow floating windows to dock check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog is cleared windows will not dock unless you hold the Ctrl key When the check box is selected you can prevent a window from docking by holding the Ctrl key For more information see General tab on page 331 e To expand a docked window so it fills the docking area click the Maximize button 4 Click again to restore the window to its previous size
60. 9 l n e e ts oe L E E 81 72 63 54 45 35 27 18 9 Po T VU PPM meter Peak meter Phase scope Mono compatibility meter Adjusting output levels The Hardware Meters window displays a gain fader for each output that is enabled on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 342 You can use these faders to adjust preview levels Important The faders in the Hardware Meters window are used to control preview volume only If you want to mix channel levels use the Volume or Envelope plug in Drag to adjust the volume of the channel Double click the center of the thumb to reset the fader to 0 0 dB If the right and left channels are set differently you can double click either thumb to force the other channel to match it Click the Lock Unlock Fader Channels button to lock gang the faders so the left and right channels will always move together Click again to unlock the faders Tip Hold Shift while dragging a fader to temporarily override the current state of the Lock Unlock Fader Channels button if the button is turned off you can hold Shift to drag the faders in locked mode if the button is selected hold Shift to drag the faders independently EDITING MULTICHANNEL AUDIO 117 Showing or hiding meters You can display a peak meter VU PPM a phase scope and mono compatibility meter for each hardware output To toggle the display of each meter right click the Hardware Meters wi
61. Adjusting effect parameters with plug in controls ccc ccc cece e eee eeeneees 223 Adjusting effect parameters with envelopes cc cece ccc eect eee e ee eneeeeeeeees 224 Previewing CIIECE GULOMALION iaa0secersateneane ives saeed venwet eased AERAN 224 Applying effect automation 6 ccc cee eeee ee n eee e eee eee eee eeeeennes 224 Showing or hiding effect automation envelopes cc cece cece eee eee e eee e ee eeeees 224 Enabling or bypassing effect automation envelopes cece ccc cece e eee eeeenes 224 Adjusting envelopes s co5 00c sce twee s Situ ddd ews deeesresuidarudeeauss swt tedwewsawenade 225 Adding envelope points ccc ccc cc ccc cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 FID DING al CN VCIODE soceystuscet one oitutie one pi eetae one courier ere EE E ES 225 Setting TAGE properties ssssrissresrsisritas ritwa Eniten PESER ENERE ANETE 225 Cutting copying and pasting envelope points ccc cece eect teen eee e ee eeees 225 Copying an envelope to another data window ccc ccc ccc cece eee cece neeeeaeenes 226 Using the Preset Manager ccc ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeees 226 Sound FOLGE CHES seins stneoe dhacsieaed tiers ducesasdoatadend a aae 226 PCOUSTICIVIINGON 2 auc out pues tesa eoee estes awe ane aes we eae E a vee os tedea ree ee ae ee 226 Amplitude Modulation 0 ccc cc cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee e eect eeeeeeeennees 226 COINS 2
62. Bank dialog is displayed 3 Browse to the fxb file that you want to use 4 Click the Open button All presets for the current VST plug in are replaced with the settings stored in the fxb file and the first preset in the bank is loaded by default Previewing the effects chain To hear the results of your effects chain without applying it to the sound file click the Preview button in the Apply Plug In Chain window You can select the Bypass check box to bypass all effects in the chain or clear an effect s check box Reverb to bypass individual effects You can use the buttons and shortcut menus in processing dialogs to set parameters for previewing and processing with plug ins Click the More button to display controls you can use to adjust the selection wet and dry gain and fade in out settings For more information see Using processing dialogs on page 218 Applying the effects chain To apply the effects chain to a data window click the OK button in the Apply Plug In Chain window Saving the plug in chain as a preset When you save a plug in chain the order of the effects in the chain and the settings for each plug in are saved with the chain 1 Add plug ins to the chain 2 Adjust each plug in s properties 3 Typeaname in the Chain box Note You cannot modify default presets 4 Click the Save Chain Preset button Apply Plug In Chain One of These Days E Chain e Sl x I 216 CHAPTER 14
63. Chain E 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 24 18 12 6 Inf Analogni iS a i Analog In 2 72 66 oS 4 4 a E O S S PDIF In 1 inf S PDIF In 2 Select the sound data you want to replace or click to position the cursor where you want to begin recording Tip f you want to check your input levels before or during recording you can use the meters The peak meters represent the volume of the recording input For best results the peak level should be somewhere in the yellow range with an occasional red segment you want your input to be as loud as possible without clipping RECORDING 155 6 Click the Arm button if you want to begin recording as soon as possible after clicking the Record button The Arm button is optional but can allow for more accurate takes When you click Arm the wave device is opened and all recording buffers are loaded in order to minimize the amount of time between clicking the Record button and when recording Starts 7 Click the Record button or press Ctrl R Recording begins and the Time Display window and the data window s selection status bar will show the current record position Note During recording playback commands the Preferences dialog and commands that affect the recording data window are unavailable 8 Recording will stop automatically at the end of the selection If you re recording without a selection existing data is overwritten during recording
64. Data selection shortcuts on page 353 For the sake of accuracy however it is often useful to create selections by entering specific start and end point values The Set Selection dialog allows you to create selections in this way or by choosing a preset selection from the Selection drop down list 1 From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Set from the submenu or press Ctrl Shift D The Set Selection dialog appears 2 From the Input format drop down list choose the format to be used for creating the selection The values in the Start End and Length boxes change to reflect the specified format 3 Configure the selection by typing appropriate values in the Start and End or the Start and Length boxes 4 Ifyou are working with a stereo file choose Left Right or Both from the Channel drop down list or for a multichannel file type the appropriate channel numbers in the Channel box 5 Click OK Using the Set Selection dialog The following sections briefly describe additional controls located in the Set Selection dialog Selection OK custo o eso Cres Start hrimn sc xxx Play End 00 00 02 432 E Play looped Length 00 00 02 318 Snap Zero Channel Both Y Snap Time Input format lm Control Description Play Clicking Play plays the current selection Play looped Selecting the Play looped check box allows you to play the selection in Looped Playback mode Snap Zero Clicking Snap Ze
65. Device entry and choose a new input from the drop down list Tip To change a channel s input in the Record Options window click the channel number and choose a new input port from the menu Record Options E3 Record status Idle Record attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit 4 Channel Time recorded 00 00 00 Time left on drive Over 2 hours Method Manual v Settings Mode Normal Coc Adjust Monitor Off x E Play unselected channels when recording Monitor input through Plug In Chain ed ee nd ne nn Elin ee anf Analog In1 N E i lo in nUn Ge a Eol Se nel ae no Bela Sein ln a ll a S PDIF In1 Inf S PDIF In 2 Record buffering seconds Specifies the total amount of buffering that is used during recording If you use your computer for other tasks while recording increasing this setting can reduce the likelihood of those tasks interrupting recording Click this button to open the Advanced Audio Configuration dialog For more information on these options see below Advanced Default All Click to restore the Audio tab to the default settings CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 343 Advanced audio preferences You can click the Advanced button on the Audio tab to access the advanced audio preferences Setting Audio devices Interpolate position Position bias Do not pre roll buffers before starting playback Audio buffers Buffer size Prior
66. Edit menu choose Trim Crop or press Ctrl T Only Wow sound editing just gets easier remains in the data window amp Wow sound editing 2 fon Ealwow EREED Sound editing just gets easier a 00 00 00 000 4 0 Inf 7 4 0 ml lt itt P 4 gt COON dP HEE x 00 00 00 000 00 00 03 640 00 00 03 640 1 290 Mixing Mixing is a powerful editing function that allows you to mix a copy of the clipboard contents at the current cursor position Mixing by dragging and dropping a selection 1 2 3 Open and play the Drumhit pca file The file contains a snare drum and crash cymbal sound Choose the Edit tool Drag the mouse over the data window to select the entire waveform Tip f the Always open dropped files in new window check box on the General page of the Preferences dialog is cleared you can also drag a file or region from the Explorer window to a data window to paste sound data When the check box is selected dropping a file on the Sound Forge workspace always creates a new data window For more information see General tab on page 331 Drag the selection to the beginning of the Voiceover pca file The cursor appears as a mouse pointer with the letter M and a shaded selection box appears to show you where the mix will occur An envelope is drawn to show you the mix and fade levels The last used settings from the Mix Replace dialog are used by default You can click the right mouse button
67. Envelope Points commands on the Options menu Slip trimming events Press Alt while dragging the right or left edge of an event The slip trim cursor appears 5 As you drag the event edge the media moves with the event edge Tips Press Alt Shift while dragging any portion of an event to slip trim the right edge The left edge of the event remains fixed and the media is slipped past the left edge of the event This slip mode is useful when you want to slip an event without changing its last frame Hold the Shift key to temporarily override snapping Regions and markers are moved with the contents of the event To turn this feature off turn off the Lock to Selection gt Markers Regions and Envelope Points commands on the Options menu Auto ripple events You can ripple the contents of the data window following an edit after performing the following tasks Adjusting an event s length by trimming slip trimming or slipping Moving events Cutting events Pasting events Mixing events Deleting events Select Options gt Event gt Auto Ripple or press Ctrl Shift R to turn on auto ripple Perform one of the edits listed above The contents of the data window are rippled after the edit Note fno channels are selected events are rippled across all channels If channels are selected only events on the selected channels are rippled USING THE EVENT TOOL 175 Crossfading events You can crossfade between tw
68. Nondestructive Editing This type of editing involves a pointer based system of keeping track of edits When you delete a section of audio in a nondestructive system the audio on disk is not actually deleted Instead a set of pointers is established to tell the program to skip the deleted section during playback Normalize Refers to raising the volume so that the highest level sample in the file reaches a user defined level Use normalization to make sure you are using all of the dynamic range available to you Nyquist Frequency The Nyquist Frequency or Nyquist Rate is one half of the sample rate and represents the highest frequency that can be recorded using the sample rate without aliasing For example the Nyquist Frequency of 44 100 Hz is 22 050 Hz Any frequencies higher than 22 050 Hz will produce aliasing distortion in the sample if no anti aliasing filter is used while recording Object Linking and Embedding OLE OLE is a technology developed by Microsoft to allow independent applications to behave as though they are tightly integrated This allows objects such as Sound Forge audio files to be integrated into other applications such as a Microsoft Word document Overview The Overview is the area on the data window directly under the title bar The entire length of the overview represents the entire sound file Cursor selection and position information is shown relative to the entire length of the sound file One Shot One
69. Record Options window and choose a new input port from the menu Record Options Record status Idle Record attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit 4 Channel Time recorded 00 00 00 Time left on drive Over 2 hours Method Manual Settings Mode Normal r DC Adjust Monitor loft Calibrate Play unselected channels when recording Monitor input through Plug In Chain ee i 72 6 4 6 2 3 M M E 1 6 i Inf Analogni hs SS i 2 09 n2 pl i Ra A role a lA Eo S PDIF In 1 Inf S PDIF In 2 Recording at the current cursor position or into a selection 1 Verify that your recording method is set to Manual a From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed b From the Method drop down list choose Manual c If you want to set up pre roll post roll or a prerecord buffer click the Settings button For more information see Setting up pre and post roll on page 144 or Setting a prerecord buffer on page 145 d From the Mode drop down list ensure Normal or Create regions is selected 2 Select the sound data you want to replace or click to position the cursor where you want to begin recording Tip Ifyou want to check your input levels before or during recording you can use the meters The peak meters represent the volume of the recording input For best results the peak level should be somewhere in the yellow range with an occasiona
70. Recording options on page 150 c Click the Settings button The Time Settings tab in the Record Settings dialog is displayed Click the Add button 3 to create a timer setting or click the Edit button to edit an existing setting The Record Timer Event dialog is displayed Tips Ifyou want to remove a timer setting select it and click the Delete button x e Ifyou want to remove all past timer settings click the Remove All Past Events from List button e Typeaname in the Name box to create a name to identify the preset f Choose a setting from the Recurrence drop down list to indicate whether you want to record one time only or repeat the timed recording at a regular interval g Use the Start date Start time and Duration boxes to indicate when you want to start and stop recording h Click OK to close the Record Timer Event dialog i Click OK to close the Record Settings dialog Click the Arm button in the data window where you want to record The Record status value in the Record Options window will display a countdown to show you when recording will begin When the timer is activated recording begins at the cursor position and the Time Display window and the data window s selection status bar will show the current record position If the destination window contains a selection that is shorter than the timer duration recording will stop at the end of the selection If the destination window contai
71. Save Options button to create a setting for each file type that you want to convert 256 CHAPTER 16 b Inthe File Format section select a radio button to indicate the format that you want to use for processed files Button Description Same as source Select this radio button if you want to save converted files using the same format as the original file Convert to Select this radio button and choose a file type from the Type drop down list if you want to convert your files to a new format Choose a setting from the Template drop down list to choose the parameters that will be used for rendering your file or click Custom to choose a new template custom templates are not available for vox ivc au or dig files Tip For any output format choose Default Template to preserve the source file s format sample rate bit depth and number of channels in the output file c Inthe File Names section select a radio button to indicate the format that you want to use for processed files Button Description Same as source Select this radio button if you want to save converted files using the same name as the original file Append to name Select this radio button and type text in the Append to name box if you want to adda descriptor to the file names of converted files The text you enter will be added to the original file name during conversion For example if your source file is C Audio DoorSlam wav the file could be saved as
72. Select this check box if you want to update OriginationTimeRef metadata when Time Reference adding or deleting sound data at the beginning of a Broadcast Wave Format file When the check box is cleared OriginationTimeRef metadata is unaffected when you add or delete sound data at the beginning of the file For more information about Broadcast Wave Format metadata please see Broadcast Wave window Ctrl Alt M 4 on page 55 Select this check box if you want to open the MIDI device assigned to the MIDI Auto power MIDI keyboard window Allow floating windows to dock Recently used file list keyboard if it is not already open when you click a key on the MIDI keyboard You may want to turn off this option if you are using the same MIDI output device for MIDI synchronization or for your sequencer If this option is turned off you need to click the On button on the keyboard prior to using it to send notes When this check box is selected windows will automatically be docked when you drag them to the edges of the Sound Forge workspace You can hold the Ctrl key while dragging a window to prevent it from docking When this check box is cleared windows will not dock unless you hold the Ctrl key Select the check box if you want to display a list of recently used files on the File menu Temporary files and record folder Display tab Use the edit box to specify the number of files you want to display Specify a folder for st
73. Settings dialog 74 custom templates copying between computers and users 75 creating 74 deleting 74 saving 74 Custom Zoom 1 button 42 95 Custom Zoom 2 button 42 95 customizing channel meters 137 data windows 32 keyboard shortcuts 47 346 347 preferences 331 345 selection grid lines 100 Time Display window 329 toolbars 39 341 Cut button 40 Cut preview configuration preferences 82 Cutlist adding regions to 133 copying to clipboard 134 creating files from 133 deleting all regions 133 editing regions 132 opening Cutlist files 134 reverting to Playlist 133 saving to file 134 viewing 133 Cutlist files opening 134 saving 134 cutting events 173 previewing cuts 82 selections 81 82 Cycle Selection command 99 DAO CDs See disc at once CD burning data windows activating 71 active vs inactive 71 arranging 38 creating 71 creating with drag and drop 163 customizing 32 overview 32 overview bar 33 playbar 35 scrolling during playback 67 DC adjust 152 154 INDEX 385 DC Offset button 44 dialog 192 estimating 191 overview 191 decibels defined 135 Default time between CD tracks preference 314 defragmenting the hard disk 325 Delay Echo effects 227 Delete Clear command 82 deleting all Cutlist regions 133 all markers and regions 119 122 all markers and regions within a selection 122 all markers within a selection 120 CD tracks 316 command markers 128 custom temp
74. Setung a Prerecord DUNGI wcexteannres cena isea reniei EEPE NOUTEN iE 145 Reviewing recorded takes uusnusnssessessessersesersorsorsoseorresseseesserrereeso 145 TABLE OF CONTENTS 13 Recording into an existing sound file 6 ccc cece eee eee e nee eeennees 146 Recording at the current cursor position or into a selection ccc cece cece eee eee ees 146 Recording multiple takes into a selection 2 0 ccc ccc eee cece eee eee e eee eeeeees 147 Reviewing recorded takes ccc ccc cece cee eee ence eee eee e eee eeeennaes 147 Recording audio automatically ccc cece ccc cece e eee e nee eee eee eeeeeees 148 Recording audio over a set threshold cc ccc ccc ccc eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeees 148 Recording using MIDI timecode ccc ccc ccc eee n ene e nena e ee eeeennaes 149 Recording USING a TIME 2i4nay ier oaw rot rirnan A AE pene eee ac aeenent 150 Recording ODORS aan ccdendvdaveudensaesdsa ea tintoe daeoe ashe Sohne ESA 150 Choosing a recording Method cece cece eee ence eee e ene eee eeeeeeees 150 CHOOSING a TECOIGING Mode ui icies cu we ew ewnw cw th iecadinn ku dP iewwadee ewe hawnandesawe nals 151 Setting UP input monitoring ccc cece eee cette eee tent ene eee teeeeeeeeeenees 151 Adjusting TOF DG ONSEL w c5acesvicvasietaeudcisse ENA ATENON teen taeweseseis ade 152 Recording A ppp tte s trenin rrE ENE EEA EES Aaea a aaea 152 Connecting an audio source to your sou
75. Tip Please note that true peaks are calculated using a higher sample rate than peaks in the Channel Meters for increased accuracy d When the Use True Peaks check box is selected select the Enable DC Blocking Filter check box if you want to filter the true peak sample value to compensate for asymmetrical audio signals or DC offset Filtered true peaks are calculated as the maximum of the filtered and unfiltered signals 4 Click the OK button The selection is scanned and markers are added whenever the software finds a number of sequential samples determined by the Clip Length setting with the same value above the Threshold setting Tip Use the Detect all clip related plateaus preset to detect clipped peaks that may exist in your file after decreasing the levels in the file You can then use the Pencil tool or the Clipped Peak Restoration tool in the Sony Noise Reduction plug in to restore the clipped peaks Using regions From the Insert menu choose Region to add region markers at each end of the current selection Regions can be used to indicate sections of projects such as choruses or verses or they can be used to make notes in the project The Regions List window contains all of the regions and markers that exist in the active data window Inserting a region 1 Drag the cursor in the data window or marker bar to make a time selection 2 From the Insert menu choose Region Numbered region markers F are placed at the start and
76. To navigate the waveform you can drag the unshaded portion of the waveform display Tip Hold Ctrl and drag the unshaded portion of the waveform display to scrub with the audio event locator For more information see Scrubbing with the audio event locator on page 93 e To zoom horizontally you can drag the ends of the unshaded portion of the waveform display LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 33 Video strip When you open a file that contains a video stream Sound Forge displays a video strip above the audio waveform to help you navigate the file For more information see Working with Video on page 289 KayakandWhale 001 avi Video strip leli lt 0 E a O j4 4d P H oe m 00 00 00 000 00 00 40 374 1 2 438 Time ruler Shows the current location in the data window as well as ruler tags e Right click to display the time ruler shortcut menu e Drag to scroll the data window Next Edit Tool button Click to toggle through the Edit Magnify Pencil Event and Envelope tools Note The Pencil tool is available only at magnification levels below the Pencil tool maximum zoom ratio setting on the Editing tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Editing tab on page 335 Minimize channel height Click the Minimize button to reduce the height of individual channels or click the Restore button m to restore their height Hold Shift while clicking a Minimize button to minimize all ch
77. Vista or Windows 7 C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 You can click the Browse button to choose a different folder 6 Click OK to save the new layout Loading a saved layout From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose the window layout you want to use from the submenu Tip To load a layout quickly press Alt D release the keys and then press a number on your keyboard not the numeric keypad to recall the layout saved in that space If no layout is saved in that space nothing will happen when you press the shortcut keys If you ve modified the current window layout choose Window Layouts and then choose Reload Selected Layout from the submenu to reset the window layout to the last saved version Adding a layout to the View gt Window Layouts submenu 1 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 2 Selecta layout in the Available layouts in current folder box This box lists the ForgeWindowLayout files in the folder displayed in the Current layout folder box If the layout you want to use is saved in a different folder you can click the Browse button to choose a new folder 3 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box 4 Click the Assign or Replace button to add the layout to the View gt Window Layouts submenu You can click the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the orde
78. You can create CD tracks by dragging selections or files from the Explorer window to a data window For more information see Adding files to a data window and creating tracks on page 312 Toggling the Mix Paste and CD Track functions An alternate way of specifying a mix paste or CD track is the mouse toggle method 1 2 3 Open the Voiceover pca and Drumhit pca files Select all audio data in the Drumhit data window Drag the selection to the Voiceover data window A shaded region representing the source selection appears in the destination window and a letter or CD icon appears in the box adjacent to the pointer Continue holding the left mouse button while clicking the right mouse button The mouse icon and the appearance of the selection region change to indicate the current drag and drop mode Release the left mouse button The source audio data is pasted mixed or inserted as a CD track 162 CHAPTER 11 Creating new windows by dragging and dropping a selection Drag and drop also allows you to create a new data window from a selection 1 2 3 Open the Voiceover pca file Create a selection containing Wow Drag the selection to an empty area of the Sound Forge workspace and drop it A new data window is created containing the selection data with the attributes of the original file Finding and repairing audio glitches Glitches are commonly the result of analog audio editing analog to digital transfer
79. a Nyquist frequency of 11 kHz well within the sensitive range of human hearing Applying noise shaping to this file results in audio that is perceived to be noisier than it actually is Ironically this defeats the entire purpose of the Noise shape control For this reason we do not recommend using noise shaping on files with sample rates less than 44 1 kHz PROCESSING AUDIO 187 iZotope MBIT Dither From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose iZotope MBIT Dither from the submenu to convert sound files to different bit depths and apply dithering Tip Because the signal to noise ratio decreases when you decrease the bit depth of a file you should maximize the volume of the sound file using the Volume or Normalize functions before performing the conversion 1 From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose iZotope MBIT Dither from the submenu The iZotope MBIT Dither dialog is displayed Preset Gx 3 m Cancel Bit depth a r So Dither mode Tpet sis Preview Noise shaping None si Bypass Dither bits aoo E Auto blank M Minimize peaks q Silence harmonics 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as needed Item Description Bit depth Choose the desired bit depth from the drop down list Note ncreasing a file s bit depth cannot improve the quality of the existing audio but does allow higher r
80. a configuration in the Sampler dialog the Sampler area near the bottom of the dialog displays all relevant sampler configuration information The bottom pane of the dialog contains two additional parameters MIDI unity note and Fine tune MIDI unity note 5 60 Fine tune cents 0 000 Parameter Description MIDI unity note The MIDI unity note value indicates the pitch to which the sample is tuned Fine tune The Fine tune value indicates any minor tuning differences measured in cents in the sample 262 CHAPTER 17 Editing MIDI unity note and Fine tune Both values can be edited and used with samplers that support tuning information in the Sampler Loops window For more information see Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 on page 57 Note The software does not use this information Processing musical instrument files Sound Forge can open and save DLS GigaStudio GigaSampler and SoundFont 2 0 musical instrument files allowing you to add effects and processing to existing samples When you open a musical instrument file you ll notice some additions to the data window BB Smooth Bass x Bank CO LE fi Bank 0 EEE i Smooth Bass L Smooth Bass R Instrument gt ll 0 Smooth Bass 2 samples pel agd es ee at fd Note C 1 G9 Note Range A A Smooth Bass L 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 500 00 00 01 000 A nile 7 EAR Bass R al taai ANAA T Sample Waveform 4 ro 4b
81. a track A track must be at least four seconds long 2 From the Insert menu choose CD Track or press N A CD track is added to the CD layout bar in the data window BB 100 Unnamed Things ce C fa I 1 Shine r 00 03 30 933 00 03 28 426 00 04 42 866 AmI ob Lella KP m gt Rate 0 00 m 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 866 1 53 791 Tip You can drag CD tracks to rearrange them drag either end ofa track to change its length or use the Track List window to edit the track s position or name Creating CD index markers You can use index markers to subdivide a track For example in a track that contains an orchestral composition index markers could allow navigation to each movement Each track on a Red Book audio CD can contain up to 99 index markers 1 Click to position the cursor where you want to add an index marker 2 From the Insert menu choose CD Index or press Shift N A CD index marker is added to the CD layout bar in the data window CD index marker Creating CD tracks from events in a data window If you re working with a data window that contains multiple events you can create tracks automatically using the events 1 Create events on the timeline to lay out your CD For more information see Using the Event Tool on page 171 2 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Create CD Tracks from Events from the submenu Each event is marked
82. acoustic spaces Reverb consists of early reflections which are the first reflections that arrive back to your ear and the reverb itself For information about using the Reverb plug in click the Help button E in the Sony Reverb dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Vibrato From the Effects menu choose Vibrato to apply periodic pitch modulation to a selection For information about using the Vibrato effect click the Help button E in the Sony Vibrato dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Wave Hammer Use Wave Hammer to boost the level of an audio signal for mastering or mixing For more information see What is the Wave Hammer plug in on page 245 WORKING WITH EFFECTS 231 232 CHAPTER 14 Chapter 15 Using Acoustic Mirror and Wave Hammer This chapter is designed to familiarize you with the Sound Forge Pro Acoustic Mirror and Wave Hammer effects The Acoustic Mirror effect is a powerful digital signal processing tool that allows you to add environmental coloration to your existing recordings The Wave Hammer effect is an audio mastering tool that features a classic compressor and volume maximizer What are the Acoustic Mirror effects The Acoustic Mirror effects represents an advance in reverb technology in that it incorporates the acoustical responses of a given environment or venue into your audi
83. an automation envelope to your audio signal or deselect the button to ignore the envelope When the button is not selected an effect automation envelope is ignored and the effect s initial state is used for the duration of the data window Bypassed envelopes are drawn with a dashed line in the data window 224 CHAPTER 14 Adjusting envelopes When the Envelope tool on the main workspace is selected you can add remove select or adjust envelope points on effect automation envelopes The Edit tool 4 allows you to add remove or adjust envelope points but you cannot select envelope points with the Edit tool By default a new envelope will contain a single envelope point If you want to adjust the overall level of an envelope drag the envelope up or down A floating ToolTip will show you the envelope s current setting If an envelope has multiple points you can drag each point or you can drag envelope segments up or down Tips Hold Ctrl while dragging an envelope point or segment to adjust the value in fine increments without changing the envelope points horizontal positions Hold Ctrl Alt while dragging an envelope point or segment to adjust the value in normal increments without changing the envelope points horizontal positions Hold Alt while dragging an envelope point to move the point s horizontal position without changing its value With the Envelope tool you can drag horizontally to selec
84. are finished working with a project file you can save your work to a media file using the Render As option on the File menu Note To use the advanced undo redo capabilities mentioned above you must have the Allow Undo past Save check box selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog To access the Preferences dialog choose Preferences from the Options menu From the File menu choose Save As to save the current data window to a project file The Save As dialog appears Using the Save in drop down list locate the folder where you want to save the project From the Save as type drop down list choose Sound Forge Pro Project File frg In the File name box type a name for the file oe SY Click the Save button A frg file is created with the name you specified and a folder with a similar name projectname_frg for example is created in the same location for the temporary files Important The associated project folder created by this process should not be deleted as this will cause your project file to be unusable Getting media files The software can open a variety of audio and video files There are two main methods for locating previewing and opening media files From the File menu choose Open to display the Open dialog From the View menu choose Explorer to display the Explorer window These methods are explained in greater detail in the following sections Note Jo have pulldown fields automatically rem
85. at once CDs on page 319 Creating track lists for disc at once CDs If you need to share your track list information with another application or with a CD replication house you can copy the track list information to the clipboard save it to a text file or print a hard copy BURNING CDS 319 Copying track lists to the clipboard 1 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Copy Track List to Clipboard from the submenu The Copy Track List to Clipboard dialog is displayed Tip Right click the Track List window and choose Copy Track List to Clipboard from the shortcut menu Copy Track List to Clipboard Format for track list output OK Cue sheet for replication show absolute times CD liner notes show times relative to track 1 canci W Indude summary information with track list output 2 Choose the format you want to apply to your track list information e Cue sheet for replication The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the beginning of the CD This is the preferred format for CD replication houses o CD liner notes The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the first track on the disc 3 Select the Include summary information with track list output check box if you want to include UPC MCN title engineer and comment information with the track list 4 Click OK to send the track list information to the clipboard You can then paste the infor
86. audio samples at varying pitches For the purposes of this manual we will concentrate on two basic varieties external samplers and internal samplers External samplers External samplers are typically capable of recording samples or transferring prerecorded samples into their memory You can choose between two methods to transfer samples to external samplers e MIDI Sample Dump Standard SDS SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI MIDI Sample Dump Standard SDS The MIDI SDS is used to send and receive digital samples using normal MIDI hardware and cable connections Due to the limited bandwidth of the MIDI protocol and the large amount of data required by digital samples a MIDI SDS transfer can be time consuming Furthermore SDS is limited to mono samples though certain samplers allow two mono samples to be joined as a stereo sample SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI The SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI allows music hardware and software to communicate using SCSI hardware and cables Because SCSI hardware has a greater bandwidth than MIDI SMDI transfers are considerably faster than SDS transfers In addition SMDI supports mono and stereo sample transfers Internal samplers Internal samplers are cards installed in your system that unlike typical sound cards actually allow sounds to be downloaded into memory and played at varying pitches to simulate a musical instrument Using an unsupported internal sampler If you have an inte
87. be played when the specified note on message is received and will play for the full length of the file Note On Play Off Stop The marker will be played when the specified note on message is received and will stop when the full file is played or the specified Note Off message is received Note On Queue Off Play The marker will be queued for play when the specified note on message is received and will play when the corresponding Note Off message is received This is used to reduce the time between receiving a trigger and playing a marker 3 Inthe Chan box specify the MIDI input channel for triggering 4 Inthe Note box specify the MIDI note that will trigger region playback This value can be entered as a MIDI note value such as C4 or as a MIDI note number such as 60 Notes Ifthe Trigger from MIDI Timecode command is selected while using this dialog you can auto complete the Chan and Note values by pressing a key on your MIDI keyboard Triggers in the Regions List function differently from triggers specified in the MIDI Triggers dialog and the Playlist When using triggers in the Playlist Regions List or MIDI Triggers dialog be aware that they can interact to create unexpected results Sound Forge software first looks at the MIDI Triggers then the Regions List and then the Playlist when determining what to do whena MIDI command is detected If you only want to use the triggers in the Regions List turn off all the tr
88. box to specify an offset that will be added to the time displayed in the Sound Forge play counter For example if you want to generate MIDI timecode starting at 01 00 00 00 instead of inserting 1 hour of silence at the beginning of your sound file you can specify that amount in this box When using Record Sync you ll often want to set this value to the Enable MTC SMPTE Input Synchronization Start time The Sound Forge ruler and play counter will not display this offset Previews tab The Previews tab allows you to specify options for previewing files Item Limit non realtime previews to Pre roll Post roll Reactive previewing Audio event locator Pre roll Loop time Cut preview configuration Pre roll Post roll Play Looped adjust pre roll Playlist pre roll Description Select this check box and specify the length of audio that will be used when generating a preview Low values decrease the amount of time needed to generate a preview when tuning effects or processing values Select this check box and specify how many seconds of unprocessed audio will be played before the processed selection Use this to listen to the transition from unprocessed to processed data Tip Pre roll can be toggled on and off by right clicking the dialog and choosing Pre roll from the shortcut menu Select this check box and specify how many seconds of unprocessed audio will be played after the processed selection Use this to list
89. can also Ctrl drag events to other data windows or to the workspace to create new data windows Tip Regions markers and envelope points are moved with an event To turn this feature off turn off the Lock to Selection gt Markers Regions and Envelope Points commands on the Options menu 172 CHAPTER 12 Editing events Copying events You can copy events to the clipboard and paste them into any data window You can copy a single event or multiple events Copying preserves the original event information edits and other modifications Events before copy Clipboard contents Events after copy z Ww Ei MFI The original events are not affected and do not change Select the events to be copied For more information see Selecting events on page 179 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button on the Standard toolbar The selected events are copied to the clipboard and the waveform is unchanged Cutting events Cutting events removes them from the file but places the cut information on the clipboard After the events are on the clipboard you can paste them into any data window Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut ui A TENTO Wh Uh ta tl Select the events to be cut For more information see Selecting events on page 179 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut or click the Cut button 44 on the Standard toolbar The selected events are removed from the data window and placed o
90. ccc eee e teen e ee eeeeeeees 271 Triggering recording with MIDI timecode ccc ccc cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 272 Pre queuing data for synchronization ccc cc cece eee ee eee e eee eeeenaees 272 USING MIDI triggers ccsescsnsnckvenehvereseeeaees bee es eens seaneseereneevaenteeee ener 272 Configuring an internal or external MIDI controller 0 ccc ccc cece eee teen eens 272 Assigning Sound Forge Pro events to MIDI triggers cc cc ccc ccc ce cece eee eeeees 272 MIDIG OGE CV CIES 404 caco mag k mate eahon wien eaewrewdawes Waa oxe y seuka aw er eascaeece th 273 Using the MIDI keyboard ccc ccc cece cece cece nee e eee e eee ee eeeeeenaes 274 Opening the MIDI keyboard ccc ccc cece cece n nent eee eeeeeeneeeeees 274 Resizing the MIDI keyboard cece ccc ccc ce eee cence eee e eee e eee eeeeeennaes 274 Configuring the output device and channel 0 cece cece eee ee ee eee ee eeeees 274 Selecting INSTFUINGCIIES 4sc5200 00 reves ps ueria ISN Na ETN eh et eaenuSestetereteias hats 275 Playing the keyboard ccs sunepeuentensentadearenreepanense aerecneouns Aemeeaw ene Reaecanen 275 Troubleshooting the MIDI keyboard ccc ccc cece cece cece n eee n eee eect eeennaes 276 LOODING oico a 0445 bs aeuiddeeeuee ora he Ree haan ow eean Gg touweraeowaeteaaworatan sans 277 LOODS secte nia bn enn cnewnhes eae erie ae eet ene leew eucenentatontwieeen 277 Sustaining and release lOOPS
91. choose Playlist Cutlist and then choose Delete from the submenu or right click the Playlist window and choose Delete from the shortcut menu USING MARKERS REGIONS AND COMMANDS 131 Editing a Playlist Cutlist region You can edit a Playlist Cutlist region by typing new values in the Cnt Trigger Chan Note and SMPTE Time boxes Repeating a region during Playlist playback You can specify the number of times a region repeats during Playlist playback Type a value in the Cnt box in the Playlist window to specify the number of times the Playlist region will repeat before playing the next region Using stop points You can attach stop points to regions in the Playlist When a stop point is encountered during playback the corresponding region is repeated the number of times specified by the Count value and playback is halted Creating a stop point Perform one of the following actions to set the stop point for a Playlist e Right click a region in the Playlist window and choose Stop Point from the shortcut menu e Select a region in the Playlist window and press Ctrl E or Ctrl 8 not on the numeric keypad A check mark appears adjacent to the comment in the shortcut menu and a stop point indicated by a red circle appears in the Playlist Playlist a Cnt Name Start End Length Trigger Chan Note 1 H 1 Silence 1 C5 2H 1 Wow 1 C5 1 Sound editing just gets easier 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 None i cs 00 00 000
92. choose a command from the menu to specify whether you want to monitor your sound card s input e When you choose Monitor Input Sound Forge will monitor the recording devices selected on the Record page of the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog e When you choose Monitor Output a cursor is displayed in the sonogram to indicate the play position real time output monitoring is not available in sonogram display mode USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 301 Tuning a sonogram It is frequently necessary to experiment with the control parameters in the Spectrum Settings dialog to produce the best possible sonogram For more information see Adjusting Spectrum Analysis settings on page 303 Improving the graph s contrast To improve the contrast of the sonogram decrease the frequency and amplitude ranges as much as possible Smoothing the graph s display If the graph appears too pixelated raise the Set sonogram resolution value to 200 Improving the frequency resolution For greater frequency resolution choose a higher value from the FFT size drop down list Reducing the processing time To reduce processing time decrease the Set sonogram resolution value and or choose a lower value from the FFT size drop down list Adjusting color intensity Adjust the sonogram s color intensity using the Color slider located directly beneath the sonogram Notice that the bottom pane of the dialog depicts the color scale in dB O 00 07 591
93. clearing from file 127 converting to regions 123 deleting 119 125 deleting all 119 deleting all within a selection 120 editing default names 337 inserting 119 inserting for clipped audio 120 moving 119 naming 119 previewing 120 renaming 119 replicating 125 Snapping to 101 triggering using MIDI commands 120 updating position 124 Measures amp Beats status format 42 88 89 metadata copying to clipboard 53 editing extended summary information 113 editing summary information 112 saving with files 113 viewing extended summary information 113 viewing summary information 112 meters channel 135 disabling 325 hardware 117 118 viewing 118 Microsoft Audio Compression Manager ACM 359 MIDI conflicting SCSI IDs 269 fine tune value 262 generating MIDI timecode 271 keyboard 267 268 274 open loop vs closed loop 261 periodic transfer failures 270 pre queuing data for synchronization 272 Sample Dump Standard SDS 259 269 SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI 259 390 INDEX triggering markers 120 triggering playback from MIDI timecode 271 triggering recording with MIDI timecode 149 272 triggers 272 unity note 262 using commands to trigger regions 122 MIDI keyboard configuring 267 displaying 267 generating chords 268 specifying instruments 268 troubleshooting 267 turning on 267 window 31 minimizing quantization errors 109 110 Mix button 40 Mix Replace dialog 83 85
94. close to zero as possible This ensures a high signal to noise ratio while preserving adequate headroom to keep the tape from saturating and distorting In addition occasional peaks above 0 do not cause problems because the tape saturation point is not an absolute However this is not true in the digital realm where amplitudes are stored as discrete numbers instead of continuous variables The flexible recording ceiling of analog is replaced by the absolute maximum sample values of digital audio Stored signals must never have a value above these maximums as the wave peaks are literally clipped This clipping adds audible distortion and though it can go unnoticed it can also ruin an entire project Therefore sample with the understanding that digital audio has absolutely no headroom Setting digital audio levels Because digital audio has no headroom setting the sampling level becomes critical If the loudest section of the audio is identified in advance the recording level should be set so that the peak is as close to 0 dB as possible to maximize the dynamic range of the digital medium If the loudest section of audio is unknown allow 3 to 6 dB of headroom for unexpected peaks Tip From the Tools menu choose Find and use the Find dialog to identify the largest peak in your file Channel Meters From the View menu choose Channel Meters to open or close the channel meters By default Sound Forge software provides peak meters that you can
95. compression until after you ve saved and reloaded the file 360 APPENDIX B Appendix C SMPTE Timecode The Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE timecode may be one of the most misunderstood concepts among individuals within the music industry The problem with SMPTE timecode formats is that they may mean different things to people in the audio and video fields What follows is a brief description of each SMPTE timecode format Important When synchronizing audio to video it is crucial that the SMPTE timecode format used in the sequencer or digital audio workstation is the same as the SMPTE timecode striped onto the video This guarantees that the SMPTE times on the video screen and computer monitor synchronize during playback SMPTE 25 EBU 25 fps Video SMPTE 25 EBU timecode runs at 25 fps frames per second and matches the frame rate used by European Broadcasting Union EBU television systems SMPTE 25 EBU format is used for PAL DV D1 video projects SMPTE Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video SMPTE Drop Frame timecode runs at 29 97 fps and matches the frame rate used by NTSC television systems North America Japan SMPTE Drop Frame format is used for NTSC DV D1 video projects Both SMPTE Drop and SMPTE Non Drop run at 29 97 fps In both formats the actual frames are not discarded but they are numbered differently SMPTE Drop removes certain frame numbers from the counting system to keep the SMPTE clock from
96. cursor where you want to insert the command marker Note Commands snap to the nearest millisecond 2 From the Insert menu choose Command The Command Properties dialog is displayed Command Properties Template Untitled HX Command URL r Parameter http www sonyoreativesoftware com Position 00 00 03 078 K Canl 3 From the Command drop down list choose the type of command you want to insert or type a custom command in the box 4 Inthe Parameter box enter the argument that should be passed to the command For example if you re using an URL command enter the address of the Web page you want to display Command Player type Description URL Windows Media Indicates when an instruction is sent to the user s Internet browser to change the content being displayed In the Parameter box enter the URL that will display at a specific time during the rendered project s playback USING MARKERS REGIONS AND COMMANDS 127 Command Player type Description Text Windows Media Displays text in the captioning area of the Windows Media Player located below the video display area In the Parameter box enter the text that will display during playback Note To view captions during playback in Windows Media Player 9 choose Captions and Subtitles from the Windows Media Player Play menu and then choose On if Available from the submenu WMClosedCaption Windows Media Displays the text from the Parameter box in the
97. disc 5 Choose a radio button in the Burn mode box Item Description Burn CDs Begins recording audio to your CD immediately Test first then burn CDs Performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD during the test and recording begins after the test if it is successful Test only do not burn CDs Performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD 322 CHAPTER 23 6 Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to a temporary file before recording Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and burned in real time Note The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit the application If an image file exists when you open the Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image 7 Select the Automatically erase rewritable discs check box if you re burning to rewritable media and want to erase the disc before burning 8 Select the Eject when done check box if you want to eject the CD automatically when burning has completed 9 Select the Write CD Text check box if you want to write CD Text data to your CD In order to display CD Text your CD player
98. dragging the cursor around in the Sound Forge Overview window Audio Interchange File Format AIFF An audio file format developed by Apple Computer ASX File ASF Stream Redirector file For more information see Redirector File on page 376 Attenuation A decrease in the level of a signal Bandwidth When discussing audio equalization each frequency band has a width associated with it that determines the range of frequencies that are affected by the EQ An EQ band with a wide bandwidth will affect a wider range of frequencies than one with a narrow bandwidth When discussing network connections bandwidth refers to the rate of signals transmitted or the amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time stated in bits second a 56 Kbps network connection is capable of receiving 56 000 bits of data per second 366 APPENDIX E Baseline The baseline of a waveform is also referred to as the zero amplitude axis or negative infinity In the following image the red line represents the baseline Beats Per Minute BPM The tempo of a piece of music can be written as a number of beats in one minute If the tempo is 60 BPM a single beat will occur once every second Bit The most elementary unit in digital systems Its value can only be 1 or 0 corresponding to a voltage in an electronic circuit Bits are used to represent values in the binary numbering system As an example the 8 bit binary number 10011010 repr
99. drop down list so that ACID software can transpose the file to match the project key Select Don t transpose from this list to keep the key from being changed e Specify the file s original tempo 40 300 bpm in the Tempo box so that ACID software can stretch the file to match the project tempo For more information see Setting loop tempo on page 287 e Enter a value in the Downbeat offset samples box to indicate the location of the first downbeat ACID Properties Name ACID Beatmappec Don t transpose 120 000 44 099 4 From the File menu choose Save As and save the file with a descriptive name 284 CHAPTER 19 Editing loops for ACID software You can use a number of tools to prepare audio for use in ACID software Halving or doubling a loop These commands allow you to quickly change the size of a selection Drum Fill re fot aS E Drum Fill ice fot aS BB Drum Fill Ee a m rN a 4E 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 000 A 00 00 02 000 a 00 00 00 000 j00 00 01 000 r y j00 00 02 000 o o K gt E gt 00 00 00 470 00 00 00 766 00 00 00 295 1 256 K gt E gt 00 00 00 470 00 00 01 061 00 00 00 591 1 256 Loop Half loop Double loop Halving a loop From the Edit menu choose Selection and choose Halve from the submenu Doubling a loop From the Edit menu choose Selection and choose Double from the submenu Shifting a selection l
100. editor check out our Vegas and ACID family of products for full multitrack recording and editing You can use multichannel recording to create surround audio or capture field recordings If you experience gapping or glitching when recording multichannel audio try increasing your buffer size You can increase the Record buffering setting on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog or click the Advanced button on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to increase your device s buffers For more information see Audio tab on page 342 Connect your audio sources to your sound card s inputs For more information see Recording setup on page 152 2 Enable your recording inputs a From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Audio tab b Choose your recording device from the Audio device type drop down list c Click the Record tab 154 CHAPTER 10 d To assign a channel to an input click the Device entry and choose an input from the drop down list In the following example the signal from Analog In 1 is recorded to channel 1 and Analog In 2 is recorded to channel 2 Channel Device Channel 1 H Analog In 1 Channel 2 H Analog In 2 e Click OK to close the Preferences dialog and save your changes Verify that your recording method is set to Manual a From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed b From the Method drop down list choose Manual c If you want to set up pre r
101. eeeees 233 Adjusting the acoustic signature ccc ccc ccc cece cee nent eee e eee eeeeeeeennees 233 GENE lal A CONUOIS can ceesid tar ord ootetwat cee unt E recede ete E ETE A cade cens 234 Envelope tab controls 2 0 ccc eect e eee e eee n ee eee eee eee eeeeeeeneeeees 235 Sumay Palo ONTOS erreren EA E E AAAA E RA 236 aS ISEE E EE E O E 236 Creating impulse flesse rerrrest irets irer ErEE NEEL E EIEEE VEERE Peers TEVENS NEETA 238 What you need to create custom impulses sususnssusesuesesorsesoresoersesoesesoereso 238 Recording the impulse in an acoustic space 1 ccc ccc cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeees 238 Recording the impulse through an electronic device ccc ccc ccc eee e eee eeeee 239 RECOVETING the IMPURE vscoiesanradiawren eave dadleed same deils dtuevad Wenn TAAL EE 239 Trimming the impulse file 2 0 0 0 ccc ccc e eee e nee e eee eee eennnees 240 Adding summary information to your impulse file 0 ccc cece cence eee eee e eens 241 Using thenew impulse NG atte etnee pany iaseaeeun sa asowe peta dacsreneseduesseeue er dunenes 241 Using impulse files in Creative WaYS ccc cece cece eee eee eee e eee eeeenennes 241 Processing individual audio elements ccc ccc ccc ence eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeees 241 Adding realistic stereo to MONO recordings ccc eee eee e teen ee ee eee eeeaenes 241 Creating special effects iserrrriseserres itoni never da need pes eet ersdoedeienierdeetanerae se 241 Recreati
102. effect s parameters in a separate window For more information about using specific plug ins click the Plug In Help button in the plug in window Tip You can have multiple plug in windows open in the Sound Forge Pro workspace To quickly close all open plug in windows right click a plug in in the Plug In Chain window and choose Close All Plug In Windows from the shortcut menu Loading an effects chain or plug in preset Loading a plug in chain preset Choose a setting from the Chain drop down list The preset chain is loaded using the saved settings for each DirectX and VST plug in in the chain Plug In Chain Chain Emer Hx lal fe Untitled ef t Empty Chain p Drums m Preset ES aaa Vocals Loading a preset for an individual DirectX plug in Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list The plug in settings stored in the preset are loaded Plug In Chain Chain Mastering Hx wl lie ef Chorus Preset Sys Chorus 2 gl amp StF nk Re Sys Cheap TV Sys Chorus 1 Preset Sys Chorus 3 WORKING WITH EFFECTS 211 Loading a preset for an individual VST plug in 1 Click the Show Plug In Window button to display the effect s parameters in a separate window 2 Click the Open VST Preset button 63 E VST Plug In Preset female voice hard He E im The Open VST Preset dialog is displayed 3 Browse to the fxp file that you want to use 4 Click the Open bu
103. events are selected Zooming events To zoom an event right click the event and choose Zoom Event from the shortcut menu or press Ctrl Up Arrow The event is zoomed to fit the width of the data window Snapping to events When snapping is enabled and you re using the Event tool f you can choose to have events snap to other events in the data window From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Events from the submenu to toggle snapping to event edges F Snap point indicator For more information about snapping see Enable Snapping on page 100 Tips To turn snapping to events on and off press Ctrl Shift F8 e Hold the Shift key to temporarily override snapping 180 CHAPTER 12 Chapter 13 Processing Audio This chapter provides descriptions of processing presets and previews as well as an overview of all functions in the Sound Forge Pro Process menu Applying presets Many Sound Forge dialogs contain drop down lists of presets used to quickly apply processes and effects Presets are especially useful when you are learning the application as they allow you to hear the results of processing as well as view the control settings used to produce these results Note All information regarding presets in this chapter is applicable to DirectX Plug ins effects from Sony Creative Software Inc Using presets 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Fade and then choose Grap
104. file For more information click the Help button E in the effect dialog Resonant Filter Restricts the range of a sound using low pass band pass or high pass filtering and then boosts and adds oscillation to the resonant frequency For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Reverb Simulates the acoustics of different environments For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Vibrato Creates periodic pitch modulation in an audio file For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Wave Hammer Acts as a classic compressor and volume maximizer For more information see What is the Wave Hammer plug in on page 245 LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 45 Tools toolbar The Tools toolbar contains buttons corresponding to commands in the Tools menu amp Ay if Extract Audio from CD Extracts audio from CD and opens for editing For more information see Extracting audio from CDs on page 76 Burn Track at Once CD Burns the selected audio track to CD For more information see Burning track at once TAO CDs on page 308 Burn Disc at Once CD Burns a disc at once CD using the current CD layout For more information see Burning disc at once DAO CDs on page 310 Auto Region Creates regions in an audio file according to rapid sound attacks or a specified time interval For more information see Creating regions based on fast attac
105. files to be opened providing they are stored in 16 bit linear format Sound Forge software does not open floating point format IRCAM files USING CSOUND MTU IRCAM BICSF AND EBICSF FILES 363 Opening an IRCAM file oo i a From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears Specify Raw Audio from the Files of type drop down list Select an IRCAM file to open and click Open The Raw File Type dialog appears Configure the following parameters e Specify a sample rate from the Sample rate drop down list e n the Sample type area select the 16 bit PCM radio button e Inthe Format area select the Signed radio button e Select the appropriate Byte order radio button e Choose a setting from the Channels drop down list to select the number of channels stored in the file e Set the Header value to 1024 bytes e Set the Trailer value to 0 bytes e To automatically use these settings to open all Raw files select the Remember my preference and apply it in the future check box Tip Ifyou select the Remember my preference and apply it in the future check box Sound Forge will bypass the Raw File Type dialog However you can access and change these settings from the Open dialog by selecting a Raw file and then clicking the Custom button 5 Click OK 8 Notes The settings you choose for opening the file with the exception of the sample rate will be used when you click Save or save the file using the Default Templ
106. for the first time the registration wizard is displayed This wizard offers easy steps that allow you to register the software online with Sony Creative Software Inc Alternatively you can register online at http www sonycreativesoftware com reg software at any time Registration assistance Registration assistance is available online at http www sonycreativesoftware com reg fag or by fax at 608 250 1745 Customer service sales For a detailed list of customer service options we encourage you to visit http www sonycreativesoftware com support custserv asp Use the following numbers for telephone support during normal weekday business hours Telephone Fax Country 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 203 7620 for all other countries 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Technical support For a detailed list of technical support options we encourage you to visit http www sonycreativesoftware com support default asp To listen to your support options please call 608 256 5555 About your rights in Sound Forge software Sound Forge software is licensed to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement you entered into with Sony Creative Software Inc About your privacy Sony Creative Software Inc respects your privacy and is committed to protecting personal information Your use of the software is governed by the Software Privacy Policy A copy of this policy is incorporated into the registrat
107. format allows you to create custom settings the Custom button becomes active 3 Click Custom The Custom Settings dialog appears 4 Make the appropriate setting changes for the chosen file format For help on individual settings click the Help button m Tip To save the custom settings for future use type a name for the template in the Template box and click the Save Template button 5 Click OK The Custom Settings dialog closes 74 CHAPTER 4 Copy rendering templates between computers or user accounts You can make your customized rendering templates available on another computer or user account by copying sft files to the appropriate location in the new account or computer Rendering templates are stored in C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Sony Render Templates lt plug in name gt Notes The AppData folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel You can find a plug in s name by clicking the About button in the Save As Render As dialog To make a template available on another computer or user account copy the sft file to the same location in another account For example to make JSmith s custom wave template available for the AJones user account in Windows XP copy the appropriate Sft2 file from this folder C Documents and Settings JSmith Application Data Sony Render Templates wave to th
108. format such as MP3 peaks that are at or near 0 dB may be clipped by the compression process Consider normalizing first to reduce the possibility of clipped peaks normalizing to a peak level of 0 9 dB is a good starting point 5 Select the Metadata tab and type values for any metadata file information that you want to save in the output files e If the Overwrite check box is not selected and the destination file already includes information for a metadata item the existing information is preserved keywords however will be appended e If the Overwrite check box is selected and the destination file already includes information for a metadata item the existing information is overwritten with the information from the Metadata tab existing information will be erased if the box is blank If a metadata type is not supported by the output format it will be ignored 6 Select the Save tab and verify the file output settings For more information see Creating or editing a batch job on page 256 If you want to convert to multiple formats at once click the Add Save Options button to create a setting for each file type that you want to convert 7 Click the Run Job button to start processing After you click the button the Batch Converter switches to the Status tab so you can monitor the progress of your batch job USING SCRIPTING 255 Creating or editing a batch job A batch job contains the settings that will be used to conve
109. frequencies below a cutoff frequency It is usually used to remove low frequency rumble from audio files Insertion Point The insertion point also referred to as the cursor position is analogous to the cursor in a word processor It is where markers or commands may be inserted depending on the operation The insertion point appears as a vertical flashing black line and can be moved by clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the data window Inverse Telecine IVTC Telecine is the process of converting 24 fps cinema source to 30 fps video television by adding pulldown fields Inverse telecine then is the process of converting 30 fps television video to 24 fps cinema by removing pulldown See also Pulldown on page 375 Telecine on page 380 InterVoice Sound File Support The InterVoice sound file format IVC commonly used in telephony applications is now supported and includes G 711 Law and A Law G 721 ADPCM 32 kb s and G 723 ADPCM 24 kb s data formats Invert Data Inverting sound data reverses the polarity of a waveform around its baseline Inverting a waveform does not change the sound of a file however when you mix different sound files phase cancellation can occur producing a hollow sound Inverting one of the files can prevent phase cancellation In the following example the red line represents the baseline and the lower waveform is the inverted image of the upper waveform Limiting Limiting
110. has a low amplitude level you can boost it by using the Volume or Normalize functions For more information see Volume on page 204 and Normalize on page 196 3 From the View menu choose Spectrum Analysis The Spectrum Analysis window is displayed Mpe Anae 2 048 Blackman Harris gt 222 s a UM ona n 3 aall Frequency Hz Decibels dB FFT Bin Peak 4 Use the toolbar at the top of the window to set your display options Tip You can also click the Settings button in the Spectrum Analysis window to set additional options The spectrum graph displays the amplitude in dB of each frequency component from 0 Hz DC to the Nyquist frequency Frequency is displayed along the X horizontal axis and the amplitude is displayed along the Y vertical axis Tip You can continue to make selections in the sound file with the Spectrum Analysis window open just move the cursor or make selections as you normally would Click the Refresh button 2 in the Spectrum Analysis toolbar to update the display If no selection is made analysis is performed on the samples immediately following the cursor position 296 CHAPTER 21 Monitoring an input and output source Click the Real Time Monitoring button to turn real time spectrum analysis on or off Click the down arrow next to the button and choose a command from the menu to specify whether you want to monitor your sound card s input or ou
111. il 4 Right click the sustaining loop and choose Edit Sample Loop from the shortcut menu or press Alt Shift L The Sampler Loops window appears Sampler Loops Value Sustaining 02 997 00 00 00 005 00 00 00 133 1 0 00 00 00 128 5 Infinite art 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 000 a Peat a Maat Pad Peat Maat Plat ate EL co sj oon B W M e O ite capes em N pe m iei ee pn au 4 ro 999 teratons Irr 5 Inthe Sustain count box choose Custom and then type a value of 10 Press Enter 6 Click the Play as Sample button gt on the playbar The looped snare selection repeats ten times before the cymbal crash Creating a sustaining loop with a release loop To add a release loop to the sustaining loop created in the previous procedure you must insert another sample loop in the Sampler Loops window and rearrange the loop tags in the data window 1 Right click the sustaining loop and choose Edit Sample Loop from the shortcut menu or press Alt Shift L The Sampler Loops window appears 2 Inthe Sample type box choose Sustaining with Release A release loop is created for the same length as the sustaining loop 3 Edit the length of the new release loop to contain the cymbal crash 4 Type a value of 5 in the Release count box Both loops sustaining and release are configured Sampler Loops sample type Sustaining with Release rt 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 005 ustain end 10 1 02 99 0
112. in the box if you want to assign a name to new regions Clear the check box if you do not want to include a prefix if you want to number regions only for example Use counter and start at Select this check box and type a number in the box if you want to number new regions Insert leading zeros in field Select this check box and specify a field width if you want to use leading zeros in width of region names For example if you specify a field width of 3 regions numbered 1 to 99 would be numbered 001 to 099 Click the OK button Editing default marker names The Marker labels section of the Labels tab allows you to modify the names that are assigned to markers when you insert markers during playback or recording 1 2 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Labels tab Select the Label Markers check box to display text labels for markers in the data window when you insert markers 3 Adjust additional settings as necessary Item Description New marker prefix Type a prefix in the box if you want to assign a name to new markers Clear the check box if you do not want to include a prefix if you want to number markers only for example Use counter and start at Select this check box and type a number in the box if you want to number new markers Insert leading zeros in field Select this check box and specify a field width if you want to use leading zeros in width of marker names For example if you specify a f
113. into any of the ACID family of products You can create three different types of files for ACID use e One shot file Loop file e ACID 3 0 or later beatmapped file Creating an ACID one shot file One shots are files that do not stretch with tempo or change pitch to match the key of the ACID project This behavior makes one shots particularly suited for audio such as cymbal crashes sound effects and short vocal lines 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing the Wow and drag it to the workspace A new data window is created containing the Wow audio data 3 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose ACID Properties from the submenu The ACID Properties window appears 4 Select One Shot from the ACID type drop down list 5 From the File menu choose Save As and save the file with a descriptive name Creating an ACID loop file Loops are musical building blocks and are by far the most common type of file used in ACID software Loops stretch with an ACID project s tempo and can be configured to change pitch 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing the And easier and drag it to the workspace A new data window is created containing the And easier audio data 3 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose ACID Properties from the submenu The ACID Properties window appears 4 Select Loop from the ACID type drop down list The Time s
114. last used new window settings When Create new windows is selected in the Mode drop down list in the Record Options window a new window is each time you start recording If you want to recording into an existing sound file see Recording into an existing sound file on page 146 Tip You can use the Stereo Recording window layout to optimize the Sound Forge Pro interface for recording For more information see Loading default window layouts on page 327 Note The maximum number of channels recorded depends on the data window where you re recording For example if you enabled six inputs on the Record tab in Audio Preferences you need to record into a six channel data window to record all six inputs Ifyou record to a stereo data window only two inputs will be recorded To choose your recording input use the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or click a channel number in the Record Options window and choose a new input port from the menu Record Options Record status Idle Record attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit 4 Channel Time recorded 00 00 00 Time left on drive Over 2 hours Method Manual OOOO Settings Mode Normal o DC Adjust Monitor C Calibrate E Play unselected channels when recording E Monitor input through Plug In Chain 72 66 60 54 48 42 35 W M 18 12 6 i Inf e Analogni hs mms i nalogin2 72 66 60 54 48 42 3 W 2 1 Z 6 S PDIF In 1 Inf S PDIF In 2 REC
115. link to a redirector file Linking to a redirector file allows a file to stream if you link to the media file it will be downloaded before playback begins Windows Media redirector files use the asx or wax extension 376 APPENDIX E Region A region in Sound Forge software is a subsection of a sound file You can define any number of regions in a sound file which are stored in the Regions List Regions List The Regions List is simply the list containing all of the regions and markers defined within the sound file From this list you can preview and edit the regions as well as drag them to the Playlist or to the desktop to create new files from them Resample The act of recalculating samples in a sound file at a different rate than the file was originally recorded If a sample is resampled at a lower rate sample points are removed from the sound file decreasing its size but also decreasing its available frequency range Resampling to a higher sample rate Sound Forge software will interpolate extra sample points in the sound file This increases the size of the sound file but does not increase the quality When downsampling be aware of aliasing See also Aliasing on page 365 Root Mean Square RMS The Root Mean Square RMS of a sound is a measurement of the intensity of the sound over a period of time The RMS level of a sound corresponds to the loudness perceived by a listener when measured over small intervals of time R
116. maximum number of channels recorded depends on the data window where you re recording For example if you enabled six inputs on the Record tab in Audio Preferences you need to record into a six channel data window to record all six inputs Ifyou record to a stereo data window only two inputs will be recorded To choose your recording input use the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or click a channel number in the Record Options window and choose a new input port from the menu Record Options Record status Idle Record attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit 4 Channel Time recorded 00 00 00 Time left on drive Over 2 hours Method Manual o Settings Mode Noma O DC Adjust Monitor for le Calibrate E Play unselected channels when recording E Monitor input through Plug In Chain 72 66 6D 54 48 42 3 30 24 18 12 6 es 1 a i aa 72 66 60 54 48 42 35 W M 18 12 6 SPDIF In 1 nk F Analogni hs inf SPDIF In 2 Recording audio over a set threshold 1 From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed 2 Use the Record Options window to set the audio levels at which recording will start and stop a b From the Method drop down list choose Automatic Threshold Choose a setting from the Mode drop down list to choose whether to create regions or record to a new window when recording is suspended and resumed For more information see Recording op
117. meters display resolution cece cc cece eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeneees 137 Changing the meters display options ccc cece cece eee e eee e eee eeeeeeneees 137 Routing channels to hardware outputs ccc ccc cece cece eee neeenees 137 VU and Peak Program Meters 0 ccc cece eee eee cence cence eee ee eeeeeeeeenees 138 CHOONI a VY OF FPM Sele sier arae a qeacucoemeeneaciantin hans sanemeeseanea ewe pears 138 Adjusting the VU PPM meters sensitivity 0 cece cece cece eee e een e eee eeeeeennees 139 IENE E S cu eae tess see cee eee oe ea cee een Sheen res EE E E E 139 Mono Compatibility Meter 0 0 ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee eee eee e eee eeeeenee 139 POUGINESSIVGLClsn944 4 ae a A A A EETA AREE E 140 Choosing a metering mode ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee e eens ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 140 Choosing a loudness Scale 3 cece ik eos taes eons nid r Ero aT EA deed 49 da ease aoe eeiweusss 141 Configuring Deak METES avncocdwsrtsaewdeeswasedvehnsavens kiveaeb ests sea nenweats OEE 141 Generating a loudness log ccc ccc cee eee eee e eens seen esse eeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 RECOICING jasc iosicewie ste led erse ae ieee beeen ee doumuansesotoamuwasenestaasGor 143 Creating a new FeCOFdING cece cece eect eee e eee e enna e eee eeneeeenaenes 143 Creating arecordiNT a c csucocernn cues Cows emn one EEE R Power cues EAA EEEN 144 Setting up pre and post roll 2 0 cece e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeees 144
118. mh i 4 gt O KEP 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 1 512 3 Copy the selection The data is placed on the clipboard 1 4 Create a selection containing Sound editing just gets easier B Wow sound editing X fisie Avon Elson editing just gets easier EIEI Ard ease b 8 AE 00 00 00 A 00 00 02 00 00 04 l 4 ll I p ip a GOON pW Be 00 00 01 476 00 00 03 640 00 00 02 164 1 512 158 CHAPTER 11 5 From the Edit menu choose Paste Special and choose Replicate from the submenu The Replicate dialog is displayed Replicate Wow sound edit Replicate OK Copy partials a aa 3 Copy pai a Whole copies 6 Select the Copy partials radio button and click OK The selection is overwritten with multiple copies of the clipboard contents A partial copy of the clipboard contents is used where appropriate B Wow sound editing re a E jise Avo Klon Wow Ei ov BAA Ard case nd AE 00 00 00 s l 00 00 02 j00 00 04 dll lt UE SIRE La O On pW Be 00 00 01 476 00 00 03 640 00 00 02 164 1 512 Repeating an operation Once you perform an operation on an audio file you can quickly repeat it with the same parameters by choosing Repeat from the Edit menu This allows you to reapply the same effect process or function to a different section of audio using the same parameters Note n the Edit menu the Repeat co
119. mixing by dragging and dropping 83 162 events 173 from clipboard 84 monitor for video previewing 292 monitoring levels decibels defined 135 digital vs analog levels 135 setting digital audio levels 135 monitoring unselected hannels 151 mono files converting from stereo 190 converting to stereo or multichannel 189 mono to stereo conversion 111 See also stereo to mono conversion mono compatibility meters 139 mouse shortcuts 358 mouse terminology 27 mouse wheel navigation 27 moving markers 119 regions 122 MTU 363 Multi Band Dynamics effect 45 227 multichannel audio applying effects 205 cutting selections in 81 deleting selections in 82 editing 115 118 editing files 116 opening files 116 recording 154 156 routing channels to hardware outputs 116 supported file formats 115 synchronizing sonograms 302 synchronizing Spectrum Analysis graphs 298 multichannel files creating from mono 189 overview 50 previewing channels 52 selecting data 51 single channel editing 52 toggling channel selections 52 Multi Tap Delay effect 45 227 musical instrument files 263 266 musical time intervals 124 Mute button 44 Mute process 195 naming automatically naming markers 337 markers 119 regions 122 navigating previewing audio with pre roll 91 scrubbing 92 93 setting cursor position 91 Spectrum Analysis graphs 298 using mouse wheel 27 Navigation toolbar 42 New button 40
120. not synchronized with your external monitor you can configure an offset for your hardware Drag the slider to synchronize audio and video This setting affects synchronization for previewing on an external monitor Audio and video synchronization in the Sound Forge workspace is not affected VST Effects tab The VST Effects tab allows you to specify where your VST plug ins are installed Item Description Default VST search folder This is the folder in which the application looks for VST effects during startup Alternate VST search folder 1 Enter a path in the edit box or click Browse to indicate where the application can find VST effects Alternate VST search folder 2 Enter a path in the edit box or click Browse to indicate where the application can find VST effects Select VST effects to be Lists the VST effects that are currently available Select a VST effect s check box to available as audio plug ins make it available for use as a plug in Note When you use a VST plug in the software will lock it for the remainder of your session A lock is displayed next to the check box to indicate that the plug in cannot be removed until you close and restart the application CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 345 Customizing keyboard shortcuts From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard to customize the keyboard shortcuts available in the Sound Forge interface The Shortcut keys box displays the currently assigned shortcut key
121. of the audio signal to the file For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Distortion Simulates the overloading of an amplifier For more information click the Help button e in the effect dialog Graphic Dynamics Applies compression expansion and limiting to affect the dynamic range of an audio file For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Multi Band Dynamics Allows compression and limiting to be placed on up to four different frequency bands For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Envelope Forces the amplitude envelope of a waveform to match a specified envelope shape For more information see Envelope on page 227 fm dhb iT Flange Wah Wah Mixes a modulated delay signal with the original signal For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Gapper Snipper Removes inserts sections of silence at regular intervals to create unusual effects For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Noise Gate Removes signals below a set amplitude threshold For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Pitch Bend Creates a modified sound envelope that corresponds to increasing or decreasing the pitch of a sound file over time For more information see Bend on page 229 Pitch Shift Changes the pitch of a selection with or without preserving the duration of the
122. of the selection h 40 00 dB 40 00 dB 1 00 1 00 Fade in 0 to 5 000 ms 30 l Fade out 0 to 5 000 ms 20 z Attack threshold Release threshold Inf to 0 dB Inf to 0 dB More 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 05 000 3 From the Preset drop down list choose Phrase Concatenator 1 and click OK The Auto Trim Crop function deletes silence in the file and creates new regions based on the preset s parameters For more information see Auto Trim Crop controls on page 185 Auto Trim Crop controls The following controls are located in the Auto Trim Crop dialog Control Description Function This drop down list contains five modes Keep edges outside of the selection Removes silence within the selection but retains all data outside of the selection e Remove edges outside of the selection Removes silence within the selection and deletes all data beyond the selection e Remove silence between phrases creates regions Removes silence within the selection and creates regions from individual phrases For more information see Minimum inter phrase silence on page 186 e Remove data beyond loop points Removes all data beyond the selected loop For more information see Minimum length following loop end on page 186 e Remove data from start and limit file length Allows you to specify an amount of sound to be deleted from the beginning of each file and specify a maximum length for converted files If a f
123. on page 205 1 From the FX Favorites menu choose Organize The Organize Favorites dialog is displayed 2 Organize your plug ins e Drag plug ins to the FX Favorites folder to add them to the FX Favorites menu e Create submenus in the FX Favorites menu by clicking the FX Favorites folder and clicking the Create New Folder button i After you have created a new folder drag plug ins to the folder to add them to the submenu in the FX Favorites menu e Remove plug ins or folders from the FX Favorites menu by selecting the plug in or folder and clicking the Delete button x Deleting a plug in from the FX Favorites folder removes it from the FX Favorites menu but does not delete the plug in from your system 3 Close the Organize Favorites dialog The new plug ins and or submenus appear in the FX Favorites menu Tip You can also add plug ins to the FX Favorites menu using the Plug In Manager Automatically adding and organizing plug ins You can automatically add all the plug ins on your computer to your FX Favorites folder and organize them by the first word in the plug in name usually the company name This replaces any menu structure you may have created with a rebuilt FX Favorites menu 1 From the FX Favorites menu choose Recreate by Plug In Name You are prompted to confirm the reorganization of the FX Favorites folder 2 Click Yes to continue Folders are created and the plug ins are organized based on the first word in t
124. or electronic noise Sound Forge software provides you with a tool for locating audio glitches and three distinct tools for repairing them channel interpolate and replace In addition you can repair audio glitches manually using the Pencil tool Locating glitches The Find tool allows you to quickly locate glitches specific volume levels or silence in a file The Find tool s glitch algorithm locates glitches by examining the file for instances where the waveform matches the specified threshold slope and sensitivity criteria The cursor then moves to the location of the glitch to allow you to repair it This tool locates only one glitch at a time Therefore it may be necessary to execute this command several times on a file to locate all glitches 1 2 Open any audio file containing glitches From the Tools menu choose Find The Find dialog is displayed Find Sound 1 rent OE a See Cancel Find Glitch i 35 0 dB 1 78 50 More Threshold slope Sensitivity 60 to 6 dB 0 to 100 From the Find drop down list choose Glitch Adjust the Threshold slope fader to configure the minimum slope that constitutes a glitch e A high value detects only glitches with steep slopes A lower value detects glitches with both steep and more gradual slopes Adjust the Sensitivity fader to determine the sensitivity of the detection algorithm e A high value results in any part of the waveform with a slope greater than the Th
125. or hide the File Properties window For more information see Editing file properties on page 105 Video Preview window Alt 3 The Video Preview window shows the video frame at the current cursor or play position From the View menu choose Video Preview to show or hide the Video Preview window For more information see Previewing files with video on page 290 Time Display window Alt 4 The Time Display window displays the current cursor or play position From the View menu choose Time Display to show or hide the Time Display window For more information see Customizing the Time Display window on page 329 Channel Meters window Alt 5 Sound Forge software provides peak and VU PPM peak program meters that you can use to monitor your audio levels From the View menu choose Channel Meters to show or hide the channel meters For more information see Channel Meters on page 135 Loudness Meters window Alt 6 The Loudness Meters tool provides data about an audio file s momentary loudness short term loudness integrated overall loudness and loudness range You can use these values when mastering for broadcast to ensure compliance with loudness standards such as the CALM Act For more information see Loudness Meters on page 140 Hardware Meters window Alt 7 The Hardware Meters window allows you to monitor hardware outputs and adjust preview levels From the View menu choose Hardware Meters to show or hide the Hardware Meters wi
126. or panning envelope Important Panning envelopes will have no effect on mono source data Convert mono sound data to stereo before adding a panning envelope Click within a data window to give it focus 2 From the Insert menu choose Volume Envelope or Pan Envelope you can also press V to add a volume envelope or press P to add a panning envelope An envelope is added to the data window and the Volume or Pan plug in is added to the Plug In Chain If the Plug In Chain is not visible it will be opened automatically Note fa data window already has a volume or panning envelope pressing V or P will hide the envelope 3 Adjust volume or panning with the envelope in the data window Adjusting effect parameters with plug in controls 1 Click to position the cursor in the data window and use the controls in the Plug In Chain to adjust effect parameters at the cursor position The envelope is updated as you adjust the plug in s controls 2 If you ve enabled the Bypass parameter for a plug in you can click the Bypass button in the plug in s banner to toggle the Bypass envelope at the cursor position Preset Untitled Hx in SONY Chorus P rau amp Chorus WORKING WITH EFFECTS 223 3 Youcan also adjust the envelope to adjust parameters For more information about working with envelopes see Adjusting envelopes on page 225 Note When you automate an effect s frequency parameter such as the modu
127. page 79 or Cutting on page 81 e For more information on the playbar see Playbar on page 35 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste or click the Paste button The clipboard data is inserted into the file and the data for Wow appears on the left side of the waveform Note f there is a selection the Paste command deletes the selected data before inserting a Wow sound editing re l fA vov EEA E Ei vov E Soud editing just gets easier EG A And easier A At 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 00 09 02 000 00 00 03 000 00 00 04 000 00 00 05 000 4 I p ip 4h O NK ah Be ra 00 00 00 734 00 00 00 734 1 456 3 To confirm that the data has been pasted into the file click the Play All button Wow Wow Sound editing just gets easier and easier plays back Pasting by dragging and dropping a selection 1 Choose the Edit tool 4 2 Drag the mouse in the data window to create a selection anywhere in Voiceover pca Tip fthe Always open dropped files in new window check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog is cleared you can also hold Ctrl while dragging a file or region from the Explorer window to a data window to paste sound data When the check box is selected dropping a file on the Sound Forge workspace always creates a new data window 3 Hold Ctrl and drag the selection to the location where you want to paste the data The cursor appears as a mouse pointer wit
128. parameters in a separate window 2 Click the Save VST Bank As button gi amp VST Plug In Preset female voice hard Hl SA im The Save VST Preset Bank dialog is displayed 3 Browse to the folder where you want to save the fxb file and type a name in the File name box 4 Click the Save button All presets for the current plug in are stored in the bank Plug In Chain shortcuts If you want to make your editing really fast the Plug In Chain can be controlled using keyboard shortcuts For more information see Plug In Chain shortcuts on page 355 WORKING WITH EFFECTS 213 Applying a plug in chain From the FX Favorites menu choose Apply Plug In Chain to apply a plug in chain to a selection or data window Tip Ifyou want to work with each data window s active plug in chain or use effect automation choose View gt Plug In Chain For more information see Using the Plug In Chain on page 209 Creating a plug in chain 1 Select the data you want to process Tip f you ve used previous versions of Sound Forge software you ll notice that you can now click away from the Apply Plug In Chain at any time to adjust your selection From the FX Favorites menu choose Apply Plug In Chain Choose a preset from the Chain drop down list to load an existing chain or add the desired plug ins to the chain Choose which of the chain s plug ins you want to apply e Clear an effect s check box FReverb_ to p
129. peak limiting to the area immediately surrounding the audio clip For more information click the Help button B in the plug in dialog Audio Restoration Removes clicks and background noise associated with vinyl records For more information click the Help button B in the plug in dialog Batch Converter Allows you to modify and manipulate multiple audio files without having to process each file individually For more information see Using the Batch Converter on page 255 Crossfade Loop Mixes audio occurring before the loop start point into the end of the loop to smooth transitions For more information see Crossfading loops on page 282 Sampler Allows you to transfer samples to from the Sound Forge application For more information see Sampling on page 259 Statistics Displays statistics corresponding to the current file or selection For more information see Viewing selection Statistics on page 68 Preset Manager Backs up and transfers user configured presets from effects processes and plug ins For more information see Using the Preset Manager on page 226 Edit in SpectraLayers Pro Click to open the active data window in SpectraLayers Pro When you re done editing close SpectraLayers Pro You ll be prompted to export your changes back to Sound Forge Pro Click Yes and the Sound Forge Pro data window is updated to reflect any changes For more information see Editing with SpectraLayers Pro on page 305 Sen
130. right click a sample and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to open the edit window quickly Perform edits as needed Notes Ifyou want to replace sample data you can clear the data in the edit window and paste data from another window Changes to bit depth sample rate or number of channels cannot be saved back to the original musical instrument file From the File menu choose Save to close the edit window and save your changes back to the musical instrument file If you want to save the edited sample to a different format other than a musical instrument file you can use Save As Saving changes After you re finished processing a musical instrument file you can use the Save or Save As commands to save your changes to the original file or to a new file For more information see Saving a file on page 72 and Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 72 Musical instrument files must be saved to the original format 266 CHAPTER 17 Using the MIDI keyboard With the MIDI keyboard you can control internal external synthesizers and samplers from the Sound Forge application The MIDI keyboard can also be used to listen to the sounds on a synthesizer or in the synthesis section of the sound card Displaying the MIDI keyboard To display the MIDI keyboard choose Keyboard from the View menu The keyboard can be resized moved or docked within the workspace On Off Voice Note Chord Output Channel MIDI Out Octave Output Ve
131. samples using the Send Sample and Get Sample buttons in the Sampler dialog Sending a sample 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog is displayed 2 From the Configuration drop down list choose the sampler configuration 3 Enter the sample number to be sent in the Logical send receive sample number box The Sampler Tool takes into account the configuration s sample bias and displays values for the Actual send sample number and Actual receive sample number For more information see Creating a sampler configuration on page 260 4 Click Send Sample Sample transfer starts A meter in the status bar indicates the progress of the transfer You can cancel a transfer at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing Esc Receiving a sample 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog appears 2 From the Configuration drop down list choose the sampler configuration 3 Enter the sample number to be received in the Logical send receive sample number box The Sampler Tool takes into account the configuration s sample bias and displays values for the Actual send sample number and Actual receive sample number For more information see Creating a sampler configuration on page 260 4 Click Receive Sample Sample transfer starts A meter in the status bar indicates the progress of the transfer You can cancel a transfer at any time by clicking Cancel or pressing Esc MIDI unity note and Fine tune Once you specify
132. settings will also allow low level sound attacks to create new regions 5 Inthe Minimum beat duration box specify the minimum length that must elapse before a new region can be created A low setting will allow very short regions to be created if sound attacks occur in fast succession This is useful for uptempo music A higher setting will prevent quick sound attacks from being separated into different regions 6 Select the Use release point for end of region check box to end a region when the sound level drops by a factor determined by the Release sensitivity This is useful if you don t want the silence between sounds or phrases to be included in the regions When this check box is cleared region ends are only created when attacks are detected 7 Click the OK button USING MARKERS REGIONS AND COMMANDS 123 Creating regions based on a musical time interval When you select the Build regions using the current tempo check box regions are created according to the file s current tempo 1 Use the Edit Tempo dialog to edit or calculate the musical tempo of your file 2 From the Tools menu choose Auto Region 3 Select the Build regions using the current tempo check box 4 Use the Measures and Beats boxes to specify the interval between regions For example if you want a region to be created at every beat set Beats to 1 and Measures to 0 To create a region at every measure set Measures to 1 and Beats to 0 For more informa
133. static int GETARG string key int ii return Script Args AsInt key ii public static Int64 GETARG string key Int64 cc return Script Args AsInt64 key cc public static bool GETARG string key bool ff return Script Args AsBool key ff public static double GETARG string key double dd return Script Args AsDouble key dd The first argument to the GETARG functions specifies a key name that is used to identify the argument to be extracted The second argument in the GETARG function is a default value to be returned if the function cannot find the key name The second argument also determines which overloaded function the script will use and how the value will be formatted For example consider a script that accepts three input parameters The syntax for the arguments is as follows in C Test input dls amp out C Test output dls amp repeat 2 The script to handle the parameters would look as follows using System using System IO using System Collections using System Runtime InteropServices using System Windows Forms using System Drawing using SoundForge using SoundForge BatchConverter public class EntryPoint public string Begin IScriptableApp app string inFile GETARG in string outFile GETARG out int count GETARG repeat USING SCRIPTING 251 Adding scripts to the Scripting menu When you start the program Sound Forge software looks at the Script Menu folder in
134. streaming formats Turning this option off can correct the artifacts but your rendering times will increase significantly Select the Save project as path reference in rendered media check box if you want to save the path to your Sound Forge project in the rendered file Saving the project path allows you to easily return to the source project if you use your rendered file in another project Note The check box will be unavailable if you haven t saved your project or if you re rendering using a third party file format plug in GETTING STARTED 73 11 Select the Generate Loudness Log check box if you want Sound Forge to analyze the loudness of your file and create a log file that summarizes its loudness values The loudness log is created using the same folder and base name as your sound file with _loud txt appended to the name The log will record the file name format loudness metering mode and loudness values throughout the file Important Loudness logging is performed after the plug in chain but before any codec is applied to your rendered file Because audio compression may affect audio levels choose Tools gt Generate Loudness Log to create a log after saving toa compressed format Select the Enable surround processing for files with 6 channels check box on the Status tab of the Preferences dialog if you want to treat audio with six or more channels as surround audio when measuring loudness a gain of 1 5 dB is applied to the l
135. test tone file in the Test file used box Enter the desired name for the impulse response file to be created in the Impulse output box If necessary click Browse and specify the folder in which the impulse file will be saved Select the Remove very low frequencies check box If the recorded file was trimmed exactly to the start and end spikes using the procedure described previously choose Use start and end of the recorded file as timing spikes from the Impulse recovery mode drop down list For more information see Trimming the test tone on page 239 Click the Recover Impulse button to begin recovering the impulse After processing is complete you can open the impulse file in the Sound Forge software and perform any necessary trimming or editing For more information see Trimming the impulse file on page 240 Trimming the impulse file After the impulse file is recovered it may still require minor trimming In general you should try to make the impulse response as short as possible to increase processing speed when using the Acoustic Mirror tool Impulse files greater than 131 071 samples about 3 seconds in length require substantial processing time When possible trim the impulse response to less than 65 535 samples about 1 5 seconds In addition we recommend fading the tail of the impulse Of course this is not always an option when dealing with spaces that produce extended reverberations 1 2 3 Open the recovered impu
136. the M key B amp Drum Fill Marker tag 00 00 00 592 00 00 00 427 Naming or renaming a marker e Right click the marker tag 4 and choose Rename from the shortcut menu Type the name of the marker in the edit box and press Enter when your re finished e Double click to the right of the marker and type a name in the edit box Moving a marker Drag the marker tag to a new location Markers will snap to other markers regions and command markers Hold Shift while dragging to override snapping Deleting a marker Right click the marker tag 4 and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Deleting all markers and regions Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All from the submenu All markers F and regions F are removed USING MARKERS REGIONS AND COMMANDS 119 Deleting all markers and regions within the selected area Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All in Selection from the submenu All markers F and regions F in the selected area are removed Previewing a marker Click a marker s Play button in the Regions list Triggering a marker using MIDI commands 1 Right click the marker tag and choose Edit from the shortcut menu The Regions List window is displayed 2 Click the down arrow in the marker s Trigger column to display a drop down list Trigger type Description Note On Play The marker will
137. the Reset Envelope button to remove all but the outer two envelope points 4 Select the Preserve original duration check box if you do not want pitch bending to change the size of the sound file This setting works best when performing small pitch corrections up to 2 semitones 5 Click the OK button Displaying the waveform Choose a command from the Show wave drop down list if you want to display the waveform in the envelope graph If you re working with a multichannel file you can choose to view individual channels or the mixed waveform Note The waveform is unavailable when the selection is greater than 300 000 samples Shift The Shift effect allows you to change the pitch of a sound with or without preserving the duration of the selection For information about using the Pitch Shift effect click the Help button E in the Sony Pitch Shift dialog or refer to Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Resonant Filter From the Effects menu choose Resonant Filter to restrict the range of a sound using low pass band pass or high pass filtering and then boost and add oscillation to the resonant frequency For information about using the Resonant Filter plug in click the Help button E in the Sony Resonant Filter dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index 230 CHAPTER 14 Reverb From the Effects menu choose Reverb to simulate various
138. the Sound Forge program folder to determine which scripts appear in the Scripting submenu This folder is C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 Script Menu by default 1 To change the contents of the submenu add or delete scripts in the Script Menu folder Tip To prevent duplication of script files you can use shortcuts in the Script Menu folder 2 From the Tools menu choose Scripting and then choose Rescan Script Menu Folder to update the menu Creating a script Sound Forge scripting uses the Microsoft NET framework for scripting You can write scripts in JScript Visual Basic NET or C 1 From the View menu choose Script Editor to display the Script Editor window if it isn t already displayed 2 Click the New Script Template button amp and choose C JScript or VBScript A new script is displayed in the Script Editor window with what is needed to write a script Script Editor Untitled Ln 8 Col 4 Script Aras BB B g F using System Windows Forms using SoundForge public class EntryPoint public void Begin TScriptableApp app f begin bere public void FProm oundFPorge Scriptableipp app Forgetpp app ewecution begins here app ZetttatusTest Ptring Format Seript 0 is mcumming Zcript Hame Begin app app fetttatusTest Jtring Format Script 0 is done Eeript Hame public static fcriptableApp ForgeApp null public static void DPF string ss
139. the current position are displayed in a ToolTip next to the cursor and in the Statistics area at the bottom of the window Spectrum Analysis Use the cursor to h display amplitude and frequency values 00 00 04 417 00 00 05 231 al 40 do EE 109 de Frequency Hz 3 111 G8 Position 00 00 03 510 Active Example music bed 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 2 048 Blackman Harris 75 8g 40 dE at 4 950 Hz D 9 a a er AT Statistics area Right click the sonogram and choose Show Position from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of ToolTips The setting for each sonogram in a multichannel file is independent If you want to display the nearest musical note equivalent of the cursor position in a ToolTip right click the sonogram and choose Show Notes from the shortcut menu Use the cursor to display lt musical note equivalent Freg OD Ds Oe ee 00002 597 0 004 35 D006 207 D0 Oe D009 812 lal 0 ce ES 150 de Right click the Spectrum Analysis window and choose Show Statistics from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the Statistics area at the bottom of the Spectrum Analysis window Updating a sonogram A sonogram updates in the same method as a spectrum graph For more information see Updating a spectrum graph on page 298 Monitoring an input and output source Click the Real Time Monitoring button to turn real time spectrum analysis on or off Click the down arrow next to the button and
140. the impulse The processed signal sounds dull and high frequencies sound unnatural At very low values the length of the impulse is shortened When this control is set to a high value the audio quality is excellent but the processing takes longer If you are experiencing difficulty previewing processing in real time decrease the Quality speed value However you must return this value to 5 prior to actually processing the file to output the highest possible quality Envelope tab controls The following sections describe all controls located on the Envelope tab Control Impulse Dry Out Wet Out Apply envelope and limit decay Envelope Graph Envelope points Reset Package Impulse into Preset Adjusting the impulse length Description This control is identical to the Impulse drop down list on the General tab This allows you to view the envelope graphs for the specified impulse file For more information see Impulse on page 234 This control is identical to the Dry Out fader on the General tab For more information see Dry Out on page 234 This control is identical to the Wet Out fader on the General tab For more information see Wet Out on page 234 This control is identical to the Apply envelope and limit decay check box on the General tab For more information see Apply envelope and limit decay to seconds on page 234 Selecting the Apply envelope and limit decay check box turns on the Envelope Graph You c
141. the left type 1 00 e Right click to display the Status Format shortcut menu which allows you to choose a time format Time zoom To zoom in and out horizontally by small increments click the Time Zoom In Out buttons or drag the area between the buttons to zoom quickly m Time Zoom In Out buttons 00 00 00 000 00 03 30 427 1 4 096 For more information see Zooming and magnifying on page 93 Time zoom resolution Indicates the number of samples of data represented by each point on the screen horizontally This determines the length of time shown in the waveform display With a small resolution value 1 1 1 2 1 4 a shorter length of time is displayed For more information see Zooming and magnifying on page 93 Maximize width Click to stretch the width of the data window to fit within the Sound Forge workspace Tip Press Ctrl Enter Close data window Click the Close button to close a data window Tip Ifyou have maximized your data windows click the Close button in a data window tab to close that data window O HW A h Hp Rate 0 00 Shine Play ts One of These Days LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 37 Arranging data windows You can use the commands on the Window menu to arrange data windows in the Sound Forge workspace Tip Press Ctri Tab to switch forward through the open windows or press Ctrl Shift Tab to switch backward through the open windows Command New Window Cascade
142. the resulting quantization noise Decreasing a file s bit depth decreases the overall size of the file but results in added quantization noise which can be masked using dither and noise shaping e Increasing a file s bit depth while not improving the quality of the audio allows subsequent audio processing to be performed with greater accuracy and resolution Prior to decreasing a file s bit depth you should optimize the audio for conversion For more information see Minimizing quantization error on page 109 Note There are no rules regarding maintaining audio quality when decreasing bit depth For this reason you should always experiment with the Dither and Noise shaping controls to determine the optimum settings for each file Converting a file s bit depth 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose Bit Depth Converter from the submenu The Bit Depth Converter dialog is displayed Preset Untitled Hx Dither Nowe Preview Noise shaping for sti Bypass a 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 3 From the Bit depth drop down list choose the desired bit depth 4 If necessary use the Dither drop down list to specify the type of dither used to mask the quantization noise results from lowering a file s bit depth For more information see Dither on page 187 5 If desired use the Noise shaping drop down list to specify any noise shaping to be applied
143. the right channel of the stereo file Mix Channels Mono data is created by mixing both channels of the stereo file Using the Channel Converter You can also use the Channel Converter to convert files between mono and multichannel formats Using the Channel Converter provides the added flexibility of independent level settings for each channel thereby allowing you to intermix the channels of a multichannel file to create pan effects To use this tool choose Channel Converter from the Process menu For more information see Channel Converter on page 189 Converting file formats The previous sections have described changing a file s sample rate bit depth and channel configuration You can also convert a file s format and compression settings To demonstrate this open the Voiceover pca file and choose Save As from the File menu Notice the Save as Type and Template drop down lists For more information see Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 72 Option Description Save as type In the Save As dialog the Save as type drop down list defaults to the Sound Forge Pro Project File frg format However using the Save as type drop down list you can specify any supported file type Template The Template drop down list provides standard settings for saving your audio file If the templates do not match your particular needs click the Custom button to create custom settings Adding summary information Specific audio file types allow yo
144. this check box is selected files that were open when you last exited the program will be opened automatically When this check box is selected information from Sony will be displayed periodically at startup Clear the check box to bypass the Net Notify dialog When this check box is selected the Sound Forge splash screen will be displayed briefly upon startup When this check box is selected a stucco texture will be used for the application background Select this check box if you want to lock media files after you ve opened them Clear the check box if you want to unlock media files when you switch to another application Select this check box if you want the application to present a confirmation message box before exiting When this check box is selected files that are dropped onto the Sound Forge workspace are automatically opened in a new data window Select this check box if you want to create an uncompressed proxy sfap0 file when you open a compressed file format Selecting this check box can improve performance on slower computers or for formats that cannot be decompressed quickly for real time playback When this check box is selected the software will ignore fact chunks in compressed WAV files Compressed WAV files use fact chunks to specify how many actual samples are represented in the file If a compressed file is improperly authored this may cause some of the compressed data to not be loaded If you suspect
145. to the file For more information see Noise shaping on page 187 Note When increasing a file s bit depth set the Dither and Noise shaping controls to None and Off respectively 186 CHAPTER 13 Bit Depth Converter controls The following controls are located in the Bit Depth Converter dialog Noise shaping dangers Control Bit depth Dither Noise shaping More Description Choose a setting to specify the number of bits that should be used to store each sample This control allows you to specify the randomness of the dither generated noise used to mask quantization distortion resulting from conversion to a lower bit depth You can select from several shapes each roughly describing the pattern that would be produced if you plotted a graph with the dither amplitude on the X axis and the probability of the dither values on the Y axis As is frequently the case when working with audio experimentation with dither values yields the best results however keep the following information in mind e Half Rectangular Eliminates distortion resulting from conversion to a lower bit depth but the noise level is more likely to be dependent on the signal This setting uses a maximum dither noise amplitude of 0 5 LSB least significant bit e Rectangular Identical to Half Rectangular but with a maximum dither noise amplitude of 1 LSB least significant bit e Triangular Eliminates distortion products as well as any noise floor mo
146. to zoom out to the full amplitude and to the normal horizontal magnification Double click a slider fader or spinner to reset it to its default value To fine tune a trackbar fader or spinner hold the right and left mouse buttons or hold the Ctrl key when dragging Shift click the Preview button to hear the original sound This is equivalent to enabling the Bypass check box Double click the Sample Rate Sample Size or Channels box at the bottom of the Sound Forge window to edit their values 44 100 Hz 16 bit Stereo 00 45 08 906 00 28 51 093 Double click the Selection Start box in a data window to type a new value Double click the Selection End or Selection Length box to type a new value 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 Click a marker tag F to move the cursor to the marker s position Double click a region Por loop tag fF in the ruler to change the current selection to the region or loop end points Ctrl click the Play Normal button i to Preview Cut skip selection on playback Ctrl Shift click to play to cursor with pre roll When making a selection past the end or beginning of the waveform display click the right mouse button while holding down the left mouse button to toggle between fast scrolling and slow scrolling Rotate the mouse wheel forward Rotate the mouse wheel back Ctrl rotate the mouse wheel forward or back Shift rotate the mouse wheel forward or back Ctrl
147. track s starting or ending position The pause time between tracks is displayed in a ToolTip BB 100 Unnamed Things Track 1 Shine 00 03 30 933 sll lt e 1 k gt i E gt ef Rate 0 00 or 00 07 01 360 00 04 42 866 rite 1 53 791 The Pause column in the Track List window allows you to edit the pause time between tracks Type a new value in the box and tracks will move accordingly in the timeline The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 00 000 fy The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 M D The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 D 1 00 03 32 933 00 07 01 360 00 03 28 425 Play 1 00 07 03 360 00 11 465 226 00 04 42 866 One of These Days BURNING CDS 317 Using the Track List window From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Track List from the submenu to toggle the display of the Track List window Track List 00 00 00 000 00 03 30 933 00 03 30 933 Shine 00 00 00 000 1 00 03 32 933 00 07 01 360 00 03 28 426 Play The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 p 1 00 07 03 360 00 11 45 225 00 04 42 866 One of These Days The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 The Track List window is essentially a text representation of the events on the CD layout bar for a disc at once CD You can use the Track List window to view track and index markers edit track position and length edit track names adjust pause time toggle protection and emphasis flags and edit ISRC data You can als
148. use with a text editor 134 CHAPTER 8 Chapter 9 Monitoring levels in digital audio The Sound Forge channel meters display peak levels during playback Use the meters to monitor levels and ensure no clipping occurs in your file Decibels The standard method for digital metering is to use the maximum possible sample value as a reference point This value is referred to as 0 dB Decibels are used to represent fractions logarithmically In this case the fraction is sample amplitude divided by the maximum possible amplitude The actual equation used to convert to decibels is dB 20 log amplitude 32 768 To illustrate this consider a sine wave with a peak amplitude of 50 percent of full scale Inserting the values in the appropriate places yields 20 log 0 50 6 0 dB Each time a signal s amplitude is divided by two its dB value is decreased by 6 GB Likewise doubling the amplitude of a signal increases its dB value by 6 dB Dividing the sine wave until its peak amplitude is equal to 1 produces lowest peak dB possible 90 3 dB Why are CBs used when talking about audio Decibels are typically used when dealing with sound pressure levels because of the vast range of sound about 120 dB that the human ear can perceive It s also easier to say 90 dB than 0 000030 1 32 768 Digital versus analog levels When recording to an analog medium such as magnetic tape recording engineers typically try to keep VU volume unit meters as
149. want to reverse the phase of the new channel s content 3 Click the OK button Swapping stereo channels 1 From the Process menu choose Channel Converter 2 From the Preset drop down list choose the Stereo to Stereo Swap Channels preset 3 Click the OK button 190 CHAPTER 13 Channel Converter controls The following controls are located in the Channel Converter dialog Control Description Output channels This drop down determines the number of channels in the output file Source Determines the amount of the original channel data that will be mixed to the new file Invert Mix Select this check box to reverse the polarity of the new channel More Click this button to view additional options that you can use to adjust your data window selection For more information see Adjusting the data window selection on page 184 DC Offset Audio that is not centered around the zero baseline in the waveform display is said to have a DC offset DC offsets are typically caused by electrical conflicts between the sound card and input device The DC Offset function located on the Process menu is used to change the baseline of an audio file by adding a constant value to each sample to compensate for offsets DC Offset Example music bed Preset B x Automatically detect and remove Adjust DC offset by 32 768 to 32 767 i F Compute DC offset from first 5 seconds only 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 Es
150. well as preview the functions for quick review of the processed and unprocessed material This list can be displayed from within the View menu Unsigned Data that has only positive values and uses half the maximum value to represent silence This is a format option when opening and saving raw sound files 380 APPENDIX E Virtual MIDI Router VMR A software only router for MIDI data between programs Sound Forge software uses the VMR to receive MIDI time code and send MIDI clock No MIDI hardware or cables are required for a VMR so routing can only be performed between programs running on the same PC Sony supplies a VMR with Sound Forge software called the Sony Virtual MIDI Router Wave An digital audio standard developed by Microsoft and IBM One minute of uncompressed audio requires 10 MB of storage Waveform A waveform is the visual representation of wave like phenomena such as sound or light For example when the amplitude of sound pressure is graphed over time pressure variations usually form a smooth waveform Waveform Display Each event shows a graph of the sound data waveform The vertical axis corresponds to the amplitude of the wave For 24 bit audio they range from 8388608 to 8388607 For 16 bit sounds the amplitude range is 32 768 to 32 767 For 8 bit sounds the range is 128 to 127 The horizontal axis corresponds to time with the leftmost point being the start of the waveform In memory the horizontal axi
151. with a CD track Note Tracks are not created for events less than four seconds long You can drag CD tracks to rearrange them drag either end of a track to change its length or use the Track List window to edit the track s position or name Tip When space exists between events Sound Forge Pro creates separate tracks for each event If you want to create a track that spans multiple events you can abut or overlap the events to create a single track BURNING CDS 311 Creating CD tracks from regions in a file If you have a live recording that uses regions to indicate the sections of the recording you can use this feature to create tracks without having to scan through the audio and create tracks manually 1 Add regions as necessary to indicate the tracks in your recording BB 100 Unnamed Things frg Eo l a AE 00 00 00 00 02 00 HG E l bi Y ll i N ASEET gt ee iz E Ea o k a xp p gt e e Rate 0 00 A 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 863 1 48 312 2 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Create Tracks from Regions Each region is marked with a CD track BB 100 Unnamed Things frg kakak l z amp AE o0 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 00 ge Inf we Inf boas 128 426 elle iu frit K a oP Rate 0 00 lt _p 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 863 1 48 312 You can drag CD tr
152. you can choose to write the disc without CD Text or cancel burning and add title information as needed e You can write a maximum of 5000 characters as CD Text If you select the Write CD Text check box on the Burn Disc at Once CD dialog this data will be written to your disc In order to display CD Text your CD player must support CD Text Adjusting pause time Double click the Pause box to edit the pause time between tracks Type a new value in the box and tracks will move accordingly in the timeline 318 CHAPTER 23 Toggling protection and emphasis flags Select the Prot check box to add a flag to the Q subcode to prevent digital copying of your CD In order to use copy protection the CD player must support the copy protection flag Select the Emph check box to add a pre emphasis flag to the Q subcode Pre emphasis is a basic noise reduction process that is implemented by a CD player Emphasis involves boosting high frequencies during CD writing and cutting those frequencies during playback The emphasis process reduces high frequency noise without disrupting the natural frequency of the source material Selecting the Emph check box does not impart the pre emphasis boost on a track it can only set the flag In order for pre emphasis to occur the CD recorder and player must support the flag Check your CD drive documentation to determine whether your drive supports pre emphasis flags Editing ISRC codes The Track List window a
153. 0 ccc ccc een eee eee eee eneeneeeeeeas 126 Importing a regions playlist file 2 0 0 0 ccc cece cece eee e eee e teen eeeennes 126 Copying regions to the clipboard ccc ccc ccc eee cence eee cece eeeeeeeeenenes 126 Locking loop and region lengths ccc ccc cece eee ence ee ee cence 127 Clearing markers and regions cece cece cece eee eee e ene e eee eeeeeenanees 127 UNOC OMI GINS 14 nutie cna EE E E Haan Ha EESE 127 Inserting aCOMMaNd Marker cc ccc ccc ccc cece kiere ranirea 127 Deleting a command Marker ccc ccc ccc ccc eect ee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 128 Editing a command Marker 3240456004 6020nuKetiedasdasnscandhedinesans E 128 Moving the cursor to a command marker ccc ccc cc eee e ee eeeeeeeeees 128 Using command templates ccc ccc cece eee ee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeees 128 12 TABLE OF CONTENTS Using the REGIONS LIS wins ecmancnid eons ad eb eew ed ewes ween een eee aies aeaha nated ary dex 129 Displaying the REGIONS LIS rss ripizsist iatera ririn EION RETORNE ETSAN 129 Working with the Regions List ccc ccc ccc ete eee nee eee eee eee eee e eee eeeeees 129 WISIN Te FIAVINSE ociyccpswe esau cucu adans e cue etaumenanenouneewese ewe cua dave ge see 130 Displaying Ie PlaVilSt sirean rono desea TEn tana ee ous nae ene lt oees cap eewas AT 130 Adding regions to the Playlist cc cece cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeneeeenes 131 Arangino the Playli
154. 0 00 00 133 det ustain length Ei ustan COUNT 21 00 09 09 09 O49 T 10 10 00 02 997 00 00 00 150 ze end 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 374 length 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 00 00 00 224 wT a m 3 D G sj OT tn Go po oe al m 5 Click the Play as Sample button in the playbar The entire file plays with the snare hit repeated ten times followed by the cymbal crash five times B Drum Hit kalakas Uea 1 P Release Loop 5 4 i rT boil mlb K gt E gt p lt gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 223 1 48 278 CHAPTER 19 Looping techniques Depending upon the source material creating a natural sounding loop can be a difficult task Many factors beyond your control may produce distracting pops and glitches thereby calling unwanted attention to the loop Although looping skill is largely the product of practice and experimentation there are some guidelines to consider Match endpoint amplitudes One of the easiest ways to minimize the occurrence of glitches when creating loops is to select loop endpoints that have an amplitude of zero These points are known as zero crossings Match endpoint waveform slope Another technique for reducing loop glitches is to avoid matching loop endpoints where the waveform slope does not match If the waveform slope changes drastically a pop plays when the sample is looped Loop Tuner Loop Tu
155. 0 256 peak file when using 1 256 Choose a zoom ratio from the drop down list to specify the default horizontal magnification This magnification level is used when you load a sound file create a new window or use the Zoom Normal command High values show more data and small values show more detail CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 333 Description Custom zoom ratio 1 Option Choose a zoom ratio from the drop down list to specify a custom level of horizontal Custom zoom ratio 2 Tabs for maximized data magnification This zoom ratio will be used when you perform any of the following actions e Click the Custom Zoom 1 or Custom Zoom 2 button on the Navigation toolbar From the View menu choose Zoom Time and then choose a Custom Zoom command from the submenu e Right click in a data window choose Zoom from the shortcut menu and then choose a Custom Zoom command from the submenu Choose a setting from the drop down list to choose whether you want to display tabs windows Color preference for Icon color saturation to help you browse maximized data windows e Choose None if you do not want to display tabs You can navigate data windows by choosing a window from the Window menu or by pressing Ctrl Tab e Choose Top to display tabs above the waveform display Shine Play One of These Days White e Choose Bottom to display tabs below the waveform display O ai kaha di hal mam Inf 4 PI
156. 0 fps Audio SMPTE at 30 frames per second hh mmiss ff Audio CD Time Hours minutes seconds and frames witha hh mmiss ff frame rate of 75 frames per second for creating disc at once CDs GETTING STARTED 87 Experimenting with status formats You can experiment with the Voiceover pca file to see how status formats affect values in the selection status bar display boxes 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 From the Options menu choose Status Format and choose Samples from the submenu 3 Select all data in the Voiceover pca window by choosing Select All from the Edit menu Notice the selection status boxes 0 220 507 220 507 e The first selected sample is sample 0 e The last selected sample is 220 507 e The total number of samples in the selection is 220 507 4 From the Options menu choose Status Format and choose Time from the submenu Notice that status values change from samples to hours minutes and seconds 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 05 000 5 From the Options menu choose Status Format and choose SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Video from the submenu Notice that status values change to hours minutes seconds and frames 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 2729 00 00 04 2729 oO Experiment with each status format and make note of how each format appears Notes Selecting a new format changes the status format for the current data window only e To quickly change a file s status format right click any of the data w
157. 00 Cutoff scaling 0 5 to 2 0 1 00 Alias suppression 50 to 200 175 00 Prering 3 100 00 Set the sample rate only do not resample More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as needed Item Description New sample rate Specify the sample rate to which the sound file will be converted Note ncreasing a file s sample rate cannot improve the quality of the existing audio but does allow higher resolution for processing Quality When the Use simplified Quality setting check box is selected you can drag the Quality slider to adjust the plug in s controls automatically Dragging the slider sets the balance of audio quality vs processing speed A setting of 50 works well for most applications Increasing the setting improves the quality of the plug in but requires more processing power When the Use simplified Quality setting check box is cleared you can adjust the plug in s controls manually Steepness The plug in uses a low pass filter to discard frequencies that cannot be represented or are undesirable in your audio output This setting establishes the steepness of the transition band of the low pass filter Higher settings will reject unwanted frequencies but can cause more ringing in the time domain and a higher CPU load Max filter length Sets the maximum length of the filters used for resampling The default set
158. 00 00 06 00 00 00 00 00 301 Selection is pasted into Drag and drop the destination window paste indicator mmr ET USE SRE 1 a K a Eet SP 00 00 03 299 00 00 05 000 1 819 5 Release the mouse button The selection is pasted into the destination window EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 161 Mixing 4 Open the Voiceover pca and Drumhit pca audio files Select all audio data in the Drumhit data window Drag the selection to the Voiceover data window e A shaded region representing the source selection appears in the destination window e An M appears in the box adjacent to the pointer B wow sound editing Colle JE Silence ERA Wow EJE Sound editing just gets easier JERRY And easier AE 00 00 00 4 0 Inf 4 4 0 t K gt oe 00 00 01 475 00 00 04 473 00 00 02 997 1 512 Drag and drop mix indicator Position the leading edge of the shaded region in the Voiceover data window where the mixing of the selection will begin Release the mouse button The Mix Replace dialog appears Verify that both Volume levels are set to 0 dB and click OK BB wow sound editing Colle Ea Eliese FEA wow EEJ Sound editing just gets easier EEJ And easier AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 i Selection is mixed into the destination window K ae ae lt O gt 00 00 01 475 00 00 05 000 1 512 Creating CD tracks
159. 1 Play as Cutlist button 36 Play as Sample button 36 Play button 41 Play Clipboard button 40 Play Normal button 36 playbar overview 35 playing clipboard contents 79 playing files 66 auto scrolling 67 current playback position 66 from Playlist 132 from specified point 67 Loop Playback mode 67 selections 68 Playlist adding regions using commands 131 adding regions using drag and drop 131 button 43 copying to clipboard 134 Count column 131 INDEX 391 creating files from 133 deleting regions from 131 editing regions 132 moving regions 131 opening Playlist files 134 overview 53 playing from 132 repeating regions during playback 132 replicating regions 131 saving to file 134 stop points 132 treating as Cutlist 133 understanding 131 viewing 130 Playlist files opening 134 saving 134 Playlist toolbar See Regions Playlist toolbar Plug In Chain adding plug ins to chains 207 210 bypassing plug ins 212 224 configuring plug ins 211 creating chains 209 loading saved chains 211 loading saved presets 211 Plug In Manager 206 Preset Manager 226 removing plug ins from chains 210 saving chains 212 Saving settings as a preset 213 VST Effects 209 window 31 Plug In Manager overview 206 window 31 plug ins See effects post roll 144 PQ lists See track lists pre emphasis boost 319 preferences Audio tab 342 344 CD Settings tab 341 Display tab 333 335 Editing tab 335 336 Fil
160. 2 Right click the waveform and choose Zoom Selection from the shortcut menu The minimum zoom ratio that allows the full selection to appear in the window is calculated and the selection is then zoomed and centered in the data window Note 7o reverse this function right click the waveform choose Zoom and choose Out Full from the submenu Zooming the window Right click the level ruler and choose Zoom Window from the shortcut menu The maximum zoom level that allows the loudest portion of the selection to appear in the window is calculated and the entire sound file is adjusted Note 7o reverse this function right click the level ruler and choose Zoom Out Full from the shortcut menu Zooming out full To quickly display all data in a data window right click the waveform choose Zoom and choose Out Full from the submenu This command sets the zoom ratio and zoom level to the lowest values required to display all data in the window Note 7o reverse this function go to the View menu choose Zoom Time and choose Normal from the submenu Zooming in full To quickly set the zoom factor to its maximum magnification right click the waveform and choose Zoom In Full from the shortcut menu The maximum magnification available is 24 1 Note Jo reverse this function right click the waveform and choose Zoom Normal from the shortcut menu Optimizing time and level ruler scaling To optimize both the time ruler and level ruler display of a se
161. 25 Audio and video Synchronization 0 ccc ccc cece nen e eee cece eeeeeennnnes 325 Customizing Sound Forge Pro Software ccc ccc cece eee eee eeeeeneeees 327 Saving and recalling window layouts ccc cece cece ene ence eee e ee eeeeenes 327 Loading default Window layouts cece ccc cece eee e eee e eee e eee eee e eee eeees 327 Saving a window layout 2i 4geusaeea hare naduenese oie neues deenenconns epantaaweyecouscuean 327 Loading a saved layout g02 0 5 6506 toc acanavasd Weeeen seeded AET ERA ee eensee ee 328 Adding a layout to the View gt Window Layouts submenu ccc cece eee eee eens 328 Removing a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu cc eee eee eens 328 Deleting a layout from your computer 6 cece eee e eee ee eee eeeneaes 328 Customizing the Time Display WINdOW cece cece cece e eee eeeeeeenenes 329 SCtUNG Dl elereNCeSscccnsoudiuaeenusbeceaueteaedd abees E AA E EE 331 Cech eee ee ee A ee ee A ee eer ee 331 DIS Olay TaD EEEE E A N E E deed eau eae ne E E EE 333 ENO 100 ea eaa E EEEN EARS CEEE EAS EER EE EAE EEN RE ETE ERA E EETA 335 22 TABLE OF CONTENTS labe CAD 2b ianede hoes bead heed eeacdee aac eet k AETR a 336 File PY OCS E e E E AE caro un wee E paar es oops tun E E 337 MIOS ACAD cavacaass ous orcaansdeoee can sea ayes bean sete ea enee cones ues ee E eh 338 PIEVICWS aia cacao rane ssn dues seneucnaaesnas EERE E AAA E EA E T
162. 297 displaying statistics 297 erasing snapshots 300 FFT 295 monitoring input output source 297 301 navigating graphs 298 printing graphs 300 printing sonograms 302 refreshing graphs 298 saving custom settings 304 settings 303 showing hiding snapshots 299 snapshots 299 synchronizing graphs for multichannel files 298 taking snapshots 299 thumbnail image 298 viewing multiple graphs 299 viewing snapshot statistics 300 window 31 INDEX 395 splitting events 174 regions 125 174 Standard toolbar 40 Statistics window 46 68 status bar command descriptions 47 editing file properties 107 status formats 87 89 Status toolbar 42 step down conversion 108 step up conversion 108 stereo files compressing selections 198 converting to mono 190 creating from mono 189 expanding selections 198 swapping channels 190 stereo to mono conversion 111 See also mono to stereo conversion Stop button 36 41 stop points creating 132 deleting 132 streaming media commands 127 Summary Information window 58 112 113 sustaining loops 277 swapping stereo channels 190 synthesizing audio DTMF MEF tones 166 FM synthesis 167 168 simple synthesis 169 Tabs for maximized data windows preference 38 334 TAO CDs See track at once CD burning technical support 25 tempo building regions using current tempo 124 calculating for loops 287 specifying for ACID loops 284 Time button 42 Time Display c
163. 3 Play the file Notice that the pitch is higher and the duration is slightly shorter 4 Right click the Sample Rate status box and choose 8 000 from the shortcut menu 5 Play the file Notice that the pitch is lower and the duration is longer CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 107 Changing the sample rate of a file also changes the pitch and duration To change the sample rate of a file while preserving its duration and pitch use the Resample command For more information see Resample on page 200 Changing the bit depth Bit depth refers to the number of bits used to represent a sound You can increase or decrease a file s bit depth Increasing bit depth Increasing the bit depth does not improve the quality of a file but it allows subsequent processing to be performed with increased precision 1 Open a file with a small bit depth 2 From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose Bit Depth Converter from the submenu The Bit Depth Converter dialog appears Preset Untitled HX OK More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 3 From the Bit depth drop down list choose a larger value and click OK Note When increasing a file s bit depth the Dither and Noise shaping controls should be set to None and Off respectively Decreasing bit depth To maximize storage space larger sound files 24 and 16 bit are frequently converted to smaller 16 and 8 bit files However representing a so
164. 3 00 00 52 CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 329 Option Record Status Passive Update 330 CHAPTER 25 Description When selected the Time Display window shows status for recording The contents of the Time Display window vary depending on the Method setting in the Record Options window Manual e Shows Armed when recording is armed e Shows pre roll time if you re recording with pre roll e Shows the time recorded while recording e Shows post roll time if you re recording with post roll Automatic Threshold e Shows the input level in dB when recording is armed Displays the release time remaining during recording Automatic MIDI Timecode e Shows Waiting when recording is armed and no MIDI timecode is being received e Shows Armed when recording is armed and MIDI timecode has not started e Shows Armed and counts down to the recording start time when recording is armed and MIDI timecode is being received e Shows Recording and displays the time recorded during recording when no record stop time has been set e Shows Recording and counts down to the recording stop time during recording when a record stop time has been set Automatic Time Counts down to the recording start time when recording is armed and counts down to the recording stop time during recording Tip You can customize the colors used to display the armed pre and post roll and recording colors on the Display tab of the Preferenc
165. 32 Samples 1 458 176 Total bytes 2 916 352 Recycling clipboard contents Once audio data is on the clipboard you can paste or mix it into an infinite number of windows Data remains on the clipboard until you replace it with new data GETTING STARTED 79 Pasting Once audio data is on the clipboard you can paste or mix it into an existing data window or use it to create a new data window Pasting data in an existing data window Notes Pasting into a multichannel file will insert data to all channels the channels in a multichannel file must always be equal in length Silence is pasted to the unselected channel If multiple channels are selected the same data is pasted to all selected channels and silence is pasted to the unselected channel If no channels are selected the same data is pasted to all channels Pasting data of different sample rates will cause the data in the clipboard to play at the same rate as the rate of the window in which the data is pasted If any regions markers or loops are present in the original sound data they will also be pasted into the destination sound file To turn this feature off turn off the Lock to Selection gt Markers Regions command on the Options menu 1 After you have cut or copied your data move the cursor to the beginning of the Voiceover pca file by clicking the Go to Start button i in the playbar e For more information on cutting or copying data see Copying on
166. 32 933 00 07 01 360 00 03 28 426 Play The Dorot 1 00 07 03 360 00 11 45 226 00 04 42 856 One of These Days The Dorot Track ol acement indicator Dragging files from the Explorer window From the Options menu choose Drag and Drop Editing and then choose CD Track from the submenu if you want to create disc at once tracks by dragging files from the Explorer window or Windows Explorer to a data window Choosing this command has the same effect as toggle clicking the right mouse button while dragging until the cursor is displayed with a CD icon of to show you where the track will be added When you drop the file the audio in the data window will be replaced and no pause time will be added Tip You can use the Default time between CD tracks control on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog to adjust the default pause time For more information see CD Settings tab on page 341 Opening multiple files as CD tracks In the Open dialog hold Ctrl or Shift to select the files you want to open as CD tracks and then select the Open as CD tracks and Append to current data window check boxes The files will be added to the end of the current data window and a CD track will be created for each file Tip You can use the Default time between CD tracks control on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog to adjust the default pause time For more information see CD Settings tab on page 341 Creating new data windows using audio files
167. 4 H 1 And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None 1 C5 00 00 00 000 Note When you play your Playlist it will continue to play through the regions until it encounters a stop point This is useful when triggering playback from incoming MIDI or timecode and you only want certain sections of the Playlist to be played at a time Deleting a stop point Perform one of the following actions to remove the stop point for a Playlist e Right click a region in the Playlist window and choose Stop Point from the shortcut menu e Select a region in the Playlist window and press Ctrl E or Ctrl 8 not on the numeric keypad The corresponding check mark is cleared from the shortcut menu and the stop point indicated by a red circle is removed from the Playlist Playing from the Playlist The Playlist displays the sequential order in which regions play To play a region click the corresponding Play button Playback begins with the selected region and continues through the end of the Playlist playing a region multiple times when instructed by the Count value Note Playback is interrupted if a stop point is present For more information see Using stop points on page 132 132 CHAPTER 8 Creating a new file from the Playlist After you have auditioned and arranged all regions in the Playlist you can create a new file based on the Playlist arrangement To create a new file from the Playlist right click the Playlist and choose Co
168. 525 ce0e sacra S ceu tsp easeuerdaewencoceues EAE E tee AEE E 227 Delay ECMO sca nang dae caueconeaneeure cameere cue none omens none T E deme cone Hee nemndeena es 227 DISTOION 226 esntasecest gente neerdeeeesec tea ee eerens ocean E oie recat nena east eeset arenes 227 OYNI S 26 eqcee eee ee ee gente cee ces ears oo eee ee ee E eee sie 227 ENIV ClO De 6 cua wuws E E sarc an crews E E E ceo one ne areas anor eemeneeas 227 Flange Wah Wah 6 siaetaincat oui tieena aman ad Wows tn aedaaeniesad dee vowewettadavesaguadets 229 GapPel SMIDPeY lt lt sccuveewscaeeecseeusiiesteseeretacs cavesusiuesceeseretedae TEREA 229 INOIS IGGUG figs eae re cecace csc EEEE EAA rane EE EEEE EE EEE 229 i ee ee E er re eee ee eT eT er er rr errr errr Terr Tr ree 229 RESON AML FING sweeter on euny sk eawroneen E mar tires monn reas one ps rae aeoas ee ER 230 TABLE OF CONTENTS 17 REV CN ex ac eid bea eee aa ed eee ee eee ie Rea an 231 VIO O ra mat ceseweewetans twa uaaneue estos oen oun Gilat saeeceuyie cet emnws iowa cent 231 Wave Hamner ge gricne ritt PENE esa RATE se sena eye as yaae aaa anin wane ayaa ee anes eane 231 Using Acoustic Mirror and Wave Hammer cece cece cece cece eee eeeees 233 What are the Acoustic Mirror effects 2 0 0 0 ccc ccc cece eect cece eee e ene eeeeeeeees 233 The ACOUSTIC SIGN att 2c ccna tena tran aidan aatcuudaosadedusaerleewatawaanaaddeverte ound 233 Adding an acoustic signature to an audio file ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee
169. 54 Event tool keyboard shortcuts 25 icsvenwevewcursedwnd ee oueed ene vee auseehenseesnnaeeesenwans 355 Plug in Chain Shortcuts 24oc ce av atten ene cede duende iden ta dores cuted AD 355 Regions List SMOMOUNS nesermen ne nE ATANA 355 Playlist CuUtist SONICS 2a aqscamachcccnatwea nace ERARA EAE 356 Serp t EGINOESHOMCULS 222 sacereuvaxn raged ceases san eh EREE eee euamindeseaceceas 356 Drag and drop shortcuts 00 ccc ccc ccc ccc cee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeees 357 Mou e PONU ereere er EEE FENE EEEE EEEIEE AA EEE TERETE 358 Sound Forge and the Microsoft Audio Compression Manager 00006 359 Audio data compression and decompression s esseessessseesresserereerrersse 359 Transparent playback and recording of non hardware supported audio files 359 Using the Sound Mapper with uncompressed files 0 ccc cece e teen eee eeees 359 Using the Sound Mapper with compressed files ccc cece cece eee e eee eeeeees 360 SMPTE MMeCOGS san senape a EA EE E EE E ANERE EET 361 SMPTE 25 EBU 25 fps VideCO osc cca ceecdeceveecucentess EER E ETEA E EE 361 SMPTE Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video ccc cece cece cece nen eee e eee eeeeeees 361 SMPTE Non Drop Frame 29 97 fps Video ccc cece ee ee cece eee e eee eeeeees 361 SMPTE 30 30 fps AUGIO serreresrirrerkeke ter tin nehin bones catenueenehuseseseeresst 361 SMPTE FIM Syme 24 00S crids tinata r EnEEE EE ENESENN AORE EES EEEE CENENE ESAS 361 TABLE OF CONTENT
170. 58 00 00 05 120 1 908 Creating a custom graphic fade 1 Open the Musicbed pca file Select the first half of the audio approximately five seconds From the Process menu choose Fade and choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Fade dialog is displayed Pr N From the Show wave drop down list choose Mono source The Musicbed pca waveform displays in the graph For more information on the dialog controls see Graphic Fade controls on page 193 5 Edit the fade envelope using the following controls e Click the envelope to create a new point Drag a point to move it to a new position e Double click or right click a point to delete it e Right click an envelope segment and choose a new fade type from the shortcut menu For more information see Envelope graphs on page 49 6 Click OK The custom graphic fade is applied to the selected audio Graphic Fade controls The following controls are located in the Graphic Fade dialog Control Description Maximum Gain Select a radio button to adjust the range of the envelope graph Show wave The Show wave drop down list provides several settings for drawing the current selection s waveform on the envelope graph This function is available only for small selections Reset Envelope Clicking the Reset Envelope button clears the envelope of all points except the Original two PROCESSING AUDIO 193 Fade Fade In The Fade In command is used to linearly fade a selection fr
171. 91 Reordering tracks Drag a CD track to move the track its associated media and the pause time before the track An indicator is displayed to show you where the event will be moved BB 100 Unnamed Things fs fon ex a 00 00 00 7 a 3 00 10 00 i 00 1 al Inf Irf l o lt u ob mT K gt E p gt oe Rate 0 00 _ gt 00 00 00 000 00 04 42 866 1 53 791 If you drag a track in a project where a single event spans more than one track Sound Forge will split the event as necessary Tips e Hold Shift while clicking CD tracks to select a range of tracks From the Options menu choose Lock to Selection and then choose Audio and CD Tracks if you want to drag CD tracks when moving audio in the data window e Regions markers and envelope points are moved with a CD track To turn this feature off turn off the Lock to Selection gt Markers Regions and Envelope Points commands on the Options menu BURNING CDS 315 Deleting tracks Right click a track and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Hiding the CD layout bar From the Options menu choose Data Window and then choose CD Tracks from the submenu The CD layout bar is hidden Choose CD Tracks from the submenu again to display the CD layout bar Tip Right click the Next Edit Tool button to display or hide components for the selected data window 100 Unnamed Things bela Stat
172. AE AA 173 DEICTING EV N is e E E ES E E S E E A E 174 Bie aE a a E ET E wore E E E E EE E E 174 SPITTING CVCING 4 54 44 40406 bach eyed A AEEA EN ENEA NTE AAA 174 PPAT AVENE 2 44 r A E E E TAE E AT E E A auers 175 Slip trimming events sssnsnsseseseseesrsesersesererersererserereroererersereroreeso 175 AUOripPple Events e eererrc neun REE A 175 OS Sra INO OV CN sis oon cnc aces REEERE TARTAR ATEREA 176 Using automate CrossfadES nace orca todeta rr OSTENE ETENE EAEAN EAA 176 Manually setting a crossfade ccc ccc ccc cece een ene e ene e eee ene eeenes 176 Changing crossfade CUIVES is ds phates chads danneeud MhwarsnG acd eabenssae ETETE 177 Using event envelopes ASR cc ccc ccc cee eee eee eee eee eee e seen eeeees 177 Setting an event s volume 0 cece cece e eee e eee e eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeeees 177 Setting an event s fade in and fade out cece ccc cece eee eee e eee e en eeeeeeees 178 Applying processes and effects to events ccc ccc eee eee eee e eee eeeenaeeees 178 SCICCHING EVM rreren eier nre EE thwscdouewme eee neha dunes EEEE TETORI ENEE 179 Selecting events USING menu COMMANAS cc cece cece cette tenet eeeeeees 179 Selecting events using keyboard Shortcuts cece ccc cece eet e eee e eee eeeees 179 Selecting Multiple events 2 0 ee ee eee e eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeees 180 LOCIMING CVCINS lt t524 a e wed hae aeeae aoa ne wea EEA tas arese nearness ees ans 180 Snapping to events
173. Attack time 0 to 500 ms J 2 0 Release time 0 to 1 000 ms 4 100 0 Smartrelease 0 to 100 J a Compressor Volume Maximizer More CPU 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 Control Description Threshold The Threshold fader is used to adjust the audio level at which compression is applied Audio with levels higher than the Threshold value are compressed while audio at levels lower than this value pass through the compressor uninterrupted Ratio The Ratio slider determines the amount of compression applied to audio signals surpassing the threshold A ratio of 1 1 applies no compression to audio surpassing the threshold while a ratio of 2 1 requires a 2 dB increase in actual volume to raise the processed volume 1 dB A ratio of Inf 1 is considered a limiter Output gain The Output gain fader allows you to determine how much the audio signal is boosted following its compression Attack time The Attack time slider allows you to determine how soon after rising above the threshold the audio signal is attenuated Release time The Release time slider allows you to determine how soon after falling below the threshold the audio signal attenuation is interrupted USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 245 Control Smart release Scan mode Auto gain compensate Use longer look ahead Smooth saturation Input Output meter Attenuation meter 246 CHAPTER 15 Description The Smart Release slider allows you to c
174. C Audio DoorSlam BatchConverted wav during conversion d Inthe File Folder section select a radio button to indicate where you want to save processed files Button Description Same as source Select this radio button if you want to save converted files in the same folders as the original files Save files to Select this radio button and type a path in the edit box or click Browse in the Append to name box if you want to save all converted files in a specific folder You can select the Preserve source subfolders check box if you want to use the same folder structure in your source and converted files For example if your source file is C Audio DoorSlam wav you could specify D as your output folder and the file will be saved as D Audio DoorSlam wav during conversion e Click the OK button Click the Save button to save the updated batch job or click the Save As button to save the edited batch job with a different name You re now ready to add files and run the batch job USING SCRIPTING 257 258 CHAPTER 16 Chapter 17 Sampling Used in conjunction with the Sampler Tool Sound Forge Pro software s powerful editing capabilities allow you to create edit and transfer samples between external and internal samplers This chapter describes the procedures used to transfer dump samples between the computer and sampler with the Sampler Tool Samplers Samplers are devices that produce on demand playback of
175. CD Text you must specify a title for the disc and for each track on the disc artist information is optional If the Title box in the CD Information window or Track List window is left blank a warning will be displayed before burning so you can choose to write the disc without CD Text or cancel burning and add title information as needed e You can write a maximum of 5000 characters as CD Text 1 Add title and artist information for your CD a From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose CD Information from the submenu The CD Information window appears b Inthe Name Title CD Text box type the name of the CD In the Artist CD Text box type the name of the artist who performed the material on the disc CD Information 100 Unnamed Things The Dorothy Heralds alg m TIA T a a J BURNING CDS 321 2 Add title and artist information for each track on your CD a From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Track List to display the Track List window b Double click the Title CD Text box and type the name of the track c Double click the Artist CD Text box and type the name of the artist who performed the track Shine The Dorothy Heralds Play The Dorothy Heralds One of These Days The Dorothy Heralds 3 Burn your disc Select the Write CD Text check box in the Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog to write CD Text while burning When the check box is cleared CD Text entries from the CD Info
176. E TT 339 C0 A e E E EEE E A S E EEE T ee 340 TOODA tD aaa aaar IEEE EAEAN EAE NENA A EAE ENEAN EEIN 340 CD ARN 1a 240 r ce E E E E ETANTE 341 PUIGIO AD ra E E E E E EE a 342 Ae oar o ALEE EE vonsnuaedtaveeetnedeaaeaenadha veaeauns teaawecumaedas 344 M SIEM E e E E E E E E E E E E E E 345 Customizing keyboard Shortcuts ccc eee eee eee cence eee e eee eeeeeee 346 Editing or creating shortcuts 2 0 ccc ccc cece eee e eee e eee eee eeeeenees 346 Saving a keyboard Mapping cece ccc cece eee ence ee ee eee eee eee eee eeeeneeeeees 347 Deleting a keyboard mapping ccc cece cece eee eee eee e een eeennees 347 Importing or renaming a keyboard Mapping ccc cece cece eee eee e eee eeeenees 347 Resetting the default keyboard Mapping ccc cece cece eee e eee eee eee e eens 347 DUMOMClsucu neces noaenseu ie cen ET EE EE E E E E E 349 KeyDoard SNOrtC tS serere nrinn EEEE ETE ESA 349 Project ile SIONUC UES serenana rE AN ace pen sate E T E E A E 349 Magnification and view shortcuts ccc eee cece eee eee e eens eee eeeeeeeees 350 Data window shortcuts x5 0 lt seunsseachacee nadues ed Phe estar owndeasiaad ene aeeoatwenasusdad s 351 CUrSOF MOVEMENT SNOMCUTS 020ccencensaeesaeaweiacaryeseweetiaus Sewers ieewanwewiawenes 352 Data selection shortcuts ccc ccc cee eee eee ene eee eee eee e eens eee eeenaes 353 Navigation and playback shortcuts ccc ccc ccc eee nee e eee e eee eee ennees 3
177. ECORDING 151 Adjusting for DC offset Sound Forge Pro software can automatically adjust for any DC offset produced by your audio hardware during the recording process 1 Setup your hardware For more information see Recording setup on page 152 2 From the View menu choose Record Options to open the Record Options window 3 Select the DC adjust check box 4 Click the Calibrate button Note f you change sound cards or are recording from different digital sources or at different sample rates you should recalibrate the DC offset before recording Recording setup This section provides general guidelines to help you record sound from an external source using Sound Forge Pro software Your specific hardware may vary Please refer to your hardware documentation for more information Tip f you re recording from a turntable use a phono preamplifier between your turntable s output and your sound card s line input Most turntables outputs are phono level rather than line level outputs Phono level outputs are quieter than line level outputs and have special equalization applied A phono preamplifier will convert the phono level signal to a line level signal that you can record Connecting an audio source to your sound card s input Basic setup In this setup an audio source is connected to an input on your sound card and your powered speakers are connected to a Line Out output You could connect a computer microphone to you
178. ER r W e BS ome Rate 0 00 k OONW Be H Shine Play One of These Days White When tabs are displayed you can click a data window s tab to bring it to the foreground When you have multiple data windows open and maximized you can drag files to a specific data window While dragging a file or selection hover over a data window s tab to bring it to the foreground You can then drop the file or selection in the desired data window The color preferences section allows you set a custom color for a variety of graphics within the Sound Forge interface 1 Choose a screen element from the Color preference for drop down list 2 Set the color of the selected item Drag the Hue slider to change the color of the selected item Drag the Saturation and Brightness sliders to adjust the intensity of the selected color Note When adjusting the display color for channel waveforms the Saturation and Brightness sliders are not available To adjust saturation and brightness for all channels choose Wave All Channels from the Color preference for drop down list and then adjust the controls Click the Default button to restore a custom color to the default setting 3 Click the OK button Drag the slider to adjust the color intensity of icons in the Sound Forge window Drag to the left to decrease the color saturation or drag to the right to increase it 334 CHAPTER 25 Description Icon color tint Editing tab Option Drag t
179. ET E ohn eee deh eee eek TEETE 163 Roa OUO ee E EEE E EEAO 164 Synthesizing AUCIO ssirissitr tinere Errera EENE EER 166 Generating DTMF MF tones sussssssssssseserssssssssserssscsseossseserseseersersee 166 Generating audio with frequency modulation ccc ccc ee cece eee e een eeeees 167 Generating simple waveforms cece cece eee eee eee e nent e eee e eee eeeeeeees 169 USING INE EVEN TOO ss 4s4s005 050546058 ortdewdendietes Ceaedasdann ti senddoad esas 171 Creating GV GING a5 cours purtgeeweeuusanee oe nea cones oune nok eedenns been eouaeeanyaewseueed 171 Creating events by cutting copying or pasting sound data cece cece cece ee 171 SDIEMINGCVCINS odcewwenddnwedn cows s 44ctueewweee dteteecuubewmetaeduiceb4eeuianetieeuneuweds 171 14 TABLE OF CONTENTS Creating events by dragging files from the Explorer 0 ccc eee cece eee e een eeeees 171 Creating events by dragging selections ccc cece cece cee eee e ee eeneeeneees 172 Creating events by processing a selection cece ccc cece e nent ee eeeeeeeneees 172 MOVIA EVENTS 944 263 aca a tagesdugesiagedoiwad REE suns OAE ATAA 172 EdItING CV GIGS chou sect orn ctetigwcnsetet waiswiewed nematic Wie ence ashe ate awh made maidaieednaneeteetaetont 173 COR VINGCVCIIS E E E ce coencmienereent E EE AEE TT ET 173 CUEING CVOCNUS oeer AE A EAER 173 EE EE EE E E EE E TEE E E E E 173 MIXING EVERI serier ri rEERART EEATT EREET EEA EREET EAA ETENE
180. F CONTENTS Snap an existing selection to the grid or zero Crossings cece cece eee eee eeeees 101 Selection SNAPPING ccc cc cece cee eee e eee ET eeeeeeeeeneenes 101 Shap CO GAG rer renee EEEE EAEE EEEE ENEE EEEE E EEEE EEEE EAEE EEEN S 102 Sap EJOS 10 GUC erresire renne AEEA AAEREN EAR AAEE ETEA 102 SS CO 2 Sl PETN II E ee eer ee E ee eee Ree N ee eae es 103 Sap EOC 10 Z oct su nytt ov eines ah deans esate ii octt essed actteocnedauesieewtorses tas 103 Exton to NOt Z TO ae cee ceuwauns agen eenuacnuea ne epee E E ET S 103 Extend Edge to Next Zero 2 ccc ccc cen eee nee eee EEA EEEE EE LARUE ERENER 103 OU ANE ZG to FLANIGS S ciits ow ane oi0s fasion GENERERE EEEE EEEIEE IEEE EAEE EERE EE 104 Creating and USING VIEWS s sssssusseesesseeseesersersrrseesersersersesserse 104 Displaying the Views toolbar s ssssssesessesussesesesossesesesersesoesosorerseseso 104 creating VIEWS scans pansies use olen E EE AE E AEA ET EEEE His 104 Changing File Properties and Formats ccc cece eee eee eect eee e teen ee eenees 105 Eding Ne DEODERICS ccc acta cca idini E E Er E dane Rae eee Ree ae eae eae 105 Editing file properties in the File Properties window cece cece cece eee een eennes 105 Editing file properties in the status bar ccc ccc cece cece teen nn eee ee eee eens 107 Copying file properties to the clipboard ccc cece ence eee nent ee ennes 107 Changing the sample rate cc
181. ForgeApp OutputText iss public static void DPF string fmt params object args ForgeApp OutputTesxt Jtring Format Emt args fEntryPoint 3 Replace the begin here text with your script 4 Click the Compile Script button to compile and test your script If there are any errors they will be displayed at the bottom of the window 5 Click the Save button to choose the file name and location that you want to use to save your script Editing an existing script Editing a script in the Script Editor window should not be very difficult as the scripts that are included with Sound Forge software are fully commented to help you find and edit the parameters you need 1 From the View menu choose Script Editor to display the Script Editor window if it isn t already displayed 2 Click the Open button 3 in the Script Editor window choose the script you want to edit and then click Open The script data is displayed in the top portion of the Script Editor window Note You cannot edit scripts that have been compiled as DLLs 3 Edit the script as necessary The comments in the script will help you find the parameters you need to edit Note Comments are indicated with double forward slashes 252 CHAPTER 16 4 Click the Compile Script button to compile and test your edited script If there are any errors they will be displayed at the bottom of the window 5 Click the Save button to repla
182. Frequency Hz Decibels dB FFT Bin Waveform display Peak Snapshot 4 4 w Spectrum graph Data displayed in the frequency domain whether in the form of a spectrum graph or sonogram shows the amplitudes and frequencies of sine waves that if mixed together would sound much like the original sound Since it s relatively easy to remember how a sine wave sounds at different frequencies it s possible to visualize how simple waveforms sound by looking at the spectrum of the sound Learning to read the frequency components of a sound in conjunction with their corresponding amplitudes makes it possible to determine the fundamental frequency of a sound as well as its overtones Similarly you can identify unwanted noise thereby allowing filtering to be applied where needed Fast Fourier Transform A Fourier transform is computationally intensive and for this reason it is common to use a technique called a Fast Fourier Transform FFT to perform spectral analysis The FFT utilizes mathematical shortcuts to reduce the processing time at the expense of putting limitations on the analysis size The analysis size also referred to as the FFT size indicates the number of samples from the audio signal used in analysis and also determines the number of discrete frequency bands When a large number of frequency bands are used the bands have a smaller bandwidth and this provides for more accurate frequency readings Howev
183. IRCAM or IRCAM Gross format consists of a 1024 byte header prior to the audio data This header contains standard information like the number of channels sampling rate and data format but can also contain the name of the sample and comments This format is used by the MTU system and these files are frequently referred to as MTU files IRCAM files support two types of data formats 16 bit linear PCM and floating point data About BICSF and EBICSF files BICSF and EBICSF files Berkeley IRCAM CARL Sound File or Extended BICSF are extensions of the IRCAM format Instead of using the standard IRCAM header these files replace the first 28 bytes of the header with a standard NeXT Sun header This allows the IRCAM format to store additional information in its 1024 byte header while also allowing the files to be read by software that supports the NeXT Sun file format such as Sound Forge software Opening files BICSF and EBICSF files When reading BICSF and EBICSF files the software identifies them as NeXT Sun files This is because the header of the BICSF file has been modified to allow it to be read as a NeXT Sun file These files are read as long as they are in one of the supported NeXT Sun data formats IRCAM CSOUND and MTU files To read these formats users must import them as Raw data files This is best accomplished by configuring the parameters in the Raw File Type dialog and saving them as presets The Raw File import function allows these
184. LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE Dolby Dolby Digital AC 3 and AAC encoding This product contains one or more programs protected under international and U S copyright laws as unpublished works They are confidential and proprietary to Dolby Laboratories Their reproduction or disclosure in whole or in part or the production of derivative works therefrom without the express permission of Dolby Laboratories is prohibited Copyright 1992 2008 Dolby Laboratories All rights reserved Dolby Digital 5 1 Creator technology is not intended for use in content creation for commercial or broadcast distribution or content that displays Dolby trademarks and logos Only Approved Dolby Digital Professional Encoders may be used for content that is commercially distributed or carries the Dolby Digital trademark and logo Dolby the double D symbol AC 3 and Dolby Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories AAC is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories lastique Pro Portions of this product use zplane lastique Pro V2 audio time stretching technology FLAC Ogg File Formats 2008 Xiph org Foundation Neither the name of the Xiph org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission
185. LOSSARY 365 Amplitude Modulation Amplitude Modulation AM is a process whereby the amplitude loudness of a sound is varied over time When varied slowly a tremolo effect occurs If the frequency of modulation is high many side frequencies are created that can strongly alter the timbre of a sound Analog When discussing audio this term refers to a method of reproducing a sound wave with voltage fluctuations that are analogous to the pressure fluctuations of the sound wave This is different from digital recording in that these fluctuations are infinitely varying rather than discrete changes at sample time See also Quantization on page 376 Attack The attack of a sound is the initial portion of the sound Percussive sounds drums piano guitar plucks are said to have a fast attack This means that the sound reaches its maximum amplitude in a very short time Sounds that slowly swell up in volume soft strings and wind sounds are said to have a slow attack Audio Compression Manager ACM The Audio Compression Manager from Microsoft is a standard interface for audio compression and signal processing for Windows The ACM can be used by Windows programs to compress and decompress wav files See also Wave on page 381 Audio Event Locator The Audio Event Locator is similar to a scrub function However rather than playing the sound file at a slow speed it loops playback around the cursor position This position can be selected by
186. MIDI Out button 4 menu A check mark appears adjacent to the command to indicate that this option is turned on If this option is turned off patches cannot be switched 2 From the Voice drop down list choose the new voice and click any key Note Patch names are arranged as specified in the General MIDI Standard For synthesizers not using the General MIDI convention use the patch number instead of the instrument name Generating chords You can also generate chords instead of single notes by choosing a chord structure from the keyboard s Note Chord drop down list Chords are generated using the specified note as the root of the chord or interval 268 CHAPTER 17 Setting up MIDI SDS hardware To use MIDI SDS protocol with an external sampler that supports MIDI SDS you must install a MIDI card with MIDI input and output ports in the system 1 Using a MIDI cable connect the MIDI output port of the sampler to the MIDI input port of the MIDI card 2 Connect the MIDI input port of the sampler to the MIDI output port of the card Note This is the same configuration used to connect a MIDI keyboard to a computer for sequencing Internal samplers do not require a MIDI card and MIDI cables however an open loop protocol may be required when sending samples to an internal sampler The sampler s documentation should specify the requirements for performing SDS transfers if the sampler supports this action Troubleshooting MIDI SD
187. MIDI time code to an external device or to receive MIDI time code from an external device MIDI Time Code MTC MTC is an addendum to the MIDI 1 0 specification and provides a way to specify absolute time for synchronizing MIDI capable applications MTC is essentially a MIDI representation of SMPTE time code Mix Mixing allows multiple sound files to be blended into one file at user defined relative levels GLOSSARY 373 Multiple Bit Rate Encoding Multiple bit rate encoding allows you to create a single file that contains streams for several bit rates A multiple bit rate file can accommodate users with different Internet connection speeds or these files can automatically change to a different bit rate to compensate for network congestion without interrupting playback Note To take advantage of multiple bit rate encoding you must publish your media files to a Windows Media server or a RealServerG2 Musical Instrument Device Interface MIDI A standard language of control messages that provides for communication between any MIDI compliant devices Anything from synthesizers to lights to factory equipment can be controlled via MIDI Sound Forge software uses MIDI for synchronization purposes Noise shaping Noise shaping is a technique which can minimize the audibility of quantization noise by shifting its frequency spectrum For example in 44 100 Hz audio quantization noise is shifted towards the Nyquist Frequency of 22 050 Hz
188. Manager window not only allows you to add plug ins and saved plug in chains but it also provides a way to manage your plug in files to rename plug ins hide plug ins create folders add plug ins to an FX Favorites folder and perform other standard file management tasks Plug In Manager di Sony i Fi a PE YF di Plug Ins ifi Amplitude Modulation di All y Audio Restoration D Som iH Chorus Views Hy Click and Crackle Removal Delete Hy Clipped Peak Restoration ti eka New Folder Hy Dither Refresh Ei ExpressEX Amplitude Modulation Up One Level hy ExpressFX Audio Restoration Hi ExpressFA Chorus Hiv ExpressFX Delay Ei ExpressFX Distortion di Automatable l m Packaged Chains a FX Favorites 4 206 CHAPTER 14 Applying a plug in or chain to a media file You can add a plug in to a chain in the Plug In Chain by dragging an effect from the Plug In Manager window Plug In Manager di Sony di Automatable l di Packaged Chains EE Fx Favorites ifi Amplitude Modulation Pi Audio Restoration fH Chorus Py Click and Crackle Removal hy Clipped Peak Restoration iH Distortion Pay Dither iy ExpressFX Amplitude Modulation iy ExpressFX Audio Restoration iy ExpressFX Chorus iy ExpressFX Delay Ei ExpressFX Distortion 4 From the View menu choose Plug In Manager The Plug In Manager window is displayed Select the data you want to process If no data is selected processi
189. NING cece cece cee eee eee eee eeeeeees 307 Wriung Mono tracks 10 a CO 154io0naidon os EEE aan NA ead eden deseadandeeeesa 307 Burning track at once TAO CDS ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cere cece reeset eeeeeees 308 ClOSIMNG AD asic nccs a tie tea acai aaaow ina neouatea see E EE debt ce hos edaanientvaheuneese 309 Burning disc at once DAO CDS ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee ee eeees 310 Creating and editing tracks for disc at once CDS ccc cece cc eee eee eeen eens 310 Moving tracks on the CD layout bar cece ccc cece eee e eee eee eneeeeees 315 Editing pause time for a disc at once CD cece cece eee nee e eee ee eeeeeennes 316 Using the Track List WINGOW cece ccc ccc cece cece teen eeeeeeeeeeeees 318 Creating track lists for disc at Once CDS cece ccc cece eect e nee e eee eeeees 319 Adding CD Text to disc at once CDS ccc ccc cence eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeenes 321 Burning a disc at once CD 4 1 i si00 wriawm sh5 4 oG 44404 5G 0d ONG ed SWS KN GOST TERCERA IRM eaeH 322 Optimizing Sound Forge Pro Software ccc cece ccc cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeees 325 Defragmenting your hard drive ccc ccc ccc e eee e eee eeeeeeaanes 325 Increasing playback buffer size 6 cece cee eee eee e eee e ee eeeeennes 325 WICTCI Ss EEEE TEE senor ee sesor sion cn S I E E aumento E E T E 325 Passive updating for video and time displays cc cece cee cece eee eee enees 3
190. New Window dialog 71 new windows See data windows creating Noise Gate effect 45 110 229 Noise Reduction button 46 noise shaping dangers of 109 187 overview 109 187 Normal zoom ratio preference 94 Normalize button 44 Normalize process applying dynamic compression 110 overview 110 196 online help 26 Open dialog 40 62 opening Cutlist files 134 files 61 63 multichannel audio files 116 Playlist files 134 Regions List files 130 workspaces 75 optimization hard disk defragmentation 325 meters 325 passive update 325 total buffer size 325 overview bar 33 audio event locator 93 overwriting selections 157 pan envelopes creating 198 customizing 199 Pan Expand button 44 Pan Expand process creating pan envelopes 198 customizing pan envelopes 199 Paragraphic EQ 44 192 Parametric EQ 44 192 passive updating of displays 325 Paste button 40 paste special overwriting 157 replicating 158 Paste to New command 81 pasting by dragging and dropping 80 drag and drop 161 events 173 in existing data windows 80 in new data windows 81 Pause button 41 pause time 316 318 peak files 66 peak program meters See VU PPM meters Pencil tool 40 165 phase scopes Lissajous Rotated style 139 Lissajous XY Plot style 139 Polar Circular Plot style 139 Polar Linear Plot style 139 showing hiding 139 style 139 Pitch Bend effect 45 229 230 Pitch Shift effect 45 230 Play All button 4
191. Noise shaping dangers Noise shaping places quantization noise near the audio s Nyquist frequency a value equal to one half of the file s sample rate Consider the following information Afile with a sample rate of 44 1 kHz has a Nyquist frequency of 22 05 kHz at the high end of human hearing Applying noise shaping to this file results in audio perceived to be cleaner than it actually is Afile with a sample rate of 22 kHz has a Nyquist frequency of 11 kHz well within the sensitive range of human hearing Applying noise shaping to this file results in audio that is perceived to be noisier than it actually is Ironically this defeats the entire purpose of noise shaping For this reason we do not recommend using noise shaping on files with sample rates less than 44 1 kHz Minimizing quantization error There are at least three methods of minimizing quantization error when decreasing a file s bit depth noise gating compression and normalization CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 109 Noise gating Frequently low level signals become noise when a file s bit depth is decreased For this reason it is preferable to have complete silence between sounds in an audio file 1 From the Effects menu choose Noise Gate The Noise Gate dialog appears 2 Choose a noise gate preset from the Preset drop down list and click OK A noise gate is applied to the audio negating its low level signals Preset Untitled Untitled
192. ORDING 143 Creating a recording Tip When using the New Recording command recording begins immediately after the new window is created If you want to check your input levels before recording click the Arm button in the main toolbar check your levels using the meters in the Record Options window and then click Arm again The peak meters represent the volume of the recording input For best results the peak level should be somewhere in the yellow range with an occasional red segment you want your input to be as loud as possible without clipping Verify that your recording method is set to Manual a From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed b From the Method drop down list choose Manual c Ifyou want to set up pre roll post roll or a prerecord buffer click the Settings button For more information see Setting up pre and post roll on page 144 or Setting a prerecord buffer on page 145 Choose Transport gt New Recording or press Ctrl Shift R Tip fyou want to check your input levels before or during recording you can use the meters The peak meters represent the volume of the recording input For best results the peak level should be somewhere in the yellow range with an occasional red segment you want your input to be as loud as possible without clipping Use the New Window dialog to specify the parameters for the new file a Choose a sample rate from the Sample rate dro
193. PF F a ce el a a PLF P A A a A ALALA LFL pe ee pe ed ee el 2 _ _ _ ag a a _ af Nal Tel Sef haf fF PP PA Pe ek he eof of PP AAA SAA Oe Og Og Oe 2 8 8 988 ee a a Ma a 8 ee S a a Ma a Oa Ma 8 8 ee a o gg o nln a a ta Me eee a a 8 A ee ag Ma a Ma Oa Mee a a a en ee ee ee ee o a aa a a ae aa e aA o AAEE EEE Sene SONY SS NERSION IT ie Paf make believe Revised July 11 2013 What s new in version 11 e Improved recording workflow For more information see Recording on page 143 e Added a Loudness Meters tool and loudness logging For more information see Loudness Meters on page 140 The Statistics dialog now includes loudness data For more information see Viewing selection statistics on page 68 Added Use True Peaks and Enable DC Blocking Filter controls to the Detect Clipping dialog for measuring loudness For more information see Detecting and marking clipping on page 120 Improved support for metadata in Broadcast Wave Format file For more information see Broadcast Wave window Ctrl Alt M 4 on page 55 e Added support for editing files in SoectraLayers Pro 2 0 For more information see Editing with SpectraLayers Pro on page 305 Improved Plug In Chain window now allows floating plug in windows For more information see Using the Plug In Chain on page 209 e Improved selection dragging you no longer need to drag up before dragging a selection e Fade in and fade ou
194. Preview window choose Video Preview from the View menu 1 Selecta file in the Explorer window 2 Click the Start Preview button to listen to the file 3 Click the Stop Preview button or select a different file to stop previewing the file Tip To automatically preview selected files click the Auto Preview button on the Explorer window s transport bar GETTING STARTED 63 Opening media To open a media file into a new data window from the Explorer window double click the file To open a media file in a specific data window drag the media file from the Explorer window to the data window Using the Favorites folder Select the Favorites folder Ga or choose Favorites from the Address Bar to view the contents of the Favorites folder This folder contains shortcuts to folders that you use often Tip Favorites are saved in C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 ExplorerFavorites txt The file is saved whenever you close the Explorer window or exit the application You can copy the file to different computers or user accounts to migrate Favorites settings To see this file you must have the Show hidden files and folders radio button selected on the View tab of the Folder Options Control Panel in Windows Adding a folder to the Favorites folder 1 Browse to the folder you want to add 2 Right click the folder and choose Add Folder to My Favorites from the shortcut menu to create a s
195. Pro software provides two ways to burn audio to a CD track at once and disc at once Track at once Track at once burning records individual tracks to the disc and results in a partially recorded disc However the CD remains unplayable on most systems until you close the disc The advantage of track at once burning is you can record tracks onto the disc as you finish them versus waiting until you have finished your whole album Track at once writing burns the entire project as a single track Disc at once single session or Red Book Disc at once burning is the most common burning method in the music industry This writing mode is used when creating a master disc to be sent to a disc manufacturer for mass replication Disc at once works just as it sounds Multiple tracks of audio are written to the CD in one recording session Correcting the sample rate for CD burning Sample rates deviating from 44 100 Hz cause CD track lengths to be miscalculated When attempting to write a file to CD that deviates from the 44 100 Hz sample rate you are prompted to change the sample rate Selecting Yes automatically resamples audio to 44 100 Hz In addition you can use the Resample tool to change the sample rate of a file prior to burning the CD For more information see Resample on page 200 Writing mono tracks to a CD If you attempt to write mono audio tracks to a CD you are prompted to create a stereo file by copying the mono data to both channels
196. R drives support this feature Check your CD R drive documentation to determine if your drive will write these codes Type the code in this box and the codes will be written to the CD with the rest of the project Universal product codes are administered by the Uniform Code Council For more information see http www uc council org First track number on disc Type a number in the box to specify the track number of the first track Note Specifying a value other than 1 will produce a valid Red Book CD but some audio CD players may be unable to play the disc Name Title CD Text Type a title for the project If you select the Write CD Text check box on the Burn Disc at Once CD dialog this data will be written to your disc In order to display CD Text your CD player must support CD Text Notes In order to burn valid CD Text you must specify a title for the disc and for each track on the disc artist information is optional If the Name Title box in the CD Information or Track List window is left blank a warning will be displayed before burning so you can choose to write the disc without CD Text or cancel burning and add title information as needed You can write a maximum of 5000 characters as CD Text Artist CD Text Type the name of the artist If you select the Write CD Text check box on the Burn Disc at Once CD dialog this data will be written to your disc In order to display CD Text your CD player must supp
197. S 23 Using CSOUND MTU IRCAM BICSF and EBICSF Files cece eee eee eee 363 ADOUTIRGAM files ccc ta4cedieensevickwntehceiudnesnd bAnuoaecun Meeehacateaateeas eon 363 AOOUL BIGS rand EBICSF NCS nsuna secon eines ried EINI ETEO NEETER ETERA tans 363 OCG TNS ars seers epee aut new bend wre eee wie es eee et E enone 363 DIGS ale EGICSF NGS aiccentesccauidiwacdeedussspteoeeaeieadeeusacssiaucseasease ued sa ss 363 IRCAM CSOUND and MTU files 2 0 0 0 ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eee nent e ee eeennnees 363 SAVING HCG A en acronis veces somes E te thage eee ianeas anne cena karn ee sneeeans 364 GIOSSENY c4cuccean pus EEE A EE cian tennanee E ERT 365 HOOK EE E E duets bin EEE EET E A E E 383 24 TABLE OF CONTENTS Chapter 1 Introduction Introducing Sound Forge Pro software Thank you for purchasing Sound Forge Pro software and for your continued support of the Sony Creative Software Inc family of products The software provides you with the powerful features you have come to expect as well as a number of new features designed to make digital audio editing quick and easy Sample files Throughout the manual you will find references to six sample audio files The manual directs you to use these files as you experiment with different Sound Forge features These files are installed in the same folder as the application e Drumhit pca Fill pca e Loop pca e Musicbed pca e Saxriff pca Voiceover pca The fi
198. S with open loop Open loop transfers while not recommended for sending or receiving samples can assist you in troubleshooting SDS hardware setup problems If the Sampler Tool does not transfer data to or from the sampler select the open loop option and attempt single cable transfers If open loop transfers are successful but closed loop transfers are not any of the following items may be the cause e The sampler does not support closed loop transfers handshaking e One or more of the MIDI cables or connections is faulty The MIDI card is not receiving MIDI input send or sending MIDI output receive Interrupt conflicts are common for MIDI input Setting up SCSI SMDI hardware To use the SCSI SMDI protocol with an external sampler that supports the SCSI SMDI protocol under Windows 98SE Windows Me Windows 2000 or Windows XP only a compatible SCSI adapter is needed The computer and sampler must be powered down prior to connecting or disconnecting SCSI cables to prevent damage to the computer and or hardware Troubleshooting SCSI SMDI A brief description of some common problems encountered with SCSI and samplers follows Conflicting SCSI IDs When connecting devices on a SCSI chain each device must have a unique device identifier ID SCSI allows for up to eight unique ID values numbered 0 to 7 Typically device ID 7 is used for the internal SCSI controller card leaving ID 0 through 6 for other devices Note The ID of
199. Select the Wait for request when sending samples check box if you want the Sampler tool to wait for the sampler to request the sample transfer before sending the sample even after you click Send Sample Typically pressing the appropriate button on the sampler satisfies this request Clearing the Wait for request check box configures the Sampler Tool to send the sample as soon as you click Send Sample Open loop versus closed loop Open loop describes a unidirectional communication protocol When the Open loop check box is selected the source transmits all data to the destination without listening for instruction from the destination The destination has no control over how the data is sent and cannot ask for information to be repeated This lack of feedback makes open loop transfers prone to error Sampler Configuration Example music bed Preset Untitled OK MIDI channel 4 Open loop The Open Loop check box in the Send request when retrieving samples Sampler Confi guration dialog Wait for request when sending samples If the Open loop check box is cleared the communication protocol is referred to as closed loop A closed loop allows information to flow in both directions Using closed loop transfers the source sends data in small packets and the destination upon receiving the packet either retains the data or discards the packet and requests the data to be resent Using closed loop protocol the source does not send the
200. Shift rotate the mouse wheel forward or back Appendix B Sound Forge and the Microsoft Audio Compression Manager The Microsoft Audio Compression Manager ACM is a standard interface for audio compression in Windows This interface allows applications such as Sound Forge software to use compression algorithms provided by other companies Sound Forge software fully supports audio compression through the ACM This enables you to use any ACM compatible compression The best part of this support is you don t have to learn anything new to use it Sound Forge software transparently opens compressed wav files and provides all available compression formats for wav files in the Save As dialog Audio data compression and decompression The first piece of the ACM allows you to compress and decompress audio data Audio compression is used to decrease the amount of data required to represent a sound this ultimately results in smaller sound files However there are drawbacks to using audio compression on your sound files e Most audio compression algorithms will degrade the quality of the sound This is referred to as lossy compression since information contained in the sound is lost when it is compressed The amount of sound degradation is dependent on the compression algorithm e Audio compression requires more processing time than uncompressed data The amount of processing time is dependent on the algorithm as well as your hardware setup As a
201. The zoom ratio determines the number of samples represented by each horizontal point on the screen The zoom ratio is a value of X Y where X is the number of horizontal points and Y is the number of samples If the ratio is 1 1 each point on the screen represents one sample At this zoom ratio a brief but detailed selection of time is displayed BB Example music bed A ROR X o 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 859 z Waveform at 1 1 zoom ratio Conversely if the zoom ratio is 1 1024 1 024 samples are represented by each point on the screen and a greater length of time is displayed For very precise editing you may want to zoom in more tightly than a 1 1 ratio Sound Forge allows up to a 24 1 ratio where 24 points on the screen represent one sample This high level of zoom can be useful when editing with the Pencil tool 42 For more information see Repairing audio glitches manually with the Pencil tool on page 165 NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 93 Example music bed amp E 00 00 00 070 4 m O NK dp pi oe Changing the zoom ratio 00 00 00 000 Waveform at 24 1 zoom ratio To edit the zoom ratio use the Zoom In Out spin control located adjacent to the zoom ratio display e Clicking the plus minus buttons increases decreases the zoom ratio by single step increments e Dragging the spin control increments the zoom ratio quickly in the corresponding direction Notes e When afile
202. Trim crop 3 Use the controls in the Customize Toolbar dialog to add remove or rearrange the buttons on the selected toolbar Click Reset to restore the toolbar to its default setting 4 Click OK LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 39 Docking a toolbar When you drag a floating toolbar to any edge of the main screen the toolbar docks on that edge Floating a toolbar When you drag a docked toolbar away from an edge the toolbar becomes a floating toolbar Standard toolbar The Standard toolbar is displayed by default when you start the application The buttons on this toolbar provide quick access to many common commands B T JE New Creates a new data window For more information see Creating data windows on page 71 Open Displays the Open dialog For more information see Using the Open dialog on page 62 Save Saves the current audio data For more information see Saving a file on page 72 Save As Saves the current file with a new name or format For more information see Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 72 Render As Renders the current project file to a media file For more information see Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 72 Publish Opens the Publish Setup wizard so you can upload your media file to the Web For more information see Publishing files to the Web on page 89 Cut Removes selected audio data and places it on the clipboard This command has no effect if ther
203. Use the envelope graph to modify the amplitude of the operator over time For more information see Envelope graphs on page 49 3 From the Operator shape drop down list choose a waveform shape 4 Specify the frequency of the operator in the Frequency box Notes fFrequency is set to 0 00 a DC zero frequency waveform is produced regardless of the waveform specified e When you choose Filtered Noise from the Operator shape drop down list Frequency determines the high frequency content of the noise 5 Use the Feedback slider to determine the amount of the operator s output that is used to modulate itself If the operator is also being modulated by another waveform the feedback path and the modulator output are mixed together to modulate the carrier 6 Use the Amplitude fader to determine the output gain that is applied to the current operator after the amplitude envelope Note f the operator is a modulator this control along with the envelope determines the amount of frequency modulation applied to the carrier If the amplitude of a modulator is high harsh audio may result 168 CHAPTER 11 Generating simple waveforms The Simple Synthesis tool is used to generate simple waveforms of a given shape pitch and length 1 From the Insert menu choose Synthesis and choose Simple from the submenu The Simple Synthesis dialog appears Tip You can also click the Simple Synthesis button on the Insert toolbar Si
204. a bootable SCSI hard drive must be set to 0 The following table describes a typical SCSI configuration ID Devices 0 Hard Drive 1 CD ROM DVD ROM Drive 2 6 Samplers 7 SCSI Controller Card SAMPLING 269 Periodic transfer failures Messages such as The SCSI Device is not responding or A problem was encountered while transferring the sample may indicate a problem with a SCSI bus 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog is displayed 2 Click Configure The Sampler Configuration dialog is displayed 3 Repeat the selection of the SCSI host This causes a series of SCSI commands to be executed that may settle the bus If the problem persists power down and restart all equipment Sampler is recognized but does not transfer reliably The following items are possible causes of unreliable SCSI transfers Synchronous transfer mode Select samplers the Kurzweil K2000 among them do not operate properly if there is a SCSI device set to synchronous transfer mode on the same SCSI chain SCSI hard drives and CD ROMs or DVD ROMs often have the option of using a synchronous transfer mode If there is a host versus device synchronous transfer option select the host option Refer to the SCSI device s documentation for more information SCSI termination If the SCSI chain is not properly terminated unreliable SCSI transfers may be experienced Refer to the SCSI card and SCSI device documentation for more infor
205. ab on page 335 1 2 7 Click the More button in the processing dialog Selection and gain controls are displayed at the bottom of the dialog Type a value in the Wet Gain box or use the spinner to set the level of the processed signal that will be mixed into the output Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the sustain portion of the wet gain envelope in the data window Lal k 00 00 05 Type a value in the Dry Gain box or use the spinner to set the level of the unprocessed signal that will be mixed into the output Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the sustain portion of the dry gain envelope in the data window F k 00 00 05 Type a value in the Fade In box or use the spinner to set the length of the fade in between the unprocessed and processed signal Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the attack portion of the envelope in the data window F a 200 Click the Fade Curves button ES and choose a curve type from the menu to set the speed of the fade in Type a value in the Fade Out box or use the spinner to set the length of the fade out between the processed and unprocessed signal Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the release portion of the envelope in the data window Lil a 200 Click the Fade Curves button Es and choose a curve type from the menu to set the speed of the fade out Tips To reset the fade in and out
206. acks to rearrange them drag either end of a track to change its length or use the Track List window to edit the track s position or name Adding files to a data window and creating tracks Tip When you create a track using a media file that includes title and artist metadata this information will be added to the Track List window as CD Text Dragging files to the CD layout bar Drag a file to the CD layout bar at the bottom of a data window An indicator is displayed to show you where the track will be added when you release the mouse When you drop the file a track is created and pause time is added before the new track DOW Bee Track placement indicator beset One of These Days oO Note f you want to adda CD track without pause time drag the file to the waveform display above the CD layout bar If Options gt Drag and Drop Editing gt CD Track isn t selected click the right mouse button while dragging until the cursor is displayed with a CD icon cf to show you where the track will be added 312 CHAPTER 23 Dragging files to the Track List window Drag a file to the Track List window An indicator is displayed to show you where the track will be added when you release the mouse When you drop the file a track is created and pause time is added before the new track Track List atari Eng Length te KCD Text i 1 00 00 00 000 00 03 30 933 00 03 30 933 Shine t Eii 1 00 03
207. active data window For more information see Adding a volume or panning envelope on page 223 Insert Silence Inserts user configurable silence into audio files For more information see Inserting silence on page 159 DTMF MF Tones Synthesis Generates dial tones used by telephone companies For more information see Generating DTMF MF tones on page 166 FM Synthesis Uses frequency modulation and additive synthesis to create complex sounds from simple waveforms For more information see Generating audio with frequency modulation on page 167 Simple Synthesis Generates a simple waveform of a given shape pitch and length For more information see Generating simple waveforms on page 169 LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 43 Process toolbar The Process toolbar contains buttons corresponding to all commands located in the Process menu amp J Auto Trim Crop Removes silence and automatically fades in out the end points of each phrase For more information see Auto Trim Crop on page 185 Bit Depth Converter Converts a file to a different bit depth For more information see Bit Depth Converter on page 186 iZotope MBIT Dither Converts a file to a different bit depth and applies dithering For more information see iZotope MBIT Dither on page 188 Channel Converter Converts between mono and multichannel formats Can also intermix the channels of a file to create panning effects For more information see Chann
208. ad 2 numeric keypad Ctrl Shift Up Down Arrow 5 numeric keypad O Ctrl Shift A Ctrl R Q Spacebar or F12 Shift Spacebar or Shift F12 Enter or Ctrl F12 X Esc F Ctrl K Ctrl Shift K J K or F6 Shift F6 F7 Ctrl F7 Event tool keyboard shortcuts Command Select the previous next editing tool Edit tool Magnify tool Pencil tool Event tool Select the next event Select the previous event Select the first event Select the last event Extend the selection to the next event Extend the selection to the previous event Extend the selection to the first event Extend the selection to the last event Split events at cursor Split events at region boundaries Toggle automatic crossfades on off Show hide fade lengths between events Toggle auto ripple on off Plug In Chain shortcuts Command Preview Process selection Bypass selected plug in Bypass plug in chain Save chain preset Toggle Ignore Mix Insert Tail Data options Add plug ins to chain Remove selected plug ins Select the next plug in in the chain Select the previous plug in in the chain Show the plug in window Show or hide the effect automation parameters Show or hide envelope in data window Enable or disable envelope Select all plug ins or effect automation parameters Regions List shortcuts Command Play or stop the active marker or region Edit the active marker or region Delete the active marker or region Keyboard Sh
209. ae TAREE AT 44 E OO are E AE NEEE EE A AAE E AEAEE econ 45 Tool oola eee a ani T E E EE EEE E EA ESAE S 46 LeveL TOODA sereta nsee E ES S A ES 47 SCHOUING TOODA orae EEE EEA EE EEE E EEE E EE EEA EAIA E EN OA E EEE AREER 47 TOON WD aerer oo se cg ar EE AE EE EE EE hae E E E eee eee oe ea 47 USING TOOMMDS ararsan aN TEEI AANE cau aiousy een ccerad sented ES E EN 47 TOMO OOM sercrssrisresncrssersiereseencis ier ode inei Er N news e beedend omnes 47 Command descriptions 4 ci cacvaies down ae alenda deans sea buslen abeee a04eaReeeowanseeaees 47 Key OOdnG SWMOF CU Guiry ve ensaasanyiae sans enon thaedsaene coated eoeue eis 47 COND O S ct E EEEE EEE E eee eaten uk peepee eee meen mean eaeaad eed 48 Faders and SHIGCIS nana acicacdencdeuetsnowedptaseieernnsaeoeneontodncstaseseaeonanniosaaa ay 48 ENVELOPE ON ADS orses darreire REENA ART PEERI RAE AETIA EEE EAEE ARE 49 Displaying the waveform on an envelope graph ccc cece cece cece een eeeeeenees 50 MGIC MANGINI TLS cnct accunmsacas E PETE E EE EEN EES TE TEE EEEE E E 50 Working with multichannel files 0 ccc ccc eee cece eee eee ene e eee et eeeeeeneneees 50 Selecting data in multichannel files 00 0 0 0 ccc ccc cence eee e eee e eee eeeeees 51 Metadata WINDOWS 05 sescaecsens ws deenonseeedhwteadtseeet ease eaecss es senedsoaded 53 Copying metadata to the clipboard ccc ccc cece eee eee e eee e nese eeeeeeees 53 Regions List window Ctrl AIt M 0 2 0 0 cece ccc c
210. ailable only if the data window contains a video file Select from the cursor to the first sample visible in the waveform display or Select the first event when the Event tool is selected Select from the cursor to the last sample visible in the waveform display or Select the last event when the Event tool is selected Select from the cursor to the first sample in the data window or Extend selection to the first event when the Event tool amp is selected Select from the cursor to the last sample in the data window 6p Extend selection to the last event when the Event tool is selected Select from the cursor to 10 of the current view prior to the cursor position Select from the cursor to 10 of the current view past the cursor position Select 100 of the current view prior to the cursor position Select 100 of the current view past the cursor position Select from the cursor to the end of the file or Select from the cursor to the next region loop or marker boundary if regions loops or markers exist in the file Extend selection to the next event when the Event tool A is selected Select from the cursor to the beginning of the file Select from the cursor to the previous region loop or marker boundary if regions loops or markers exist in the file or Extend selection to the previous event when the Event tool is selected Select from the cursor to the next sample
211. ake a selection during playback playback is pre rolled from the end of the selection to help you tune long loops Specify the number of seconds before the end of the selection that you would like to pre roll Enter a value in the edit box or use the up and down arrows to specify the amount of pre roll that will be used when playing entries in the Playlist Cutlist window This allows you to easily hear the transition from one region to another without having to play all the way through the first region CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 339 Status tab Item Default frames per second Default beats per measure Default beats per minute RMS level scan time Peak level scan time 0 VU 4 dBu level VU meter integration time Enable surround processing for files with 6 channels Open editor when new loudness log is generated The Status tab allows you to specify preferences for displaying information in the status bar Description The default frame rate used to calculate frame values Frame values are useful when trying to synchronize sound with animation Most animation players specify a playback frame rate at which video frames are shown to the user If you are using an animation that has a frame rate of 15 0 frames per second you would set the frame rate to 15 0 When status values are displayed they will be shown in values of frames This allows you to find the frame to which a given point in the sound file corr
212. an use the envelope graph to decrease the length of the specified impulse file which consequently decreases the reverberation decay time and processing time You can also use the envelope graph to apply fades to the specified impulse file 0 Time seconds L55 The horizontal axis of the graph represents the time of the impulse file and the vertical axis represents peak amplitude in dB Specifying an impulse file from the Impulse drop down list automatically displays its envelope in the graph Note f the impulse file is greater than 6 seconds in length it does not display in the envelope graph Envelope points are used in the envelope graph to specify a fade curve The fade amount can vary from 0 to 100 You can create delete and arrange envelope points just as you can in all of the Sound Forge envelope graphs For more information see Envelope graphs on page 49 Note The fade value at any point in a curve does not use the same vertical logarithmic dB scale used for displaying the impulse file Clicking this button resets the envelope points to 100 indicating no fade Clicking this button creates a link between the current preset and the selected impulse file along with encoding the impulse information You can use the Preset Manager to share presets and the accompanying impulse files between computers without losing information For more information see Using the Preset Manager on page 226 Drag the vertical Envelope En
213. ancescaueeaueac oceoeeeesencaneeauene ao 259 intemal samplers 40 5ccc sawn tnau ine seen ieee b sauna dee cub sake se ueeseene andes eemineaws 259 Configuring the Sampler 00 lss 4 ssi420 00sc0 esveeeesadecs cancaeerecyesaerewsebidn 260 Creating a Sampler configuration 66 cee eee cece eee e eee e eee eeeeees 260 Open loop versus closed OOD oisceiacocccseeeteeerewndswiadendesdseteeeeeenar ees coreseeres 261 Saving Sampler CONFIGUrATIONS 6 6 ccc eee eect e eee ee ee ee eee eeeeeeeees 262 Sending and receiving SAMPIES 6 eee eee eee eee ee ee ee eee teen eee aenaes 262 SENGING a Sample stirs cers see ce aw biadaae uw sa ud iawesw weuurieeoses E EA NAER 262 Receiving a sample cece ee een e eee eee eee eee eee eeenaes 262 MIDUnity NOTE and FING TUNG a o lt 96s8es lt es9suws dan sad ee ced seeker deine caeaewss eeeceiwernes 262 Processing musical instrument files ccc ccc eee eee e eee ee ee eeeenaes 263 Opening musical instrument files cece eee eee eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeneees 263 Previewing SAMDIES 2ccudacadeeuseacseetxeteecisaateeupass 6aNd Kena eed behind EENE 264 SCICCUING SAINPICS t0404o4anccaiewerdowesne suns cacesedownrnrn E wee cascades deena ens 264 Processing Selections 2 0 ec cee cece eee ee ee eee eee nent e eee eee eeeeennes 266 ECIEING Sai MNCS 2 4006 chs E E E E E A E E E ed eee eersunneruuderd 266 Saving ChanOes saeara EAEAN A 266 Using the MIDI keyboard ccc cece cece cc cee ene eee e
214. and outgoing signals When an Input button is displayed the meters are displaying the incoming signal level Clicking Input toggles the button to an Output button and displays the outgoing signal level Clicking Output returns you to the incoming signal display Attenuation meter This meter allows you to monitor the audio signal attenuation derived from the current settings USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 247 248 CHAPTER 15 Chapter 16 Using Scripting You can use scripting to streamline repetitive tasks and implement customized features When the Script Editor window displays you can use it to create edit or run scripts Sound Forge software can use scripts written using JScript VBScript or C as well as scripts that have been compiled as DLLs Scripting references Sample scripts You can find the most recent scripting API application programming interface and sample scripts on our Web site at http www sonycreativesoftware com download devkits Additional scripting information For additional information about scripting we encourage you to check out the Sound Forge scripting forum on our Web site at http www sonycreativesoftware com forums showtopics asp forumid 27 Using the Script Editor window From the View menu choose Script Editor to display the Script Editor window You can use the Script Editor window to open run create or edit scripts Script Editor Untitled Ln 1 Col 1 Script Args BH we
215. and you can click the Record or Stop E button to end recording Clicking Pause Il suspends recording clearing the selection and moving the cursor to the end of the recorded data When you pause recording the recording device remains armed Generating MTC SMPTE synchronization during recording Sound Forge software can generate MTC SMPTE synchronization while recording 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the MIDI Sync tab 2 On the MIDI Sync tab choose the trigger device from the Input drop down list and click the OK button 3 From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Generate MIDI Timecode from the submenu to enable MIDI timecode output Click the Record button Click the Advanced tab at the bottom of the Record dialog Select the Enable MTC SMPTE Output Synchronization check box Select the Start check box and specify the time you want to start recording Select the Pre Roll check box and type a value in the edit box to begin SMPTE output at a specified time before recording Click the Close button eo oe S SS 156 CHAPTER 10 Chapter 11 Editing Repairing and Synthesizing Audio This chapter introduces some of the Sound Forge Pro advanced editing repair and synthesis features Overwriting and replicating Earlier in this manual paste and mix were described as ways of adding clipboard contents to the current data window As your audio editing projects become mo
216. anges 2 Select the Send Program Changes command to select instruments in the device from the keyboard Program changes are sent only when a key on the MIDI keyboard is clicked 274 CHAPTER 18 3 Click the up and down arrows to select the MIDI channel you want to use for the selected device Most MIDI devices are configurable to accept MIDI commands on any channel Output channel Keyboard 000 Acoustic Grand Piano Selecting instruments The Instrument drop down list contains instrument patches listed in the General MIDI standard Choose an instrument from the drop down list and click a key on the keyboard to play the patch Notes e The Send Program Changes command must be selected if you want to be able to select instruments Program changes are sent only when a key on the MIDI Keyboard is clicked e If your synthesizer does not use the General MIDI convention choose a patch number instead of an instrument name Playing the keyboard Click the keys to play them e Choose Note from the Chord structure drop down list to play a single note or choose a chord structure or interval to play a chord the key you click will be the chord s root Chord structure drop down list Keyboard 000 Acoustic Grand Piano kd if gt 17 e Drag the Velocity slider to set the MIDI output velocity Keyboard 000 Acoustic Grand Piano 7 if 7 17 Velocity slider MIDI SYNCHRONIZATION 275 e Click the arr
217. annels drop down list the rendered file will contain only 2 audio channels EDITING MULTICHANNEL AUDIO 115 Routing channels to hardware outputs If you re working with multichannel files and have a sound card with multiple outputs Sound Forge provides you with a great deal of flexibility in routing the channels to the outputs on your sound card you can route each channel to a separate output or you can route all the stereo pairs to a single set of outputs to simulate a stereo downmix Channel Meters Left Front Right Front Center LFE Left Rear Right Rear fs Pi B EEENKEKEK LEX EREEREE fay gs s sf fe Re pn The Hardware Meters window displays a meter and gain fader for each enabled output port For more information see Using the hardware meters on page 117 You can change channel assignments from the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or the Channel Meters window Changing the setting in either location updates your preferences and affects all open data windows For information about using the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog to enable and map channels see Audio tab on page 342 To change a channel s output device using the Channel Meters window click the channel number and choose a new output port from the menu Opening and editing multichannel audio files If you ve used Sound Forge to edit stereo files before you already know everything you need to know to edit mul
218. annels except for the one you clicked Level ruler Shows the amplitude of the waveform e Right click to display the level ruler shortcut menu which allows you to change the zoom level and labels e Drag to shift the view up or down when zoomed in vertically 34 CHAPTER 2 CD layout bar The CD layout bar displays information about the tracks you ve created for a disc at once CD Each CD track shows the track s number and length Red indicators are drawn at the right end of the CD layout bar to represent the end of the disc if the disc length is known End of disc indicator You can use the CD layout bar to perform many of the track editing functions from the Track List window For more information see Moving tracks on the CD layout bar on page 315 Level zoom To zoom in and out vertically by small increments click the Level Zoom In Out buttons or click and drag the area between the buttons to zoom quickly Level Zoom In Out buttons Ja KM lt 4 b gt mp Rato o For more information see Zooming and magnifying on page 93 Playbar Use the playbar transport buttons to control playback Button oO Arm Record jq Goto Start Go to Previous Track ppi Go to Next Track p Go to End Description Opens the wave device and loads all recording buffers in order to minimize the amount of time between clicking the Record button and w
219. arts and the active data window is loaded as a new layer in a SpectraLayers project Edit your file as needed in SpectraLayers Pro For information about using SpectraLayers Pro please refer to the application help Save your file in SpectraLayers Pro You ll be prompted to export your changes back to Sound Forge Click Yes and the Sound Forge data window is updated to reflect any changes Sending a file to a layer in SpectraLayers Pro Select a data window or drag the cursor in the data window or marker bar to make a time selection From the Tools menu choose Send to SpectraLayers Pro If SpectraLayers Pro is running the selection is added to the current project as a new layer If SpectraLayers Pro is not running the application starts and the active data window is loaded as a layer in a new project Repeat step 2 as needed to build layers in your SpectraLayers Pro project Edit your file as needed in SpectraLayers Pro For information about using SpectraLayers Pro please refer to the application help When you re done editing you can save your project in SpectraLayers Pro render the mixed output or use Process gt Send to Sound Forge Pro to save your changes EDITING WITH SPECTRALAYERS PRO 305 306 CHAPTER 22 Chapter 23 Burning CDs You can write audio to CD if your system is configured with a supported CD R RW drive and the necessary drivers Understanding track at once and disc at once burning Sound Forge
220. as source media Removing 2 3 pulldown is inefficient because the pulldown fields that are created for frame 3 span two frames 24 fps film top and resulting NTSC video with 2 3 pulldown fields bottom GLOSSARY 375 Use 2 3 3 2 pulldown when you plan to use your rendered video as source media When removing 2 3 3 2 pulldown Sound Forge software simply discards frame three and merges the pulldown fields in the remaining frames 24 fps film top and resulting NTSC video with 2 3 3 2 pulldown fields bottom Pulse Code Modulation PCM PCM is the most common representation of uncompressed audio signals This method of coding yields the highest fidelity possible when using digital storage PCM is the standard format for wav and aif files Q Subcode Compact disc players use the Q channel to display the music playing time The Q channel is broken down into three modes e Mode 1 Contains the running times from both the beginning of the disc total disc time and the beginning of the track track relative time e Mode 2 Identifies the track number who recorded the track where it was recorded and in what year e Mode 3 Identifies UPC media catalog number for the disc A special mode of Q data is stored within the lead in area This Q data contains information on two or four channel format copy protection and pre emphasis Quantization Quantization is the process by which measurements are rounded to discrete values Sp
221. at your files adhere to loudness standards Generating a loudness log when saving a file 1 Use the Save As dialog to save your file 2 Select the Generate Loudness Log check box if you want Sound Forge to analyze the loudness of your file and create a log file that summarizes its loudness values The loudness log is created using the same folder and base name as your sound file with _loud txt appended to the name The log will record the file name format loudness metering mode and loudness values throughout the file Important Loudness logging is performed after the plug in chain but before any codec is applied to your rendered file Because audio compression may affect audio levels choose Tools gt Generate Loudness Log to create a log after saving to a compressed format Select the Enable surround processing for files with 6 channels check box on the Status tab of the Preferences dialog if you want to treat audio with six or more channels as surround audio when measuring loudness a gain of 1 5 dB is applied to the left and right surround channels When the check box is cleared all channels contribute equally to the loudness measurement MONITORING LEVELS IN DIGITAL AUDIO 141 Generating a loudness log for a data window 1 Select the data window you want to analyze Note f no data is selected the entire file is analyzed 2 Choose Tools gt Generate Loudness Log The loudness log is created using the same folder an
222. ate setting in the Save As dialog as long as the number of channels in the source file matches the number of channels in the file you re saving The sample rate will be determined from the source file If you do not always use the same settings for reading raw files make sure the Keep media files locked check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Otherwise the individual settings will be lost if you have multiple raw files open and switch away from the Sound Forge window Click Save As The Save Preset dialog is displayed Enter a name for the preset in the New preset name box and click OK The preset is saved and the Raw File Type dialog is displayed Click OK The file opens Remember that the byte order of files generated by CSOUND is not constant CSOUND executables for PC generate files that use Little Endian byte ordering while CSOUND for other platforms tends to generate files with Big Endian ordering In addition MTU files use Big Endian byte ordering Sony Creative Software Inc recommends initially trying a file in Big Endian Note You may want to save presets for byte ordering as well as mono or multichannel when receiving CSOUND files from a number of source computers Saving files You cannot save these files in their original format You must select a Sound Forge supported file format To save files for use with software that supports the BICSF EBICSF format use the NeXT Sun format This format doe
223. ated frequency changes sound more natural change the fade curve types to change the interpolation rates between envelope points For high to low frequency sweeps use a fast fade curve for low to high frequency sweeps use a slow curve For more information about changing fade curves see Setting fade properties on page 225 Previewing effect automation Effects from the Plug In Chain are previewed in real time when you play back a file To hear the results of your effect automation chain without applying it to the sound file click the Play Normal button i in the data window s playbar You can select the Bypass button im in the Plug In Chain to bypass all effects in the chain or select the Bypass button for an effect to bypass individual effects Applying effect automation Effects from the Plug In Chain are applied when you save the file Showing or hiding effect automation envelopes 1 Inthe Plug In Chain click the Show Parameters button 4 to display the effect s automatable parameters 2 Select the Show Envelope button to display a parameter s envelope or deselect the button to hide the envelope Hiding an envelope simply removes the line from the data window while it retains the playback properties Enabling or bypassing effect automation envelopes 1 Inthe Plug In Chain click the Show Parameters button 8 to display the effect s automatable parameters 2 Select the Enable Envelope button to apply
224. ation but the removed information is not placed on the clipboard For more information see Cutting events on page 173 1 Select the events to be deleted For more information see Selecting events on page 179 2 From the Edit menu choose Delete Clear or press Delete Tip Regions markers and envelope points are deleted with an event To turn this feature off turn off the Lock to Selection gt Markers Regions and Lock Envelope Points commands on the Options menu Trimming events 1 Move the cursor over the edge of an event The cursor changes when properly positioned 5 2 Drag the edge of the event to trim it Note You cannot trim an event beyond the edges of the underlying media Dragging channel boundaries You can drag the top and bottom edges of events if you want to use only a subset of the channels in a multichannel file This method is also useful for duplicating or rearranging channels without using the Channel Converter which always processes the entire file Drag the bottom edge of a multichannel event to hide one or more channels You can quickly restore contiguous channels by dragging the event edge back instead of stepping through undo operations Splitting events Splitting an event allows you to adjust a small part of an event or break a single event into multiple sections that you can edit independently Splitting events at the cursor 1 Select the events you want to split For more infor
225. audio mastering tool consisting of a classic compressor and a volume maximizer The Wave Hammer tool can be used in any Microsoft DirectX compatible host application for example Sound Forge and ACID Pro software and the quality and functionality of the Wave Hammer plug in is the same in each host application however the method of previewing effects is different Consult your host application s documentation to determine the available previewing methods Displaying the Wave Hammer plug in To display the Wave Hammer tool choose Wave Hammer from the Effects menu The Wave Hammer dialog The Wave Hammer controls are divided into two tabs Compressor and Volume Maximizer Compressor tab The controls on the Compressor tab are used to compress the audio signal When applied properly compression reduces the dynamic range of audio and allows you increase overall loudness Compression has various uses For example applying heavy compression at a low threshold to electric guitar produces distortion The controls are explained below Sony Wave Hammer Example music bed Preset Untitled HX SONY Wave Hammer bot Cancel Bypass Compressor Inf Inf 0 0 l Preview 12 0 dB 40 1 0 0dE Scan mode E 3 RMS ea a Pine ey Real time Auto gain compensate pm 2 Use longer look ahead ks f J F Smooth saturation 0 fE ee e Threshold Ratio Output gain input 60 to 0 dB 1 1 to Inf 1 30 to 30 dB Inpu
226. audio with six or more channels as surround audio when measuring loudness a gain of 1 5 dB is applied to the left and right surround channels When the check box is cleared all channels contribute equally to the loudness measurement Select this check box of you want to automatically open loudness log files in your default text editor when you choose Tools gt Generate Loudness Log For more information see Generating a loudness log on page 141 Toolbars tab The Toolbars tab allows you to specify which toolbars you want to display Display or hide toolbars Select the check box to display a toolbar clear a check box to hide a toolbar Display or hide ToolTips Select the Show ToolTips check box if you want to display pop up descriptions when the mouse is held over certain items 340 CHAPTER 25 Customizing a toolbar From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog appears with a list of available toolbars Select the check box for a toolbar and click Customize The Customize Toolbar dialog is displayed Use the controls in the Customize Toolbar dialog to add remove or rearrange the buttons on the selected toolbar Click Reset Ve 2 3 to restore the toolbar to its default setting 4 Click the OK button CD Settings tab The CD Settings tab allows you to specify settings for burning and extracting audio from CDs Item Use strict Red Book specification for DAO validation Use SPTI Direct for CD bur
227. aveforms The maximum true peak sample value and the location where it occurs This value displays the peak level in dB FS Please note that true peaks are calculated using a higher sample rate than the Maximum sample position and Maximum sample value items for increased accuracy The maximum filtered true peak sample value and the location where it occurs This value displays the peak level in dB FS Peak levels may be miscalculated if audio signals are asymmetrical or if a DC offset is present Filtered true peaks are calculated as the maximum of the filtered and unfiltered signals GETTING STARTED 69 Statistical Category Loudness Copy to Clipboard 70 CHAPTER 4 Description Displays loudness statistics about an audio file s momentary loudness short term loudness integrated overall loudness and loudness range You can use these values when mastering for broadcast to ensure compliance with loudness standards such as the CALM Act The following values are calculated The Integrated value represents the integrated loudness in loudness units full scale LUFS across all audio channels over the duration of the program The Loudness Range value represents the loudness range in loudness units LU of the momentary and short term levels The Loudness Range measurement provides a standardized method of determining the dynamic range of the signal The Maximum Short Term value represents the max
228. aylist allows for nondestructive editing and rearranging of asound file quickly and easily Multiple versions of the playlist can be saved in an external playlist file for easy comparison Pre roll Post roll Pre roll is the amount of time elapsed before an event occurs Post roll is the amount of time after the event Pre and post roll have various uses in Sound Forge software Pre roll can be added to a crossfade preview to listen to the sound before the crossfade begins to give context to it Pre roll can also be used in the Playlist to hear previous regions when playback is initiated from the middle of the Playlist Preset A preset calls up a bulk setting of a function in Sound Forge software If you like the way you adjusted the EQ but do not want to have to spend the time getting it back for later use save it as a preset All presets show up in the drop down list on the top of most function dialogs in Sound Forge software Punch In Punching in during recording means automatically starting and stopping recording at user specified times Pulldown In telecine conversion fields are added to convert 24 fps film to 30 fps video In 2 3 pulldown for example the first frame is scanned into two fields the second frame is scanned into three fields and so on for the duration of the film 2 3 pulldown is the standard for NTSC broadcasts of 24p material Use 2 3 pulldown when printing to tape but not when you intend to use the rendered video
229. bar in a data window to be updated when you mark the beginning or end of a selection When the check box is cleared the loop bar isn t updated until you ve marked both ends of the selection Fine tuning a selection After creating a selection you may discover that the start or end point has not been positioned properly In cases like this you can try to reselect the data but it can be difficult to accurately create selection points For this reason you have a number of tools designed to help you fine tune selections If you find that the selection jumps unexpectedly as you fine tune it snapping may be turned on For more information see Enable Snapping on page 100 Adjusting a selection with the mouse You can fine tune selection start and end points by dragging the edge of the selection to a new location 1 Opena file and create a selection in the waveform 2 Position the mouse pointer over one of the selection edges The pointer is displayed as a bi directional arrow 4 3 Drag the selection edge to a new position BB Example music bed o fmt Se BB Example music bed o km 00 00 01 338 00 00 03 356 00 00 02 018 iq i gt 00 00 01 338 00 00 05 518 00 00 04 180 Drag the edge of the selection to a new position 4 Release the mouse button The selection is updated Adjusting a selection with the keyboard Using the keyboard you can quickly and accurately select data or update a selection F
230. board from the shortcut menu 126 CHAPTER 8 Locking loop and region lengths From the Options menu choose Lock Loop Region Length to force the length of a region to remain constant when changing the start or end time of a region or loop Tip When this option is not selected you can hold the Alt key while dragging region markers 4 to lock the length of a region To move a loop without changing its length drag the bar between the loop markers Clearing markers and regions From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Clear All from the submenu to remove all markers and regions from the current file This command will also clear the Playlist Cutlist window Tip Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All or Delete All in Selection from the submenu Using commands From the Insert menu choose Command to place a metadata command marker at the current cursor position Command markers indicate when an instruction function will occur in a streaming media file You can use command markers to display headlines captions link to Web sites or any other function you define Important Windows Media Player 9 and later will ignore metadata commands unless the Run script commands when present check box is selected on the Security tab of the player s Preferences dialog Be sure to instruct your audience to select this check box before playing your file Inserting a command marker 1 Place the
231. c ccc cee eee e eee eee eee e eee eeeeees 294 Using Spectrum ANGI SIS naindnacing pessan depi Er A a a a 295 Working in the frequency domain susususuesesenesesesesoroesereseseseserese 295 Fast FOULED Trans ONT sn lt 06 erru AR E AETR AE ATEREA 295 Using a spectrum graph ses sersisirersersrn rrera riaren Kerm eee eee eee eee eee eeeeees 296 Displaying a spectrum graph sssessesesessssesessesesoeseseserersesesorsesoreesesese 296 Monitoring an input and output source s ssessessesessecseesessossessesseserseesee 297 Viewing frequency and amplitude values notes and statistics ccc cece eee eee ees 297 Navigating a spectrum Graph cece cece cece eee eee e nent eee eeeeees 298 Changing the graph type s lt cseswscacs Er rren NSARE ARTER TOA 0ea teens aneeeiewuses 298 Changing the zoom level of the graph ccc ccc cece eee eee eeeneeeeneees 298 Synchronizing graphs in a multichannel file 0 c ccc eet eee n eee ene eeeeeee 298 Updating a spectrum graph 0 ccc cece cece ene eee teen eee eee eee iesise arsenaus 298 Viewing multiple spectrum graphs ccc ccc ccc cece tee ence eee nent nent eeeenees 299 Creating and comparing snapshots of the Spectrum Analysis window eee ees 299 PRIMING ANE O O 2t4snreounuae seu ueteeterncamsiadee aia nattderesercen eau ee netaeieues 300 SING a SONO eare rar er EEEE EEEE E AS AAEE AAEE EEES 300 Displaying a sonogram lt cccaensicdsed lt ew sa
232. c cece eee eee eeeeeneenes 107 Changing the bit depth cece cece cece cette eee e eee e tent ee eee eeeeenaenes 108 Increasing Dit depth 2 0 ccc cece eee eee ee ee ee eee E e eee eee e ee eeeeenees 108 Decreasing DIDCEDUN cccacenuscouaran neice neciearsa a couteneesiaesaaeudetaneebasuduerogeers 108 Understanding dither and noise Shaping ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eeeeeeees 109 Minimizing QUANTIZATION error 1 ccc cece een eee eee e eee e ete eee eeeeeeeeee 109 Converting mono stereo cChannels cece cece cece cee eee e eee e eee eee eeees 111 Converting from MONO tO stereo cc cee eee eee ee ne eee eee e ee eeeneeneees 111 Converting from stereo tO MONO cece ccc cence eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeneeneees 111 Using the Channel Converte icc scwscwnitaereerwawateeeeeewoniadeneeewskaie weed wetaeieuwn 112 CONVEMING TIE TOMNNIALS 4c5085cineaeevonnsesdtcdoneataduiiecsanseaasav etka eesat hans 112 Adding summary information 0c ccc cece cence eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 112 Viewing and editing summary information cc ccc cece cece cent eee e nee eeeennes 112 Saving summary information ccc cee eee nee eee eee e eee eee eeeeeeneeeee 113 Including additional embedded information cc ccc ccc cc ee eee e een enenes 113 Editing Multichannel Audio cc ccc cece cece eee e eee e cece eeeeeees 115 Routing channels to hardware OUtTPUtS ce ccc ccc cc ccc cec
233. c is pointed 90 degrees away from the source to record the stereo image For proper playback on most systems MS recordings must be converted to your standard left right also called AB track MIDI See Musical Instrument Device Interface MIDI on page 374 MIDI Channels MIDI allows for 16 discrete channels for sending data When dealing with MIDI triggers Sound Forge software needs to know what MIDI channel to look at for receiving the trigger The channel this information is sent to in Sound Forge software depends on the device sending the MIDI messages MIDI Clock A MIDI device specific timing reference It is not absolute time like MIDI Time Code MTC instead it is a tempo dependent number of ticks per quarter note MIDI clock is convenient for synchronizing devices that need to perform tempo changes mid song MIDI Controllers MIDI controllers are a specific type of MIDI message Sound Forge software can use MIDI controllers to trigger events and playback of sound files Consult your MIDI sending device to see what controller messages it sends MIDI Notes MIDI notes are a specific type of MIDI message Sound Forge software can use MIDI notes to trigger events and playback of sound files Any MIDI sequencer or controller will send MIDI notes MIDI Port A MIDI port is the physical MIDI connection on a piece of MIDI hardware This port can be a MIDI in out or through Your computer must have a MIDI capable card to output
234. captioning window that is defined by an HTML layout file WMTextBodyText Windows Media Displays the text from the Parameter box in the text window that is defined by an HTML layout file WMtTextHeadline Windows Media Displays the text from the Parameter box in the headline window that is defined by an HTML layout file 5 Inthe Position box type the time you want the command to occur in your project The command is inserted at the cursor position by default B Example music bed a foe Ex 2 URL http www sonyoeativesoftware com z amp AE 00 00 00 l lt m W e lehia COK HA Be lt 40 00 00 03 273 00 00 02 510 1 956 Deleting a command marker Right click the command marker tag F and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Editing a command marker e Right click the command marker tag F and choose Edit from the shortcut menu e Double click the command marker tag Moving the cursor to a command marker Click the command marker tag F Using command templates If you frequently insert commands that use similar settings you can create a template to insert command settings automatically Creating a template 1 From the Insert menu choose Command to display the Command Properties dialog 2 Enter the settings you want to use in the Command Parameter and Position boxes 3 Inthe Template box enter the name you want to use to store the template 4 Click the Save button 128 CHAPTER 8 R
235. cc ccc ccc ee eee eee eee e eee ee eee eeenes 53 Playlist window Ctrl Alt M 1 22a scvevsewwednnee Ws8 oea enwewewaeedeewer seesaw deswanew ees 53 8 TABLE OF CONTENTS Track List window Ctrl AIt M 2 ccc cc cc ccc ce cc cece cee eee e teen eeceteeeteeeneenees 54 ACID Properties window Ctrl Alt M 3 0 0 0 ccc cece cece e cece ence eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeannes 54 Broadcast Wave window Ctrl Alt M 4 0 0 cc ccc ccc ccc cece cence eee e eee e ee en eens 55 CD Information window Ctrl Alt M 5 2 0 cc cece ccc cece nee e tenet e ee eeeeeneeees 56 Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee eee e eee e ee eeeteeeeeees 57 Summary Information window Ctrl AIt M 7 0 0 ccc ccc cece cee e nee eee e nent enne tenes 58 Getting Stated coscce iine a I4 now ekwad iweheeedwe sd diwndasdhawedsdedmareaudews 61 creating a proje Ci esera tan ea iaa e E cedseukdaecoeusaeseesewaaeeuteeeaes 61 GCN GO WeGIA GS arnie E R TEERAA N 61 Using the Open dialog snennnusnsnnsnnsnesessessessessereesorsorsorressrssessesrrsrese 62 Using the Expl rer WINGOW irisrererripris kri Coinn rri N EEEE 63 e e E E E E E E E E E ereeneueees 66 Working with video files onunusnnnusunnesuenesuenerrrreroereserresrrresrerese 66 PEV O a A E AEAEE E E E E E E EE E E EEE E E E E 66 VIEWING the current POSITION esarri rsen ranri N EEEE 66 Data window scrolling during playback ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee e nent eeeenes 67
236. ccessful Test only Performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD Close disc Closes your disc without adding any audio when you click the Start button Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player Erase RW disc Erases your rewritable CD when you click the Start button You should use this option if your rewritable CD already has data on it 3 Select your burning options Option Description Buffer underrun protection Select this check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning Erase RW disc before burning If you re using a rewritable CD select this check box to erase the CD before you begin burning if your rewritable CD already has data on it Close disc when done burning Select this check box to close the CD after burning Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player Note You can close the disc using a separate step later For more information see Closing a CD on page 309 Eject disc when done Select this check box to eject the CD automatically when burning has completed Burn selection only Select this check box to burn only the audio within the loop region 4 From the Drive drop down list choose the CD R RW drive that you want to use to burn your CD 5 From the Speed drop down list choo
237. ce the script you edited or click the Save As button to save the edited script with a different name or in a different location Using the Scripting toolbar Adding or removing toolbar buttons 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog appears with a list of available toolbars 2 Select the Scripting check box Preferences Toolbars W Standard E Transport Navigation E Views E Status Selection E Regions Playiist Process E Tools E Levels E ACID Loop Creation Tools Edl Scripting Customize W Show Tool Tips 3 Click Customize The Customize Toolbar dialog appears 4 Use the controls in the Customize Toolbar dialog to add remove or rearrange the buttons on the selected toolbar All scripts from the Script Menu folder are listed in the Available tools column If you want to Then Add a script to the toolbar Select a script in the Available tools column and click the Add button Note The script will appear before the currently selected button Remove a script from the toolbar Select a script in the Current tools column and click the Remove button Rearrange the buttons Select a script in the Current tools column and click the Move Up or Move Down button Restore the toolbar to its default setting Click the Reset button 5 Click the OK button USING SCRIPTING 253 Creating custom button images You can display custom button images for the scripts tha
238. ch 164 CHAPTER 11 4 From the Tools menu choose Repair and choose Interpolate from the submenu The glitch data is replaced with interpolated data B sound L frg Data is interpolated within the selection Replacing audio with preceding data The Replace tool allows you to repair audio files by replacing the damaged data with the data immediately preceding it This repair method is useful for repairing longer glitches such as needle drops and scratches 1 Open the file containing the glitch 2 Create a5 to 50 ms selection containing the damaged audio Note The maximum allowed replace time is 0 5 seconds 3 From the Tools menu choose Repair and choose Replace from the submenu The selection is replaced with the selection of identical length immediately preceding the damaged data In addition rapid crossfades are created at the beginning and end of the replacement selection to prevent a new glitch from being created E sound L frg 00 00 00 000 Replacement data Selection data Repairing audio glitches manually with the Pencil tool The Pencil tool is for users who prefer to repair their audio glitches manually This tool allows you to repair waveform glitches by redrawing the damaged waveform section However the Pencil tool can only be used when a file s waveform displays at a zoom ratio of 1 32 or lower 1 Open the file containing the glitch 2 Zoom in tightly on the glitch 3 Select the Pencil tool u
239. ch frequency component in the sonogram is represented by the color intensity of each point in the graph This method of displaying spectral information is useful for identifying distinctive spectral patterns created from sounds such as speech musical instruments and ambient noise Displaying a sonogram 1 Open an audio file and select the portion of the waveform you want to analyze The sound or note you want to analyze should be in the center of the highlighted area Note Analyzing long sections of audio can take a long time and decreases the time resolution so your selection should be relatively short Also if the audio has a low amplitude level you can boost it by using the Volume or Normalize functions For more information see Volume on page 204 and Normalize on page 196 2 From the View menu choose Spectrum Analysis The Spectrum Analysis dialog is displayed 3 Click the Sonogram button to display your data as a sonogram 4 Use the toolbar at the top of the window to set your other display options Tip You can also click the Settings button in the Spectrum Analysis window to set additional options 300 CHAPTER 21 If there is no selection in the waveform display window the sonogram analyzes the sound data from the current cursor position to the end of the file Displaying frequency and amplitude values notes and statistics As you move the cursor through the sonogram the amplitude and frequency values at
240. ck OK Note f you save to a file type that doesn t support metadata this check box is unavailable Including additional embedded information Some file formats allow non text data such as embedded bitmaps and metafiles to be embedded in files If you use the Sound Forge software to edit a file containing data created in another application Sound Forge software tracks the embedded data and places it back in the file when it is saved in its original format Saving additional embedded information To save additional embedded information choose Save As from the File menu and select the Save metadata with file check box If the file type does not support metadata you are prompted to save the metadata in an external file with an sfl extension Removing additional embedded information To save a file without additional embedded information choose Save As from the File menu and clear the Save metadata with file check box CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 113 114 CHAPTER 6 Chapter 7 Editing Multichannel Audio With Sound Forge Pro software you can edit multichannel audio files in the same way you work with mono or stereo files Sound Forge software supports multichannel files in the following formats Dolby AC 3 ac3 AC 3 is available as a render format only Raw Audio raw Sony AVC mp4 m2ts avc Sony Wave 4 w64 Wave wav Video For Windows avi specifically DV SDI Windows Media Audio Vi
241. ck the Cut button 44 The selected data is removed from the file and placed on the clipboard Wow sound editing o eE Wow Silence FREI sound editing just gets easier EG And easier a AE 00 00 00 000 00 01 00 00 03 000 l lt in O K 4 OE lt o gt 00 00 01 476 1 398 3 Click the Play All button I Wow Sound editing just gets easier and easier plays back GETTING STARTED 81 Previewing a cut You can preview cuts prior to performing the edit This option allows you to determine if you made the selection accurately and if the results are desirable by playing the data before and after the current selection 1 Create a selection anywhere in Voiceover pca 2 From the Transport menu choose Preview Cut Cursor or press Ctrl K The selection is ignored and the audio before and after the selection is played to allow you to preview the cut Notes To set the amount of pre and post roll that will be played when you preview a cut choose Preferences from the Options menu and choose the Previews tab Type values in the Pre roll and Post roll boxes in the Cut preview configuration section of the dialog If there is no selection the playback will pre and post roll around the cursor position Configuring cut pre roll and post roll lengths Frequently the default pre roll and post roll lengths are insufficient to evaluate the accuracy of an edit For this reason you can con
242. click OK The Views toolbar appears Views X 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Creating views 1 Open the Voiceover pca file and create a selection containing Wow 2 Click the Set button on the Views toolbar A view can now be created 3 Click the 1 button 1 The selection is saved as view 1 and the 1 button 1 is underscored to indicate that a view was created Create a new selection anywhere in the audio file preferably at an increased magnification Click the Set button 6 followed by the 2 button 2 The selection is saved as view 2 Click the 1 button 1 The view 1 selection is used ew a Click the 2 button 2 The view 2 selection is used 104 CHAPTER 5 Chapter 6 Changing File Properties and Formats This chapter deals with the supported file properties and formats in Sound Forge Pro software and discusses file summary information Editing file properties When you open or create a file its properties are displayed in the first four boxes of the status bar at the bottom of the Sound Forge workspace The file properties are sample rate bit depth channels and length 44 100 Hz 16bit Stereo 00 45 08 906 00 28 51 093 11 697 0 MB Sample Rate BitDepth Channels Total Length CD Time Remaining Free Storage Notes The CD Time Remaining box is displayed only when CD tracks exist in the active data window You can use the CD Settings tab in the Preferences dialog to specify whether the soft
243. clicking on the hash marks in a fader also changes the value by very small increments Spin Control Use the up down buttons or type a value in the edit box to change the setting 0 00 5 Tips e Click the button between the up down buttons and drag the mouse to change the setting in large increments Hold down both mouse buttons or hold down the Control key to fine tune a control s value You can use the Up Down arrow and Page Up Page Down keys to alter the value Drop Down List Click the drop down list and choose an item If you have to scroll through a large list click the scroll buttons or use the arrow keys aad iii Tip Ifyou scroll down the drop down list for a preset you can see all of the parameters change for each preset This is useful for getting a feel for which Mastering Vocals parameters are used to create different effects WORKING WITH EFFECTS 219 Control Button Radio Button Check Box Envelope Graph 220 CHAPTER 14 Description Click a button or press the spacebar while it is selected Radio buttons always come in groups of two or more where you can select only one option When you select a radio button the previously selected button is turned off Click a check box to select it You can click a selected check box to clear it An envelope allows you to change a sound over time e Drag the small boxes envelope points up or down e To create a new envelope point click the envelope
244. commands You can access these commands from the View menu by choosing Zoom Level and choosing the desired command from the submenu Command Description Out Full Decreases the zoom level to minimize the display of the file s amplitude Window Changes the level zoom to display the entire waveform amplitude in the data window Selection Maximizes the display of the selection vertically and horizontally in the data window Formatting the level ruler You can configure the level ruler to appear in decibels or percent by right clicking the ruler and choosing Label in Percent or Label in dB from the shortcut menu Using custom zoom settings You can create two custom time zoom settings for quick access to time magnification levels that you use frequently Creating custom zoom settings 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Display tab 3 Select time magnification settings from the Custom zoom ratio 1 and Custom zoom ratio 2 drop down lists 4 Click OK Zooming to custom settings From the View menu choose Zoom Time and choose a custom zoom setting from the submenu Tip You can also click a Custom Zoom button or amp on the Navigation toolbar or press 1 or 2 on the numeric keypad NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 95 Using zooming shortcuts Zooming to a selection 1 Create a selection If no selection is created the Zoom Selection function is not available
245. components and do not overdrive the speakers Error message explanations The following sections briefly describe Acoustic Mirror error messages that you may encounter The selected file is not a valid test file The file specified in the Test file used box is not a test tone file included on the Sound Forge application disc USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 243 The level of the first spike is low Do you wish to use it as a timing spike This typically means that no actual timing spike was detected Verify that the first spike is within one second of the start of the recorded file If the recording is noisy and the spike is not very pronounced you can aid detection by muting the audio immediately before and after the spike An error occurred reading the test tone file Either the test tone file was not found or is not a valid test tone file Always use a test tone file provided on the Sound Forge application disc The selected Recorded file is much smaller than the test tone size This may indicate that the test tone or the recorded file specified in the Recover tab is not correct Verify that the length of the recorded file roughly the same size as the test tone file The end spike was not found Verify that the spike following the test tone is present in the recorded file when recovering impulses in Auto detect timing spikes mode 244 CHAPTER 15 What is the Wave Hammer plug in The Wave Hammer DirectX plug in is an
246. criptions in status bar 47 compressing audio 110 configuring MIDI keyboard 267 plug ins on achain 211 controls envelope graphs 49 50 faders 48 mouse shortcuts 358 sliders 48 converting file formats 112 mono to stereo 111 mono to stereo or multichannel 189 stereo to mono 111 190 converting markers to regions 123 Copy button 40 Copy Other Channel button 46 copying audio to clipboard 79 current video frame 290 custom rendering templates between computers and users 75 data to new files 71 events 173 regions to clipboard 126 track lists to clipboard 320 Count column in Playlist 131 Crash Recovery dialog 89 creating CD tracks from events 311 CD tracks from files 312 314 CD tracks from regions 312 CDs See disc at once CD burning track at once CD burning custom templates 74 data windows 71 events 171 files from Playlist 133 markers for each index change in extracted CD track 76 pan envelopes 198 presets 182 projects 61 regions for each extracted CD track 76 release loops 278 sampler configurations 260 sustaining loops 277 views 104 Crop button See Trim Crop button cropping audio 83 185 186 Crossfade Loop button 46 Crossfade Loop tool 282 crossfade types 176 crossfading events 176 CSOUND 363 cue sheets See track lists Cursor Center button 42 cursor position 91 moving to command markers 128 Cursor to Selection End button 42 Cursor to Selection Start button 42 Custom
247. cting 122 splitting 125 174 triggering using MIDI commands 122 updating position 124 Regions List changing region order 129 copying to clipboard 130 opening Regions List files 130 overview 53 saving to file 130 viewing 129 Regions List button 43 Regions List files opening 130 saving 130 Regions Playlist toolbar 43 release loops creating 278 defined 277 Remember last used Save As folder 331 renaming effects plug ins 207 markers 119 regions 122 Render As dialog 40 72 74 rendering creating custom settings 74 saving project path 78 reordering CD tracks 315 318 repairing audio Audio Restoration plug in 166 copying the other channel 164 interpolating audio 164 replacing with preceding audio 165 using Pencil tool 165 Repeat button 40 repeating an operation 159 Replace button 46 replacing glitches 165 replicating audio 158 regions in Playlist 131 replicating markers or regions 125 Resample button 44 Resample process 200 201 INDEX 393 resampling downsampling 200 upsampling 200 resetting clipping indicators 136 default keyboard map 347 envelopes 50 fader values 48 slider values 48 Resonant Filter effect 45 230 restoring selections 99 Reverb effect 45 231 Reverse process 44 203 reviewing recordings 145 147 Rewind button 41 RMS Root Mean Sqaure level 69 rotating audio 44 286 routing channels to hardware outputs 116 137 sample files 25 sample rat
248. ction For more information see Reverse on page 203 Rotate Audio Moves the current selection to the opposite end of the file For more information see Rotating audio on page 286 Smooth Enhance Opens the XFX Smooth Enhance tool For more information click the Help button B in the process dialog Time Stretch Opens the XFX Time Stretch tool For more information click the Help button B in the process dialog lastique Timestretch Opens the lastique Timestretch tool For more information click the Help button B inthe process dialog Volume Adjusts the volume of an audio file For more information see Volume on page 204 Effects toolbar The Effects toolbar contains buttons corresponding to all Sound Forge built in XFX plug ins ANE i Acoustic Mirror Adds environmental coloration to your existing recordings For more information see What are the Acoustic Mirror effects on page 233 Amplitude Modulation Applies a sinusoidal or square shaped periodic gain to the input signal For more information click the Help button E in the effect dialog Chorus Simulates multiple audio sources from a single sound For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Multi Tap Delay Creates a delay with up to eight delay taps spaced anywhere within 2 5 seconds of the original sound For more information click the Help button B in the effect dialog Simple Delay Adds a delayed copy
249. ction button i in the Plug In Chain to apply the effect Renaming a plug in You can customize the names of plug ins within the software 1 2 Right click a plug in in the Plug In Manager and choose Rename from the shortcut menu Type a new name and press Enter WORKING WITH EFFECTS 207 Hiding a plug in All DirectX plug ins on your system are automatically available to you You may want to hide a plug in within the software without removing the plug in from your system 1 Right click a plug in in the Plug In Manager and choose Hide from the shortcut menu You are prompted to confirm that you want to permanently hide the plug in 2 Click Yes The plug in no longer appears in Sound Forge software Tip To restore hidden plug ins you can force Sound Forge to rescan your system for plug ins by deleting the HKEY_CURRENT_USER Software Sony Creative Software Sound Forge Pro 1 1 0 DXCache key in the Windows Registry Organizing effects in the FX Favorites menu The FX Favorites menu provides easy access to the plug ins you use most frequently You can add and remove plug ins and folders to organize the menu however you like You can also automatically add all plug ins on your system to the menu For more information see Automatically adding and organizing plug ins on page 208 Once you add a plug in to the FX Favorites menu you can apply the plug in to a file by selecting it from the menu For more information see Adding effects
250. ction or even to apply an effects chain to a different data window From the View menu choose Plug In Chain Choose a preset from the Chain drop down list to load an existing chain or add the desired plug ins to the chain For more information see Adding a plug in from the Plug In Chooser on page 210 Choose which of the chain s plug ins you want to apply e Select an effect s Bypass button im to prevent the audio signal from being sent through the plug in This is useful for isolating certain plug ins without removing others from the chain e Deselect the Bypass button for each plug in you want to apply to your signal Adjust each plug in s properties as desired For more information see Setting a plug in s properties on page 211 WORKING WITH EFFECTS 209 Adding removing or arranging plug ins on a chain Adding a plug in from the Plug In Chooser 1 Click the Add Plug Ins to Chain button t in the Plug In Chain window The Plug In Chooser window appears 2 Select each plug in you want to add and then click the Add button or browse to an effects package The plug ins appear at the top of the window in the order you added them Tips You can also double click a plug in in the Plug In Chooser to add it to the chain To reorder the plug ins within the chain simply drag a plug in button to a new location or click the Shift Plug In Left or Shift Plug In Right buttons Plug In Chooser o Disto
251. cursor appears 2 Drag the handle to the desired position t i M TN M a AA Tg i ai 1 I 1 Hij i ml n TA W ddai aiis Vuai RTE PTT atd uiia k Ji ERIE EF TARN TE dak al Events without crossfade Events with manual crossfade 176 CHAPTER 12 Changing crossfade curves You can change the crossfade curves that are used to fade in and out between two events Right click a crossfade to choose a different crossfade curve KIX X y XN NADI KMKK KEK K 7 EFS X lt P a So o lt 1 Right click anywhere in the crossfade region to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose Fade Type and then choose the desired fade type from the submenu Using event envelopes ASR You can apply envelopes to individual events Envelopes also known as ASRs attack sustain and release give you the ability to control an event s fade in fade out and overall volume level When you create an event handles are added that are used to set the envelope As you drag these handles on events a volume envelope appears indicating how the event is being affected Envelope handles 7 Event envelope r Setting an event s volume When you place the mouse pointer at the top of an event the pointer changes to a hand cursor t that you can use to lower the event s overall volume 1 Place the mouse pointer a
252. cy bands When a high number of frequency bands are used the bands have a smaller bandwidth which allows for more accurate frequency readings File Associations This dialog allows you to associate sound file extensions such as wav au snd etc with Sound Forge software This dialog is opened from the File tab of the Preferences dialog File Format A file format specifies the way in which data is stored In Windows the most common audio file format is the Microsoft wav format For information on the different file formats supported by Sound Forge software click here Frame Rate Audio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synchronizing to video or other audio To synchronize with audio a rate of 30 non drop is typically used To synchronize with video 30 drop is usually used Frequency Modulation FM Frequency Modulation FM is a process by which the frequency pitch of a sound is varied over time Subaudio frequency modulation results in pitch bending effects vibrato Frequency modulation within audio band frequencies 20 Hz 20 000 Hz creates many different side band frequencies that drastically alter the timbre of the sound Frequency Modulation FM Synthesis This type of synthesis relies on the principles of Frequency Modulation The FM Synthesis tool allows you to use frequency modulation FM and additive synthesis to create complex sounds from simple waveforms In frequency modulation the frequency of a
253. d 30 frames per second Sound Card The sound card is the audio interface between your computer and the outside world It is responsible for converting analog signals to digital and vice versa There are many sound cards available on the market today covering the spectrum of quality and price Sound Forge software will work with any Windows compatible sound card Status Format The status format is the format by which Sound Forge software displays the time ruler and selection times These include Time Seconds Frames and all Standard SMPTE frame rates The status format is set for each sound file individually Streaming A method of data transfer in which a file is played while it is downloading Streaming technologies allow Internet users to receive data as a steady continuous stream after a brief buffering period Without streaming users would have to download files completely before playback GLOSSARY 379 Telecine The process of creating 30 fps video television from 24 fps film cinema See also Inverse Telecine IVTC on page 372 Pulldown on page 375 Tempo Tempo is the rhythmic rate of a musical composition usually specified in beats per minute BPM Threshold A threshold determines the level at which the signal processor begins acting on the signal During normalization levels above this threshold are attenuated Time Format The format by which Sound Forge software displays the time ruler and selection ti
254. d and the compression ratio is 3 1 the resulting signal is 1 dB louder than the threshold Compression Ratio file size The ratio of the size of the original uncompressed file to the compressed contents For example a 3 1 compression ratio means that the compressed file is one third the size of the original Computer ID Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate An activation number is created based on that number Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID it is important that you have Sound Forge software installed on the computer where you will be using it The Computer ID is automatically detected and provided to you when you install the software Note The Computer ID is used for registration purposes only It doesn t give Sony access to any personal information and can t be used for any purpose other than for generating a unique activation number for you to use the software See also Activation Number on page 365 368 APPENDIX E Crossfade Mixing two pieces of audio by fading one out as the other fades in Crossfade Loop Sometimes a sample loop cannot be easily created from the given source material In these instances a crossfade can be applied to the beginning and end of the loop to aid in the smooth transition between the two The Crossfade Loop function provides a method of creating sampling loops in material that is otherwise difficult to loop Cutoff frequency The cutoff freque
255. d base name as your sound file with _loud txt appended to the name The log will record the file name format loudness metering mode and loudness values throughout the selection or file If the Open editor when new loudness log is generated check box is selected on the Status tab in the Preferences dialog the log will be automatically opened in your default text editor Important Select the Enable surround processing for files with 6 channels check box on the Status tab of the Preferences dialog if you want to treat audio with six or more channels as surround audio when measuring loudness a gain of 1 5 dB is applied to the left and right surround channels When the check box is cleared all channels contribute equally to the loudness measurement 142 CHAPTER 9 Chapter 10 Recording Sound Forge Pro can record audio into multiple audio channels while simultaneously playing back existing audio tracks You are limited only by the performance of your computer system and audio hardware Tip You can use the Stereo Recording window layout to optimize the Sound Forge Pro interface for recording For more information see Loading default window layouts on page 327 Creating a new recording After you ve connected an audio source and verified your recording setup you re ready to start recording audio When you click the Arm or Record button when no data windows are open Sound Forge Pro creates a new window automatically using the
256. d marker properties 128 file properties 105 112 loops 279 282 multichannel audio 115 118 multichannel audio files 116 Playlist Cutlist regions 132 effects adding a chain of effects 209 Amplitude Modulation 45 226 applying 205 applying automation 224 applying in Event mode 178 applying in multichannel files 205 automatically organizing 208 automating 223 bypassing effects on a chain 212 224 Chorus 45 227 configuring plug ins on a chain 211 Delay Echo 227 Distortion 45 227 Dynamics 227 Envelope 45 227 229 Flange Wah Wah 45 229 FX Favorites menu 208 Gapper Snipper 45 229 Graphic Dynamics 45 227 hiding 208 loading saved chains 211 loading saved presets 211 Multi Band Dynamics 45 227 Multi Tap Delay 45 227 Noise Gate 45 229 Pitch Bend 45 229 230 Pitch Shift 45 230 Plug In Manager 206 Preset Manager 226 previewing automation 224 removing plug ins from chains 210 renaming 207 Resonant Filter 45 230 Reverb 45 231 saving chains 212 saving settings as a preset 213 saving settings as presets 206 Simple Delay 45 227 toolbar 45 Vibrato 45 231 lastique Timestretch process 44 203 See also Time Stretch process embedding additional information in files 113 Envelope effect 45 227 229 envelope graphs adding points 50 225 changing fade curves 49 clearing all points 50 deleting all points 50 deleting points 50 displaying multichannel waveforms 50 displaying wavef
257. d position in the data window Previewing audio with pre roll Many audio editing operations depend upon accurate placement of the cursor in the data window The Pre roll to Cursor command allows you to preview audio data leading up to the current cursor position This command is extremely useful when recording punch ins For more information see Generating MTC SMPTE synchronization during recording on page 156 A 1 5 second pre roll is automatically designated However you can change this value if necessary For more information see Configuring cut pre roll and post roll lengths on page 82 1 Place the cursor anywhere in the data window 2 From the Transport menu choose Pre roll to Cursor or press Ctrl Shift K Sound Forge software plays the audio leading up to the cursor and stops at the cursor NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 91 Scrubbing Scrubbing is a type of timeline playback that gives you precise control over the speed and direction of playback Both linear and logarithmic scale scrubbing are allowed Tip Choose a setting from the JKL shuttle speed drop down list on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog to control the scrub speed and range when using the keyboard or multimedia controllers Scrubbing with the scrub control slider The scrub control slider 4 located at the bottom of the data window can be dragged back and forth The farther from the center that the slider is dragged the faster the playback bo
258. d recording system to produce optimal results Microphone placement is crucial to the quality of the impulse The distance between the speakers and the microphone is the perceived distance of audio processed with the impulse you create For example if you record the test tone with the speakers positioned 100 feet from the microphones all sounds processed with the resulting impulse sound as if they are originating 100 feet from the listener 238 CHAPTER 15 Setting levels After the devices are positioned you should begin playback of the test tone The test tone should be played as loudly as possible or practical to produce the best signal to noise ratio With the test tone playing at optimum volume set the levels on the recording device Recording devices levels should also be set as high as possible but not permitted to clip or distort Safe levels are determined by whether you are recording to an analog or digital medium Recording the test tone Begin recording on the recording device and begin playback of the test tone Remember to include the spikes at the beginning and end of the test tone Record the test tone several times using the initial setup then move the microphones and record the test tones several more times Continue moving the microphones and recording until you have exhausted the space s acoustic possibilities Recording impulses in this manner provides you with several distinct impulses for each space Recording the impu
259. d then choose a command from the submenu to change the pitch of a selection Bend The Bend command allows you to draw an envelope that increases or decreases the pitch of a sound file over time 1 From the Effects menu choose Pitch and then choose Bend from the submenu The Pitch Bend dialog appears Pitch Bend Example music bed Preset id baal x Semitones Cancel 5 Preview Bypass ro Range 0 25 4b DI Fo 75 3 100 To 24 E Preserve original duration 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Drag the Range slider to determine the maximum and minimum pitch change in semitones half steps Example A range of twelve half steps one octave allows an increase or decrease of the pitch by an octave WORKING WITH EFFECTS 229 3 Adjust the envelope to achieve the desired sound e Drag the small envelope points up or down e Tocreate a new envelope point double click the envelope e To delete an envelope point right click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu e Tochange the fade curve between two points right click an envelope segment and choose a command from the shortcut menu Fade Type Fade In Out Envelope Linear Fade rs Fast Fade NO S Slow Fade Smooth Fade Sharp Fade Hold LPP e To move all envelope points press Ctrl A and drag when the envelope has focus The cursor will be displayed as a hand hy Note You can create up to 16 envelope points Click
260. d to SpectraLayers Pro Click to open the active data window as a layer in SpectraLayers Pro When you re done editing you can save your project in SpectraLayers Pro render the mixed output or use Process gt Send to Sound Forge Pro to save your changes For more information see Editing with SpectraLayers Pro on page 305 Levels toolbar The Levels toolbar displays the audio levels in the left and right channels in the user specified format You can right click to choose the format from a shortcut menu fff J92 Left channel level Right channel level Scripting toolbar The Scripting toolbar allows you to show hide or activate the Script Editor and display the Batch Converter window You can also add buttons for scripts to the toolbar For more information see Using the Scripting toolbar on page 253 Script Editor Allows you to create edit or run scripts For Batch Converter Allows you to modify and manipulate more information see Using the Script Editor window on multiple audio files without having to process each file page 249 individually For more information see Using the Batch Converter on page 255 ToolTips Using ToolTips Hovering the mouse pointer over a button or status bar box for longer than one second displays a small text box adjacent to the pointer This text called a ToolTip is a brief description of the item s function Using ToolTips is an effective way to quickly familiarize yourself with featur
261. dates e From the Options menu choose Time Display and choose Passive Update from the submenu e From the Options menu choose Video and choose Passive Update from the submenu Audio and video synchronization If your video has been opened from a slow device such as a CD ROM or network drive Sound Forge Pro may have trouble accurately playing back the audio and video in sync You should always copy your video files to a fast hard drive Following are tips that can help when trying to synchronize the audio and video e After assembling or editing the audio you wish to use with your video place markers during video playback to correspond to any major synchronization points You can locate a particular frame by dragging the cursor along the audio if the Video Preview window is open or the Animate Video Strip option is enabled After primary locations have been identified drag your audio to these markers to mix paste and crossfade audio OPTIMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 325 Features such as Insert Silence Delete Clear and Time Stretch are commonly used to correct synchronization Another useful trick is to create a region representing the offset between a video frame and audio event Then you can enable Lock Loop Region Length and drag the offset region to a preceding silent section Use the region as a template for adjusting the audio stream length either copying and pasting to insert time or deleting to remove time For more informati
262. ded If Then Your source media does not Choose a setting from the If project format is invalid for DV output conform to the conform to DV standards following drop down list The video is automatically adjusted to display properly on your external monitor Your audio is not synchronized You can configure an offset for your hardware Drag the Sync offset frames slider to with your external monitor synchronize audio and video This setting affects synchronization for previewing on an external monitor only audio and video synchronization in the file is unaffected Click Close to close the External Monitor dialog Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Attaching video to an audio file Once you have edited an audio file to your satisfaction you can attach it to a video file and save it as a video file 1 a a Open the audio file you want to use For more information see Getting media files on page 61 From the File menu choose Attach Video The Open dialog is displayed Locate and select a video file you want to attach and click the Open button to attach the video file From the View menu choose File Properties The File Properties window is displayed To change the field order setting for the video file choose an option from the Video field order drop down list The options are explained below e None progressive scan For video to be viewed on a computer monitor e Upper field first For output that is jittery or shaky
263. deo wma or wmv ATRAC oma Material Exchange Format mxf Note MXF files require a video stream If you want to save an audio only file to MXF format you must first attach a video stream For more information see Attaching video to an audio file on page 292 When working with MXF files the number of channels in your source media must match the number of output channels specified by the rendering template If necessary use the Channel Converter before rendering Render format Number of channels DV MXF Always contains 4 audio channels You can use the Channels drop down list on the Audio tab of the Custom Template dialog to choose how many channels will be filled with audio For example if you choose 2 from the Channels drop down list the rendered file will contain 4 audio channels two channels will contain audio and two channels will contain silence IMX MXF Always contains 8 audio channels You can use the Channels drop down list on the Audio tab of the Custom Template dialog to choose how many channels will be filled with audio For example if you choose 2 from the Channels drop down list the rendered file will contain 8 audio channels two channels will contain audio and six channels will contain silence HD MXF Can contain 2 or 4 audio channels You can use the Channels drop down list on the Audio tab of the Custom Template dialog to choose how many channels will be rendered For example if you choose 2 from the Ch
264. dia formats such as Windows Media You can save a file using a standard template or you can customize the settings to suit your needs Once you create custom settings you can save those settings as a template You have the option to save all open files at once or to save all open files as a workspace file Saving a file 1 Click anywhere in the data window to select it 2 From the File menu choose Save Note When saving a new file the Save As dialog appears If the file was previously saved choosing Save automatically saves the file without your input Using the Save As Render As dialog The Save As dialog allows you to save an audio file with a new name in an alternate format or with new attributes The Render As dialog allows you to render a file using a standard template or you can customize the settings to suit your needs Once you create custom settings you can save those settings as a template Save As mm Save in d Audio Files O P p m T Name Title Contributi Album ay A Drumhit pca Recent Places Fill ia 4 Loop pca al Musicbed pca Desktop P34 SAXRIFF pca Pa Voiceover pca Libraries A Computer Network File name Musicbed2 pca v Select file type Save as type Sony Perfect Clarity Audio pca i Cancel Select recent directories Recent EAMedia Audio Files Help Select template _ Template Default Tem
265. do History window 30 85 87 undoing operations 85 87 unity note 262 Update loop bar on Mark In Out preference 99 updating displays 325 sonograms 301 Spectrum Analysis graphs 298 Vegas software 78 Vibrato effect 45 231 video animating video strip 290 attaching to audio files 292 copying current frame to clipboard 290 detaching from audio files 292 external monitor 292 frame animation 289 frame numbering 290 overview 66 previewing 290 291 saving 294 video strip 289 Video Preview window 30 290 291 viewing Playlist 130 Regions List 129 views 42 104 Views toolbar 42 104 Volume process 44 204 volume unit meters See VU PPM meters VU PPM meters 138 139 Wave Hammer 45 245 247 Web publishing files to 89 window layouts See also workspaces adding to View menu 328 deleting from computer 328 loading saved layouts 328 overview 327 removing from View menu 328 saving 327 windows docking 29 floating 29 hiding docked windows 30 preventing from docking 29 Windows Media files streaming media commands 127 workspaces See also window layouts opening 75 overview 75 saving 75 writing CDs See disc at once CD burning track at once CD burning zero crossings finding for loops 281 snapping to 101 Zoom In Full button 42 Zoom Level commands 95 Zoom Normal button 42 Zoom Selection button 42 Zoom Time commands 94 95 zooming custom settings 95 events 180 horizontally 93
266. dows when you create a new data window or choose Create a new window for each take from the Mode drop down list in the Record dialog 1 2 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Labels tab Select the New window prefix check box and type a prefix in the box if you want to display a name in the new window s title bar Clear the check box if you do not want to include a prefix if you want to number windows only for example Select the Use counter and start at check box and type a number in the box if you want to number new data windows Select the Insert leading zeros in field width of check box and specify a field width if you want to use leading zeros in window names For example if you specify a field width of 3 windows numbered 1 to 99 would be numbered 001 to 099 Click the OK button 336 CHAPTER 25 Editing default region names The Region Labels section of the Labels tab allows you to modify the names that are assigned to regions when you insert regions or choose Multiple takes creating regions from the Mode drop down list in the Record dialog 1 2 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Labels tab Select the Label Regions check box to display text labels for regions in the data window when you insert regions or choose Multiple takes creating regions from the Mode drop down list in the Record dialog Adjust additional settings as necessary Item Description Prefix Type a prefix
267. dpoint line to the desired location The Envelope Endpoint is repositioned and the length of the impulse is adjusted 0 Time seconds 1 55 E Time seconds L55 Repositioning the envelope endpoint line USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 235 Summary tab controls The Summary tab provides information about the impulse file The following section describes all controls located on the Summary tab Control Impulse Dry Out Wet Out Quality speed Recover tab controls The Recover tab is used in creating your own impulse files For more information see Creating impulse files on page 238 The following Description This control is identical to the Impulse drop down list on the General tab For more information see Impulse on page 234 This control is identical to the Dry Out fader on the General tab For more information see Dry Out on page 234 This control is identical to the Wet Out fader on the General tab For more information see Wet Out on page 234 This control is identical to the Quality speed check box on the General tab For more information see Quality speed on page 234 section describes all controls located on the Recover tab Control Recorded file Test file used Impulse output Remove very low frequencies Recover Impulse 236 CHAPTER 15 Description The Recorded file box allows you to select the file containing the test tone recorded in the field You can enter the path di
268. dulation but results in a slightly higher noise level The option typically works well in conjunction with noise shaping e Highpass Triangular Behaves like triangular dither but shifts its noise into higher frequencies This is typically the best option when used in conjunction with noise shaping e Gaussian Does not perform as well as Rectangular and Triangular dither but may be suitable for certain audio Determines the aural positioning of quantization noise Using this control you can shift the noise into audio registers that are less perceptible to human hearing This lowers the perceived noise floor and creates the illusion of cleaner audio High pass contour noise shaping attempts to push all quantization noise and error into high frequencies Equal loudness contour noise shaping attempts to push the noise under an equal loudness type of curve Click this button to view additional options that you can use to adjust your data window selection For more information see Adjusting the data window selection on page 184 Noise shaping places quantization noise near the audio s Nyquist frequency a value equal to one half of the file s sample rate Consider the following information A file with a sample rate of 44 1 kHz has a Nyquist frequency of 22 05 kHz at the high end of human hearing Applying noise shaping to this file results in audio perceived to be cleaner than it actually is A file with a sample rate of 22 kHz has
269. e You should now have an audio file with a spike at the beginning a test tone and silence 4 Save the test tone file USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 239 Naming configuring and recovering the impulse 1 2 From the Effects menu choose Acoustic Mirror The Acoustic Mirror dialog is displayed Click the Recover tab Sony Acoustic Mirror Funky saxophone riff Preset Untitled Bx SONY Acoustic Mirror bout Cancel This page is used to create your own impulse file from a test tone that you have recorded and saved to a sound file It does not affect processing of normal sound files Preview Recorded file Browse Bypass 3 Real time Test file used ka Browse ze Impulse output Browse ze V Remove very low frequencies Recover Impulse Impulse recovery mode Use the start and end of the recorded file as timing spikes The recorded file must be trimmed so that the timing spikes occur at the very start and end samples of the file Auto detect timing spikes The first timing spike must be present within first second of recorded file i Do not use timing spikes The recorded test tone begins at the start of the recorded file General Envelope Summary Recover More CPU o 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 500 00 00 02 500 Enter the name and path of your impulse file in the Recorded File box or click Browse and locate the file Enter the name of the original
270. e Moves the cursor to the next sample Moves the cursor to the previous sample Using the MIDI keyboard From the View menu choose Keyboard to open or close the MIDI Keyboard window The keyboard allows you to send MIDI note on and MIDI note off commands to your sound card or sampler With the Sound Forge Pro MIDI keyboard you can control internal or external synthesizers and samplers from Sound Forge Pro software For example you might want to test a sound in a sampler after sending downloading it from Sound Forge Pro software You can also use the MIDI keyboard to listen to the different sounds on a synthesizer or in the synthesis section of your sound card Opening the MIDI keyboard From the View menu choose Keyboard to open or close the MIDI Keyboard window Resizing the MIDI keyboard Like any other toolbar or shortcut menu window in Sound Forge Pro you can resize the MIDI Keyboard window move it or dock it to any side of the Sound Forge Pro window When the cursor is over any edge of the window the cursor is displayed asa __ Drag to resize Depending on how you resize the keyboard the keys will be arranged horizontally or vertically Configuring the output device and channel 1 To select a MIDI device click the MIDI Out button and choose a device from the menu MIDI Out button Keyboard 000 Acoustic Grand Piano Note a Microsoft MIDI Mapper Microsoft GS Wavetable Synth em Send Program Ch
271. e changing 107 for CD burning 307 Sampler Loops window 57 Sampler tool 46 260 Samples button 42 sampling configuring Sampler Tool 260 external samplers 259 internal samplers 259 MIDI keyboard 267 268 open loop vs closed loop 261 Sample Dump Standard SDS 269 Sampler tool 260 saving sampler configurations 262 SCSI SMDI hardware and setup 269 sending and receiving samples 262 unsupported internal samplers 259 Save All command 75 Save As dialog 40 72 74 331 Save button 40 saving all open files 75 command properties as template 128 custom templates 74 Cutlist files 134 files 72 loop points 287 metadata with files 113 Playlist files 134 project paths in rendered files 78 projects 77 Regions List to file 130 regions to external file 126 sampler configurations 262 394 INDEX summary information 113 video files 294 workspaces 75 Script Editor button 47 scripting adding scripts to the Scripting submenu 252 API and sample scripts 249 arguments 251 Batch Converter 255 command line 250 creating scripts 252 editing existing scripts 252 online forum 249 running scripts 250 Script Editor window 31 249 toolbar 253 Scripting toolbar adding or removing toolbar buttons 253 creating custom button images 254 overview 47 running scripts from 254 Scroll Playback command 67 Scroll Smoothly command 67 scrolling during playback 67 smooth 67 scrub control slider 92 scrubbing
272. e if you enabled six inputs on the Record tab in Audio Preferences you need to record into a six channel data window to record all six inputs Ifyou record to a stereo data window only two inputs will be recorded To choose your recording input use the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or click a channel number in the Record Options window and choose a new input port from the menu Record Options Record status Idle Record attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit 4 Channel Time recorded 00 00 00 Time left on drive Over 2 hours Monitor Calibrate E Play unselected channels when recording C Monitor input through Plug In Chain 72 66 60 54 48 42 3 30 24 18 12 6 Inf le Analog In 1 hs N Inf Analog In 2 7266 60 54 48 42 W M 18 12 6 S PDIF In 1 i inf SPDIF In 2 RECORDING 153 1 Ensure all cables are connected and that your audio source is generating a signal 2 Adjust your recording levels If your audio device provides a console application to adjust levels open the application and adjust its gain controls while monitoring the peak meters on the Meters tab in the recording dialog Adjust the gain controls in the console application so Sound Forge receives a strong signal with no clipping For more information about using your sound card and its console application please refer to the manufacturer s documentation e
273. e Invert Mix check box if you want to reverse the phase of the new channel s content 4 Click the OK button The file is converted to stereo a Wow sound editing 4 K PL m p e Rate 0 00 i 00 00 00 000 Converting a stereo file to mono 1 Open the saxriff wav file Notice that this is a stereo file 2 From the Process menu choose Channel Converter 3 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as needed a b d Choose 1 from the Output channels drop down list to create a mono file Click in the Source 1 box and type a gain value or drag the fader to adjust the amount of the original left channel that will be mixed to the new mono file Click in the Source 2 box and type a gain value or drag the fader to adjust the amount of the original right channel that will be mixed to the new mono file Select the Invert Mix check box if you want to reverse the phase of the new left channel mix 4 Click the OK button Intermixing channels in a file 1 From the Process menu choose Channel Converter 2 Adjust the controls as needed a b C Choose a setting from the Output channels drop down list to indicate the number of channels in the converted file Click in the Source box for each output channel and type a gain value or drag the fader to adjust the amount of the original channel that will be mixed to the new channel Select the Invert Mix check box if you
274. e Start Moves the cursor to the beginning of the release loop Center Release End Moves the cursor to the end of the release loop Double Selection Doubles the size of the current selection Halve Selection Divides the current selection in half Shift Selection Left Shifts the current selection to the left so the current start point becomes the end point Shift Selection Right Shifts the current selection to the right so the current end point becomes the start point The Navigation toolbar also contains a Tempo box that appears to the right of the toolbar buttons This box calculates and displays the tempo of the current selection as is if the selection represents a complete measure Views toolbar The Views toolbar contains buttons used to store and retrieve data window views Toggles views 1 8 between setting and restoring Status toolbar 2 Stores and recalls specific selection views The Status toolbar contains buttons used to specify a file s status format and control snapping functions 4 Samples Changes the status format to Samples Time Changes the status format to Time Seconds Changes the status format to Seconds Time amp Frames Changes the status format to Time amp Frames Absolute Frames Changes the status format to Absolute Frames Measures amp Beats Changes the status format to Measures amp Beats SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps Changes the status format to SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps 42
275. e Types tab 337 General tab 331 333 Labels tab 336 337 MIDI Sync tab 338 Previews tab 339 Status tab 340 Toolbars tab 340 341 Video tab 344 345 VST Effects tab 345 pre queue for MIDI timecode 272 Pre Queue for MIDI Timecode button 43 prerecord buffer 145 392 INDEX pre roll 144 Pre roll to Cursor command 91 Preset Manager 46 226 presets applying 181 creating 182 deleting 182 overview 181 resetting parameters 182 saving in Spectrum Analysis graph 304 previewing CD tracks 77 channels in multichannel files 52 cuts 82 effect automation 224 markers 120 processed audio 183 regions 122 video 290 291 previewing files in Explorer window 63 pre roll to cursor 91 previewing processed audio bypassing processes 183 customizing parameters 183 printing sonograms 302 spectrum graphs 300 track lists 321 Process toolbar 44 processes adjusting data window selection 184 applying in Event mode 178 Auto Trim Crop 185 186 Bit Depth Converter 186 187 Channel Converter 189 DC Offset 191 lastique Timestretch process 203 EQ 192 Fade In 194 Fade Out 194 Graphic Fade 192 193 Invert Flip 194 iZotope 64 Bit SRC 44 202 iZotope MBIT Dither 44 188 189 Mute 195 Normalize 196 198 Pan Expand 44 198 Resample 200 201 Reverse 203 Rotate Audio 286 Smooth Enhance 203 Time Stretch 203 Volume 204 projects creating 61 folders 61 saving 77 saving paths in rendered files 78
276. e and used to record the center mid channel and a second microphone is pointed 90 degrees away from the source side and used to record the stereo image For proper playback on most systems MS recordings must be converted to standard left right orientation To convert an MS recorded track to a left right track first ensure that the center channel is in the left track and the side channel on the right The MS mix function is then used to set the width of the stereo image for the converted track Output gain Determines the amount of gain applied to the signal following pan expand processing Show wave The Show wave drop down list provides several settings for drawing the current selection s waveform on the envelope graph This function is available only for small selections Reset Envelope Clicking the Reset Envelope button clears all but the two original envelope points For the Pan modes these two points prevent unintended panning e For the Stereo expand and Mix Mid Side modes these two points prevent unintended expansion PROCESSING AUDIO 199 Resample The Resample command allows you to change the sampling rate of a file without altering its pitch or duration Resample Example music bed Preset G x as New sample rate 2 000 to 192 000 Hz 22 050 Preview Interpolation accuracy 1 to 4 Medium J High Z2 Bypass Apply an anti alias filter during resample 5et the sample rate only do not resample
277. e eee eee eeeeeees 116 Opening and editing multichannel audio fileS cc ccc cece eee ee eens 116 Recording multichannel audio files ccc ccc eee cece eee eeenenees 117 Using the hardware Meters ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeenes 117 Adjusting o tp t levels o44 c0sdsscecdscundeton clean edu ladsenen sa lawenw awd suaweewetehataws 117 Showing or hiding Meters cece eee eee eee e eee eee eeees 118 TABLE OF CONTENTS 11 Using markers regions and COMMANAS 0c cece cece e eee eeeees 119 DETRI AIK ONS O 5 auq doo4 E E E E 119 IMSCMING A MAKET oreren EEr ANEA EEEREN ANENE A EEEE EAE ETERNE ERT 119 Naming or renaming a marker 6 ccc cee eee ence eee e eee e eee eeeeeeees 119 MOVNO TVA KOD sce ete ria eons r caw A nensnbes Mer E Ghee cad wow eee st 119 Deleting a marker siiisvadtiduw dened one esevwewe ova bacepucedenevedtaded daawdscaceaeewhen ene 119 Deleting all markers and regions ccc cc ccc cece eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 119 Deleting all markers and regions within the selected area cece cece cece eee eenes 120 Previewing a MAPKeLr cece eee eee eee e eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeeees 120 Triggering a marker using MIDI CoOmMMands ccc ccc cece cence eee eeeeeeeeeeeeees 120 Detecting and marking ClIPPING cece ccc ccc cee eee eee eee eee eeeees 120 SING VCOIONS ccticcuaucanpiancyseaceseosanenGadueenteeeeececeeerceeuneseseencsesecs 121 inse
278. e hee 34 CD laVOUr Dal 4s ecxkennateanarsoes E dean eae sewage ence aut san eanon bans eananosedade nous 35 TABLE OF CONTENTS 7 Level ZOOM covdnctdoidibadeledere dosed EEE a Aaii 35 PVDA EER E A ER AE E E T E A EEE NA 35 STOD e a E A E E E E E E E E E E EA 36 SCIUOCONIIO t3 0cs4saaccaacuedes ENE AAEN SAN NEE EENES KENDA 36 SCICCHON SAUS DAF seere r EA EEE ERTE E EN OERE AER EN AR AEE ETE EENE EEEE E EEES 37 U Ne ni NEET E ETE E E ETE TEE T E EE T EEE ETN ET E 37 Tine zoomi esot eeraa EAN A EEN Ea 37 Maximize WIA 249045 ob xorncdw pir nre Ea a 37 ClOSe Cala WINKOW csirssesirirsdinrent es dnai isa sedtiedwwennweseed IEEE NARE 37 Arranging data windOWS s sessssssssesersesssessesersseeseeserseesersesereee 38 TOO eea EEE E EE EAE AEE ET TOA 39 Displaying a toolbar snssssusnsnssesosseseseseesesesorsesorseseseesesosorsesoreree 39 CUSTOMIZING 2 1OOIDAE sesrarerr anran piae ETETEN ANE EENAA EENE OEREN 39 DOCKING a toolDar yaaa sccavrs cucu docs crewnoseberes Err aT ENa Nai 40 Fonn a TOODA ederrari anre EE E EEE EEEE ENA 40 EAA EIA RED 8 R E AR E E E EAE E E A E E A 40 Transport toolbar sersrrere rart EEEE EEES EEUE E EEEE EISES 41 Navi TOORN TOOD eee aa ea eee a E EE 42 WICWS TOOIOG erp AEE EAEE EE EEEE EE T E E EAE E EE 42 E OI aeara A EEE EA EA E ES E AEA TE E E AAAA 42 Regions Playlist tOOlpar crisrerrrireridtrsta rattiin ETEA ENTE EANES NEE INTESE Ee iR 43 Men OODI sariren rA S AA S ETEA 43 Proce TOO ene a EEE EA AEREN AE e
279. e is no selection For more information see Cutting on page 81 Copy Copies selected audio data to the clipboard This command has no effect if there is no selection For more information see Copying on page 79 Paste Inserts a copy of the clipboard data at the current insertion point If there is a selection this command replaces the selected data with the clipboard data For more information see Pasting on page 80 Mix Mixes a copy of the clipboard data with the current audio file The mix start point is either the cursor point or the start or end of the selection in the destination data window For more information see Mixing on page 83 Play Clipboard Plays the audio on the clipboard For more information see Previewing clipboard contents on page 79 40 CHAPTER 2 d4 Trim Crop Removes all data from the file that is not currently selected This command has no effect if there is no selected data This command does not copy data to the clipboard For more information see Trimming Cropping on page 83 Undo Reverses the last edit operation For more information see Using Undo and Redo on page 85 Redo Reverts the previously undone edit operation For more information see Using Undo and Redo on page 85 Repeat Repeats the last operation This command can be used with most processing functions The previous operation s parameters are repeated To specify new parameters hold Shift and click this button For more informa
280. e mono signal in each channel After the audio is converted to stereo choose an impulse file from the HRTF Impulses folder You will notice that the HRTF Impulses folder is further divided into Left and Right directories Opening the desired folder displays the available impulse files all of which are named based on their elevation up or down and azimuth left or right angles in degrees The following table provides some examples File Name Impulse positioning OEOOOL Straight ahead OEO90L Far left OEO90R Far right 9OEOOOL Directly above your head OE180L Directly behind you 20E120L Below behind and to your left Note Refer to Readme doc in the HRTF Impulses folder for more information Troubleshooting the Acoustic Mirror effect The following sections describe problems that may be encountered when working with the Acoustic Mirror tool Stuttering during real time previewing It is not uncommon to experience problems when previewing processing in real time The following sections contain several suggestions to remedy the situation Lower the Quality speed setting Lower the value of the Quality speed control on the General page When previewing lengthy impulse responses a setting of 1 or 2 may be necessary however the quality suffers This setting should always be returned to 5 prior to processing to maintain effect quality 242 CHAPTER 15 Increase the DirectX buffering size 1 Open the Acoustic Mirror dialog 2 Ri
281. e timecode h Click OK to close the Record Settings dialog 4 Click the Arm button in the data window where you want to record The Record status value in the Record Options window indicates the timecode when recording will begin and the meters in the Record Options window monitor the level from your recording input Recording will begin when Sound Forge Pro detects the specified Timecode start value and will stop at the specified Timecode stop value Recording begins at the cursor position and the Time Display window and the data window s selection status bar will show the current record position If the destination window contains a selection that is shorter than the specified timecode range recording will stop at the end of the selection If the destination window contains a selection that is longer than the timecode duration recording will stop at the Timecode stop value Note During recording playback commands the Preferences dialog and commands that affect the recording data window are unavailable RECORDING 149 Recording using a timer From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed Use the Record Options window to specify when you want to record a From the Method drop down list choose Automatic Time b Choose a setting from the Mode drop down list to choose whether to create regions or record to a new window when recording is suspended and resumed For more information see
282. e to several compressed formats clearing these check boxes prevents you from having to reopen the file after saving each format When the Automatically reopen files after Save As check box is cleared select this check box if you want the application to prompt you to open the destination file to a new data window after saving a sound file to a different format Opening the file in a new data window will allow you to hear any changes in quality between the original file and the result of the Save As operation When this check box is selected your undo history is maintained until you close the data window or exit the application so you can undo edit operations even if you ve saved your file When this check box is selected quick file saving may not be available Tip fyou want to be able to undo edit operations even after closing and reopening your file save a Sound Forge project When this check box is selected Rewind and Forward buttons will appear on each data window s transport controls When this check box is selected Arm and Record buttons will appear on each data window s transport controls When this check box is selected the waveform is drawn while you re recording audio When this check box is selected the total amount of free disk space available on your specified temporary drive is displayed on the status bar Use the Temporary files and record folder box at the bottom of the General tab to set the f
283. e your project In Audio CD Time format the ruler will display hh mmiss ff hours minutes seconds frames Audio CD time uses a frame rate of 75 fps Next choose Quantize to Frames from the Options menu to ensure that any edits you make will occur on frame boundaries If your first track region begins before 00 00 02 00 a timeline offset is automatically added so the first track begins at exactly two seconds This offset is added for burning only and is not reflected in the data window If you want to display track numbers in the Time Display window right click the Time Display window and choose CD Track Position from the shortcut menu In this mode the Time Display will show track numbers and the running time for each track Negative values indicate the pause time before a track Time Display 03 00 00 52 Creating and editing tracks for disc at once CDs A disc at once CD requires that you define a track list before burning BB 100 Unnamed Things paoe 4a N 8 AE 00 00 00 p 04 08 pi Track 1 Shine 00 03 30 933 ll a i K gt i E gt og Rate 0 00 4op 00 00 00 000 From the Insert menu choose CD Track to add a CD track using the current selection as the track length Sound Forge also provides several other methods of adding tracks 310 CHAPTER 23 Adding CD tracks and index markers to a sound file Creating CD tracks 1 Select the time range that you want to use to create
284. e zero crossings adjacent to the current loop tag location te i 20 896 gt 59 648 t Loop End Zero Crossing Right Loop Start Zero Crossing Right Loop End Zero Crossing Left Loop Start Zero Crossing Left The Loop Tuner contains two zero crossing finders for each of the loop points e The left button in each pair locates the zero crossing to the left of the current location e The right button in each pair locates the zero crossing to the right of the current location To use the finders click the desired button By experimenting with different locations and repositioning the start and end points you can create seamless loops You can also configure the zero crossing finders to locate positive slope crossings negative slope crossings or all zero crossings Configuring the zero crossing finders 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog is displayed 2 Click the Editing tab 3 From the Snap to zero crossing slope drop down list choose the desired slope and click OK Fine tuning loop points You can use the Loop Tuner to fine tune loop points in three ways e To move loop points by small amounts use the Loop Start Position and Loop End Position arrow spinners Clicking the up or down arrow increments the loop point by one sample e To move loop points by larger amounts use the mouse to drag the spinner up or down e To move loop points by very large amounts use the mouse to drag the ruler at the t
285. easing playback buffer size The playback buffer size determines the amount of RAM used for playing from the hard drive A buffer size of 0 10 seconds is recommended but increased buffering may be necessary if you detect gaps during playback Increasing the total buffer size requires additional memory Combined with a large preload size this may result in a delay when starting and stopping playback 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Audio tab 3 Use the Playback buffering slider to configure an appropriate buffer size value and click OK If you re using an ASIO device click the Advanced button to display the Advanced Audio Configuration dialog and then click the Configure button to edit your device settings Meters If you experience gapping during playback and the channel meters are displayed turn them off by choosing Channel Meters from the View menu If you experience gapping during recording and you have the Monitor check box selected in the Record dialog clear the check box to turn off the record meters For more information see Recording on page 143 Passive updating for video and time displays If you experience gapping during playback or your computer just seems to be bogging down during playback try turning on Passive Update This will force the video and time displays to update only if there is time to do so In most cases you won t be able to tell if it is missing some up
286. ecalling a template 1 From the Insert menu choose Command to display the Command Properties dialog 2 Choose the template you want to use from the Template drop down list The Command Parameter and Position boxes are automatically filled in using the information stored in the template 3 Edit the settings in the Command Parameter and Position boxes as necessary 4 Click OK Editing metadata commands Your metadata command templates are saved in the following file C Users user name AppData Local Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 cmdtemp xml You can edit this file directly to modify your templates Using the Regions List The Regions List contains information pertaining to all regions in the current data window The Regions List information can be saved as metadata in most file types You also have the option of saving the Regions List to an external Playlist file Displaying the Regions List 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Regions List from the submenu or press Ctrl Alt M 0 The Regions List for Voiceover pca appears Working with the Regions List By default the Regions List displays the following information for each region in the current data window e Asmall Play button dedicated to the region e The region s name e The region s start point e The region s end point e The regio
287. ecifically with respect to audio quantization is a function of the analog to digital conversion process The continuous variation of the voltages of a analog audio signal are quantized to discrete amplitude values represented by digital binary numbers The number of bits available to describe these values determines the resolution or accuracy of quantization For example if you have 8 bit analog to digital converters the varying analog voltage must be quantized to 1 of 256 discrete values a 16 bit converter has 65 536 values Quantization Noise Quantization noise is a result of describing an analog signal in discrete digital terms see quantization This noise is most easily heard in low resolution digital sounds that have low bit depths and sounds like a shhhhh type sound while the audio is playing It becomes more apparent when the signal is at low levels such as during a fade out Reactive Preview Reactive previews allow for the adjustment of parameters in a function dialog while the preview is playing When a parameter is changed the preview will automatically rebuild and continue playback Real Time Streaming Protocol RTSP A proposed standard for controlling broadcast of streaming media RTSP was submitted by a body of companies including RealNetworks and Netscape Redirector File A metafile that provides information to a media player about streaming media files To start a streaming media presentation a Web page will include a
288. ecified 3 Verify that the file specified in the Test file used box is the exact test tone used to make to field recording and that neither its length or data has been changed 4 Ifthe impulse still does not recover properly in Auto detect timing spikes mode normalize the spikes in the recorded test tone file This should aid the auto detect algorithm in detecting the timing spikes and recovering the impulse Recovered impulse is too noisy To maximize the impulse s signal to noise ratio you should verify that the field recording s noise floor is not too high When recording in noisy environments increase the test tone s amplitude until the test tone is at least 25 dB louder than the noise floor At least 40 dB of signal to noise is recommended for optimal impulses If you cannot avoid noise when recording in the field the Noise Reduction tool can salvage a session Speaker nonlinear distortion can also cause noisy impulses The most common source of nonlinear distortion is loudspeaker harmonics Most speakers display substantial harmonic distortion at low frequencies For example when you play a 60 Hz tone the speaker vibrates at 60 Hz but also outputs lower level audio at multiples of 60 Hz 120 180 etc The impulse recovery method greatly minimizes these low frequency distortions however inexpensive tweeters often display substantial high frequency distortion that can disrupt the recovery process When possible use high quality
289. ed as Loudness Units LU relative to the selected mode EBU R 128 Mode or ATSC A 85 Mode Configuring peak meters To toggle the True Peaks meters in the Loudness Meters window choose Loudness Meters from the Options menu and then choose Show True Peak Meter from the submenu you can also right click the meter to set its options Tip Please note that true peaks are calculated using a higher sample rate than peaks in the Channel Meters for increased accuracy Peak levels may be miscalculated if audio signals are asymmetrical or if a DC offset is present To enable filtering choose Loudness Meters from the Options menu and then choose True Peak Blocking Filter from the submenu you can also right click the meter to set its options When True Peak Blocking Filter is selected peaks are calculated as the maximum of the filtered and unfiltered signals The True Peaks meters display levels in dB FS To change the resolution of the meters do either of the following e From the Options menu choose Loudness Meters choose True Peak Range from the submenu and then choose a display range e Right click the Loudness meter choose True Peak Range from the submenu and then choose a display range Note Choosing a wide range allows you to see low level signals at the expense of precision display at high levels Generating a loudness log A loudness log is a report of the loudness of an audio file and it allows you to provide documentation th
290. ed loudness in loudness units across all audio channels over the duration of the program The Integrated box displays a numeric representation of the integrated loudness and includes an over target indicator e The LRA meter represents the loudness range in loudness units of the momentary and short term levels The Loudness Range measurement provides a standardized method of determining the dynamic range of the signal e The True peaks meter represents the peak levels in dB FS True peaks are calculated using a higher sample rate than peaks in the Channel Meters window for increased accuracy The True Peaks indicator shows you whether the target loudness has been exceeded The indicator is reset when you restart playback or you can right click the Loudness Meters window and choose Reset Clip from the shortcut menu Tips e Loudness is recalculated whenever you start stop seek or change playback direction If you want to force a recalculation right click the window and choose Reset Metering Engine from the shortcut menu e Select the Enable surround processing for files with 6 channels check box on the Status tab of the Preferences dialog if you want to treat audio with six or more channels as surround audio when measuring loudness a gain of 1 5 dB is applied to the left and right surround channels When the check box is cleared all channels contribute equally to the loudness measurement Choosing a metering mode To c
291. ed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Reverse The reversed audio data displays in the data window a Example music bed o JE a Example music bed sion ex a NX 2 N 8 E 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 100 00 06 100 00 08 j00 00 8 E 00 00 00 f j00 00 02 100 00 04 100 00 06 100 00 08 j00 00 4 i D ee SIRERE 2 4 l W b o p 4h K gt h E gt lt o gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 1 908 K gt E gt lt o gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 1 908 Original audio data Reversed audio Rotate Audio You can move the beginning of a loop to the end or the end of a loop to the beginning by rotating audio For more information see Rotating audio on page 286 Smooth Enhance To start the XFX Smooth Enhance plug in choose Smooth Enhance from the Process menu For more information on using the XFX Smooth Enhance plug in click the Help button E in the Smooth Enhance dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Time Time Stretch To start the XFX Time Stretch plug in choose Time Stretch from the Process menu For more information on using the XFX Time Stretch plug in click the Help button E in the Time Stretch dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Time lastique Timestretch To start the lastique Timestretch plug in choose Time from the Process menu and then choose lastique Times
292. ed preference 92 keyboard shortcuts creating 346 customizing 47 346 347 default configuration 349 356 deleting keyboard maps 347 editing 346 importing keyboard maps 347 renaming keyboard maps 347 resetting the default keyboard map 347 saving keyboard maps 347 Keyboard window 274 Keyboard window See MIDI keyboard labels automatically generating for markers 337 level ruler formatting 95 optimizing scaling 96 restoring default level 96 zooming 94 95 zooming with Magnify tool 97 levels monitoring 135 setting 135 toolbar 47 Lock to Selection option 80 172 173 174 175 315 locking loop and region lengths 127 Loop Playback button 41 67 Loop Tuner displaying 280 finding zero crossings 281 locking loop length 282 playing loops 280 switching between sustain and release loops 280 viewing loop amplitude 281 window 31 loops creating for ACID 283 287 doubling 285 editing 279 282 halving 285 locking length 282 locking lengths 127 release 277 rotating audio 286 saving 287 setting tempo 287 shifting selections left right 285 sustaining 277 loudness log 74 141 loudness meters 30 140 INDEX 389 Magnify tool button 40 overview 96 zooming level ruler 97 zooming time and level ruler 97 zooming time ruler 97 main window components 28 overview 28 Mark In command 42 99 Mark Out button 42 Mark Out command 99 markers automatically naming 337 changing position 119
293. ed to the waveform and audio to the right of the tail will be moved to accommodate the extra audio Click the Preview button to hear the effects of your processing settings Select the Bypass check box to hear the unprocessed signal Click the OK button to start processing During processing a progress meter is displayed at the bottom of the data window You can cancel the operation at any time by clicking the Cancel button to the left of the progress meter or you can press the Escape key Note When applying an effect to a file via scripting you can only specify the current time channel selection DoMenu or anew time channel selection DoEffect Event selection is not exposed to scripts When processing musical instrument files all events in the time channel selection will be processed If no selection exists or the entire file is selected as when using the Batch Converter all events will be processed Editing samples In addition to applying processing and effects you can also edit the samples in an instrument file For example if you need to remove a glitch or replace a sample in an instrument file you can open an individual sample in a new editing window 1 2 Select the sample you want to edit From the Edit menu choose Event and then choose Edit from the submenu The selected sample is opened in a new window If you selected multiple samples in step 1 each sample is opened in a separate window Tip Press E or
294. ee Using the MIDI keyboard on page 267 Script Editor window Ctrl Alt 3 The Script Editor window can be used to open create edit or run scripts From the View menu choose Script Editor to show or hide the Script Editor window For more information see Using the Script Editor window on page 249 Loop Tuner window Ctrl Alt 4 The Loop Tuner window can be used to adjust the starting and ending points of a loop to create smooth transitions From the View menu choose Loop Tuner to show or hide the Loop Tuner window For more information see Editing loops on page 279 Record Options window Ctrl Alt 5 You can use the Record Options window to configure various options for recording in Sound Forge Pro For more information see Recording options on page 150 LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 31 Data windows Each sound file is opened in a data window Each data window shows you a graphical representation of the waveform and other information about the file Title bar 100 Unnamed Things frg es Close Overview bar Next Edit Tool Lock Channel Selection Marker bar Time ruler Waveform display Level ruler CD layout bar Scroll bar eee rack 2 Play Track 3 One of Th Track 4 White Track 5 Syner Track 6 100 Ur Tack D Time zoom in out Level zoom i aila Maximize width in out COOMA Bee eo 00 11 52 227 00 04 44 867 1 131 072 Time zoom resoluti
295. ee Using the Playlist on page 130 Sustaining and release loops A sound envelope contains four elements attack decay sustain and release Attack Ecay Sustain Release Typically the sustain portion of the envelope is looped to lengthen the duration of a sound This is referred to as the sustaining loop While sustaining loops are useful it is frequently necessary to create a second loop taken from later in the envelope This allows you to reproduce longer more complex sounds such as a piano chord struck with the sustain pedal depressed This second type of loop is referred to as the release loop Creating a sustaining loop 1 Open the Drumhit pca file and create a selection containing the snare hit at the beginning of the waveform B Drum Hit o E A 8 Af 00 00 00 000 j00 00 01 000 j00 00 02 000 00 00 C hoe tb Ki Pi m p of Rate 0 00 lt gt 00 00 00 005 00 00 00 133 00 00 00 128 1 256 2 With the Loop Playback button G selected in the transport bar click the Play Normal button i on the playbar to preview the loop LOOPING 277 3 From the Insert menu choose Sample Loop or press Alt L The data window displays the appropriate tags in the ruler to specify the loop s start and end points The Play as Sample button gt appears on the playbar a Drurn Hit F Sustaining Loop I Loop start and end tags amp E O00 00 OD 00 00 00 100 so
296. eed or click Configure and adjust the Audio extract optimization setting Note Jo eject the CD at any time prior to beginning the extraction process click the Eject button 10 Click OK The data extraction from the CD begins and a progress meter is displayed Previewing CD tracks In the Extract Audio from CD dialog select a track and click the Play button to preview a track prior to extracting it from the CD To end the preview click Stop Refreshing the Extract Audio from CD dialog Click the Refresh button after you insert a new CD in the system s CD or DVD drive This allows you to view the contents of the new CD without closing and reopening the Extract Audio from CD dialog Working with projects Projects are new to Sound Forge software however if you ve used ACID or Vegas software then you ll be quite familiar with how to use Sound Forge projects You should note that Sound Forge projects do function slightly different than ACID and Vegas projects A project file is not a multimedia file It contains pointers to the original source files so you can edit your project nondestructively without changing your source files When you edit a Sound Forge project you can undo edit operations even past your last save For more information see Using Undo and Redo on page 85 Saving projects 1 Click anywhere in the data window to activate it 2 From the File menu choose Save As to display the Save As dialog 3 Select the folder whe
297. eee eee eeeeeennaes 267 Displaying the MIDI keyboard ccc cece ccc ccc cee eee e ene e eee e eee eeneees 267 Turning on the MIDI keyboard ccc ccc ccc cee nent e een e eee e ee eeneaes 267 Configuring the MIDI keyboard output port and channel c cece cence eee e eens 267 Troubleshooting the MIDI keyboard ccc ccc ccc eee ence eee eee e eee e eee eeeaes 267 SPECIFYING INSTTUMENTS cence eee eee nett EE e eee eens teeneeneeee 268 Gee latino CHOI OS 605 00 ones starr ccahdnas sows ius E scene beater aoer st ieiess 268 Setting up MIDI SDS hardware ccc ccc eee een cece eee eee e eee e eee eeeeees 269 TABLE OF CONTENTS 19 Troubleshooting MIDI SDS with open lOOP cece ccc ccc ccc ee cee eee eeees 269 Setting up SCSI SMDI hardware ccc ccc cece eee eee eneeenaneenes 269 Troubleshooting SCSI SMDI 0 ccc cece cece eee eee eee e eee e teen eeeeeaes 269 COMMNCIING SCSIIDS scacuseceahacetue asacete sean E E A E E E 269 Penodi aan er tallies spre E RA 270 Sampler is recognized but does not transfer reliably 0 ccc ccc ccc ee een eens 270 MIDISVACHFOMIZAUOM wagsuenk oso suacnesweuees pera teseuawedaventeceaeeeonentess 271 Generating MIDI timecode ccc cece eee ee eee teen e tent nese eee eeeeeeeaeaes 271 Triggering from MIDI timecode ccc ccc ccc eee eee e nent eeeeneeeeeees 271 Triggering playback with MIDI timecode ccc cece
298. eeneees 284 Editing loops for ACID software ccc ccc cc ccc eee nee e eee e eee eee eeeenneaes 285 Halving or doubling a l00p oi0s2 cones ce ewe serine acd daeeaeen ce beneensnawed onde werdawda anus 285 Shifting a selection left or right ccc ccc cee eee e eee ee ee ee ee eeeeeeeeeees 285 en eRe e a PE one sau E E tise say eer eee eoay bauaeeran re aaaeres 286 Setting OOD TEMG 3 054 00ccncdoueindeeetaenseayeadatew gh ESTEA EREET EETAS 287 Saving loop DOWNS eresse irese in Eara en toe i ee Sa ees 287 WORKING WIT WIGEOs son couc5 a ousecadanace scat ws dennaemees 1a Gor nen een eoes 289 Viewing VIGO 0 ccc eee eee eee e eee e eens eee e beeen eee eeeeeeeeeneeeees 289 Using the video SIND cn esac vcdecex ewe deesnckwaws denser one wadineweswinsdeaeanieeseeewaneaws 289 Previewing TIES With VideO ws cescesdcee sate neds saateewndeiass SENIE ES EEOAE 290 Using an external MONItOr 0 0 s0cewen sce eondawssdee ddede wedi eanbewee sited endewrsedewda sere 292 Attaching video to an audio file ccc ccc eee cence eee ee eeneeeeeeeees 292 Detaching video from an audio file 2 0 ccc ccc cee eee e eee eee een enneees 292 Setting video OPTIONS 0 6 ccc cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeeeaeeaes 293 Video file properties sane etre pon towre sae bontoonse ce beatowss brn deetaaseneen hes aeeaeensences 293 Configuring your video settings ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee eee eee neeeeeneeee 293 Saving a video FIC cc
299. eferences dialog Using the Sound Mapper with uncompressed files The primary use of the Sound Mapper for uncompressed sound files is for your convenience You don t have to convert the sound to a supported format before you listen to it If for example you have a sound file that is recorded at a nonstandard sample rate such as 22 257 Hz and the closest sample rate that your sound card supports is 22 050 Hz then the sound file normally cannot be played You would have to change the sample rate of the file to 22 050 Hz before you could play it However changing the sample rate without resampling would cause the sound to play at a lower pitch Using the Sound Mapper you can play this sound file correctly without resampling the file first The Sound Mapper will map the sound to the best format possible and perform the resampling in real time e The Sound Mapper will allow you to play 16 or 24 bit sounds on an 8 bit sound card play stereo sounds on a mono sound card and record stereo files on a mono only sound card However when you use the Sound Mapper to record in stereo from a mono source the mono input of your sound card is simply duplicated in both channels the Sound Mapper cannot create something that is better than what the sound card can supply SOUND FORGE AND THE MICROSOFT AUDIO COMPRESSION MANAGER 359 Using the Sound Mapper with compressed files The Sound Mapper allows you to play and sometimes record compressed sound
300. eft and right surround channels When the check box is cleared all channels contribute equally to the loudness measurement 12 Click the Save button Creating custom templates If the file type you select supports it you can create custom settings for saving files by clicking the Custom button Note fa file type supports custom templates a Custom button appears next to the Template drop down list after you choose the file type When you click the Custom button a Custom Settings dialog appears Adjust the settings for the different template properties as needed For help on the different settings click the Help button 0 or press Shift F1 When you are finished editing the template properties click the OK button Saving custom templates You can save a custom template to use again by typing a template name in the Template box and clicking the Save Template button W Deleting custom templates You can delete a custom template by selecting the template from the Template drop down list and clicking the Delete Template button X Creating custom rendering settings The Custom Settings dialog appears when you click Custom in the Render As dialog You can use the Custom Settings dialog to create custom encoding templates for many of the file formats available in the software 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears 2 Choose your preferred file format from the Save as type drop down list If the
301. eft or right The shift selection commands allow you to quickly create a new selection adjacent to the current selection while maintaining the size of the original Creating a new selection to the left of the current selection From the Edit menu choose Selection and choose Shift Left from the submenu Tip You can also click the Shift Selection Left button on the Navigation toolbar or press lt Creating a new selection to the right of the current selection From the Edit menu choose Selection and choose Shift Right from the submenu LOOPING 285 Rotating audio You can move the beginning of a loop to the end or the end of a loop to the beginning by rotating the audio From the Process menu choose Rotate Audio Notes S ka R Q 5 17 O a a N S JJ O or fav or D gt 2 e o QO gt oa Ne QO 53 DF D G A M WN WN O QO F Q QO lt 3 gn WN lt QO QO 5 If the selected audio does not originate from the start or end of a loop Rotate Audio has no effect Rotating the audio has different effects depending on what is selected e If no audio is selected Rotate Audio transfers the first 25 percent of the loop to the end of the loop B Voices Pad o o BB voices Pad e 7 Sustaining Loop 7 Sustaining Loop y y a x y a N amp AE 00 00 00 f 00 00 02 i 00 00 04 l i 00 00 06 amp AE 00 00 00 00
302. el Converter on page 189 DC Offset Changes the baseline of an audio file For more information see DC Offset on page 191 Graphic EQ Opens the XFX Graphic EQ For more information click the Help button D in the process dialog Paragraphic EQ Opens the XFX Paragraphic EQ For more information click the Help button e in the process dialog Parametric EQ Opens the XFX Parametric EQ For more information click the Help button B in the process dialog Graphic Fade Creates user configurable fades For more information see Fade Graphic Fade on page 192 Fade In Fades in the selection For more information see Fade Fade In on page 194 Fade Out Fades out the selection For more information see Fade Fade Out on page 194 Invert Flip Inverts or flips the polarity of the current selection For more information see Invert Flip on page 194 44 CHAPTER 2 J Mute Mutes the current selection For more information see Mute on page 195 Normalize Normalizes the loudness of an audio file For more information see Normalize on page 196 Pan Expand Creates custom pans expands and mixes For more information see Pan Expand on page 198 Resample Creates a copy of the audio file with a new sample rate For more information see Resample on page 200 iZotope 64 Bit SRC Changes the sample rate of an existing file For more information see iZotope 64 Bit SRC on page 202 Reverse Reverses the current sele
303. eletes data from the window but does not copy it to the clipboard Trim Crop Deletes all data in the window with the exception of the selection Mix Mixes data from the clipboard with the data in the current window starting at the current cursor position or the start of the current selection Copying You can copy audio data from a data window to the clipboard without changing the original file Once audio data is on the clipboard you can paste it into existing files or use it to create new files Copying data to the clipboard 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 Create a selection containing Wow B Wow sound editing a dila le MD lo lm ab O K 41 gt Pi m p Pate0 00 aA 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 1 347 3 From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button amp The selected data is copied to the clipboard but the waveform is unchanged Previewing clipboard contents To preview the contents of the clipboard choose Clipboard from the View menu and choose Play from the submenu Tip You can view detailed information on the size and attributes of the clipboard contents in the Clipboard Contents window From the View menu choose Clipboard and then choose Contents from the submenu to display the Clipboard Contents window Clipboard Contents Format PCM Attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Stereo Length 00 16 5
304. ellation among the channels in an audio file For more information on channel meters see Channel Meters on page 135 For more information on hardware meters see Using the hardware meters on page 117 Right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window and choose Show Phase Scope from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the phase scope To change the display right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window choose Phase Scope Style from the shortcut menu and then choose a setting from the submenu Style Description Lissajous XY Plot Displays the right and left channels plotted along the X and Y axes of the graph Lissajous Rotated Displays the right and left channels plotted along the X and Y axes of the graph This setting is identical to the Lissajous XY Plot setting but the graph is rotated 45 degrees Polar Linear Plot Displays the right and left channels plotted vertically on the graph Polar Circular Plot Displays the right and left channels plotted on a circular graph Mono Compatibility Meter You can display a mono compatibility meter in the Channel Meters and Hardware Meters windows to detect correlations or differences between the channels of a file that can cause phase cancellation when downmixing to mono For more information about channel meters see Channel Meters on page 135 For more information about hardware meters see Using the hardware meters on page 117 Right click the Channel Met
305. elp Guidelines button in this dialog When you are finished entering the information click the OK button to submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote database Extracting audio from CDs The Explorer window allows you to easily extract audio from a CD into a data window Each audio track on the CD is extracted into a separate data window 1 Use the Explorer window to browse to and select your CD drive The CD s audio tracks appear in the right pane of the Explorer window Select the tracks you want to extract Drag the tracks to the main Sound Forge workspace The software begins extracting the selected tracks into individual data windows To stop the extraction process you can click the Cancel button on the status bar to stop the whole process or on the individual data windows to stop extracting a specific track Tip To extract a single audio track into a new data window double click the track in the right pane of the Explorer window Using Explorer views You can control the information that appears in the Explorer window by clicking the Views button and selecting a view These options are explained below Item Description Tree View Displays all of the available drives and folders that you can choose from to find files Region View Displays any regions that have been defined in the selected media file Summary View Displays a short description of the selected media file at the bottom of the Explorer window Detail
306. els of a multichannel file However channel lengths must always remain equal in multichannel files For more information on cutting copying and pasting data see Editing audio on page 79 52 CHAPTER 2 Chapter 3 Metadata windows From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose a command from the submenu to display metadata windows where you can view and edit information about the current data window Tips Ifyou want to sort the contents of a metadata window you can click a column heading to sort in ascending or descending order Ifyou want to display all metadata windows docked together choose View gt Metadata gt Show All and then choose a command from the submenu to indicate where youd like to display the docked window Copying metadata to the clipboard Note These procedures do not apply to the Regions List Playlist and Track List If you want to copy metadata to the clipboard right click the window and choose Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu File Properties Edit a Copy to Clipboard NS Custom Copy to Clipboard TP oo If you want to customize the format for copying metadata to the clipboard right click the window and choose Custom Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu The Copy Metadata dialog is displayed to let you choose whether you want to copy the data as formatted text or delimited text set a delimiter and choose wheth
307. en the feature is enabled When the video strip is animated the video strip always displays the frame that corresponds to the cursor position Press Alt Right Arrow or Alt Left Arrow to move the cursor one frame When frame animation is turned off the video strip always shows the frame that corresponds to the left edge of each image in the video strip Tip f you experience slow or stuttering video preview turn off animated video to reduce the load on your CPU Copying the current video frame to the clipboard You can use the clipboard to copy the video frame at the current cursor position From the Options menu choose Video and then choose Copy Frame or right click the video strip and choose Copy Frame from the shortcut menu The current frame is copied to the clipboard Previewing files with video If you are working with a media file that contains video you can use the Video Preview window for previewing You must have the Video Preview window displayed to preview the audio stream You can hide or display the Video Preview window by choosing Video Preview from the View menu To begin previewing the current data window click the Play All button I on the transport bar Tip To display the Video Preview window press Alt 4 290 CHAPTER 20 Video Preview F g 160x120 320x240 29 970 fps Frame Rate Current Display Size Original Frame Size Frame 0000137 Frame Number Copy Frame to Clipboard Copies the cu
308. en to the transition from processed to unprocessed data Tip Post roll can be toggled on and off by right clicking the dialog and choosing Post roll from the shortcut menu Select this check box to automatically recalculate and play back the preview buffer if the parameters of an effect change This allows for immediate feedback of the effects of a change This option is most useful when using a fast computer limiting preview times and not using processor intensive effects Use the Pre roll and Loop time settings to control how the audio event locator plays audio e Inthe Pre roll box specify the amount of data played prior to the cursor position e Inthe Loop time box specify the amount of time that will loop when you stop the cursor while clicking and dragging in the overview bar To use the audio event locator hold Ctrl click the overview bar and drag the mouse Similar to a scrub control playback follows mouse movement and loops around the cursor position when the mouse is still Playback stops when the mouse button is released Use the Pre roll and Post roll settings to control the amount of data that is played back when you choose Preview Cut Cursor from the Transport menu e Inthe Pre roll box specify the amount of data played prior to the selection or cursor position Inthe Post roll box specify the amount of data played after the selection or cursor position When Loop Playback mode is turned on and you m
309. en working with the Event tool the End box is not available Determines the length of your selection in the data window Click the Lock Length button to lock or unlock the current selection length When the selection length is locked Sound Forge will adjust the values in the Start or End boxes to retain the specified selection length Note When working with the Event tool x the Length box is automatically locked Determines the channel s included in the data window selection Type a number in the box to change the channel selection while retaining the start end and length selections Click the Lock Channels button sf to preserve to Channels setting when adjusting the time selection in the data window Note When working in event editing mode the Channels box is automatically locked If you re working with the Event tool s and have multiple events selected you can of the processing dialog to navigate events Sound Forge processes The remainder of this chapter describes the functions located in the Process menu Auto Trim Crop Auto Trim Crop removes silence from an audio file In addition this function automatically fades the endpoints of a phrase Using Auto Trim Crop 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Auto Trim Crop The Auto Trim Crop dialog is displayed Auto Trim Crop Wow sound editing Preset x ee Cancel Function Keep edges outside
310. end of the selected area 3 If you want to name the region right click the tag and choose Rename from the shortcut menu Type a name for the region in the edit box and press Enter Tip You can also insert regions by pressing the R key or Ctrl Alt R when the Event tool is selected USING MARKERS REGIONS AND COMMANDS 121 Naming or renaming a region e Right click the starting region marker F and choose Rename from the shortcut menu Type the name of the region in the edit box and press Enter when you re finished e Double click to the right of the region marker and type a name in the edit box Selecting a region e Right click the starting or ending region marker F and choose Select Region from the shortcut menu The region is highlighted e Double click the start or end region marker The region is highlighted Moving a region Drag either region tag F to move the tab and change the region s size Hold the Alt key while dragging either region tag to move a region and preserve its length Regions will snap to other markers regions and command markers Hold Shift while dragging to override snapping Deleting a region Right click the region marker F and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Deleting all markers and regions Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All from the submenu All markers 2 and regions F are removed Deleting all markers and regions withi
311. er 187 HRTF impulses 242 importing regions from external file 126 importing keyboard shortcut maps 347 impulse files adding summary information 241 configuring 240 creating 238 equipment placement 238 equipment required for creating 238 head related transfer functions HRTF 242 naming 240 recording test tone 239 recording through electronic device 239 recovering 240 recovering from acoustic spaces 238 recovering from electronic devices 238 setting levels 239 transferring test tone 238 trimming impulse files 240 trimming test tone 239 using in creative ways 241 inactive data windows vs active data windows 71 increasing volume of selections 204 input monitoring 151 Insert CD Index button 43 Insert CD Track button 43 Insert Command button 43 Insert Marker button 43 Insert Pan Envelope button 43 Insert Region button 43 Insert Sample Loop button 43 Insert Silence button 43 Insert toolbar 43 Insert Volume Envelope button 43 inserting CD index markers 311 CD tracks 311 command markers 127 markers 119 regions 121 silence 159 interactive tutorials 26 40 intermixing channels 190 internal samplers 259 International Standard Recording Codes ISRC 319 interpolating audio to repair glitches 46 164 introduction 25 26 Invert Flip process 44 194 IRCAM 363 ISRC codes 319 iXML metadata 55 iZotope 64 Bit SRC process 44 202 iZotope MBIT Dither process 44 188 189 JKL shuttle spe
312. er because complex sounds have a rapidly changing spectrum a large analysis size can blur the time changing frequencies of a sound For example when performing FFT analysis of an audio file sampled at 44 100 Hz using an analysis size of 4096 almost 100 milliseconds 44 100 4096 of sound are analyzed If the sound is not constant for those 100 milliseconds it is impossible to focus on the instantaneous spectrum at smaller time intervals This is the trade off between time resolution and frequency resolution encountered when analyzing audio signals Spectrum Analysis allows you to perform precise FFT analysis and displays the resulting data in a spectrum graph or a sonogram display The spectrum graph allows real time monitoring of playback or input while the sonogram displays a playback cursor for real time preview Both formats make it easy to navigate data and read audio frequency and position USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 295 Using a spectrum graph In the spectrum graph the horizontal axis represents frequency in Hertz Hz while the vertical axis represents amplitude in decibels dB Displaying a spectrum graph 1 Open an audio file 2 Select the portion of the waveform you want to analyze The sound or note you want to analyze should be in the center of the highlighted area Note Analyzing long sections of audio can take a long time and decreases the time resolution so your selection should be relatively short Also if the audio
313. er playback or recording by receiving timecode from another device When this option is selected dialogs that specify MIDI triggers will also accept input from the MIDI input port allowing easy entry of MIDI note and controller values When this option is not selected the MIDI triggers Regions List triggers and Playlist triggers specified will be ignored Note You can specify a MIDI input port on the MIDI Sync tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see MIDI Sync tab on page 338 Triggering playback with MIDI timecode You can use MIDI timecode to trigger Sound Forge playback from another device 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the MIDI Sync tab 2 On the MIDI Sync tab choose the trigger device from the Input drop down list and click the OK button 3 From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu to enable MIDI input 4 From the View menu choose Toolbars Select the Regions Playlist check box and click the OK button The timecode is displayed in the Regions Playlist toolbar when you start your MIDI device 5 Create a region that includes the sound data that you want to trigger For more information see Inserting a region on page 121 6 Add your region to the Playlist For more information see Adding regions to the Playlist on page 131 7 Inthe Playlist window choose SMPTE Play at Time from the Trigger drop down list and enter the time a
314. er you want to include a header row Copy Metadata Copy formatted text Copy delimited text Indude tite row IM Indude header row W Indude header underscores OK Cancel Click OK to copy the metadata to the clipboard and you can then paste the information wherever you need it Regions List window Ctrl Alt M 0 The Regions List window contains all regions and markers that exist in the active data window From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Regions List from the submenu to show or hide the Regions List window For more information see Using the Regions List on page 129 Playlist window Ctrl Alt M 1 The Playlist window is used to arrange regions for playback From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Playlist from the submenu to show or hide the Playlist window For more information see Using the Playlist on page 130 METADATA WINDOWS 53 Track List window CtrI Alt M 2 The Track List window is used to arrange tracks for a disc at once CD From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Track List from the submenu to show or hide the Track List window For more information see Using the Track List window on page 318 ACID Properties window Ctrl Alt M 3 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose ACID Properties from the submenu to display the ACID Properties window where you can view and edit ACID specific information in a sound file For more information ab
315. ers or Hardware Meters window and choose Show Mono Compatibility Meter from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the mono compatibility meter When the channels are similar the right or top half of the meter is illuminated EE When the channels exhibit phase cancellations the left or bottom half of the meter is illuminated I MONITORING LEVELS IN DIGITAL AUDIO 139 Loudness Meters From the View menu choose Loudness Meters to display the Loudness Meters window The Loudness Meters tool provides data about an audio file s momentary loudness short term loudness integrated overall loudness and loudness range You can use these values when mastering for broadcast to ensure compliance with loudness standards such as the CALM Act Loudness Meters ATSC 485 Momentary EAE LU Short 1 1 LU Integrated RIE LU Loudness Range 9 0 LU True Peaks True peaks dBFS The meters display real time values for each of the following measurements e The M meter represents the momentary loudness in loudness units LU across all audio channels based on 400 millisecond integration windows The Momentary box displays a numeric representation of the momentary loudness e The S meter represents the short term loudness in loudness units across all audio channels based on 3 second integration windows The Short box displays a numeric representation of the short term loudness e The I meter represents the integrat
316. es Woe jell ae 639 00 00 02 677 Selection Length ToolTip Turning off ToolTips 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog is displayed 2 Clear the Show ToolTips check box and click OK Command descriptions When you click and hold a menu item or a button in a toolbar a brief description of the command appears in the lower left corner of the status bar If you release the mouse button outside of the menu item or toolbar the command is not executed Keyboard shortcuts The Keyboard map allows you to customize the keyboard shortcuts available in the Sound Forge interface You can access the Keyboard map by choosing Customize Keyboard from the Options menu For more information see Customizing keyboard shortcuts on page 346 LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 47 Controls A major step in mastering Sound Forge software is becoming familiar with the controls used to set and adjust feature parameters including faders sliders and envelope graphs Faders and sliders Faders and sliders are frequently used to edit effect and process parameters To use either control drag the control to the desired position and release 16 00 dB Fader 15 85 Drag to set value Normalize to 60 to 0 dB Response width 0 to 100 j 50 Slider Resetting fader and slider values Double click to return the control to its default value Fader and slider shortcuts There are numerou
317. es To display the Preset Manager choose Preset Manager from the Tools menu In the Preset Manager choose Contents and Index from the Help menu for instructions on how to manage your presets Sound Forge effects The remainder of this chapter describes the functions located in the Effects menu Acoustic Mirror The Acoustic Mirror effect is a powerful digital signal processing tool that allows you to add environmental coloration to your existing recordings For more information see What are the Acoustic Mirror effects on page 233 Amplitude Modulation Use the Amplitude Modulation effect to apply a sinusoidal or square shaped periodic gain to the input signal The frequency of the gain waveform can be specified to create effects varying from a slow tremolo to unusual sound distortions For information about using the Amplitude Modulation effect click the Help button E in the Sony Amplitude Modulation dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index 226 CHAPTER 14 Chorus From the Effects menu choose Chorus to add a pitch modulated and delayed version of the input signal to the unprocessed input signal The effect simulates the variances in pitch and timing that occur naturally when two or more people try to play or sing the same thing at the same time For information about using the Chorus effect click the Help button E in the Sony Chorus dialog or refer to the Sound Forge onli
318. es dialog For more information see Display tab on page 333 When selected the Time Display window will be updated only when the processor is idle Use this when using a slow computer to prevent the audio from glitching The smallest increments may not be exact but the major time increments will be accurate Selecting this option can prevent gapping during playback on slower computers Setting preferences Preferences affect how Sound Forge software functions Any changes that you make to the preferences remain set until you change them again or reset Sound Forge software to use the default presets You can access the Preferences dialog by choosing Preferences from the Options menu This dialog contains tabbed pages The following sections explain the settings on each tab General tab The General tab allows you to set miscellaneous Sound Forge options Option Open default Workspace on startup Use Net Notify to stay informed about Sony products Show logo splash screen on startup Show a textured background on the Workspace Keep media files locked Confirm on close Always open dropped files in new window Always proxy compressed formats Ignore fact chunk when opening compressed Wave files Remember last used sample rate for vox and ivc files Remember last used settings for raw files Hide new temporary files Delete new temporary files on close Remember last used Save As folder Description If
319. es the mouse related terms used throughout this manual Mouse Term Pointing Clicking Right clicking Double clicking Triple clicking Toggle clicking Shift clicking Ctrl clicking Dragging Slow dragging Description Moving the mouse pointer over an item Pointing to an item and quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button If there is no left or right specification left clicking is implied Pointing to an item and quickly pressing and releasing the right mouse button Right clicking is frequently used to display shortcut menus Identical to clicking but instead of pressing and releasing the mouse button once it is done twice in quick succession Double clicking always indicates the left mouse button Identical to clicking but instead of pressing and releasing the mouse button once it is done three times in quick succession Triple clicking always indicates the left mouse button Clicking the right mouse button while holding down the left mouse button This is used to toggle options and is a shortcut for drag and drop editing and using the Magnify tool Holding down the Shift key while clicking the mouse Shift clicking is typically used to skip dialogs and quickly repeat operations Holding down the Ctrl key while clicking the mouse Ctrl clicking is used to modify the operation of a normal click Holding down the left mouse button while moving the mouse pointer and releasing the mouse at the desired
320. esents the unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system In digital sampling a binary number is used to store individual sound levels called samples Bit Depth The number of bits used to represent a single sample For example 8 or 16 bit are common sample sizes While 8 bit samples take up less memory and hard disk space they are inherently noisier than 16 or 24 bit samples Buffer Memory used as an intermediate repository in which data is temporarily held while waiting to be transferred between two locations A buffer ensures that there is an uninterrupted flow of data between computers Media players may need to rebuffer when there is network congestion Bus A virtual pathway where signals from tracks and effects are mixed A bus s output is a physical audio device in the computer from which the signal will be heard Byte Refers to a set of 8 bits An 8 bit sample requires one byte of memory to store while a 16 bit sample takes two bytes of memory to store Channel Converter The Channel Converter is a function that converts files from mono to stereo and stereo to mono with independent level control of the new channels This function can also create interesting effects by converting stereo files to stereo with various levels and inversion of channels Channel Meters The Channel Meters in Sound Forge software display the peak output levels of the sound file currently playing These meters have selectable resolution and op
321. esolution for processing Dither mode Choose a setting from the drop down to choose the type of dithering that will be applied to mask quantization noise e Type 1 Uses a traditional rectangular probability distribution function e Type 2 Uses a traditional rectangular probability distribution function e MBIT Uses a proprietary algorithm to offer superior results for all types of source material Noise shaping Choose a setting from the drop down list to control the amount of noise shaping that will be applied When Type 1 or Type 2 is selected in the Dither mode drop down list the following settings are available e None No noise shaping is applied e Simple A high pass filter is applied to the dither noise e Clear Aggressively moves dither noise toward the Nyquist frequency e Psych5 Uses a fifth order filter to move dither noise away from audible frequency bands Psych9 Uses a ninth order filter to move dither noise away from audible frequency bands When MBIT is selected in the Dither mode drop down list you can choose a setting from the Noise shaping drop down list to control the amount of noise shaping applied Increased settings will provide more audible noise suppression at the expense of a higher noise floor 188 CHAPTER 13 Item Description Dither bits amount When Type 1 or Type 2 is selected in the Dither mode drop down list you can choose a setting from the Dither bits drop down list to choose whether you
322. esponds The number of beats in each measure for displaying in measures and beats For example 2 4 time would have two beats per measure This setting will be also be used in the Edit Tempo dialog The number of beats per minute that is the tempo of a song for displaying lengths This setting will be also be used in the Edit Tempo dialog The amount of sound data surrounding the cursor used to calculate the RMS level in the Levels toolbar The amount of sound data surrounding the cursor used when searching for a peak level to display in the Levels toolbar Choose a setting from the drop down list or type a value in the box to calibrate the VU PPM meters to their associated levels on the peak meters VU meters display sound in dB VU where 0 VU is a reference level and there is headroom above 0 VU The Sound Forge peak meters display peaks in dB FS decibels relative to full scale In digital audio there is no headroom above 0 dB FS Choosing a setting from this drop down list subtracts a nominal dB value from the VU meters so that a signal displayed on the VU meters remains slightly below 0 dB on the peak meters Type a value in the box to set the amount of data surrounding the cursor that will be used to calculate levels in the VU meters This setting has no effect on the PPM scales which use fixed integration times e UKPPM 10ms e EBU PPM 10 ms e DIN PPM 5 ms e Nordic PPM 5 ms Select this check box if you want to treat
323. eswectiersoronarsierers psa see a aa a iaa 216 Applying the effects Chain ccc ccc cece eee eee e ene e eee e eee eeneeeeeeeennes 216 Saving the plug in chain aS a Preset cece ee eee e eee eeeeeeees 216 Saving the settings from an individual plug in as a preset cece ccc eee eee eee 217 Using processing dialogs ccc ccc ccc ccc ce cece eee eee teen eeeeeeeees 218 PREVIEWING 4UCIO ansudscaiectw as aaan E somatsddeiwuddeianddsenyaettabavewiauied n 218 Previewing with pre or pOSt roll 0 ccc cc cece eee eee eeeennnes 218 Choosing a processing mode for tail data ccc ccc ccc eee cette eee ee neeeeeneees 219 creanga DESE ie nance crea os Gare cierto a arene ee vane E E eae meweeeun aes 219 Deleting a Preset cca tik ows dGerwednos oboe ewieeuedued neces seek eeues eee andes eeminwaws 219 Using Sound Forge CONTIONS oo ive ndscdedeuseud Terres ndane PEENE EAEN 219 Changing the data window selection 0 ccc cece cece e cece eee e eee e esse eeeeeeeeanes 221 Changing the wet dry mix and fade in out ccc ccc cece tee een eeennneeees 222 Learning more about a specific effect 2 0 ccc ccc eee ee eee nee e eee ee eennees 222 Learning more about a specific PFOCESS 6 ccc cee eee teen eee e eee ee eeeneees 222 Automating effect parameters ccc ccc ccc cee eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeneees 223 Adding a volume or panning envelope cc ccc cece cece eee e eee e ee ee eee eeeeeeeeees 223
324. ew Loading a preset for an individual DirectX plug in Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list The plug in settings stored in the preset are loaded Apply Plug In Chain One of These Days Chain Mastering Hx T Cancel Bypass axl W Real time z Untitled S Sys Bass A Sys Bypass a Byp Sys Deep compression FE 42 0 Eys Default all parameters Sys Guitar Sys Guitar distortion 1 Sys Guitar distortion 2 te Loading a preset for an individual VST plug in 1 Click the VST effect s button to display the effect s parameters in the Apply Plug In Chain window 2 Click the Open VST Preset button 6 Apply Plug In Chain One of These Days Ea Hx k cancel c Wave Hammer F VST Plug In Bypass Real time Preset Untitled E The Open VST Preset dialog is displayed 3 Browse to the fxp file that you want to use WORKING WITH EFFECTS 215 4 Click the Open button The current VST preset is replaced with the settings stored in the fxp file Loading a bank of VST plug in presets 1 Click the VST effect s button to display the effect s parameters in the Apply Plug In Chain window 2 Click the Open VST Bank button Apply Plug In Chain One of These Days I k c F Wave Hammer ST Plug In Preview E Bypass Preset Untitled E H E fy za Real time The Open VST Preset
325. ew data window Drag a file from the Explorer window to a data window The cursor indicates where the sound data will be added When you release the mouse button to drop the selection the selection is pasted and an event is created From the Edit menu choose Tool and then choose Event from the submenu Peo p When you click in the data window with the Event tool events are selected You can hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple events In the following example the data window contains four events and the second event is highlighted to indicate that it is selected all USING THE EVENT TOOL 171 Creating events by dragging selections You can create events in a data window by dragging sound data within a data window or to another data window Tip The Always open dropped files in new window check box on the General page of the Preferences dialog must be cleared if you want to create events with drag and drop operations When the check box is selected dropping a file on the Sound Forge workspace always creates a new data window Select the Edit tool 4 Create a time selection in a data window Drag the selection to the location where you want to mix or paste it When you release the mouse button to drop the selection the selection is pasted or mixed and an event is created TOA We S Select the Event tool f You can then use the Event tool to work with the new event Creating events by processing a selection W
326. eyond if you have the Allow Undo past Save check box enabled on the General tab of the Preferences dialog To clear the undo redo history for the current file go to the Edit menu and choose Clear Undo Redo History Note A file s undo redo history is also automatically cleared when you close the file or exit the software Selecting status formats The status format determines how a file s position and length information is displayed The following table briefly describes supported status formats hh hours mm minutes ss seconds and ff frames For more information see SMPTE Timecode on page 361 Format name Description Format Samples Number of samples Numbered starting with zero Time Hours minutes seconds and milliseconds hh mmiss sss Seconds Seconds and fractions of seconds sssss sss to three decimal places Time amp Frames Hours minutes seconds and frames hh mm ss ff Absolute Frames Frames and fractions of frames Numbered starting with zero to three decimal places Measures amp Beats Measures beats and quarter beats measures beats quarters SMPTE Film Sync 24 fps SMPTE at 24 frames per second for hh mmiss ff synchronizing with film SMPTE EBU 25 fps Video SMPTE at 25 frames per second for hh mmiss ff European Broadcasting Union SMPTE Non Drop 29 97 fps Video SMPTE at 29 97 frames per second hh mmiss ff SMPTE Drop 29 97 fps Video SMPTE at 29 97 frames per second using hh mmiss ff dropped frame numbers SMPTE 30 3
327. f 12 to 12 dBu UK Marks dBu 7 12 6 8 5 4 4 0 3 4 2 8 1 12 EBU PPM The EBU peak program meter is a Type Il meter and is displayed with a scale of 12 to 12 which corresponds to 12 dBu to 12 dBu 0 on the EBU PPM equals 0 dBu The EBU PPM and UK PPM respond identically to increases in volume but the EBU PPM decays more slowly DIN PPM The DIN peak program meter is a Type I meter and is displayed with a scale of 50 dB to 5 dB which corresponds to 44 dBu to 11 dBu 0 dB on the DIN PPM equals 6 dBu Nordic PPM The Nordic peak program meter is a Type meter and is displayed with a scale of 42 dB to 12 dB which corresponds to 42 dBu to 12 dBu 0 dB on the Nordic PPM equals 0 dBu 138 CHAPTER 9 Adjusting the VU PPM meters sensitivity Unlike peak meters which read instantaneous changes in your audio signal the VU PPM meters read a portion of the signal and calculate the average level The size of the signal that the meters read is determined by the meters integration time To set the amount of data surrounding the cursor that will be used to calculate levels in the VU meters specify a value in the VU meter integration time box on the Status tab of the Preferences dialog The PPM scales use a fixed integration time Scale Integration time UKPPM 10ms o EBU PPM 10 ms DIN PPM 5 ms Nordic PPM 5ms Phase Scope You can display a phase scope in the Channel Meters and Hardware Meters windows to find phase canc
328. f the looped region The number of times the loop plays is dependent upon the Loop count value in the Edit Sample dialog Use this button to audition the loop for pops and glitches For more information see Creating a sustaining loop on page 277 tom Play Post Loop Starts playback immediately following the loop end point and continue through the end of the file Tip You can use the Play as Sample button gt in the playbar to audition the entire sample with configured loops Switching between the sustain and release loops When working with a file that contains sustain and release loops you can quickly toggle between the loops by clicking the Loop Select button jg When working with a file containing two loops this button indicates which loop is active e A selection in the middle of the Loop Select button icon g indicates that the sustaining loop is active e A selection at the end of the Loop Select button icon gi indicates that the release loop is active 280 CHAPTER 19 Viewing loop amplitude The sample amplitude at the loop s start and end points appears in the lower right corner of the Loop Tuner End Loop Amplitude gt 1 104 4 355 lt Start Loop Amplitude Although it is dependent on the specific waveform a good rule of thumb is that the closer these two amplitude values are the more natural the resulting loop sounds Finding zero crossings The Loop Tuner s zero crossing finders are used to locat
329. f the scroll box to zoom in or out 4 i ih O HW a hH Ep Pato Scrub control Drag the scrub control b gt at the bottom of a data window to shuttle forward or backward from the cursor position to find an edit point O HKH Hh H H p ae 0 00 oe 00 00 00 000 00 03 30 427 1 1 024 Tip Hover over the scrub control and roll the mouse wheel forward or backward You can drag the Normal Rate indicator 4 below the scrub control to adjust playback speed or double click the label to type a playback rate For more information see Scrubbing on page 92 36 CHAPTER 2 Selection status bar Shows the beginning end and length of a selection If no selection has been made only the cursor position is displayed No selection Selection 00 00 02 207 00 00 05 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 Cursor position Selection start Selectionend Selection length e Double click the Selection Start box to edit the current value Press Tab or Enter to move the cursor to the new position e Double click the Selection Start or Selection Length box to edit beginning or ending of the selection Press Tab or Enter to update the selection Tip To update the Selection Start Selection End or Selection Length values quickly you can type or and a numeric value For example to extend the right end of a selection one second double click the Selection End box and type 1 To move the left end of a selection one minute to
330. figure pre roll and post roll lengths 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Previews tab 3 Configure the Pre roll and Post roll values in the Cut preview configuration area of the dialog and click OK Deleting Deleting a selection permanently removes it without placing it on the clipboard To delete data choose Delete Clear from the Edit menu or press the Delete key Notes Ifyou delete data from individual channels of multichannel files the waveform will contain silence at the end of the deleted channel The channels in a multichannel file must always be equal in length Ifthe Treat as Cutlist command available in the Edit menu Playlist Cutlist submenu is selected deleting a selection creates a region in the Cutlist window but does not remove the selection For more information see Configuring the Playlist as a Cutlist on page 133 82 CHAPTER 4 Trimming Cropping Trimming allows you to retain a selection while deleting all surrounding data 1 Create a selection containing Wow sound editing just gets easier in Voiceover pca but do not select the second and easier a Wow sound editing 2 fon Ealwow FERRE Silence EBM Sound editing just gets easier EI Ara easier ky a Af 00 00 00 000 100 00 4 0 5 Inf 4 4 0 5 dll lt iit r o OOK dP AEE 00 00 00 000 00 00 03 640 00 00 03 640 1 398 2 From the
331. files even on sound cards that do not directly support compression so you can play a sound file that is compressed with Microsoft ADPCM or the DSP Group s TrueSpeech without decompressing the file first The Sound Mapper cannot always record compressed sound files because compressing sound data can be very processor intensive the amount of time required is dependent on the compression algorithm and how it is implemented Decompressing sound data is almost always faster than compressing the same sound data Sound Forge software does not play and record compressed sound files directly Rather all compression and decompression is performed while opening and saving the sound files Sound Forge software saves compressed sound files using the best quality possible something that cannot always be done in real time Saving compressed sound files with Sound Forge software will usually sound better than those recorded with audio compression Notes The Open dialog allows you to preview compressed wav files if you have an appropriate ACM driver is installed However you must have your Default playback device set to the Sound Mapper for this to work e When saving uncompressed audio data to a compressed format with the Save As dialog it is a good idea to close the file and reopen it after saving Since Sound Forge software performs the compression and decompression during saving and loading you will not be able to hear what the file sounds like with
332. frame in the video strip To move the cursor by single frames press Alt Right Arrow or Alt Left Arrow Viewing frame numbers You can display frame numbers on each frame in your video strip which can assist you in positioning your audio As you zoom in more tightly each frame in the strip represents one frame in the video 1 Open a video file and display the video strip 2 From the Options menu choose Video and then choose Number Frames A check mark appears next to this option on the menu when the feature is enabled and a small box with a number appears at the bottom of each frame The small black arrow marks the exact position of the frame Tip You can also right click the video strip and choose Number Frames from the shortcut menu 3 Using the data window s zoom ratio controls Zoom in out on the waveform several times and observe the numbering of the video frames Tip Select a frame number format by choosing Preferences from the Options menu and selecting an option from the Frame numbering on thumbnails drop down list on the Video tab Animating the video strip During playback of a video file the video strip can display animated or still frames This can visually aid in editing and positioning your audio to match the video From the Options menu choose Video and then choose Animate Video Strip or right click the video strip and choose Animate from the shortcut menu A check mark appears next to this option on the menu wh
333. g a SCVIPt 1 cece cece eee ee eee eee e eens eee eeeaeeenes 250 Running a script from the Script Editor WINGOW cece ccc ccc eee nett eee eeneees 250 Running a script from the Scripting MENU ccc cee eect ene eee e eee eeeennees 250 Running a script from the command line ccc cece eee eee ee eee eee eee ennees 250 SCAP rU aroa AA AR EEEE A ETE EANA 251 Adding scripts to the Scripting Menu ccc eee eee cence eee e nents eeeeeeeeeeeaes 252 ES EE a a go ep tage va yas bees eae cue Ree ei eae 252 Editing AN EXISTING SCFIPT 0 6 ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeees 252 Using the SCIDUNG TOON 94 2405 sseaeswanyasneeisseeks eves EEEa 253 Adding or removing toolbar buttons cece eee ee eee eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeees 253 Creating CUSTOM DUTTON IMAGES cece cece eee eee e eens este eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 254 HUMMING a SCWIDe acaccsexccadcneweenensastvsesacetu eames eas pacee eee ancmuee weer acaea semen 254 Using the Batch CONVENE 4 6d4 40 5250435i0dbsdawdn eeeeeareteaewds aeeee eS TENEN PITON 255 CONVO Te Sc anon gucassccedaueansecerseusacsscquuensenssshaeuacnasceoinedonsscaunsauess 255 Creating or editing a batch job ccc ccc eee eee e eee e eects eeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 256 Sali OMINO scans EErEE 4 new ad a EEEE E EEEE bore Gann eure EERE 259 SAINI Sea wawh ae oh eee esac aac eee be eena wenn a ueads bese E E EE A E sus 259 Exte hia sal Cle sec aatesces oles oa cee neea acaeeeo
334. g files to the Web 0 ccc cece cece cee een ee ee ee eee eee eeeeeeneeeeees 89 Recovering files after a crash 0 0 ccc cece cece cece eee e eee e eee eee eeeenneeeees 89 RECOVEIING NCS coca suse E daesiu sone Borde asnsenesoulaaueavehceaesisaus oes 89 Deleting recovered TINGS ssererserisia wig bionaiieanGidadeade cua ATETA 89 Navigating Zooming and Selecting ccc cece cece e eee e eee e eee eeeees 91 Setting the cursor POSITION 6 ccc cece cece eee eee eeeeeeeeneees 91 Previewing audio with pre roll 0 ccc cc ccc ccc ccc cee cece eee eee eeeeees 91 SUODIN 45 04 n 4 04eu cache EEE neon eens oe E euees A NA 92 Scrubbing with the scrub control slider ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee teen eeeenes 92 Scrubbing on the timeline 9 0 5050000 4 06 bond awee cand cde weeded ew EEEE EEE CNREE CECENE REEERE 92 Scrubbing with the keyboard susssesesessesesessesesesessesorseserereesesoesesoeseso 92 Scrubbing with the audio event locator ccc ccc cece cece ee eee eee eeeeeees 93 ZOOMING ANG MAGHINVING 4i ss 0viexd eles eine de rinitis at nINE wenden bekesews anes Ea 93 Zooming the time ruler horizontal ccc eee eect eee neeeeeees 93 Zooming the level ruler vertical 0 ccc eee eee cece eee e eee e eee e esses eeeeeaeees 94 Using custom zoom SEUINGS 2025s Sco eaaseesesieewisaaws deeresmonsdeueay swe wecee ee enees 95 Using ZOOMING SHOMCULS 4ac6 a6 cdssevse naGontiansenaduedenteud does eesdGnsdi
335. g its length Replicating markers or regions Replicating a marker or region creates an exact copy of an existing marker or region in a file You can use the Regions List window to modify the properties of the replicated entry 1 Select an entry in the Regions List If the Regions List is not visible choose Regions List from the View menu 2 From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Replicate from the submenu Tip Right click an entry in the Regions List and choose Replicate from the shortcut menu Deleting markers or regions From the Edit menu choose Regions List and then choose Delete from the submenu to remove the selected marker or region from the Regions List window Tips e Select a region or marker in the Regions List window and press Delete e Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All or Delete All in Selection from the submenu Splitting regions Splitting a region divides an existing region at the current cursor position producing two separate regions 1 Inthe Regions List window select the region you want to split 2 Inthe data window position the cursor where you want the split to occur 3 From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Split from the submenu or right click a region in the Regions List window and choose Split from the shortcut menu If the cursor is placed within the region you re splitting the region will be split at the cursor positio
336. g the apparent loudness of a number of individual recordings 196 CHAPTER 13 Control Description Normalize to This fader specifies the level to which the highest peak should be set Ignore below With Peak level if the peak level is 10 dB and the Normalize to value is 3 dB a constant boost of 7 dB is applied to the entire file With Average RMS level normalizing to 0 dB means boosting the signal until it has the same apparent loudness as a 0 dB square wave This results in all the dynamic range of the signal being flattened and all peaks being either clipped or seriously compressed Note As a rule normalizing using Peak levels to 0 dB is acceptable but normalizing using Average RMS level to anything above 6 GB is not recommended Determines the level of audio data included in the RMS calculation Data below the Attack time Release time threshold is ignored effectively eliminating silent sections from RMS calculation The Ignore below fader should be set a few dB above perceived silence If Ignore below is set to Inf all audio data is used However if the value is set too high above 10 dB the RMS value may never rise above the threshold In this case normalization cannot occur For this reason you should evaluate the threshold by clicking the Scan Levels button Determines how quickly the scan responds to transient peaks Determines how quickly the scan should stop using transient peak material after i
337. g the mouse within the data window Notice that the waveform is selected as the mouse is dragged 2 Click the Play button Only the selection plays B Wow sound editing Selection status bar 4 Il O I 41 gt gt gt i m gt Rate 0 00 40 gt 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 Tip When Options gt Seek Cursor on Playback is selected playback will restart when you position the cursor If you do not want to interrupt playback when positioning the cursor clear this command Viewing selection status When a selection exists the boxes in the selection status bar in the bottom right corner of the data window contain values These values indicate the start end and length of the selection Double click a box to edit the value No selection Selection 00 00 02 207 00 00 05 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 A t t Cursor position Selection start Selection end Selection length Selecting the status format You can display status values in any supported format You can change the format by right clicking and choosing a new format from the shortcut menu For more information see Selecting status formats on page 87 Viewing selection statistics Choosing Statistics from the Tools menu displays a Statistics window showing information about the current selection or if there is no selection on the entire file E Statistics Wow s
338. ght click an empty area of the dialog outside of the four tabs and choose Configuration from the shortcut menu The Real Time Preview Configuration dialog is displayed 3 Reconfigure the Buffers to process per second and Total playback buffers controls Typically lowering the Buffers to process per second value and increasing the Total playback buffers value reduces gapping during real time previewing Close all memory intensive applications Real time previewing may be limited by any additional applications operating on the desktop To avoid this situation close all memory intensive applications prior to using this effect Add additional RAM to the system We require at least 512 MB of RAM to operate Sound Forge software and its related tools Add a faster floating point arithmetic processor Many high speed processors are still lacking in speed when processing floating point arithmetic We recommend using high speed processors that provide exceptional floating point arithmetic for reliable real time previewing Impulses do not recover properly If you experience problems recovering custom impulse recordings verify each of the following 1 Verify that you have trimmed the recorded test tone based on the mode chosen from the Impulse recovery mode drop down list For more information see Trimming the test tone on page 239 2 Verify that the second spike is present in the recorded test tone if the Auto detect timing spikes options is sp
339. h the letter P and a vertical line appears to show you where the paste will occur You can click the right mouse button while dragging to toggle mix paste and CD track drag and drop modes 4 When you release the mouse button to drop the selection the selection is pasted 80 CHAPTER 4 Pasting in a new data window To use data from the clipboard to create a new data window go to the Edit menu choose Paste Special and choose Paste to New from the submenu A new window containing the clipboard data is created Cutting Cutting allows you to remove a section of sound data from a data window and store it on the clipboard until you paste or mix it into another file Cutting sound data replaces the previous contents of the clipboard When deciding between cut and copy consider the following information e Copying data has no effect on the original file e Cutting data modifies the original file Cutting data from a window Note f you cut data from individual channels of multichannel files the waveform will contain silence at the end of the cut channel The channels in a multichannel file must always be equal in length 1 Create a selection containing the second Wow there should be two if you are following the examples in Voiceover pca B Wow sound editing o SOR X all lt tt OOK dp ra Ee 1er 00 00 01 476 00 00 02 210 00 00 00 734 1 456 2 From the Edit menu choose Cut or cli
340. hange the mode of the meters choose Loudness Meters from the Options menu and then choose EBU R 128 Mode or ATSC A 85 Mode from the submenu you can also right click the meter to set its options e When using EBU R 128 Mode the target value of the Integrated meter is 23 LUFS and the maximum True peak value is 1 0 dB FS Use this mode when you re mastering to European Broadcasting Union EBU standards e When using ATSC A 85 Mode the target value of the Integrated meter is 24 LUFS and the maximum True peak value is 2 0 dB FS Use this mode when you re mastering to North American Advanced Television Systems Committee ATSC standards The over target indicators will be triggered if the target values for Integrated and True peak meters are exceeded 140 CHAPTER 9 Choosing a loudness scale To change the scale of the meter choose Loudness Meters from the Options menu choose Loudness Scale and then choose EBU 9 or EBU 18 from the submenu you can also right click the meter to set its options e When using EBU 9 the meters are displayed with a range of 18 to 9 LU e When using EBU 18 the meters are displayed with a range of 36 to 18 LU Note Choosing a wide range allows you to see low level signals at the expense of precision display at high levels Select Absolute 23 LUFS if you want to display loudness values as Loudness Units Full Scale LUFS When Absolute 23 LUFS is not selected all values are express
341. hat enables different programs to share information ActiveX extends Microsoft Windows based architecture to include Internet and corporate intranet features and capabilities Developers use it to build user interactivity into programs and World Wide Web pages Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM A method of compressing audio data Although the theory for compression using ADPCM is standard there are many different algorithms employed For example Microsoft s ADPCM algorithm is not compatible with the International Multimedia Association s IMA approved ADPCM Advanced Streaming Format ASF See Windows Media Format on page 381 Aliasing A type of distortion that occurs when digitally recording high frequencies with a low sample rate For example in a motion picture when a car s wheels appear to slowly spin backward while the car is quickly moving forward you are seeing the effects of aliasing Similarly when you try to record a frequency greater than one half of the sampling rate the Nyquist Frequency instead of hearing a high pitch you may hear a low frequency rumble See also Nyquist Frequency on page 374 To prevent aliasing an anti aliasing filter is used to remove high frequencies before recording Once the sound has been recorded aliasing distortion is impossible to remove without also removing other frequencies from the sound This same anti aliasing filter must be applied when resampling to a lower sample rate G
342. he Video tab of the Preferences dialog allowing you to choose your external monitor device For more information see Configuring your video settings on page 293 Important Pulldown is automatically added when you preview 24p video on an external monitor Reduces the overhead needed to update the Video Display window The Video Display is updated when the processor is idle Toggles the display of the toolbar at the top of the window Toggles the information display at the bottom of the window Resizing the Video Preview window Double click the title bar of the Video Preview window to automatically resize the window to fit the current video file Double click the title bar again to resize the window to half its previous size This smaller size window allows for faster video frame previewing WORKING WITH VIDEO 291 Using an external monitor You have the option of viewing video on an external monitor To use this feature you must have an OHCl compliant IEEE 1394 DV interface and a device to convert the DV signal to video such as a DV camcorder deck or media converter Note Pulldown is automatically added when you preview 24p video on an external monitor From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Video tab or click the External Monitor button 1 on the Video Preview window From the External monitor device drop down list select the appropriate device Click Properties and adjust the following settings as nee
343. he mouse to create a selection box containing all points to be moved LOD Di poeeme 2 Release the mouse button The selected envelope points are displayed with a white square center 3 Drag any of the selected envelope points to the desired position The pointer displays as a multi directional arrow and the selected points move together 4 Release the mouse button The entire envelope graph adjusts 100 To Reposition multiple envelope points Changing the fade curve between two points To change the type of fade between two envelope points right click an envelope segment and choose a fade type Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade Smooth Fade Sharp Fade and Hold from the shortcut menu LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 49 Selecting or clearing all envelope points Press Ctrl A to select or clear all envelope points Adding an envelope point 1 Hover over the envelope Place the pointer on the envelope and 50 double click to add a point 2 Double click the mouse A point is added to the envelope graph and can be positioned as needed For more information see Moving an envelope point on page 49 Deleting an envelope point Right click the point to be deleted and choose Delete from the shortcut menu The point is deleted and the envelope adjusts Delete all points Delete all envelope points by clicking the Reset Envelope button Displaying the waveform on an envelope graph Certain envelope graph
344. he names of the plug ins 208 CHAPTER 14 Using the Plug In Chain From the View menu choose Plug In Chain to open or close the Plug In Chain for the current data window Tip Ifyou want to apply a single plug in chain to a data window use FX Favorites gt Apply Plug In Chain For more information see Applying a plug in chain on page 214 The Plug In Chain allows you to link up to 32 DirectX and VST plug ins into a single processing chain All of the plug ins in the chain can be previewed simultaneously in real time as long as your computer can process the preview information quickly enough The Plug In Chain is modeless you can navigate your data windows to change selections or apply effects to a different data window without closing the Plug In Chain Chain preset chain Untitled Remove Plug In chorus Plug in chain WW Slew Rate Add Plug Ins to Chain Plug In Chain Bypass Show Plug In Window Show Parameters Preset Untitled m on ef Distortion Preset Untitled X m GE E Slew Rate Enable E Low pass Filter Enable E Low pass Filter Frequency E Dry Out E Wet Out C C CICS LS 42 4 08 4 4 A I Bypass Creating a plug in chain 1 Select the data you want to process Tip f you ve used previous versions of Sound Forge Pro software you ll notice that you can now click away from the Plug In Chain at any time to adjust your sele
345. he slider to adjust the amount of tinting that is applied to the icons in the Sound Forge window Drag the slider to the right to add an average of the title bar colors to the icons Drag to the left to decrease the amount of tinting applied Tip You can use the Personalization control panel to change your active window title bar colors e In Windows Vista open the Personalization control panel and click Window Color and Appearance n the Appearance Settings dialog click the Advanced button and choose Active Title Bar from the Item drop down list In Windows 7 open the Personalization control panel and click Window Color In the Window Color and Appearance dialog choose Active Title Bar from the Item drop down list The Editing tab allows you to specify preferences for editing and undo operations Option Disable triple clicking to select all sound file data Disable auto snapping below 1 4 zoom ratios Force loop bar to match selection Update loop bar on Mark In Out Auto crossfade Mix with selection Drag amp drop auto rise delay Description Select this check box if you don t want to select all data when you triple click in a data window You might want to select this option if triple clicks are falsely detected when you make a selection and then try to perform a drag operation Otherwise decrease Windows double click threshold time When this check box is cleared you can triple click anywhere in a data
346. hen recording starts When Create new window is selected in the Mode drop down list in the Record Options window the Arm and Record buttons are enabled even when no data windows are open When Normal or Create regions is selected the Arm and Record buttons are not available until you create a data window or open a file For more information see Recording options on page 150 Starts and stops recording For more information please see one of the following sections e Creating anew recording on page 143 e Recording into an existing sound file on page 146 e Recording audio automatically on page 148 Moves the cursor to the start of the file Moves the cursor to the previous disc at once track or index Hold Ctrl while clicking to skip index markers or hold Shift to extend a selection Tip This button is displayed only if disc at once tracks are present in your data window Moves the cursor to the next disc at once track or index Hold Ctrl while clicking to skip index markers or hold Shift to extend a selection Tip This button is displayed only if disc at once tracks are present in your data window Moves the cursor to the end of the file LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 35 Button Description g Stop Stops playback and returns the cursor to its position prior to playback gt Play Normal Plays the file in Normal mode If there is no selection playback occurs from the cursor to end of file If there is a selec
347. hen you apply processes or effects to a portion of a sound file Sound Forge creates an event from the selection 1 Select the Edit tool 4 2 Create atime selection in a data window 3 Apply a process or effect to your time selection Sound Forge creates an event from the selection 4 Select the Event tool You can then use the Event tool to work with the new event Moving events You can move events horizontally along the timeline by dragging them Moving an event past the end of the current file inserts time into the data window You must remove any unwanted silence when you are finished editing the file When dragging events vertically across channels you are limited to the number of channels in the current file You cannot drag an event past the top or bottom channel in a data window to create more channels in the file Events can cross channel boundaries but overlapping events must lie on the same channels Sound Forge automatically splits or merges event channels as you move events Inf Inf Split BE Inf Ba o Sel a f _ Inf ac ba Inf Late a lt n 1MM Ini Crossfaded events before channel split The channels in both events are split when the first event is moved to channels 2 and 3 because overlapping events must lie on the same channels For more information on dragging channel boundaries see Dragging channel boundaries on page 174 You
348. hic from the submenu The Graphic Fade dialog is displayed 3 From the Preset drop down list choose the 20 dB exponential fade out preset Notice that the dialog s controls change to reflect the 20 dB exponential fade out 4 Click the Preview button The following actions occur e The Preview button changes to a Stop button e The effect previews on a brief selection of audio For more information see Previewing processed audio on page 183 5 From the Preset drop down list choose the 3 dB exponential fade out preset Notice that the dialog s controls update to reflect the new preset and the effect automatically previews 6 Select the Bypass check box The original audio previews with no effects For more information see Bypassing a process while previewing on page 183 7 Clear the Bypass check box and click OK The 3 dB exponential fade out preset is applied to the audio file Note An effect or process is not applied to the audio data until you click OK PROCESSING AUDIO 181 Creating presets You can also create custom effects and save them as presets 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Fade and then choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Fade dialog is displayed 3 From the Preset drop down list choose the 3 dB exponential fade out preset The dialog s controls change to reflect the preset 4 Drag any of the graphic fade points to a new position Graphic Fade Wow sound edi
349. his occurs decrease the Ignore below threshold level and rescan PROCESSING AUDIO 197 Control Description If clipping occurs The If clipping occurs drop down list is used to specify how the normalize function handles clipping that may occur when an audio file is processed using the RMS option This list provides four options Apply dynamic compression Audio peaks that will result in clipping are limited below 0 dB using non zero attack and release times to minimize distortion This mode is useful for getting loud and clear audio during mastering e Normalize peak value to 0 dB The selection s peak amplitude level is normalized to O dB thereby allowing the maximum possible constant gain without clipping the selection However less gain is applied than would be necessary to achieve the Normalize to RMS level e Ignore saturate Audio is permitted to clip and distort e Stop processing Audio peaks that will result in clipping force the normalize function to cease processing and alert you that clipping will occur at the current level Note When normalizing multichannel audio normalization is computed on the loudest sample value found in a channel and identical gain is applied to all channels Ifa single channel is selected in a multichannel file normalization processes only that channel Use current scan level do not When you select the Use current scan level check box the current scan levels are scan selection used witho
350. hoose Snap Edge to Grid from the submenu or press Shift T to force the active edge of a selection to a whole time division as designated by the marks on the time ruler above the data window The active edge of a selection is defined by the blinking cursor Press Home or End to change the active edge 00 00 03 000 Before snapping After snapping the active right edge of the selection snaps to the 3 000 division on the ruler Tip To change the resolution of the grid choose Status Format from the Options menu and then choose a setting from the submenu or right click the time ruler and choose a format from the shortcut menu 102 CHAPTER 5 Snap to Zero Performing edits at zero crossings reduces the possibility of introducing glitches in your sound file From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Snap to Zero from the submenu or press Z to force both edges of a selection to the next zero crossing of the waveform Before snapping After snapping the edges of the selection snap to the nearest locations where the waveform crosses Note The Editing tab in the Preferences dialog allows you to choose whether this is a negative positive or any zero crossing For more information see Editing tab on page 335 Snap Edge to Zero Performing edits at zero crossings reduces the possibility of introducing glitches in your sound file From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Snap Edge to Zero from the s
351. hortcut menu 2 Use the Open Regions Playlist dialog to locate an existing file 3 Specify the type of regions you want to import from the Files of type drop down list e Choose Playlist File sfl to import a Sound Forge regions Playlist file e Choose Session 8 File prm to import a file that supports both Session 8 and Sound Forge regions e Choose Windows Media Script File txt to import a file that includes Windows Media script commands e Choose Wave File wav to import markers and regions from another audio file 4 Click Open Copying the Regions List to the clipboard Editing a Regions List in a text editor allows you to make an annotated list that you can print for reference From the Edit menu choose Regions List and then choose Copy onto Clipboard or right click the Regions List and choose Copy onto Clipboard from the shortcut menu The list is copied to the Windows clipboard Using the Playlist After you create regions you can arrange them in the Playlist Unlike the Regions List which displays its contents in alphabetical or chronological order the Playlist displays and plays its regions in a user specified arrangement In addition you can rearrange and audition regions endlessly in the Playlist without performing a destructive edit when you save the file As with the Regions List you can save the Playlist information as metadata in most file types You also have the option of saving the Playlist to an externa
352. hortcut to the folder Removing a folder from the Favorites folder 1 Select the Favorites folder 2 Right click the folder you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Note Deleting a folder from Favorites deletes only the shortcut to the folder the target folder is unaffected Obtaining or editing CD information If Sound Forge can access information about a track or CD either from the file or CD itself or from a local cache it automatically reads and displays this information when you insert a CD or browse your computer However if this information is not available the software can retrieve information over the Internet from Gracenote MusicID Once Sound Forge obtains information from Gracenote MusiclD it is saved to a local cache so the information appears more quickly the next time the tracks are displayed If the software cannot connect to the Gracenote Media Database and the appropriate CD information is not available on your computer the tracks are simply listed numerically In this case you can edit CD information and submit it to the Gracenote Media Database Notes e Using Gracenote MusiclD requires an active Internet connection e For more information on using Gracenote MusiclD refer to the Gracenote Web site at http www gracenote com company_info FAQ FAQs 64 CHAPTER 4 Locating matching CD information using Gracenote Insert a CD in your drive Browse to the CD and click the Mu
353. i Sys Default all parameters Sys Long decay time j Sys Noise gate 2 Sys Slow attack Sys Strong beats only Compressing Decreasing the dynamic range of a sound file makes it easier to represent with decreased bit depth 1 From the Effects menu choose Dynamics and choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Dynamics dialog appears 2 Choose a preset with a small amount of compression 2 1 or less from the Preset drop down list and click OK Normalizing Normalizing a file prior to decreasing its bit depth ensures that the entire dynamic range is used In addition normalization lowers the signal to noise ratio 1 From the Process menu choose Normalize The Normalize dialog appears Normalize Exarnple music bed Preset Untitted Hx i i Cancel Normalize using Peak level D Average RMS level loudness 0 00 dB Sateen Preview 100 00 __ Bypass Da 200 Lise equal loudne i i Normalize to 60 to 0 dB Scan Levels Apply dynamic compression Peak M Li y mM m gi M M oa 2 Use current scan level do not scan selection E i More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Select the Peak level radio button 3 Set the Normalize to fader to 0 dB peak and click OK Applying compression and normalization simultaneously 1 From the Process menu choose Normalize The Normalize dialog appears 2 Select the Average RMS level radio button 3 Choo
354. i fa lan jbl o Po a ed Inf y inf p Inf liana aoa I a ad Inf ym inf De rele Inf Inf Drag within a channel to select that channel only Double click a channel number to select the entire channel amp AE 00 00 00 i wr Inf 2 l Inf Inf ol on ed Int Inf Ba Inf Bos mym Inf Inf Inf Inf Drag across channels to select multiple channels Drag along the divider between channels or the loop bar above the ruler to select all channels Hold Ctrl and click a channel to add or remove it from the current selection LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 51 Toggling channel selections After you place the cursor or create a selection in a multichannel file you can cycle through channel options by pressing Tab Previewing channels The single channel selection option allows you to preview channels in a multichannel file individually Open a multichannel file and select all data Click the Play Normal button All channels play Click the Stop button E Press Tab The first channel is selected Click the Play Normal button Only the first channel plays Click the Stop button Press Tab The second channel is selected oe Se YS Click the Play Normal button Only the second channel plays Click the Stop button E Single channel editing You have the ability to cut copy and paste data in single chann
355. ialog is displayed click the Toolbars tab e From the View menu choose Toolbars Displaying a toolbar 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog is displayed with a list of available toolbars 2 To display a toolbar select the corresponding check box and click OK Preferences a General Display Editing Labels Fie Types MIDI Sync Previews Status Toolbars CD Settings Audio Video VST Effects Toolbars v E Tapat Select a check box to Navigation 3 Views display a toolbar Status Regions Playlist Insert Process Effects Tools Levels Scripting i Click Customize to add F Show ToolTs remove or rearrange buttons on a toolbar Default All ok Cancel Apy Customizing a toolbar 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars The Preferences dialog is displayed with a list of available toolbars 2 Select the check box for a toolbar and click Customize The Customize Toolbar dialog is displayed Customize Toolbar x Available tools Current toals Separator Add F New Record Separator Play All Remove Hopen Play m Save 00 Pause Move Up E Save As stop Move Down fe Render As Move Do Fi Go to Start Publish 4 Rewind Separator Pi Forward Reset ae Cut P Go to End GL Copy Fid Go to Previous Track Paste bh Go to Next Track F Mix w Regions List Play Clipboard T Playlist E
356. id ds riowt te sda btsedieuaeddevewaaestsdavessawnaidas 300 Displaying frequency and amplitude values notes and Statistics cece eee eee ees 301 Updating a SONOGFAM 0 cece eee een ee eee n eee e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eees 301 Monitoring an input and output Source 2 1 cece ee eee eee eee eeeeees 301 DUTT SOMO VAM rae A EEE E ears eae Go ie ee ae ee oe ee ee 302 Synchronizing sonograms in a multichannel file 0 ccc cece cece e teen eee eeeee 302 Returning to a SP CtrUM Graph ccc ccc ERAKETA TANEET ETELE ETAST OET 302 Printing THE SONOOKGNY srircsririsiseresnimin paritair ur E AA EREIN RAAE EE 302 TABLE OF CONTENTS 21 Adjusting Spectrum Analysis SettingS 0c cece cece cece ee eee eee e eee aeeeeees 303 Saving spectrum graph Settings cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeenes 304 Editing with SpectraLayers Pro 2 cc ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee e eens eeeeeneeees 305 Editing a file in SoectraLayers Pro ccc cece eee eee eee ene eeeeeeeeeanes 305 Sending a file to a layer in SoectraLayers PrO cece ccc cee eee e een eeeees 305 SU dg ho SO er re er er ee ee re eee rer rer 307 Understanding track at once and disc at Once burning cc ccc ccc cece ete eens 307 TRACK al ONCS ve reacousst ow E E E boeGeuse ace Goer au dines 307 Disc at once single session Or Red Book ccc ccc ccc eee ee eee eee eeeeeeeeees 307 Correcting the sample rate for CD DUI
357. ield width of 3 markers numbered 1 to 99 would be numbered 001 to 099 Click the OK button File Types tab The File Types tab allows you to indicate which types of files you want to associate with Sound Forge software When file is associated with Sound Forge software you can double click a sound file in the Windows Explorer and it will open for editing 1 Select a file type from the list The File association details box near the bottom of the tab displays information about the selected file type as well as the current association Select the check box for each sound file format you want to associate with Sound Forge software or clear the check box to remove a file association Click the OK button CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 337 MIDI Sync tab The MIDI Sync tab allows you to specify preferences for MIDI and synchronization Item Output Input Bound record time on SMPTE record sync Use internal timer for SMPTE generation Use free wheel for SMPTE loss Apply offset to generated SMPTE 338 CHAPTER 25 Description Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list to specify the MIDI output device for synchronization when Generate MIDI Timecode is enabled Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list to specify the MIDI input device for synchronization and triggering when Trigger from MIDI Timecode is enabled This is the device through which Sound Forge will receive all MIDI triggering and synchro
358. iew your selection During playback the button changes to a Stop button 5 Select extraction options as needed e Select the Create regions for each track check box to add each extracted track to the file s Regions List e Select the Create markers for each index change check box to place markers in the extracted file at all points where indices occur in the original track 76 CHAPTER 4 6 Select the Create CD tracks from full subcode scan check box if you want to create a disc at once CD track for each extracted track Note When you select the Create CD tracks from full subcode scan check box the software will create a disc at once track list based on the PQ data on the disc ISRC data is added to each track if the data exists on the disc Universal product code media catalog number information is updated in the CD Information window 7 From the Drive drop down list choose the CD drive that contains the CD from which you want to extract audio 8 Click the MusiclD button if you want to obtain CD information using Gracenote MusiclD If CD information is not available you can click the CD Info button to display a dialog box where you can edit the CD information and submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database For more information see Obtaining or editing CD information on page 64 9 From the Speed drop down list choose the rate at which you want to extract audio If you experience gapping or glitching decrease the sp
359. iggers in the MIDI Triggers dialog and the Playlist Detecting and marking clipping The clip indicators in the channel meters help you determine whether clipping occurs in your file and you can use the Find command to find audio that matches levels you specify For more control however you can use the detect clipping tool elo 84 78 72 66 60 54 48 42 36 30 M 18 12 6 From the Tools menu choose Detect Clipping to scan a selection of audio for clipping and add markers where clipping occurs Markers can be quickly selected from the list in the Go To dialog Also markers are displayed in the Regions List for quick playback 120 CHAPTER 8 1 Select the audio you want to scan 2 From the Tools menu choose Detect Clipping The Detect Clipping dialog is displayed Detect Clipping Shine Preset Sys Detect all 0 dB dipping Threshold 0 00 dB 60 to0dB LJ 100 00 Clip Length 3 z 1 to 100 samples m Use True Peaks Enable DC Blocking Filter More 00 00 07 987 00 00 15 789 00 00 07 801 3 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as necessary a Drag the Threshold fader to determine the sound level you want to find b Seta value in the Clip Length box to specify how many sequential samples must meet the Threshold setting to constitute clipping c Select the Use True Peaks check box if you want to detect clipping of true peaks in dB FS for loudness measurements
360. igital Signal Processing DSP A general term describing anything that alters digital data Signal processors have existed for a very long time tone controls distortion boxes wah wah pedals in the analog electrical domain Digital Signal Processors alter the data after it has been digitized by using a combination of programming and mathematical techniques DSP techniques are used to perform many effects such as equalization and reverb simulation Since most DSP is performed with simple arithmetic operations additions and multiplications both your computer s processor and specialized DSP chips can be used to perform any DSP operation The difference is that DSP chips are optimized specifically for mathematical functions while your computer s microprocessor is not This results in a difference in processing speed DirectX A set of Application Program Interfaces designed by Microsoft for multimedia development A DirectX plug in such as the Sony Noise Reduction DirectX Plug In uses the DirectX Media Streaming Services DMSS API Because DMSS is a standard API a DirectX plug in can be used in any application that supports DMSS Dithering Dithering is the practice of adding noise to a signal to mask quantization noise See also Quantization Noise on page 376 Drag and Drop A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse To drag and drop you click and hold a highlighted selection drag it hold the left mouse button down a
361. ignature Root note for transposing and Number of beats boxes are added to the ACID Properties window ACID Properties Name Don t transpose a 5 Choose one of the following options for the Root note for transposing box If Then The loop should be transposed when inserted in an Choose it s root note from the Root note for ACID project transposing drop down list The loop should not be transposed in an ACID project Choose Don t transpose from the drop down list 6 Specify the length of the loop in beats in the Number of beats box The default value is 4 7 From the File menu choose Save As and save the file with a descriptive name LOOPING 283 Creating an ACID beatmapped file ACID beatmapped files can change tempo and pitch to match an ACID project You must specify the file s original tempo and root note for transposing upon configuration If you do not specify these values no tempo or key changes occur Beatmapped files are typically used in ACID software version 3 0 or later for extended vocal tracks or other long audio files that do not loop 1 Open the Voiceover pca file and select the entire waveform 2 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose ACID Properties from the submenu The ACID Properties window appears 3 Select ACID Beatmapped from the ACID type drop down list Complete the information for an ACID beatmapped file e Select a value from the Root note for transposing
362. il didak i A L Dlh a cB a L i fah ah faca aT a E CD Trocks z Ba the location of the frame Data Window Only ia on the timeline Set as Default diel lt i K gt met Oo 00 00 00 000 00 00 06 005 1 512 By default the video strip appears when you open a file containing video If the video strip is not displayed right click the data window s Edit Tool Selector and choose Video Strip from the shortcut menu A check mark appears adjacent to the command and the video strip is displayed To hide the video strip choose Video Strip from the shortcut menu again Changing video strip height You can change the video strip height by dragging the thin bar at the bottom of the video strip To change the default height for all video files you open choose Preferences from the Options menu and set a Default video strip height on the Display tab Moon mov Drag the bar below the video strip to change the video strip height Enabling frame animation When playing a video file you can specify whether frames are animated or displayed as still frames To turn on frame animation right click the video strip and choose Animate from the shortcut menu A check mark appears adjacent to the command to indicate this feature is turned on WORKING WITH VIDEO 289 Using the cursor to select a frame When frame animation is turned on clicking anywhere within the audio portion of the data window displays the corresponding video
363. ilable in the Edit menu Playlist Cutlist submenu is selected deleting a selection creates a region in the Cutlist window but does not remove the selection Place acommand marker at the current cursor position Place a marker at the current cursor position Place a region at the current cursor position Place a region at the current cursor position when the Event tool s is selected Enable snapping Toggle auto snap to grid Toggle auto snap to markers Toggle auto snap to event edges Toggle auto snap to zero crossings Insert show hide volume envelope Insert remove volume envelope Insert show hide pan envelope Insert remove pan envelope Create a loop from the current selection without displaying the Sampler Loops window Create a loop from the current selection Stop or cancel the current action including playback Split event at cursor position when the Event tool A is selected Split selected events at region boundaries when the Event tool f is selected Keyboard Shortcut D Shift D Ctrl D Ctrl A Ctrl C Ctrl E Ctrl M Ctrl T Ctrl V Ctrl L Ctrl X Ctrl Y Ctrl Z Ctrl Shift Z Delete C M R Ctrl Alt R F8 Ctrl F8 Shift F8 Ctrl Shift F8 Ctrl B V Shift V P Shift P Alt L Alt Shift L Esc S Ctrl Alt T SHORTCUTS 351 Cursor movement shortcuts Command Keyboard Shortcut Move one pixel right left Right Arrow Left Arrow Go to end of file Ctrl Right Arrow Go to the next region l
364. ile or click the Custom button to create a new template For more information see Creating custom templates on page 74 Notes e When you convert from mono to stereo the data will be stored in both channels When converting from stereo to mono the data from both channels will be mixed to a single channel e When determining bit rates 1K 1024 Select the Save metadata with file check box if you want to preserve metadata such as embedded data from other applications regions markers disc at once CD tracks commands playlist and sampler information in your file If the check box is cleared the data will be ignored Note f the selected file type doesn t support all the metadata in your file you will be prompted to save the metadata to an external file with an sfl extension using the same base name as your media file Metadata can be saved internally for the following file formats MP3 e PCA e SFA WAV e WAV64 e Windows Media Format WMA and WMV Select the Stretch video to fill output frame do not letterbox check box if you are saving to a format with a different aspect ratio than your source media settings When this check box is cleared black bars may appear at the top and bottom letterboxing or sides pillarboxing of the frame to preserve the aspect ratio Clear the Fast video resizing check box if you see unacceptable video artifacts in the rendered video these artifacts are most obvious with MPEG and
365. ile is longer than this length it is trimmed This preset is useful for creating sample clips Attack threshold Determines the threshold level for detection of the trim crop start point Inf indicates complete silence and 0 dB indicates maximum amplitude level Release threshold Determines the threshold level for detection of the trim crop end point Inf indicates complete silence and 0 dB indicates maximum amplitude level Fade in Determines the length in milliseconds of the fade applied to a section of audio prior to the detected trim crop start point PROCESSING AUDIO 185 Control Description Fade out Determines the length in milliseconds of the fade applied to a section of audio following the detected trim crop end point Minimum inter phrase silence When you choose the Remove silence between phrases mode the Minimum inter phrase silence value determines the minimum amount of silence needed between phrases for a new region to be created Minimum length following When you choose the Remove data beyond loop points mode the Minimum length loop end following loop end value determines the number of samples that must follow a loop More Click this button to view additional options that you can use to adjust your data window selection For more information see Adjusting the data window selection on page 184 Bit Depth Converter The Bit Depth Converter is used to increase decrease the bit depth of a file while concealing
366. ile using the Look in drop down list at the top of the dialog 3 To preview the file before adding it to your project click the Play button Note f you have the Auto play check box selected your file will automatically begin previewing when you select it 4 Click Open The file is opened and a data window containing the waveform appears D Wow sound editing co aE Elsie Para wow ERIE Sound editing just gets easier EEJ And easier ta a 00 00 00 000 j00 00 01 000 j00 00 02 000 j00 00 03 000 j00 00 04 000 00 lt 4 l OE SEE O K gt m p Rate 0 00 lt o gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 1 394 Using the Explorer window In addition to using the Explorer window for locating previewing and opening media you can drag files or regions from the Explorer window to an open data window to paste or mix the data Click the right mouse button while dragging to toggle mix paste and CD track drag and drop modes You can also extract audio from a CD Previewing media The Explorer window allows you to easily preview files before you open them The Explorer window has a mini transport bar with Start Preview Stop Preview and Auto Preview buttons gt E When you preview a file its stream is sent to the channel meters on the main workspace for audio files or to the Video Preview window for video files Note To preview video files you must have the Video Preview window open To display the Video
367. imum short term loudness in loudness units full scale across all audio channels based on 3 second integration windows The Maximum Momentary value represents the maximum momentary loudness in loudness units full scale across all audio channels based on 400 millisecond integration windows Tip Select the Enable surround processing for files with 6 channels check box on the Status tab of the Preferences dialog if you want to treat audio with six or more channels as surround audio when measuring loudness a gain of 1 5 dB is applied to the left and right surround channels When the check box is cleared all channels contribute equally to the loudness measurement Copies all contents of the Statistics window to the clipboard This can be useful if you want to compare statistics of multiple files in a spreadsheet Tip To copy specific data or cells select the cells that you want to copy and press Ctrl C Creating data windows 1 From the File menu choose New The New Window dialog appears New Window Sample rate 2 000 to 192 000 Hz 44 100 OK Bit depth 16 bit g Cancel Channels 1 to 32 2 Stereo r Maximum editing time 13 37 16 2 Complete the New Window dialog a From the Sample rate drop down list choose a sample rate b From the Bit depth drop down list choose a bit depth c Choose a setting from the Channels drop down list to select the number of channels stored in the file For more i
368. indow Note When appending files to a data window be sure to use files with matching formats or perform any required sample rate or bit depth conversion before appending the files If the formats of the selected files do not match they will play back at the target format without any conversion If the sample rates do not match for example pitch will not be preserved When the check box is not selected multiple files will be opened to separate data windows Feature Description Open as CD tracks Select this check box if you want to create a disc at once CD track when opening a file If you have multiple files selected you can select the Append to current data window check box to add the selected files to the end of the current data window and create a disc at once CD track for each file When the check box is not selected multiple files will be opened to separate data windows Note Disc at once CD tracks must be at least four seconds long If you select a file that is less than four seconds long silence will be added as needed Merge L R to stereo Select this check box and hold the Ctrl button while selecting two mono files in the browse window The two mono files will be merged to the left and right channels of a new stereo file The first file you select will be placed in the left channel and the second file will be placed in the right channel Compressed files are not supported for merging 2 Locate and select a media f
369. indow e The current playback position in relation to the entire file appears in the overview bar e The first selection status box in the playbar displays the current position in the user specified format For more information see Selecting status formats on page 87 a Wow sound editing Overview bar current position _ 2O 00 02 0000 Cursor Ark Becton Ooo we i lt iu i t a a OOK dry Be 00 00 02 479 00 00 05 000 1 256 Status box value 66 CHAPTER 4 Data window scrolling during playback From the Options menu choose Scroll Playback or press F6 to enable automatic data window scrolling during playback When the cursor moves off of the current window it will quickly scroll to show another full window of data To enable smooth scrolling select the Scroll Smoothly option from the Options menu or press Shift F6 When this option is selected the cursor will slowly move back to the center of the display and the wave data will scroll past it This allows you to view upcoming data while the file is being played Playing a file from a specified point You can begin playback from any point in a file 1 Click to position the cursor in the data window A flashing cursor spanning the height of the waveform display is displayed 2 Click the Play button on the transport bar The file plays from the cursor position If you do not hear playback you may have inadvertently created a small selection T
370. indow s status display boxes and choose a new format from the shortcut menu Configuring the Measures amp Beats format Choosing the Measures amp Beats format allows you to specify the beats per minute and beats per measure values used to calculate measures and beats Changing a file s beat values 1 From the Options menu choose Status Format and then choose Edit Tempo from the submenu The Edit Tempo dialog appears Edit Tempo Wow sound editing Start 00 00 00 000 hr mn sc xxx End 00 00 05 000 Cancel Length 00 00 05 000 Input format Time ka Play x M Play looped Selection length in beats 10 000 ana Tempo in beats per minute 120 000 Number of beats in a measure 2 Type an appropriate value in the Tempo in beats per minute box 3 Type an appropriate value in the Number of beats in a measure box and click OK Alternately you can make a selection in the file equal to one measure and then type the number of beats in the sample measure in the Selection length in beats box The Tempo value is automatically calculated based on the selection length and number of beats 88 CHAPTER 4 Changing the default beat values The previous procedure changes the beat values for the current audio file only Use the following steps to change the Sound Forge default beat values 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Status tab 3 Type an app
371. ine In addition to running scripts from the Script Editor and the Scripting menu you can run scripts directly from the command line using the following commands SCRIPT Starts Sound Forge and runs the specified script Example C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 Forge11 exe SCRIPT C Scripts MyScript cs 250 CHAPTER 16 SCRIPTARGS Starts Sound Forge and passes the specified arguments to a script Example C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 Forge110 exe SCRIPTARGS in C Test input dls amp out C Test output dls amp repeat 2 SCRIPT C Scripts MyScript cs EXIT Exits Sound Forge after running the specified script Example C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 Forge110 exe SCRIPT C Scripts MyScript cs EXIT Script arguments A script can accept arguments to dynamically change the behavior of a script Arguments allow you to develop a single script that performs multiple functions controlled by the arguments sent to the script Each argument is a key value pair The key is a string that identifies the argument s value Multiple arguments are delimited by an ampersand amp key1 valuel amp key2 value2 amp key3 value3 When you supply arguments to a script the following static functions can be used to extract and format the parameters public static string GETARG string key string str string val Script Args ValueOf key if val null val str return val public
372. ing Description Half Rectangular Eliminates distortion resulting from conversion to a lower bit depth but the noise level is more likely to be dependent on the signal This setting uses a maximum dither noise amplitude of 0 5 LSB least significant bit Rectangular Identical to Half Rectangular but with a maximum dither noise amplitude of 1 LSB least significant bit Triangular Eliminates distortion products as well as any noise floor modulation but results ina slightly higher noise level The option typically works well in conjunction with noise shaping For more information see Noise shaping on page 109 Highpass Triangular Behaves like triangular dither but shifts its noise into higher frequencies This is typically the best option when used in conjunction with noise shaping For more information see Noise shaping on page 109 Gaussian Does not perform as well as Rectangular and Triangular dither but may be suitable for certain audio Noise shaping The Noise shaping value determines the aural positioning of quantization noise Using this control you can shift the noise into audio registers that are less perceptible to human hearing This lowers the perceived noise floor and creates the illusion of cleaner audio High pass contour noise shaping attempts to push all quantization noise and error into high frequencies Equal loudness contour noise shaping attempts to push the noise under an equal loudness type of curve
373. ing cursor Press Home or End to change the active edge Note The Editing tab in the Preferences dialog allows you to choose whether this is a negative positive or any zero crossing For more information see Editing tab on page 335 Quantize to Frames From the Options menu choose Quantize to Frames to force edits to occur on project frame boundaries This setting is independent of grid and marker snapping and is useful when editing audio for video and creating disc at once CD projects When Quantize to Frames is turned on the following actions will always occur on frame boundaries e Positioning the cursor e Making selections e Placing markers and regions Note f you drag to a snap point that does not occur on a frame boundary when Quantize to Frames is enabled the snap point will be quantized to the nearest frame boundary Creating and using views Views are used to save and recall selections Zoom ratios and waveform display positions Sound Forge software can retain eight different views for any audio file each containing any or all of the following elements Selection Cursor position e Magnification e Position scroll bar placement Tip Views are discarded when you close the file To save views with a file save the file as part of a workspace For more information see Saving files as a workspace on page 75 Displaying the Views toolbar 1 From the View menu choose Toolbars 2 Select the Views check box and
374. ing impulse recovery You must trim the file as close to the timing spikes as possible for this method of recovery to work most effectively The first sample of the file should contain the start of the first spike and the last sample of the file should contain the start of the second spike Therefore most of the second spike is deleted Auto detect timing spikes This option specifies that the timing spikes exist near the start and end of the recorded file and that they should be auto detected Timing spikes are used to correct for clock or tape speed mismatches If you have not trimmed the recorded file so that the timing spikes are at the very beginning and end select this option for the best results With this option you need only ensure that the first spike occurs within one second of the start of the file and that the second spike exists in the file To improve detection accuracy you can also boost the level of the start and end spikes in the recorded file Tip f the spike s level is close to the noise floor select the Use the beginning and end of the recorded file as timing spikes option Do not use timing spikes This option specifies that no timing spikes are used This is the least desirable option as no timing information is used To use this option you must trim the recorded file so that the test tone starts and ends at the start and end of the file with no blank audio before or after This option should only be used if the
375. ing window layout Alt Shift D then press R Load Red Book authoring window layout Alt Shift D then press B Load 5 1 channel video window layout Alt Shift D then press V Cascade the data windows Shift F5 Restore the active data window Ctrl F5 Toggle playback scrolling on and off F6 Toggle smooth playback scrolling on and off Shift F6 Go to the next data window Ctrl F6 Go to the previous data window Ctrl Shift F6 Maximize all data windows Ctrl F10 Maximize the Sound Forge application window Alt F10 Show hide windows docked at the bottom of the workspace F11 Show hide windows docked at the sides of the workspace Shift F11 Show hide all docked windows excluding floating window docks Ctrl F11 Maximize the width of the active data window Ctrl Enter 350 APPENDIX A Data window shortcuts Command Select previous next editing tool Select normal edit tool Select all data in the active window Copy the selected data onto the clipboard Paste the clipboard contents into a new data window Mix data from the clipboard with the active window Trim crop to the current selection Paste data from the clipboard into the active window Enable locking markers regions and envelope points to selection Move cut the selected data onto the clipboard Repeat last process effect or tool Undo the last action Redo the last undone action Clear delete the selected data nothing will be placed on the clipboard Note f the Treat as Cutlist command ava
376. intain last monitored view Item Description FFT size Choose a value from the FFT size drop down list to set the size in samples of the analysis window and number of discrete frequencies analyzed Higher numbers produce increased frequency resolution at the expense of lower time resolution and longer computational time FFT overlap The value in the FFT overlap box specifies the percentage of overlap between FFT analysis windows Overlapping allows for more accurate analysis Lower settings decrease the number of distinct analysis functions performed which decreases processing time High settings allow for more analysis but can result in slow processing Smoothing window Choose a setting from the Smoothing window drop down list to determine the window function applied to the input data before analysis The window function affects the sharpness of peaks in an FFT graph and the leakage into neighboring frequencies e Choose Rectangle to apply no window This results in a very sharp peak but high leakage e Choose Triangular also called a Bartlett or Parzen window to apply a window that results in less leakage than the rectangle window e Hamming Hanning and Blackman windows are commonly used in audio applications e Choose Blackman Harris to obtain the least sideband leakage of the six options The major drawback of Blackman Harris is rounded graph peaks Slices displayed The Slices displayed value determines the number of FFT
377. io glitches 163 Flange Wah Wah effect 45 229 flipping envelope graphs 225 floating windows See windows FM synthesis 43 167 168 Focus to Data Window command 71 Forward button 41 frame animation 289 frame numbering 290 388 INDEX frg files 61 FX Favorites menu 208 Gapper Snipper effect 45 229 Gaussian dither 187 Generate Loudness Log 74 141 generating MIDI timecode 43 271 Get CD Text button 65 GigaStudio GigaSampler files 263 266 glitches finding 163 repairing by copying the other channel 164 repairing by interpolating audio 164 repairing by replacing with preceding audio 165 repairing with Pencil tool 165 glossary 365 381 Go To dialog 42 91 Go to End button 35 41 Go to Next Track button 35 41 Go to Previous Track button 35 41 Go to Start button 35 41 Gracenote 64 65 Graphic Dynamics effect 45 110 227 Graphic EQ 44 192 Graphic Fade button 44 creating 192 customizing 193 dialog 193 overview 192 grid lines See Selection Grid Lines option Half Rectangular dither 187 Halve Selection button 42 halving loops 285 hard disk defragmentation 325 hardware meters adjusting output levels 117 adjusting preview levels 117 mono compatibility meters 139 overview 30 phase scopes 139 viewing 117 118 VU PPM meters 138 139 hardware setup external monitor 292 MIDI SDS 269 SCSI SMDI 269 help 26 hiding effects plug ins 208 video strip 289 Highpass Triangular dith
378. ion This is not technically a scrub function but it serves a similar purpose It allows you to audition brief audio segments and quickly locate specific events within a file Playback stops when the mouse button is released Configuring the audio event locator You can set the amount of pre roll and loop duration for the audio event locator 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Previews tab 3 Inthe Audio event locator section edit the Pre roll and Loop time values as desired and click OK Zooming and magnifying Because there are considerably more samples in a sound file than horizontal points pixels on the screen many data samples must be represented by each horizontal point when audio data displays in the data window Depending upon the editing operation you may want to view the entire file at once or a small portion of data in greater detail For this reason you can utilize two varieties of zooming time ruler zooming and level ruler Zooming You can also zoom to events when using the Event tool Zooming the time ruler horizontal The current time ruler magnification ratio appears in the lower right corner of the data window above the status boxes BB Example music bed o E e Zoom in Zoom out Maximize width of window Sc 4 ll p p 0 K dp di oe L512 h 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 859 Zoom ratio Understanding the zoom ratio
379. ion process and you are asked to agree to its terms prior to accepting the terms of the End User License Agreement Please review its contents carefully as its terms and conditions affect your rights with respect to the information that is collected by the software For your reference a copy of the Software Privacy Policy is located at http www sonycreativesoftware com corporate privacy asp Proper use of software Sound Forge software is not intended and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using Sound Forge software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement Legal notices ACID ACIDized ACIDplanet com ACIDplanet the ACIDplanet logo ACID XMC Artist Integrated the Artist Integrated logo Beatmapper Cinescore CD Architect DVD Architect Jam Trax Perfect Clarity Audio Photo Go Sound Forge Super Duper Music Looper Vegas Vision Series and Visual Creation Studio are the trademarks or registered trademarks of Sony Creative Software Inc in the United States and other countries All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners in the United States and other countrie
380. ions launch the appropriate XFX effect For more information on using the XFX EQ effects click the Help button E in the process dialog Fade Graphic Fade Graphic fade allows you to create custom fade envelopes to apply to audio data You can use up to 16 envelope points to create complex graphic fades Creating a graphic fade 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 Select the last half of the audio approximately five seconds 3 From the Process menu choose Fade and choose Graphic from the submenu The Graphic Fade dialog is displayed 4 From the Show wave drop down list choose Mono source The Musicbed pca waveform is displayed in the graph For more information on the dialog controls see Graphic Fade controls on page 193 5 From the Preset drop down list choose 6 dB exponential fade out The fade s envelope is displayed in relation to the waveform in the graph Graphic Fade Example music bed Preset Sys 6 dB exponential fade out r m x Cancel 100 Yo Full volume at start of selection 5 rr foe a LL INGLE haha liia L hdl Maximum Gain 100 0 dB 200 6 dB 400 12 dB Show wave Mono source kai r More 00 00 04 738 00 00 09 858 00 00 05 119 DI 6 25 2o 0 Zero volume at end of selection 0 192 CHAPTER 13 6 Click OK The specified fade is applied to the selection a Example music bed amp E DNONM I P llm A 00 00 04 738 00 00 09 8
381. is essentially a hard compressor Limiting is often used to keep signals from going above a certain level but can also be applied to create heavily compressed effects Limiting should only be performed on peaks if the Threshold level is set too low heavy distortion will occur See also Compression Ratio audio on page 368 Loop Loops are small audio clips that are designed to create a repeating beat or pattern Loops are usually one to four measures long Low Pass Filter A low pass filter attenuates all frequencies above a cutoff frequency Low pass filters can be used as anti alias filters or for general tonal shaping Marker A marker is an anchored accessible reference point in a file Markers are stored in the Regions List and can be used for quick navigation 372 APPENDIX E Media Control Interface MCI A standard way for Windows programs to communicate with multimedia devices such as sound cards and CD players If a device has an MCI device driver it can easily be controlled by most multimedia Windows software Microsoft Sound Mapper The Sound Mapper is a special device that attempts to select the most appropriate sound card map on which to play a sound or it will translate the sound into a format that can be played on your sound card Mid Side recording Mid side MS recording is a microphone technique in which one mic is pointed directly towards the source to record the center mid channel and the other mi
382. is folder C Documents and Settings AJones Application Data Sony Render Templates wave Tip fyou re copying templates from an older Sony Creative Software application templates are saved as sft files in the following folder C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Sony File Templates lt plug in name gt lt plug in GUID gt Saving all open audio files Choosing Save All from the File menu automatically prompts you to save all open audio files on the current workspace Note Pressing Shift while choosing the Save All command automatically saves all open files without prompting you to approve each save Saving files as a workspace To accommodate complex editing scenarios you can save the entire workspace as an alternative to saving individual files Workspaces are saved as Sound Forge Workspace sfw files When you open a workspace file all files are restored to their previous sizes positions and magnifications In addition each file s current cursor position custom views and plug ins in the Plug In Chain are restored For more information see Creating and using views on page 104 and Using the Plug In Chain on page 209 Saving the current workspace 1 From the File menu choose Workspace and choose Save As from the submenu The Save Workspace dialog appears 2 Browse to the folder where the file will be saved 3 Typeaname for the file in the File name box and click Save Opening a workspace 1 F
383. is opened the horizontal magnification is set to the value specified by the Normal zoom ratio setting in the Display tab in the Preferences dialog To access the Preferences dialog choose Preferences from the Options menu e Right clicking the waveform display allows you to quickly access time ruler zoom commands from the shortcut menu Using zoom time commands If you prefer using commands you can control the time magnification from the View menu The following table briefly describes the available time zoom commands You can access these commands from the View menu by choosing Zoom Time and choosing the desired command from the submenu Command In Full Normal Out Full Selection Custom Zoom X Y Description Increases the zoom ratio to represent each audio sample with 24 screen pixels 24 1 zoom ratio Returns the file to its default zoom ratio Changes the zoom ratio to display the entire file within the data window Changes the zoom ratio to maximize the display and center the selection within the data window Sets the zoom ratio to a custom setting For more information see Using custom zoom settings on page 95 Zooming the level ruler vertical Zooming along the level ruler displays a larger vertical waveform and allows for more precise editing at low audio amplitudes Level ruler Zooming controls Zoom in 94 CHAPTER 5 a Example music bed fen z amp At 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04
384. ison aerial view scenery ILGT Lightness Describes the changes in lightness settings on the digitizer required to produce the file The format of this information depends on hardware used IMED Medium Describes the format of the original subject of the file INAM Name Title CD Text The title of the subject of the file such as Madison From Above IPLT Palette Setting The number of colors requested when digitizing an image IPRD Product The name of the title the file was originally intended for such as Encyclopedia of Midwest Geography ISBJ Subject Describes the contents of the file such as Aerial view of 58 CHAPTER 3 Madison FourCC Code ISFT ISHP ISRC ISRF ITCH DISP TLEN TRCK TURL TVER LOCA TORG Name Software Sharpness Source Album Source Form Technician Sound Scheme Title Text Length ms Track Number URL Version Location Organization Description The name of the software package used to create the file Identifies the changes in sharpness for the digitizer required to produce the file The format of this information depends on the hardware used The name of the person or organization who supplied the original subject of the file The original form of the material that was digitized such as slide paper map and so forth This is not necessarily the same as IMED The technician who digitized the file Sets the title that is displayed for Microsoft Sound Systems The
385. isting of the help topics available Scroll through the list of Search Favorites Interactive tutorials available topics or type a word in the Type in the keyword to find box to quickly locate topics related to that word Select the topic and click the Display button to view it Allows you to enter a keyword and display all of the topics in the online help that contain the keyword you have entered Type a keyword in the Type in the word s to search for box and click the List Topics button Select the topic from the list and click the Display button to view it Allows you to keep topics that you revisit often in a separate folder To add a topic to your favorites click the Add button on the Favorites tab You can learn more about many of the features in Sound Forge by using the interactive tutorials installed with the software You can access the tutorials at any time by choosing Interactive Tutorials from the Help menu Help on the Web Additional Sound Forge information is available on the Sony Creative Software Inc Web site From the Help menu choose Sony on the Web and choose the desired location from the submenu The software starts your system s Web browser and attempts to connect to the appropriate page on the Sony Web site 26 CHAPTER 1 Chapter 2 Learning the Sound Forge Pro Workspace This chapter provides a detailed overview of Sound Forge Pro toolbars and controls Using the mouse The following table defin
386. itch three or four times longer maximum 50 ms than the glitch itself BB Sound 2 pro pez N A AE o0 00 00 i l l l 00 00 05 l l 00 00 10 a ld ge n auae Re AR NN ae Bao O y eee pi Re 4 ll W p ip mdh kK gt m gt e VEO wr 00 00 08 091 00 00 08 420 00 00 00 328 1 967 3 From the Tools menu choose Repair and choose Copy Other Channel from the submenu The selected data is replaced with the corresponding data from the good channel In addition rapid crossfades are created at the beginning and end of the replacement selection to prevent a new glitch from being created Tip f this method fails to repair the glitch undo it and apply Copy Other Channel again this time using a longer selection Interpolating new audio This is the most basic method of repairing glitches New audio data is simply interpolated based on the data at the beginning and end of the selection This method results in a straight line connecting the beginning and end of the selection Interpolation should be used to repair only small less than 2 ms glitches 1 Open the file containing the glitch 2 Right click the data window and choose Zoom from the shortcut menu and choose In Full from the submenu The file is displayed at a 24 1 zoom ratio 3 Create a selection containing the glitch Tip To improve the accuracy of this feature the selection should be as small as possible while still containing the glit
387. ities If you encounter problems burning CDs select this check box and your drive to determine its capabilities when the application starts Select this check box if you want to automatically detect the length of your blank CDs when you insert them in your drive When this check box is cleared the Default CD length minutes setting is used and you can click the CD Time Remaining box in the status bar to update the available time ona CD Type a value in the edit box to specify the length of time that is inserted between disc at once CD tracks Type the default length for CD media This length is used if the software has not yet scanned your CD drive or if no CD is in your drive This length is used to calculate the amount of time remaining on the disc that is displayed in the status bar CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 341 Audio tab The Audio tab allows you to specify playback and recording options Basic audio preferences Item Description Audio device type Choose a driver type from the drop down list e Microsoft Sound Mapper The default setting Allows the Sound Mapper to choose appropriate playback and recording devices e Windows Classic Wave Allows you to choose a specific audio device using a classic Wave driver e ASIO Allows you to choose a specific audio device using a low latency ASIO driver Playback Click the Playback tab to adjust playback routing and buffering settings Playbac
388. ity Video tab Description This list contains all of the audio devices that are installed in your computer Select a device from the list to set the options below for that device When this check box is selected the software will attempt to compensate for inaccurate devices by interpolating the playback or recording position If you notice that your playback cursor is offset from what you are hearing enable this option for the playback device If the position of playback or recording does not match what you hear after you enable Interpolate position you can attempt to compensate using the Position bias slider Moving this slider will offset the position forward or backward to compensate for the inaccuracies of the device When this check box is selected the software will not create buffers prior to starting playback Some devices do not behave properly if this check box is cleared If your audio stutters when you start playback try selecting this check box Drag the slider to set the number of audio buffers that will be used Adjusting this setting can decrease gapping or help you synchronize the input and output Choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate the buffer size you want to use Choose MME to use the Playback buffering setting on the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog For example if you choose MME from the Buffer size drop down set the Audio buffers slider to 5 and set Playback buffering to 0 35 seconds f
389. ival Location Indicates where the subject of the file is archived IART Artist CD Text The artist of the original subject of the file ICMS Commissioned The name of the person or organization that commissioned the subject of the file ICMT Comments General comments about the file or the subject of the file If the comment is several sentences long end each sentence with a period Do not include new line characters ICOP Copyright Copyright information for the file For example Copyright 2009 Sony Creative Software Inc If there are multiple copyrights separate them with a semicolon followed by a space ICRD Creation Date The date the subject of the file was created List dates in year month day format padding one digit months and days with a zero on the left For example 1964 03 02 for March 2 1964 ICRP Cropped Describes whether an image or sound has been cropped and if so how it was cropped For example Third movement first through fourth bars IDIM Dimensions The size of the original subject of the file For example 8 5 in h 11inw IDPI Dots Per Inch The dots per inch setting of the digitizer used to produce the file IENG Engineer The name of the engineer who worked on the file If there are multiple engineers separate the names by a semicolon and a blank Engineer Joe Mixer Matt IGNR Genre Describes the classification of the original work IKEY Keywords Separate multiple keywords with a semicolon and a blank Mad
390. ive 0 07 second buffers are created If you choose 1024 from the Buffer size drop down and set the Audio buffers slider to 5 five 1024 byte buffers are created Choose a setting from the drop down list to set the priority that is assigned to your audio buffers Increasing the buffers priority can help you attain smoother playback but it can also adversely affect other processes Use the Video tab to specify preferences for displaying video Item Frame numbering on thumbnails Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV Deinterlace method Resample source video when rendering to a higher frame rate 344 CHAPTER 25 Description Determines how individual frame information located in a box at the lower left hand corner of each frame will be displayed in the video strip when frame numbering is turned on The frame information box can include Frame Numbers or Media Timecode Select this check box if you want to remove pulldown when you open 24 fps progressive scan DV video files When the check box is cleared Sound Forge software will read 24p video as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i Choose a setting from the drop down list to determine how Sound Forge software separates the two fields that make up a video frame when you render to a progressive format e Blend Fields Maintains the data in the two fields by blending them together This method can produce a smooth motion blurred image e Interpolate Deletes
391. k at the end of a CD by adding silence at the end of the last track and adding the new track after the silence Drag the end of the final track marker to the new end of the CD Because both events exist within a single track they will be treated as one track by an audio CD player 00 03 30 933 Silence between final track and bonus track 314 CHAPTER 23 Moving tracks on the CD layout bar The CD layout bar displays information about the tracks you ve created for your disc at once CD project Each CD track shows the track s number active take name and length Note A red indicator is drawn at the end of the CD layout bar to represent the end of the disc if the disc length is known You can use the Automatically detect CD length and Default CD length controls on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog to set CD length z End of disc indicator You can use the CD layout bar to perform many of the track editing functions from the Track List window Changing track starting and ending points Drag either end of the track to adjust the track s starting or ending position The pause time between tracks is displayed in a ToolTip BB 100 Unnamed Things Ec AT 00 00 00 i acd a Inf Ka ba Inf i felle lt m Uh gt ellla K gt E p gt oe Rate 0 00 gt 00 07 01 360 00 04 42 866 1 53 7
392. k device routing The Channel and Device columns indicate which Record audio output will be used to play each channel ina multichannel file To assign a channel to a different output click the Device entry and choose a new output from the drop down list Tip To change a channel s output device using the Channel Meters window click the channel number and choose a new output port from the menu Playback1 Playback 2 Playback 3 Playback 4 Playback 5 Playback 6 h Playback buffering seconds Specifies the total amount of buffering that is used during playback The larger the number the more buffering is performed during playback This value must be as low as possible without gapping To set it start at 25 and play back a typical song Move some of the track faders If the playback gaps try increasing this slider in small increments until the gapping goes away If you simply cannot get playback to be free of gapping you need to install more RAM in your computer so you can increase buffering buy a faster access hard drive or minimize the number of audio plug ins you are trying to use simultaneously Click the Record tab to adjust record input routing and buffering settings 342 CHAPTER 25 Item Description Recording device routing The Channel and Device columns indicate which audio output will be used to record each channel in a multichannel file To assign a channel to a different input click the
393. ks on page 123 and Creating regions based on a musical time interval on page 124 Extract Regions Extracts all file regions and saves them as individual files For more information see Extracting regions to new files on page 124 Detect Clipping Performs clip detection on the current file or selection For more information see Detecting and marking clipping on page 120 Find Searches for clicks and pops volume levels or silent breaks in an audio signal For more information see Finding and repairing audio glitches on page 163 Interpolate Replaces selected audio with interpolated audio data based on the selection s beginning and end samples For more information see Interpolating new audio on page 164 Replace Replaces selected audio data with previous adjacent data For more information see Replacing audio with preceding data on page 165 Copy Other Channel Replaces selected audio with a corresponding selection from the opposite channel For more information see Copying the other channel on page 164 Noise Reduction Analyzes and removes background noise such as tape hiss electrical hum and machinery rumble For more information click the Help button e in the plug in dialog 46 CHAPTER 2 th IK Click and Crackle Removal Detects and removes all clicks and pops For more information click the Help button B in the plug in dialog Clipped Peak Restoration Rounds the tops of clipped peaks and applies
394. l Playlist file Displaying the Playlist 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Regions List from the submenu or press Ctrl Alt M 0 The Regions List window for Voiceover pca appears 3 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Playlist from the submenu or press Ctrl Alt M 1 The Playlist window for Voiceover pca appears Notice that the file contains regions but the Playlist is empty You must add regions to the Playlist before arranging them 130 CHAPTER 8 Understanding the Playlist display When you add a region to the Playlist its appearance is similar to its appearance in the Regions List with the exception of the Count Cnt column Located to the left of the Name column the Count Cnt column displays the number of times the corresponding region plays before the Playlist proceeds to the next region 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 None 1 C5 00 00 00 000 1 Sound editing just gets easier 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 None 1 C5 00 00 00 000 1 And easier 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None 1 CS 00 00 00 000 Adding regions to the Playlist You can add regions from the Regions List to the Playlist using commands or drag and drop You can also add regions to the Playlist directly from the data window
395. l red segment you want your input to be as loud as possible without clipping 3 Click the Arm button if you want to begin recording as soon as possible after clicking the Record button The Arm button is optional but can allow for more accurate takes When you click Arm the wave device is opened and all recording buffers are loaded in order to minimize the amount of time between clicking the Record button and when recording starts 146 CHAPTER 10 Click the Record button or press Ctrl R Recording begins and the Time Display window and the data window s selection status bar will show the current record position Note During recording playback commands the Preferences dialog and commands that affect the recording data window are unavailable Recording will stop automatically at the end of the selection If you re recording without a selection existing data is overwritten during recording and you can click the Record or Stop E button to end recording Clicking Pause Il suspends recording clearing the selection and moving the cursor to the end of the recorded data When you pause recording the recording device remains armed Recording multiple takes into a selection 1 Verify that your recording method is set to Manual a From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed b From the Method drop down list choose Manual c Ifyou want to set up pre roll po
396. lates 74 events 174 keyboard maps 347 markers 119 125 presets 182 recovered files 89 regions 122 125 regions from Playlist 131 selections 82 Detect Clipping 120 Detect Clipping button 46 digital vs analog levels 135 DirectX plug ins See effects Disable auto snapping below 1 4 zoom ratios preference 101 disc at once CD burning bonus tracks 314 burning CDs 322 323 CD layout bar 315 CD Text 318 321 322 creating CD tracks from events 311 creating CD tracks from regions 312 defined 307 displaying CD track position in Time Display window 310 dragging and dropping files 312 314 inserting CD index markers 311 inserting CD tracks 311 ISRC codes 319 locking audio and CD tracks 315 mono tracks 307 pause time 316 318 pre emphasis boost 319 protecting CDs 319 Q subcode 319 sample rate correction 307 track lists 318 321 displaying sonograms 300 video strip 289 386 INDEX Wave Hammer 245 Distortion effect 45 227 dither 109 187 DLS files 263 266 docking windows See windows Double Selection button 42 doubling loops 285 drag and drop creating data windows 163 mixing 162 mono selections to multichannel destinations 160 pasting 161 snapping to points 160 toggling mix paste functions 162 drag and drop shortcuts 357 DTMF MF tones synthesis 43 166 Dynamics effects 227 EBICSF 363 Edit Source Project command 78 Edit Tempo button 42 Edit Tool button 40 editing comman
397. lation frequency parameter in the amplitude modulation effect you may notice that the frequency changes are more apparent when moving through the lower frequencies This is because frequency scales plug ins use a logarithmic scale but effect automation uses linear interpolation To make the automated frequency changes sound more natural change the fade curve types to change the interpolation rates between envelope points For high to low frequency sweeps use a fast fade curve for low to high frequency sweeps use a slow curve For more information about changing fade curves see Setting fade properties on page 225 Adjusting effect parameters with envelopes An envelope is displayed in the data window for each effect parameter that you ve chosen to automate Envelope points represent plug in parameter settings at a specific point in time You can add points adjust their positions and change the fade curves between points to modify effect parameters and the transitions between them For more information about working with envelopes see Adjusting envelopes on page 225 Note When you automate an effect s frequency parameter such as the modulation frequency parameter in the amplitude modulation effect you may notice that the frequency changes are more apparent when moving through the lower frequencies This is because frequency scales plug ins use a logarithmic scale but effect automation uses linear interpolation To make the autom
398. lay right click the processing dialog and choose a command from the shortcut menu e Choose Ignore Tail Data to ignore the tail The effect will end abruptly at the end of the selection e Choose Mix Tail Data to mix the tail into the adjacent material This is the most natural sounding option e Choose Insert Tail Data to insert the audio tail All audio to the right of the tail will be moved over to accommodate the extra audio Creating a preset 1 Choose a command from the Process Effects or FX Favorites menu Adjust the dialog controls to create the desired effect Type a name in the Preset box oY Click the Save Preset button E Deleting a preset 1 Choose a command from the Process Effects or FX Favorites menu 2 Choose a preset from the Preset drop down list 3 Click the Delete Preset button x Note The Delete Preset button is available only for custom presets Using Sound Forge controls Control Description Slider Fader Drag the handle to change the setting W Tips Hold the left and right mouse buttons or hold the Control key to fine tune a control s value You can use the Up Down Left and Right arrow keys to change the value in small increments or the Page Up and Page Down keys to change the value in larger increments The Home and End keys change the parameter value to its maximum or minimum e Double click a handle to return to the default value usually 0 50 or 100 Left
399. lay button E and choose Line Graph Filled Graph or Bar Graph from the menu to change the type of graph displayed in the Spectrum Analysis window A check mark is displayed next to the selected graph type Note Some video drivers have problems displaying Filled Graph and Bar Graph modes If you encounter problems such as incorrect shading or very slow drawing use the Line Graph option or change video drivers If you re analyzing a multichannel file you can click the down arrow next to the Normal Display button and choose Single Graph to see all channels in a single graph Right click the graph and choose Logarithmic from the shortcut menu to toggle the x axis between logarithmic and linear mode In logarithmic mode more of the graph is devoted to lower frequencies Changing the zoom level of the graph Zooming can be accomplished in several ways 1 Drag on the graph to draw a box around the area you want to magnify You can toggle through mouse selection mode by right clicking while holding the left mouse button e The first type is a vertical Zoom window This will allow you to zoom to a frequency range e The second type is horizontal zoom window This will allow you to zoom to an amplitude range e The third type is a combination of vertical and horizontal zoom This will allow you to zoom to a frequency and amplitude range 2 Right click the graph and choose Zoom Out Full to view the entire amplitude and frequency range 3
400. lays the level of the output audio signal These meters can be toggled on off by choosing Channel Meters from the View menu Right clicking the channel meters displays a shortcut menu that allows you to precisely configure the appearance of the meters 28 CHAPTER 2 Floating and docking windows Your workspace can become cluttered quickly if you have several windows and toolbars visible You can create multiple window docks to organize your Sound Forge windows These docks can be anchored to the perimeter of the Sound Forge workspace or they can float over the workspace or on a secondary monitor Sound Forge Pro 11 0 Wow sound editing Col E lee a File Edit View Insert Transport Process Effects Tools FXFavorites Options Window Help a x Z2HOaBRS XRBAAEB D i O c P Pm Il EKK lt p gt hi DI eceeee x qt Microsoft Sound Silence E 2 EJ sound dting just gets easier EGA Ard easier 4 0 0 0 0 Inf Inf a AE 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 500 00 01 00 00 01 500 00 00 02 000 00 00 02 500 00 00 03 000 00 00 03 500 00 00 04 000 00 00 04 500 00 00 elle Seal rr ict fer sear fl re a el al fe al a a far el eal hed EA arar 6 Fal Pe 15415 2 5 18418 21421 PERRIS P 241 24 Maximized i afr e 12 0 4 334 33 data windows lz Docked Inf 4 42142 with tabs sJ channel meters 12 0 4 514 51 54 574157 4 0 60460 63463 66166 2 5
401. lection double click the level ruler Double clicking the level ruler a second time restores both displays to their default levels Using the Magnify tool The Magnify tool provides an additional way to magnify a section of an audio file You can access the Magnify tool in three ways e From the Edit menu choose Tool and choose Magnify from the submenu e Click the Magnify Tool button amp on the Standard toolbar e Click the Edit Tool Selector in the upper left corner of the data window until the Magnify tool is selected Tip When the Allow Ctrl drag style zoom in data windows check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog you can hold Ctrl while creating a selection to temporarily use the Magnify tool When you select the Magnify tool the cursor appears as a magnifying glass You can use this tool to create a selection box indicating how audio data is magnified By using the Magnify tool and toggle clicking the mouse you can toggle between time zoom level zoom and simultaneous time level zoom For more information see Using the mouse on page 27 96 CHAPTER 5 Zooming the time ruler with the Magnify tool 1 Drag the Magnify tool on the waveform to make a small selection box 2 Toggle click the mouse until the selection box is the same height as the data window 3 Drag the Magnify tool to create a time zoom selection and release the mouse button The zoom ratio of the selection increases
402. length 106 CHAPTER 6 uo Sony Perfect Clarity Audio 44 100 IFC Kane Fd RUS 16 bit 1 Mono Description The name of the file saved on disk The folder where the file is saved The size of the file on disk Indicates whether file attributes read only hidden etc have been set The date and time the file was saved The file type for the file The format used to save the audio stream Click the down arrow and choose a sample rate from the drop down list or choose Custom to type a value in the edit box to set the number of samples per second used to represent the audio Notes e This setting will not resample the sound file If the playback rate is different from the originally recorded rate the pitch will vary unless the file is resampled Ifthe active data window s sample rate is not supported by your audio hardware the output will be resampled to a supported rate for playback During playback the Sample Rate box in the Status Bar is displayed in italics to indicate that the output has been resampled F 449100 24bit Mono 00 00 05 477 843 899 7 MB Hardware Sample Rate Resampled Displays the bit rate of the audio file Click the down arrow and choose a bit depth from the drop down list to set the number of bits used to represent each sample Note Use the Bit Depth Converter to perform advanced channel mixing Click the down arrow and choose a setting from the dro
403. length of the file in milliseconds The track number of the media from the original source media The Web address associated with the file Sets the version of the file You can use versioning information to keep track of multiple mixes Identifies the location where the file was recorded Identifies the organization that produced the track METADATA WINDOWS 59 60 CHAPTER 3 Chapter 4 Getting Started The Sound Forge Pro digital audio editing tool is for users from all musical backgrounds It is an extremely deep program containing features that may only be required by the most advanced or specialized users Nonetheless a firm grasp of Sound Forge basics is essential This chapter is designed to provide you with information on Sound Forge fundamentals Creating a project You can use Sound Forge project files to organize and work with your media files nondestructively When you save a project file two things are created a frg file and a subfolder that contains your media file and all of the temporary files created while working on your project The frg file is not a multimedia file but is used to render the final file after editing is finished When you copy cut paste and otherwise edit your project the process is nondestructive meaning you can edit without worrying about corrupting your source files Within the project file you can also undo any past operations including those occurring before your last save When you
404. les 4 FunkSlap NV 8 samples 5 FunkPop NV 7 samples 6 Funk Slap amp Pop NV 15 samples 7 Funk Split D3 NV 10 samples 8 Funk Slap NC 8 samples 9 FunkPop NC 7 samples 10 Funk Slap amp Pop NC 15 samples 11 Funk Split D3 NC 10 samples 5 8 Sample Pool 15 od Funk Slap G1 4 Funk Pop G1 sali Funk Slap A 1 po Funk and Q r eil ul Funk Slap C2 00 00 00 271 1 530 if 6 a E H S ae g 7s m m m m a m m m m m Funk Slap amp Pop 15 samples Funk Split D3 10 samples Funk Slap NV 8 samples FunkPop NV 7 samples Funk Slap amp Pop NV 15 samples Funk Split D3 NV 10 samples 8 Funk Slap NC 8 samples 9 FunkPop NC 7 samples 10 Funk Slap amp Pop NC 15 samples E M 11 Funk Split D3 NC 10 samples 5 8 Sample Pool 15 wal Funk Slap G1 Funk Pop G1 de Funk Slap A 1 nd Funk Pop C2 gt tlle laa al Funk Slap C2 00 00 00 271 1 530 D 0 EE a e fi Bank0 6M 0 Funk Slap Bass 8 samples bA JJ Note A2 A 2 J Note B2 C3 J Note C 3 D 3 E fd Note E3 G 3 J Note A3 B3 fd Note C4 D4 J Note D 4 E5 1 Funk Pop Bass 7 samples 2 Funk Slap amp Pop 15 samples 3 Funk Split D3 10 samples 4 FunkSlap NV 8 samples 5 FunkPop NV 7 sa
405. les are saved in Perfect Clarity Audio PCA format a Sony Creative Software Inc proprietary lossless audio compression format Technical support The Web site at http www sonycreativesoftware com support default asp has technical support reference information program updates tips and tricks user forums and a knowledge base INTRODUCTION 25 Getting help You can access two varieties of help within Sound Forge e Online help e Interactive tutorials Online help To access online help choose Contents and Index from the Help menu or press F1 X Sound Forge Pro Online Help Toolbar gt i ff Hide Options Shortcuts Glossary Tabs gt Contents Index Search Favorites 0 Introduction a Using Help Technical Support Optimizing Sound Forge The Sound Forge Window How Do I Working with Projects Working with Files Editing Multichannel Audio Working with Video Files Previewing a File Monitoring Levels Recording Selecting Data and Positioning 1 Basic Editing Event Based Editing oO Markers Regions and Comma Editing with the Playlist Cutlist Applying Processes and Effects Repairing Glitches Clicks and Scripting Synthesis Sampling MIDI Synchronization Spectrum Analysis Editing with SpectraLayers Pro Acoustic Mirror X m po la kai Sound Forge Pro Sound Forge software is the workhorse
406. level ruler 94 95 level ruler with Magnify tool 97 shortcuts 96 time and level ruler with Magnify tool 97 time commands 94 time ruler 93 time ruler with Magnify tool 97 vertically 94 95 Zoom Level commands 95 zoom ratio 93 94 INDEX 397 398 INDEX
407. lick Preview The processed file plays and the sax riff is virtually placed in a football stadium sized venue 8 Select or clear the Bypass check box to toggle between the processed and unprocessed audio Adjusting the acoustic signature After you add an acoustic signature to a file you can use the controls of the Acoustic Mirror dialog to precisely configure the reverb effect More importantly you can preview configuration changes as quickly as you make them 1 Open a file and display the Acoustic Mirror dialog 2 Verify that the Real time check box is selected 3 From the Impulse drop down list choose the desired impulse file and click Preview The processed audio file is played Notice that all dialog controls are set to their default values USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 233 5 Drag the Dry Out fader up Notice the audible change in output as the balance between the Wet Out and Dry Out values changes Tip f you are experiencing difficulty previewing processing in real time decrease the Quality speed value Drag the Response delay slider to the right Notice the audible change in the reverb s delay The Acoustic Mirror dialog contains four tabs General Envelope Summary and Recover Each tab contains controls that allow you to precisely configure the effect as well as recover custom impulses Notice that the Acoustic Mirror dialog contains the preset and preview controls found in all of the Sound Forge proce
408. llows you to specify an ISRC International Standard Recording Code that will be used to identify the tracks on your disc For more information about ISRC codes see http www ifpi org content section_resources isrc html 1 Double click the ISRC box in a track row 2 Type the appropriate code for the track 3 Press Enter Industry Standard Recording Codes ISRC were designed to identify CD tracks The ISRC code is a 12 character alohanumeric sequence in the following format Field A B C D E Sample ISRC SE T38 86 302 12 Field Description A Country Represents the recording s country of origin B First Owner Assigned ID for the producer of the project Each country has a board that assigns these codes C Year of Recording Represents the year the recording was made Recording Represents the recording s serial number made by the same producer in that year This value will use three digits 300 999 when the CD has 10 or more tracks This value will use four digits 0001 2999 when the CD has 9 or fewer tracks E Recording Item 1 or 2 digits Identifies tracks on a CD each track can have a different ISRC code Creating track lists PQ lists or cue sheets You can right click the Track List window and choose Copy Track List to Clipboard Export Track List or Print Track List to share your track list information with another application or with a CD replication house For more information see Creating track lists for disc
409. location Dragging is used to quickly move sections of data between windows as well as to adjust sliders scrollbars and faders Holding down the right and left mouse buttons while adjusting sliders and faders increases the resolution of the movement This is useful when making fractional adjustments to parameters Tip After you are familiar with Sound Forge basics you may want to use mouse and keyboard shortcuts For more information see Shortcuts on page 349 Using the mouse wheel The following table describes the available mouse wheel functionality you can use to navigate audio files Mouse Functionality Wheel Up Wheel Down Ctrl Wheel Up Ctrl Wheel Down Shift Wheel Up Shift Wheel Down Ctrl Shift Wheel Up Ctrl Shift Wheel Down Description Zoom in horizontally Zoom out horizontally Zoom in vertically Zoom out vertically Scroll left in tenths of screen width Scroll right in tenths of screen width Move cursor left or move current selection point left if there is a selection Move cursor right or move current selection point right if there is a selection LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 27 The main window When you start the application the main window is displayed The main window s workspace is where you perform all audio editing Menu bar TT Standard toolbar B SOa86 X 2 FSB Blox 5 MHa Rs s Transport bar F gt gt i m i4 Ki lt 4 gt i gt i W
410. locity 000 Acoustic Grand Piano Turning on the MIDI keyboard Clicking any key turns the keyboard on If you do not hear any sound verify that the output is connected to the MIDI Output device Configuring the MIDI keyboard output port and channel 1 Click the MIDI Out button 2 and choose an output device from the menu Keyboard 000 Acoustic Grand Piano Note if Za 22 Feel a 7 Microsoft MIDI Mapper Microsoft GS Wavetable Synth Ww Out USB Keystation Send Program Changes 2 Choose Send Program Changes from the menu if the keyboard will be used to choose instrument voices A check mark appears adjacent to the command to indicate that this option is turned on 3 Configure the MIDI input channel of the selected device to correspond to the keyboard s output channel Note Most MIDI devices are configurable to accept MIDI commands on any channel Troubleshooting the MIDI keyboard If after configuration the keyboard fails to produce sound check the following items e Verify that the output velocity of the keyboard is set to a value greater than 100 e Verify that the MIDI input channel in the sound module is set to the same channel as the keyboard e Verify that the device is configured to receive MIDI input e Verify the device output volume level e Verify external MIDI connections if applicable SAMPLING 267 Specifying instruments 1 Choose Send Program Changes from the
411. lse file in Sound Forge software and play it Delete any silence or low level noise that occurs before or after the actual audio data Typically there are between 900 and 1100 samples of data at the beginning of the impulse that should be removed Save the trimmed impulse response file using the standard WAV format Tip To prevent phase problems when mixing the dry and wet signals you may also want to verify the phase of the impulse file The file should begin by going positive above the centerline If the impulse file has a negative below the centerline phase choose Invert Flip from the Process menu 240 CHAPTER 15 Adding summary information to your impulse file If you plan on sharing impulses with other Sound Forge users we recommend adding summary information and BMP images to your files 1 Open the impulse file in the software 2 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Summary Information from the submenu The Summary window is displayed 3 Enter the appropriate information in each box Note f the data you want to edit is not displayed in the window you can right click the window choose Insert from the shortcut menu and then choose a metadata field from the submenu Using the new impulse file To use your new impulse file open the Acoustic Mirror dialog and choose it from the Impulse drop down list as you would any other impulse file If you performed the previous procedures properly the custom impul
412. lse through an electronic device The recording process is similar if you are recording the output of an electronic device but there are no speakers or microphones to be placed Using the appropriate cables connect the playback system s outputs to the electronic device s inputs and the electronic device s outputs to the recording system s inputs Once the devices are connected play the test tone through the electronic device and record its output on the recording system Other impulses Any number of methods can be used to create an impulse including starter pistols clap boards or even a sharp hand clap The drawback of these impulse generators is that they add their own coloration to the sound For best results we recommend using the test tones included on the Sound Forge application disc Recovering the impulse After you have recorded your test tones they must be processed and converted into impulse responses The following sections describe the typical impulse recovery procedure Trimming the test tone 1 Open your test tone file the room processed output test tone in the software 2 Locate the first timing spike and delete all audio before it Cut as close to the beginning of the timing spike as possible but do not delete the spike itself 3 Locate the second timing spike and delete all data from the start of the second spike to the end of the file Again cut as close to the start of the timing spike as possibl
413. lue Displays the length of the sustaining loop You can double click the value to edit it Editing the length will automatically update the Sustain end value Indicates how many times the sustaining loop should be played Click the down arrow to choose a new setting If you choose Custom you can type a new value Displays the start of the release loop You can double click the value to edit it Displays the end of the release loop You can double click the value to edit it Editing the end will automatically update the Release length value Displays the length of the release loop You can double click the value to edit it Editing the length will automatically update the Release end value Indicates how many times the release loop should be played Click the down arrow to choose a new setting If you choose Custom you can type a new value For example if you set the Sustain count to 3 and the Release count to 2 the sustain loop would be played 3 times and then the release loop would be played twice The MMA manufacturer code for the target device If the sample is not intended for a specific manufacturer set the value to 0 For more information see http www midi org techspecs manid php The sampler that created the sample Click the down arrow and choose a sample period from the drop down list or choose Custom to type a value in the edit box to set the duration of each sample in nanoseconds Indica
414. lurred image Interpolate Deletes one field and uses the remaining field to interpolate the deleted lines This produces sharper images than Blend Fields but can introduce jagged motion or stair stepping artifacts Resample source video when Select this check box if you want to interpolate video frames when you render to a rendering to a higher frame frame rate that is greater than the source file s frame rate rate External monitor device Allows you to identify an external video device with which Sound Forge software can communicate This video device is used to display previews on an external monitor Important Pulldown is automatically added when you preview 24p video on an external monitor WORKING WITH VIDEO 293 Saving a video file 1 2 3 4 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears From the Save as type drop down list choose a video file format Name the file in the File name box Select or clear the following check boxes as needed e Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox Selecting this check box stretches the source video frame if the destination frame size differs When this check box is cleared letterboxing or pillarboxing is used to keep the frame aspect correct e Fast video resizing Selecting this check box speeds the process of saving video When this check box is cleared the time required to save the file can increase dramatically Clear this check box only when y
415. matically enter the values in the Channel Note Controller and Value boxes Select the Enable MIDI Input Sync Trigger check box and press a key or controller on your MIDI device Click the OK button Note MIDI triggers are different from triggers in the Playlist and Regions List When using triggers in the Playlist Regions List or MIDI Triggers dialog be aware that they can interact with each other to create unexpected results Sound Forge software first looks at the MIDI Triggers then the Regions List and then the Playlist when determining what to do when a MIDI command is detected MIDI trigger events Item Enable Disable Triggers Play All Play Pause Stop Record Start Stop Start End Next Window Previous Window Loop Mode On Off Play Normal Play as Sample Play as Cutlist Loop Mode On Loop Mode Off Preview Cut Cursor Pre Roll to Cursor Forward Slow Forward Medium Forward Fast Rewind Slow Rewind Medium Rewind Fast Insert Marker Create Region Description Click to assign no MIDI trigger to the selected event or to remove an existing trigger Plays the entire sound file from beginning to end regardless of cursor position selection or playlist Plays the sound file in the current playback mode Pauses playback and leaves the cursor at its current position Stops playback and returns the cursor to its position prior to playback Starts or stops recording when the Record dialog is open Move
416. mation Long or faulty SCSI cables SCSI cables that are very long or not properly shielded may not operate reliably In addition do not use cables that are not certified SCSI cables Adaptec 1540 1542CF does not recognize a sampler If the Adaptec 1540 1542CF does not recognize the sampler a change may be required in the configuration of the Adaptec controller Some samplers do not operate when the Reset SCSI Bus at Power On option of the Adaptec controller is turned on This is the default operation for the 1540 1542CF and must be turned off to allow the system to work with the sampler Note Turning off the Reset SCSI Bus at Power On option may keep other devices on the SCSI chain from resetting correctly when using the system s soft boot feature Other systems may freeze temporarily To guarantee that devices are reset when rebooting with this option turned off use the system s reset button or power down and up to reset the system SCSI SMDI compatible menu is not displayed under Windows 98SE and Windows Me Verify proper SCSI termination and check for multiple devices on the SCSI chain using the same SCSI ID If this fails to solve the problem Adaptec SCSI card users may need to update the system s mini port drivers Adaptec has a series of updated mini port drivers available for Windows 98SE and Windows Me on the Web After you download the file you must create a temporary directory or folder on the system and run the WIN95MPD EXE prog
417. mation see Selecting events on page 179 2 Position the cursor where you want to split the events 3 From the Edit menu choose Event and then choose Split from the submenu or press S If no events are selected the events located at the current cursor position will be split throughout all of the channels If events are selected only the selected events will be split at the current cursor position Splitting events at region boundaries 1 Select the events you want to split For more information see Selecting events on page 179 2 From the Edit menu choose Event and then choose Split Regions from the submenu or press Ctrl Alt T If no events are selected the events located at the current cursor position will be split throughout all of the channels at region boundaries e If events are selected only the selected events will be split at region boundaries 174 CHAPTER 12 Slipping events Press Alt while dragging an event The slip cursor appears As you drag the event the contents of the event shift but the event does not move You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length and position but have the event play a different section of the source audio file Tips e Hold the Shift key to temporarily override snapping e Regions markers and envelope points are moved with the contents of the event To turn this feature off turn off the Lock to Selection gt Markers Regions and
418. mation into a text editor or e mail message Exporting track lists as text files 1 From the Edit menu choose Track List and then choose Export Track List from the submenu The Export Track List dialog is displayed Tip Right click the Track List window and choose Export Track List from the shortcut menu Export Track List Format for track list output Cue sheet for replication show absolute times CD liner notes show times relative to track 1 Export as formatted text 4 Indude summary information with track list output Export as delimited text ge Neadger roy OK cane 2 Choose the format you want to apply to your track list information e Cue sheet for replication The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the beginning of the CD This is the preferred format for CD replication houses e CD liner notes The track list is formatted so track times are listed relative to the first track on the disc 3 Choose the format you want to apply to your track list information e Export as formatted text Track information is formatted in a table Select the Include summary information with track list output check box if you want to include UPC MCN title engineer and comment information with the track list e Export as delimited text You can choose the character that will separate columns of text and choose whether to include a header row to identify the columns 4 Click OK to save your file
419. ment e A playback device and speakers e Astereo pair of microphones to record the test tone e A recording device for recording the signal captured by the microphones Recovering an impulse from an electronic device To recover an impulse from an electronic device you need the following equipment e A playback device that connects to the device s inputs e A recording device that connects to the device s outputs Recording the impulse in an acoustic space When you have assembled the required equipment you are ready to begin recording the impulse The following sections describe the typical impulse recording procedure Transferring the test tone The first step in recording the impulse is to transfer the desired test tone to your playback device The Sound Forge application disc contains two test tones a 24 second test tone and a 48 second test tone We typically recommend that you use the 24 second tone because longer tones result in greater signal to noise ratios The 48 second tone should be used in particularly noisy environments or when the decay time of the acoustic space is greater than six seconds Tip There are spikes at the beginning and end of each test tone You should include the spikes in the recording to simplify the recovery of the impulse in the later stages of the process Placing equipment When recording the test tone in an acoustic space you must determine where to place your playback system speakers microphones an
420. mer Example music bed Preset Untitled x SONY Wave Hammer About Cancel o Canel E Bypass Volume Maximizer Te OD aa 0 0 dB 0 0 dB Preview E Use longer look ahead Bypass om ha ey Real time an Threshold Output level 60 to 0 dB 30 to 0 dB Release time 0 to 1 000 ms 100 0 Compressor Volume Maximizer More CPU o 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 Control Description Threshold The Threshold fader is used to adjust the audio level at which the volume maximizer activates Audio with levels higher than the Threshold value are affected while audio at levels lower than this value pass through the volume maximizer uninterrupted Output level The Output level fader allows you to determine the level to which peaks above the Threshold setting are boosted or cut Release time The Release time slider allows you to determine how soon after falling below the threshold the audio signal attenuation is interrupted Use longer look ahead When you select the Use longer look ahead check box the volume maximizer scans farther ahead in the incoming audio to determine the amount of limiting that is needed This results in limiting being applied before the threshold surpassing audio actually occurs However the pre limiting effect fades that occur prior to attacks of this option may be distracting Input Output meter This meter allows you to monitor the level of the incoming
421. mes These can include Time Seconds Frames and all standard SMPTE frame rates Trim Crop Trim Crop is a function that will delete all data in a sound file outside of the current selection This is a necessary function when dealing with samples to be played by a sampler to get rid of blank time at the beginning and ending of samples u Law u Law mu Law is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a nonlinear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in European and Asian telecommunications Law is very similar to A Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder Undo Buffer This is the temporary file created before you do any processing to a sound file This undo buffer allows you to rewrite previous versions of the sound file if you decide you don t like changes you ve made to the sound file This undo buffer is erased when the file is closed or the Clear Undo Redo History command is selected Undo Redo These commands allow you to change a project back to a previous state when you don t like the changes you have made or reapply the changes after you have undone them Undo Redo History This is a list of all of the functions that have been done to a file that are available to be undone or redone Undo Redo History gives you the ability to undo or redo multiple functions as
422. mes faster than Forward Slow Moves the cursor through the data window in the current zoom ratio For example if the zoom ratio is 1 1024 this will move the cursor back 1024 samples Moves the cursor through the data window 25 times faster than Rewind Slow Moves the cursor through the data window 75 times faster than Rewind Slow Places a marker at the current cursor position Creates a region quickly using the currently selected data MIDI SYNCHRONIZATION 273 Item Mark In Mark Out Zoom Level In Zoom Level Out Zoom Time In Zoom Time Out Pan Down Pan Up Go To Next Marker Go To Previous Marker Go To Next Frame Go To Previous Frame Go To Next Sample Go To Previous Sample Description Sets the beginning of a selection at the current cursor position The data between this point and the Mark Out position will be selected Sets the end of a selection at the current cursor position The data between this point and the Mark In position will be selected Zooms in vertically Zooms out vertically Zooms in horizontally Zooms out horizontally Pans down vertically This is useful when the entire amplitude range is not visible in the data window Pans up vertically This is useful when the entire amplitude range is not visible in the data window Moves the cursor to the next marker Moves the cursor to the previous marker Moves the cursor to the next video frame Moves the cursor to the previous video fram
423. mmand is displayed in conjunction with the name of the previous function You can also repeat an operation by doing any of the following actions e Hold Shift while choosing the command from its menu e Press Ctrl Y e Click the Repeat button gt on the Standard toolbar Inserting silence The Insert Silence command allows you to place sections of silence in audio files 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Insert menu choose Silence The Insert Silence dialog is displayed Tip You can also click the Insert Silence button on the Insert toolbar Insert Silence Exarnple music bed Cancel Insert hr imn sc xxx 00 00 01 800 at Cursor Total samples to be inserted 79 380 Maximum length allowed for insert 00 10 00 000 EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 159 3 Perform one of the following actions From the Preset drop down list choose a preset that has been stored for the plug in e Specify the length of silence that you want to add in the Insert box and choose a setting from the at drop down list to specify where the silence should be inserted Setting Description Cursor Inserts silence at the current cursor position Start of file Inserts silence at the beginning of the file End of file Inserts silence at the end of the file 4 Click the OK button Using drag and drop operations You can take advantage of using drag and drop operations to perform many common tasks Drag and d
424. mple Synthesis Example music bed Preset MME E x 12 0 dB a 25 12 Waveform shape Sine Preview Length 0 001 to 600 0 seconds 1 000 3 Start Frequency 0 01 to 22 050 Hz 60 00 C End Frequency 0 01 to 22 050 Hz 90 00 no Sweer LAA oe Amplitude Inf to 0 dB Insert new waveform at End of file ka 2 From the Waveform shape drop down list choose a shape to specify the shape of a single period of the current operator s waveform 3 Inthe Length box specify the length in seconds of the generated waveform 4 Inthe Start Frequency box specify the frequency of the waveform 5 If you want to sweep a range of frequencies select the End Frequency check box and specify an ending frequency in the box Select the Log Sweep check box if you want to sweep the range logarithmically when the check box is cleared the sweep is linear 6 Use the Amplitude fader to set the peak level of the waveform Note When you choose Noise in the Waveform shape drop down list the amplitude is affected by the specified cutoff frequency 7 From the Insert new waveform at drop down list choose a position to determine where the waveform is placed in the data window 8 Click OK EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 169 170 CHAPTER 11 Chapter 12 Using the Event Tool The Event tool in Sound Forge Pro software allows you to edit multiple audio events in a single data window
425. mples 6 Funk Slap amp Pop NV 15 samples 7 Funk Split D3 NV 10 samples 8 Funk Slap NC 8 samples 9 FunkPop NC 7 samples E H A A A SERRE EERE o oo ww r eilla K gt E KA Di 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 271 1 530 E sec EE EE E A I 00 00 00 J Note B2 C3 a J Note C 3 C 3 JJ Note D3 D3 fd Note D 3 F 3 fd Note 63 A3 J Note A 3 D4 fd Note D 4 G4 fd Note G 4 E5 a a a R Sample Pool 15 A Funk Slap G1 le Funk Pop G1 od Funk Slap A 1 4 Funk Pop C2 4 Funk Slap C2 de Funk Slap D2 wal Funk Pop F3 A Funk Slap G3 4 Funk Pop G3 0G m eilla K gt E K D 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 271 1 530 SAMPLING 265 Processing selections Select the samples you want to process If no samples are selected processing will be applied to all samples Choose a command from the Process Effects or FX Favorites menu Choose a preset from the Preset drop down list or adjust the dialog controls as needed For more information see Applying presets on page 181 Note Plug ins that can change the length of audio data such as reverb or delay will use Insert Tail Data mode Tails will be add
426. n mar El F x 00000200 Before split After split If the cursor is placed outside the region you re splitting a new region will be created from the closest edge of the original region to the cursor position Before split After split USING MARKERS REGIONS AND COMMANDS 125 Saving a regions playlist file You can save a file s regions list and playlist cutlist to an external file This command offers the flexibility of using multiple playlists for the same sound file 1 From the Edit menu choose Regions List or Playlist Cutlist and then choose Save As from the submenu Tip Right click the Regions List or Playlist Cutlist window and choose Save As from the shortcut menu 2 Use the Save Regions Playlist As dialog to specify a folder and file name 3 Specify the type of regions you want to save from the Save as type drop down list e Choose Playlist File sfl to save a Sound Forge regions playlist file e Choose Session 8 File prm to save a file that supports both Session 8 and Sound Forge regions e Choose Windows Media Script File txt to save a file that includes Windows Media script commands e Choose Text File Tab delimited txt to save markers and regions to a plain text file 4 Click the Save button Importing a regions playlist file From the Edit menu choose Regions List or Playlist Cutlist and then choose Open from the submenu to import an existing regions playlist file sfl into the current so
427. n s length e The region s trigger e The region s channel e The region s note Regions List 700 00 000 00 00 00 742 00 00 00 742 None 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 None Sound editing just gets easi 00 00 01 475 00 00 03 639 00 00 02 163 None 00 00 03 639 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 None Changing region order By default the Regions List displays regions in alphabetical order by name but you can specify an alternate order by clicking the column heading to sort in ascending Start or descending Start order USING MARKERS REGIONS AND COMMANDS 129 Saving a Regions List file You can save a file s Regions List to an external file This offers the flexibility of using multiple Regions Lists for the same audio file 1 From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Save As from the submenu or right click the Regions List and choose Save As from the shortcut menu 2 Use the Save Regions Playlist As dialog to specify a folder and file name 3 Click Save Opening a Regions List file Importing a Regions List file offers the flexibility of using multiple Regions List files for the same audio file Opening a new Regions List file clears the current Regions List Make sure you have saved the current Regions List before continuing 1 From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Open from the submenu or right click the Regions List and choose Open from the s
428. n on page 260 4 Begin the process of sending or receiving samples For more information see Sending and receiving samples on page 262 Creating a sampler configuration The Sampler Configuration dialog allows you to create new sample configurations that can be saved as presets and accessed from the Sampler dialog Creating new custom configurations requires you to specify the sampler and sample transfer mode However the process of creating a custom sampler configuration differs based on which transfer mode is used 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog appears 2 Click the Configure button The Sampler Configuration dialog appears MD scsI Sample bias 0 Save AS MIDI MIDI In Delete MIDI Output Devices MIDI Input Devices dy Microsoft MIDI Mapper ds In USB Keystation y Microsoft GS Wavetable Sy 2 Out USB Keystation MIDI channel 4 z E Open loop V Send request when retrieving samples E Wait for request when sending samples 3 From the Sampler model drop down list choose the appropriate sampler If the desired sampler is not included in the drop down list choose the generic SMDI or SDS capable sampler option If the sampler supports the specified protocol the Sampler Tool should interface with the sampler 260 CHAPTER 17 4 Specify input output settings for the sampler If Then Your sampler uses MIDI SDS transfer Select the MIDI radio button and choose input and out
429. n submenu to snap the selection to the grid and to zero crossings Tip Hold the Shift key to temporarily override snapping Important n previous versions of Sound Forge both ends of a selection would snap to the grid when you released the mouse Sound Forge now uses a softer snapping mechanism that gives you more control if you click near a grid line with snapping enabled the cursor will snap to that grid line As you drag a selection along the timeline the cursor will stick to grid lines to allow you to snap to them If you want to snap both edges of a selection to the grid as in previous versions of Sound Forge you can press T Turn snapping on or off From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Enable from the submenu or press F8 to turn snapping on or off When snapping is enabled objects will snap to the following points The cursor e Time selection edges You can also choose to snap events to grid divisions markers or zero crossings Automatically snap to the grid When snapping is enabled you can also choose to have objects snap to whole time divisions as designated by the marks on the time ruler above the data window From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Grid from the submenu or press Ctrl F8 to toggle snapping to grid lines Tip To change the resolution of the grid choose Status Format from the Options menu and then choose a setting from the submenu or right click the time rule
430. n the Loop pca file A sustaining loop appears in the data window 2 From the Tools menu choose Crossfade Loop The Crossfade Loop dialog is displayed 3 Drag the Loop slider to configure the percentage of the loop to be crossfaded Loop to crossfade Sustaining Release Loop to crossfade Sustaining Release NY gt 27 D a PENN Z gt a i P hs F Loop 1 to 100 30 W Loop 1 to 100 80 Post Loop 1 to 100 Post Loop 1 to 100 Preview mode Loop the Loop r Preview mode Loop the Loop 4 If desired select the Post Loop check box and drag the slider to configure the percentage of the loop to be crossfaded into the post loop audio Loop to crossfade Sustaining Release Loop to crossfade Sustaining Release oat r oy a ae Lj z i E FREAR A E EA A LO A Saa F Loop 1 to 100 oe 80 M Loop 1 to 100 80 Post Loop 1 to 100 20 W Post Loop 1 to 100 90 Preview mode Loop th e Loop Preview mode Loop the Loop Y 5 From the Preview mode drop down list specify how the Preview button operates Loop the Loop Play Loop through Post Loop or Play as One Shot 6 Preview and tune the crossfade until you cannot detect the loop transitions 7 Click OK 282 CHAPTER 19 Creating loops for ACID software The Sound Forge application is an excellent tool for creating and editing loops to be imported
431. n the clipboard Pasting events After events are copied or cut to the clipboard you can paste them to a different place in the file or to a different data window Notes Ifany regions or markers are present in the original sound data they will also be pasted into the destination sound file To turn this feature off turn off the Lock to Selection gt Markers Regions command on the Options menu Envelope points from the original sound data are not pasted into the destination sound file Move the cursor to the desired location on the timeline 2 From the Edit menu choose Paste or click the Paste button on the Standard toolbar The clipboard events are inserted into the data window and existing events on the selected channels are moved down the data window by the total length of the pasted audio If no channels are selected the clipboard events are pasted to all channels Mixing events You can mix files events and selections when using the Event tool by dragging and dropping audio from the current data window other data windows the Sound Forge Explorer window or Windows Explorer Mixed audio is inserted as a new events over the existing events in a data window Crossfades are created but the Mix Replace dialog does not appear USING THE EVENT TOOL 173 Deleting events Deleting an event removes the event s audio from the data window You can delete multiple events at once Deleting operates like a cutting oper
432. n the selected area Right click above the loop region choose Markers Regions and choose Delete All in Selection from the submenu AAIl markers F and regions F in the selected area are removed Previewing a region Click a region s Play button H in the Regions list Triggering a region using MIDI commands 1 Right click the marker tag and choose Edit from the shortcut menu The Regions List is displayed 2 Click the down arrow in the region s Trigger column to display a drop down list Trigger type Description Note On Play The region will be played when the specified note on message is received and will play for the full length of the file Note On Play Off Stop The region will be played when the specified note on message is received and will stop when the full file is played or the specified Note Off message is received Note On Queue Off Play The region will be queued for play when the specified note on message is received and will play when the corresponding Note Off message is received This is used to reduce the time between receiving a trigger and playing a region 3 Inthe Chan box specify the MIDI input channel for triggering 122 CHAPTER 8 4 Inthe Note box specify the MIDI note that will trigger region playback This value can be entered as a MIDI note value such as C4 or as a MIDI note number such as 60 Notes Ifthe Trigger from MIDI Timecode command is selected while using this dialog y
433. n this case you should edit the loop using the Loop Tuner Editing a loop with the Loop Tuner The Loop Tuner allows you to precisely edit loop points in order to prevent distracting audio glitches This is accomplished by greatly magnifying the waveform and displaying the loop tags in relation to one another You can also use the Loop Tuner to adjust the starting and ending points of a loop or selection to create smooth transitions LOOPING 279 The left side of the Loop Tuner window displays the end of the loop while the right side displays the start of the loop This arrangement allows you to fine tune loops by viewing a graphical representation of the junction between the end and the start of a loop Displaying the Loop Tuner 1 Open the Loop pca file A sustaining loop appears in the data window 2 From the View menu choose Loop Tuner The Loop Tuner appears and displays the waveform of the file s loop Loop Tuner a o oo Oe Loop End window Loop Start window Loop End Position Loop Start Position PA wtp tep toe G Loop Endpoint Lock Loop Amplitudes Length Zero crossing finders Play Post Loop Play Loop Play Pre Loop Loop Select Playing loops using the Loop Tuner The Loop Tuner contains three playback buttons Play Pre Loop Play Loop and Play Post Loop wto Play Pre Loop Starts playback of a file from its beginning and stop playback at the loop start tag Py Plays Loop Starts playback o
434. n without automatic snapping enabled or have modified a selection so its edges no longer align with the grid zero crossings you can use the commands on the Edit gt Selection submenu to snap the selection to the grid and to zero crossings For more information see Selection Snapping on page 101 Selection Snapping From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose a command from the submenu to force the edges of the current selection to the points you choose Snapping helps you align your selection with items in the data window If you want to use snapping when positioning the cursor and making selections you can use the commands on the Options gt Snapping submenu to enable snapping and set snapping options For more information see Enable Snapping on page 100 NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 101 Snap to Grid From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Snap to Grid from the submenu or press T to force both edges of a selection to a whole time division as designated by the marks on the time ruler above the data window 00 00 03 000 Before snapping After snapping the edges of the selection snap to the 2 000 and 3 000 divisions on the ruler Tip To change the resolution of the grid choose Status Format from the Options menu and then choose a setting from the submenu or right click the time ruler and choose a format from the shortcut menu Snap Edge to Grid From the Edit menu choose Selection and then c
435. nces dialog For more information see Previews tab on page 339 More Click to display additional controls at the bottom of the dialog that you can use to change the selection you want to process or adjust dry and wet gain and fades Previewing audio Click the Preview button to hear the effect of the current dialog settings on the selected audio During playback you can select the Bypass check box to hear the unprocessed audio This is a useful feature when comparing the affected and unprocessed signal Previewing with pre or post roll If you want to listen to the unprocessed audio before or after the current selection right click the processing dialog and choose Pre Roll or Post Roll from the shortcut menu A check box is displayed next to the commands when they re selected Pre and post roll allow you to hear the transition from unprocessed to processed data When the Pre Roll and Post Roll buttons are selected the pre post roll regions are displayed next to the loop region in the data window on A 00 00 40 Ez 00 00 45 0000 i Preroll 00 00 01 000 T You can use the Previews tab in the Preferences dialog to specify how many seconds of unprocessed audio will be played before and after the processed selection For more information see Previews tab on page 339 218 CHAPTER 14 Choosing a processing mode for tail data If you want to specify how Sound Forge handles the extra audio tail of plug ins such as reverb or de
436. ncy of a filter is the frequency at which the filter changes its response For example in a low pass filter frequencies greater than the cutoff frequency are attenuated while frequencies less than the cutoff frequency are not affected Data Window Each opened sound file has its own data window At the top of each data window is a title bar displaying either the title of the sample or the name of the file Also in each data window are the waveform display time and level rulers playbar and other tools that give you information and allow you to navigate throughout the entire sound file DC Offset DC offset occurs when hardware such as a sound card adds DC current to a recorded audio signal This current results in a recorded waveform that is not centered around the baseline infinity Glitches and other unexpected results can occur when sound effects are applied to files that contain DC offsets Sound Forge software can compensate for this DC offset by adding a constant value to the samples in the sound file In the following example the red line represents the baseline The lower waveform exhibits DC offset note that the waveform is centered approximately 2 dB above the baseline Inf LA OPTRA nO ee Taa abah Decibel dB A unit used to represent a ratio between two numbers using a logarithmic scale For example when comparing the numbers 14 and 7 you could say 14 is two times greater than the number 7 or you could say 14 is 6 dB g
437. nd Card s input eee ccc cee eet eee eens 152 Choosing an input device and adjusting levels ccc ccc cece cc cee cette eee cence enes 153 Adjusting for DC Offset oaconcad or asaeebieainuen cates nen E ENESENN ESE ae wncaee dt 154 Recording multichannel audio cc ccc ccc ccc ccc cc cee nett eeeeee eee eeeenes 154 Generating MTC SMPTE synchronization during recording eeeeeeeeeees 156 Editing Repairing and Synthesizing Audio ccc eee cece eee e eee eeees 157 Overwriting and replicating cece cece eee eee eee eee e eee e eee eeeeeeeeee 157 OVEIWINIVIG ena aAA ANE sede seanee ener oecun tinue apanenens dare TA 157 REP NO eerren era T E A A Gavan EA A anes 158 Repeating an operation sssssnsssssssseeeessessenreesesesoreressseoreessseeeo 159 MSerting SileNCE 6 0 2 2 5 04 0000 save Ghee Shale edbwle 4 Ea E teased A TEETE EE 159 Using drag and drop operations 0 cece eee eee eee e eee e nen een eens 160 Dragging mono selections into multichannel destinations 0 cece cece eee eee eens 160 Snapping to points in drag and drop operations ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eeeees 160 Pasting mixing and creating CD tracks with drag and drop ccc ccc cece eee 161 Creating new windows by dragging and dropping a selection ccc cece eee eee 163 Finding and repairing audio Glitches ccc ccc cece cece eee eee eeeees 163 Korse aek eles ie E E E
438. nd attacks such as drum beats or words or according to the Selection tempo value specified in the File Properties window Creating regions based on fast attacks 1 From the Tools menu choose Auto Region 2 Drag the Attack sensitivity slider to determine how sensitive the attack detection algorithm is to fast increases in volume With a high setting regions are created when the sound level increases by very small amounts and more regions are created With a low setting the sound level must increase by a large amount before a new region is created and fewer regions are created 3 Drag the Release sensitivity slider to determine the minimum decrease in sound level that must occur before a region end is created With a high setting regions are created when the sound level decreases by very small amounts and more regions are created With a low setting the sound level must decrease by a large amount before a new region is created and fewer regions are created A low setting is useful if you want regions to be created after quiet breaks 4 Drag the Minimum level fader to determine the threshold sound level that must be found before a new region is created With a high setting only high level sounds will trigger the creation of a new region This is useful if you want loud instrument attacks in a song such as the bass drum to mark the beginning of a region since they often correspond to the beginning of a measure or beat Low threshold
439. nd move the mouse and drop it let go of the mouse button at another position on the screen Dynamic Range The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels It can refer to a musical performance high volume vs low volume signals or to electrical equipment peak level before distortion vs noise floor Endian Little and Big Little and Big Endian describe the ordering of multi byte data that is used by a computers microprocessor Little Endian specifies that data is stored in a low to high byte format this ordering is used by the Intel microprocessors Big Endian specifies that data is stored in a high to low byte format this ordering is used by the Motorola microprocessors Equalization EQ Equalizing a sound file is a process by which certain frequency bands are raised or lowered in level 370 APPENDIX E Fast Fourier Transform FFT Analysis A Fourier Transform is the mathematical method used to convert a waveform from the Time Domain to the Frequency Domain Since the Fourier Transform is computationally intensive it is Common to use a technique called a Fast Fourier Transform FFT to perform spectral analysis The FFT uses mathematical shortcuts to lower the processing time at the expense of putting limitations on the analysis size The analysis size also referred to as the FFT size indicates the number of samples from the sound signal used in the analysis and also determines the number of discrete frequen
440. nd reads the interlaced video as lower field first Note The Video field order setting remains in effect only as long as the file is open The setting is not retained when you save or close the file Choose a setting from the Video pixel aspect ratio drop down list to determine the ratio used to display and render the video In most cases this value is auto detected for you Configuring your video settings You can use the Video tab on the Preferences dialog to choose your video settings From the Options menu choose Preferences and then click the Video tab The items on this tab are explained below Item Description Frame numbering on This drop down list determines how the frame information is displayed on the video thumbnails strip when you have frame number display enabled To display frame numbers choose the Frame number option To display timecode choose the Media timecode option Allow pulldown removal If you want to automatically remove pulldown fields when opening 24 fps when opening 24p DV progressive scan DV video files select this check box To open your 24p DV video files as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i clear this check box Deinterlace method Choose a setting from the drop down list to determine how the two fields that make up a video frame are separated when you render to a progressive format Blend Fields Maintains the data in the two fields by blending them together This method can produce a smooth motion b
441. nding marker or select corresponding region Increase time magnification zoom in Decrease time magnification zoom out Increase level magnification Decrease level magnification Zoom to selection if a selection exists otherwise Zoom In Full or Zoom event when the Event tool i is selected Zoom normal zooms to default zoom ratio set in Preferences Display custom zoom ratio 1 Display custom zoom ratio 2 Pan data window up down if zoomed in vertically Switch cursor to opposite end of selection Set Mark In at the current cursor position Set Mark Out at the current cursor position Arm for recording Start stop recording Toggle loops playback Play or Stop the contents of the data window in default mode Play All Play Pause Switch play mode through Normal Plug In Chain Play as Sample and Play as Cutlist playback modes Stop playback Seek cursor on playback Preview cut skip selection on playback with pre roll Play to cursor with pre roll Scrub playback Toggle playback scrolling on and off Toggle smooth playback scrolling on and off Generate MIDI timecode Trigger from MIDI timecode 354 APPENDIX A Keyboard Shortcut Backspace Sor Alt L Alt Shift L Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl Shift lt Number gt Ctrlt lt Number gt 0 9 keys not numeric keypad Up Arrow or mouse wheel up Down Arrow or mouse wheel down Shift Up Arrow Shift Down Arrow Ctrl Up Arrow Ctrl Down Arrow 1 numeric keyp
442. ndow For more information see Using the hardware meters on page 117 Undo Redo History window Alt 8 The Undo Redo History window allows you to see all of your edit operations From the View menu choose Undo Redo History to show or hide the Undo Redo History window For more information see Using the Undo Redo History window on page 85 30 CHAPTER 2 Spectrum Analysis window Alt 9 The Spectrum Analysis window allows you to examine the fundamental frequency and overtones present in a recording From the View menu choose Spectrum Analysis to show or hide the Spectrum Analysis window For more information see Using Spectrum Analysis on page 295 Plug In Chain window Ctrl Alt 0 The Plug In Chain window allows you to link up to 32 DirectX and VST plug ins into a single processing chain From the View menu choose Plug In Chain to show or hide the Plug In Chain window For more information see Using the Plug In Chain on page 209 Plug In Manager window Ctrl Alt 1 The Plug In Manager window displays your plug ins in a tree view like Windows Explorer From the View menu choose Plug In Manager to show or hide the Plug In Manager For more information see Using the Plug In Manager on page 206 Keyboard window Ctrl Alt 2 The Keyboard window allows you to control internal or external synthesizers and samplers from Sound Forge software From the View menu choose Keyboard to show or hide the Keyboard window For more information s
443. ndow and choose a command from the shortcut menu A check mark is displayed to indicate which meters are currently visible For more information about peak meters see Channel Meters on page 135 For more information about VU PPM meters see VU and Peak Program Meters on page 138 For more information about phase scopes see Phase Scope on page 139 For more information about mono compatibility meters see Mono Compatibility Meter on page 139 118 CHAPTER 7 Chapter 8 Using markers regions and commands Markers and regions serve as reference points along the timeline You can use markers for annotations to insert metadata commands or for MIDI triggers Using markers From the Insert menu choose Marker to add a marker at the current cursor position Markers are reference points you can place throughout a file You can use markers to identify positions for editing or to seek forward and back within a streaming media file Markers can be quickly selected from the list in the Go To dialog Also markers are displayed in the Regions List for quick playback Inserting a marker 1 Position the cursor where you want to add a marker 2 From the Insert menu choose Marker A marker F will be added at the cursor position 3 Ifyou want to name the marker right click the tag and choose Rename from the shortcut menu Type a name for the marker in the edit box and press Enter Tip You can also insert markers during playback by pressing
444. ne help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Delay Echo From the Effects menu choose Delay Echo and then choose a command from the submenu to apply an echo effect to a selection For information about using the Multi Tap Delay and Simple Delay effects click the Help button E in the plug in dialogs or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Distortion From the Effects menu choose Distortion to tailor the gain at all input levels of a signal You can create effects ranging from dramatic to subtle distortion simple compression expansion and noise gates For information about using the Distortion effect click the Help button E in the Sony Distortion dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Dynamics From the Effects menu choose Dynamics and then choose a command from the submenu to modify the dynamic range of a selection For more information about using the Graphic Dynamics and Multi Band Dynamics effects click the Help button E in the plug in dialogs or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index Envelope From the Effects menu choose Envelope to apply an envelope to vary the amplitude of a waveform over time Unlike the Graphic Fade command which simply fades a waveform by a specific amount over time the gain at each point is dynamically calculated to achieve the exact
445. ner 00 00 02 325 i 00 00 01 723 i l 00 00 02 285 00 00 01 513 a a Ore 51 377 3 37 882 e 737 14 338 i re em w A Ox 50 495 33 274 e 6 673 4 236 Non matching slope Matching slope Match endpoint sound levels The overall amplitude or loudness approaching the loop s endpoints should be as similar as possible to prevent distracting glitches Unfortunately it is frequently difficult to avoid this problem particularly with rapidly decaying source material Avoid very short loops If the loop is shorter than 50 ms 1 20 Hz the pitch of the loop may not equal the sample pitch Pitch tuning a loop is accomplished by creating short loops with a length equal to 1 frequency For example a sample of pitch 440 Hz corresponds to A5 on the keyboard meaning the loop can be pitch tuned 2 27 ms However pitched loops do not sound like the original sample Editing loops The loop you initially create in any situation is rarely perfect Frequently loops require some degree of editing before they are usable Once you create a loop you can quickly edit its beginning and end and subsequently its length by dragging the markers to a new location Editing a loop without the Loop Tuner After you create a loop you can quickly edit its beginning and end and subsequently its length by dragging the markers to a new location However this method frequently does not provide the control required to create seamless loops I
446. next packet of data until the destination requests it This makes closed loop transfers more reliable than open loop transfers In addition to being less reliable open loop transfers are slower than closed loop transfers especially when sending samples using the Sampler Tool This is due to intentional delays placed between data packets to compensate for varying sampler speeds Closed loop transfers typically guarantee the most efficient timing between packets If possible avoid using an open loop to receive samples from a sampler The Sampler Tool cannot control the flow of data packets and there is a high probability that data will be missed Tip Open loop transfers can be useful when you do not have enough cables to connect both the MIDI input and MIDI output ports SAMPLING 261 Saving sampler configurations Once you complete a sampler configuration you can save it as a preset and quickly access it in the future 1 From the Sampler Configuration dialog click Save As The Save Preset dialog appears Save Preset OK New preset name Cancel 2 Enter a descriptive name in the New preset name box and click OK The new configuration is saved and can now be chosen from the Configuration drop down list in the Sampler dialog Note To delete a preset choose it from the Preset drop down list and click Delete Sending and receiving samples Once you have accurately configured the sampler setup you can send and receive
447. nformation see Editing file properties on page 105 3 Click OK A new data window with the specified attributes appears Tip New windows are automatically named for you You can customize this automatic naming feature to suit your needs For more information see Editing default data window names on page 336 Active data windows vs inactive data windows When multiple data windows are displayed on the workspace only the window currently being edited is active and all operations affect this window exclusively Activating a window To activate a data window click anywhere within it The title bar changes to the color defined as the active window color and the previously active window is deactivated Note Choosing Focus to Data Window from the View menu also results in the focus being returned to the current data window Copying data to a new file You can create new audio files by copying data to a new data window 1 Open an audio file and create a selection 2 From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button The selection is copied to the clipboard 3 Create a new data window For more information see Creating data windows on page 71 4 From the Edit menu choose Paste or click the Paste button The selected data is pasted in the new data window GETTING STARTED 71 Working with files You can save a file in a variety of formats including popular audio formats such as WAV and AIFF and streaming me
448. ng audio 1 Verify that the file created in the previous procedure is the active data window 2 From the Process menu choose Resample and then choose Resample from the submenu The Resample dialog is displayed 3 From the Preset drop down list choose Resample to 48 000 Hz with anti alias filter and click OK The audio is resampled at 48 000 Hz 4 From the File menu choose Save As Save the resampled file with a new name and close it 5 Open the new file and view its File Properties window Notice that the sample rate is higher 48 000 Hz and the file size is larger 6 Play the file Notice that resampling to a higher sample rate produces an audio quality at 48 000 Hz that is indistinguishable from the quality at 8 000 Hz 200 CHAPTER 13 Resample controls The following controls are located in the Resample dialog Control Description New sample rate Determines the sample rate in Hz at which the file is resampled Tip Processing is quicker when downsampling by an even multiple such as when going from 44 kHz to 22 kHz Interpolation accuracy The Interpolation accuracy value determines the complexity of the interpolation method used during resampling Interpolation accuracy is most apparent in high frequencies but the audible difference between the values is subtle and often undetectable without the use of test tones A value of 1 is suitable for general purpose audio A value of 2 or 3 is good for high end audio ap
449. ng spaces for foley effects and dialog replacement 0 cece cence eee ee eens 242 Panning with head related transfer functions cece cece cee nett eee eeeeennees 242 Troubleshooting the Acoustic Mirror effect 0 ccc ccc ccc eect eee eee ee eeens 242 Stuttering during real time previewing cece ccc ccc cece eee eee eeeeeeeees 242 Impulses do not recover properly cece ccc cece eee eee eee eens eee ee eeeennaes 243 Recovered impulse iS toO NOISY cece ccc cee eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeees 243 Error message explanations cece ccc ccc cece eee EEEE 243 What is the Wave Hammer plug in cece cece e cece eee e eee e ee eeeeee 245 Displaying the Wave Hammer plug in cece eee eee eee eee eee e eee eeeenes 245 The Wave Hammer dialog 0 cece cece cece eee e eee o EE SEINE IRORA 245 COMIDIG S500 1a ac c40ckschovesivcewss EEEE TA E EREET EEEE nie seuataeed en eueen een 245 Volume Maximizer tab 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee e eee e eee e eens sees eee eeeeeeeeeeaeees 247 SIG SCHIDUING 42 taae a pe aadee wens Olwaen nae cern twar eva E 249 Scripting ETCTCINCCS sidan earn ineeiieo 249 SAMPIC SCHD s a EEE EEE EEE E EE E TAAA E EEE E AN 249 Additional scripting information ccc cece cece eee eee eee eeeeneeeeeennees 249 Using the Script Editor WINGOW ccc ccc ccc ccc cece cece eee eee eee eteeenes 249 18 TABLE OF CONTENTS Opening and runnin
450. ng will be applied to the entire file Note When you re working with multichannel files only the selected region in the selected channel is processed Most functions can be applied to individual or all channels However since all channels in a multichannel file must be equal in length functions that affect the length of the data cannot be performed on individual channels These functions include Insert Silence Resample Time Stretch Gapper Snipper Pitch Bend and Pitch Shift without preserving duration If you want to apply one of these processes in a single channel convert the file into separate mono files you can select a channel and drag it to the Sound Forge workspace to create a new file quickly apply the process and merge the files into anew multichannel file Select the desired plug ins Note Effects chains including packages created in Vegas or ACID appear in the DirectX Chains folder in the Plug In Manager Drag the plug ins from the Plug In Manager window to the Plug In Chain window The selected plug ins are added to the chain Tip You can also drag plug ins ora plug in chain from the Plug In Manager window to a data window The Plug In Chain window is opened with the selected effects in a new chain Use the Plug In Chain to preview your effects and adjust settings as needed You can select the Bypass button fs to hear the Original unprocessed audio When you are satisfied with the chain click the Process Sele
451. ngth 0 001 to 2 seconds 0 100 Pause length 0 001 to 5 seconds 0 200 W Fade the edges of each tome Pause character Amplitude _ ___ feng D dB Insert new tone sequence at End of file 2 Enter the phone number to be generated in the Dial string edit box including pause characters Note Unknown characters are ignored 3 Use the Amplitude fader to set the peak level of the waveform 4 Select the Tone style to generate radio button corresponding to the tone to be generated e DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency signals are used by standard push button telephones and are generated using combinations of 679 770 852 941 1209 1336 1477 and 1633 Hz sine waves e MF signals are used internally by the telephone networks and are generated with a combination of 700 900 1100 1300 1500 and 1700 Hz sine waves Specify the output length in seconds of each tone in the Single tone length box Specify the length in seconds of silence between tones in the Break length box Select the Fade the edges of each tone check box to help prevent glitching 5 6 7 Specify the pause length in seconds to be inserted for a pause character in the Pause length box 8 9 Specify the pause character in the Pause character box 1 O Use the Insert new tone sequence at drop down list to specify where the generated tone is placed in the audio file 166 CHAPTER 11 11 Click OK Generating audio with frequency modulation
452. ning Overwrite CD Text autodetection results Include Wide SCSI devices when searching for drives Skip drive database autodetect drive capabilities on startup Automatically detect CD length Default time between CD tracks seconds Default CD length minutes Description Select this check box if you want to be notified prior to burning a disc at once CD if anything about your CD project is against strict Red Book standards These warnings are not critical and in most cases you will not write an unreadable disc if you proceed Clearing this check box will not suppress critical warnings that will result in an unreadable disc Select this check box if you want to use SPTI SCSI Pass Through Interface to communicate with your CD burning drive If the software incorrectly detects that your CD recorder is not able to write CD Text select this check box to turn on CD Text writing for your drive Note Check the documentation provided with your CD recorder to determine whether the drive is able to write CD Text Select this check box if you want to scan for wide SCSI CD drives when you attempt to extract data from or burn CDs When the check box is cleared the application will not scan for wide SCSI devices which can increase compatibility with some USB device drivers that incorrectly identify themselves as wide SCSI When the check box is cleared an internal configuration file is used to determine your drive s capabil
453. nization input including SMPTE MTC MIDI triggers and Regions Playlist triggers When this check box is selected Sound Forge software will not allow recording beyond the specified end time This ensures that your record length is exact regardless of any inaccurate timecode Select this check box if you want to use the internal timer for SMPTE generation rather than position values reported by the sound card driver Since many sound cards do not report their position accurately it is usually better to use the internal timer for SMPTE generation Choose a value from the Internal timer resolution drop down list to specify the internal timer accuracy used for generating SMPTE Low values produce more accurate SMPTE generation but may also decrease system performance Select this check box to stop playback if the incoming MIDI timecode signal stops When this check box is not selected Sound Forge playback will continue until the user stops playback manually In the Free wheel time box specify the amount of time that Sound Forge playback will continue after the incoming MIDI timecode signal stops If timecode starts again during this time playback will continue In the Free wheel slack box specify how fast the software should expect timecode updates before going into Free wheel mode If you have a fast computer this value can be set to a lower value if you want to stop playback immediately when timecode is interrupted Select this check
454. nnels in stereo files Dry Out Wet Out The default value is 0 and indicates a typical center position The Dry Out fader controls the amount of unprocessed signal mixed into the output The Wet Out fader controls the amount of processed signal mixed into the output Apply envelope and limit decay to seconds Low shelf start frequency When you select this check box the length of the impulse is limited to the time specified in the adjacent box Limiting the length of an impulse file shortens the decay of the reverberation and decreases the amount of processing required In addition selecting this check box results in the impulse fading according to the Envelope Graph configured on the dialog s Envelope tab For more information see Envelope Graph on page 235 Acoustic Mirror high and low shelving filters to allow you to tailor the frequency High shelf start frequency Convert mono to stereo Quality speed 234 CHAPTER 15 response of the impulse Notice that you can adjust the cutoff frequency and boost attenuation of each filter independently Selecting the Convert mono to stereo check box converts a mono signal to stereo output If the impulse file is in stereo selecting this check box imparts a pseudo stereo effect on the mono input The Quality speed slider allows you to strike a balance between the quality and speed of the audio processing Lowering this value immediately affects the frequency response of
455. ns a selection that is longer than the timer duration recording will stop at the end of the timer duration Note During recording playback commands the Preferences dialog and commands that affect the recording data window are unavailable Recording options From the View menu choose Record Options to open the Record Options window You can use this window to configure various options for recording in Sound Forge Pro Tip The top of the Record Options window displays the current record status attributes time recorded and time left on your hard drive You can also display the record status in the Time Display window by right clicking the Time Display window and choosing Record Status from the shortcut menu For more information see Customizing the Time Display window on page 329 Choosing a recording method Choose a setting from the Method drop down list to choose what happens when you start recording Manual Recording starts at the cursor position or selection Use this mode for general purpose recording punch in recording or voiceover work For more information see Creating a new recording on page 143 or Recording into an existing sound file on page 146 Automatic Threshold Recording starts when the audio reaches a specified level and stops when the audio falls below that level for a specified duration For more information see Recording audio over a set threshold on page 148 150 CHAPTER 10 e Automatic MIDI Timec
456. nsdnerna siden ARANA AAR A 192 aeee EE E E P EE E E E E E E N E E 194 Fades Fade OUR araar E E E A E E A E T 194 M a rA T T A T ES E E ET E A 194 WING 2 ven E dare EE EEEE EEE E E eee eae E EE E 195 NONNA se reres E E E E A vee A E E E E A ES 196 PE N a E E E E E A E E S T A A 198 EE E E E E AE ET E E E ee i E E ee 200 ZOtODPE OA BIOORG sorrir drita EAA A A E A A eed NAAA 202 KE E EEE A TE EE SEE EEE A E E E E E T es 203 PO CAUTO eea a E AEE 203 SIMO OU ENN AN Ce sss ant aae ten wsudd EEE EERTE AREER nied 203 Time TMS Mei Mecro on eta eae ene eau y exqremasaneyeawoeie eer reansa prea mers 203 Time lastique Timestretch ec ccc ccc tee e eee e eee e eee eee eens eeneeeees 203 VO occu ceudoes ca neny seas oe seu ede deter paaNaa R EA EA A EEA O AREAN 204 WOKING WIT EMOCI 005 0 spas uaa onsannss ovaudddscnawcayie td AEE EEG 205 Adama CNCCS veer eoaee sre eens dense eecaweretovesdoesenconss bene auwenseoerye ans 205 Applying an effect ccc ccc ccc cece een n ene e ene e eee e eee ee eee teeeeneneees 205 Saving effect settings as a CUSTOM preset ccc ccc cee eee e eee e eee ee etnies 206 Using the Plug In Manager ccc ccc ccc ee eee eee ence eee e ence eee eeeees 206 Applying a plug in or chain to a media file cc ccc ccc cee ence ee eee eee eeeeeaeees 207 eMart a PUO ereraa arera N aes eae ek poner dhe aa enedawwes 207 PATO ON Ws tore orn gettw ane gaia E oe ae BS we ae se a eee 208 Organizing effects in the FX Fa
457. nts on page 173 1 oe E i From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed From the Method drop down list choose Manual Click the Settings button in the Record Options window Select the Prerecord buffer check box and type a value in the edit box to set the duration of the buffer Click the OK button Reviewing recorded takes Click the Play button to review your recording Click the Stop button M to end playback RECORDING 145 Recording into an existing sound file After you ve connected an audio source and verified your recording setup you re ready to start recording audio Click the Record button or choose Transport gt Record to record into an existing sound file also called punch in recording If you want to record to a new file see Creating a new recording on page 143 Tip You can use the Stereo Recording window layout to optimize the Sound Forge Pro interface for recording For more information see Loading default window layouts on page 327 Note The maximum number of channels recorded depends on the data window where you re recording For example if you enabled six inputs on the Record tab in Audio Preferences you need to record into a six channel data window to record all six inputs Ifyou record to a stereo data window only two inputs will be recorded To choose your recording input use the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or click a channel number in the
458. nu The selection is overwritten with the clipboard contents B Wow sound editing o SOM X Silence Wow Sound editing j easier l a Eglo casio 00 00 02 i 8 00 00 00 4 IW P pl mll GOON Be 00 00 03 640 00 00 04 373 00 00 00 734 1 512 Note f any of the selection data remains it is because the length of the clipboard contents was less than the length of the selection Replicating Replicating allows you to overwrite your current data window selection with several copies of the clipboard contents When replicating you must specify whether you want to use partial copies of the clipboard contents or only complete copies e Using partial copies of the clipboard content completely overwrites the selected data window area Using complete copies of the clipboard content prevents a portion of the data window selection from being overwritten unless the selection length is an exact multiple of the length of the clipboard contents Note The Replicate command will paste as many copies of the clipboard as will fit in the current selection If no selection exists in the data window the command is not available Replicating a selection 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing Wow BB Wow sound editing o 2 a Sience EEA wow Ei sound edri just gets easier EGA And case E a 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 4 0 Inf 4 4 0 4
459. nvert to New from the shortcut menu Note f the original file has both audio and video components such as an AVI file the new file created from the Playlist contains the audio portion only Configuring the Playlist as a Cutlist When trimming lengthy recordings configuring the Playlist as a Cutlist can sometimes decrease editing time In Play as Cutlist mode the original file is played but all regions placed on the Cutlist are ignored Click the Play as Cutlist button p on the playbar to enter Play as Cutlist mode Treating the Playlist as a Cutlist 1 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Playlist from the submenu The Playlist window is displayed 2 Right click the Playlist and choose Treat as Cutlist from the shortcut menu A check mark appears adjacent to the command in the shortcut menu and the Cutlist appears The Play as Cutlist button p appears in the playbar Adding regions to the Cutlist 1 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 Open the Cutlist 3 Select the Silence region and drag it to the Cutlist or press Delete The region is added to the Cutlist and the selection area in the waveform display is shaded a Wow sound editing Eliene Eww paced editing just gets easier Ei easier inl amp AE 00 00 00 000 00 00 01 000 j00 00 02 000 00 00 03 000 00 00 04 000 Cutlist x Name Start End Length i NCH 00
460. o copy save and print the contents of the Track List window if you need to provide a track list to a CD duplicator Reordering tracks 1 Click in the numbered column to select a row 2 Drag the row to a new position Track List 0 000 00 03 30 933 00 03 30 933 Shine The Dorothy Herald 00 00 00 000 fw 1 00 03 32 933 00 07 01 360 00 03 28 426 Play The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 00 11 46 226 00 04 42 866 One of These Days The Dorothy Heralds 00 00 02 000 mm The track is moved to the position where you drop it and the timeline is updated Editing track position and length Double click the Start End and Length boxes and type a new value in the box to edit a CD track s starting or ending point or length Typing a new value in the boxes has the same effect as moving or resizing the CD track on the CD layout bar e Editing the Start or End value moves the track forward or backward in time while preserving its length e Editing only the Length value changes the track s ending time while preserving its start time Editing track title and artist information Double click the Title CD Text and Artist CD Text boxes to edit their contents Notes In order to burn valid CD Text you must specify a title for the disc and for each track on the disc artist information is optional If the Title box in the CD Information window or Track List window is left blank a warning will be displayed before burning so
461. o determine if you created a selection examine the status boxes in the bottom right corner of the data window Wow sound editing c a EJ Sound editing just gets easier EEJ And easier amp At j90 00 02 000 F 00 00 03 000 3 j00 00 04 000 4 0 Inf 6 0 dilla a m Pip 4 OOK HHA Ee YY 00 00 02 479 00 00 05 000 1 256 Selection status bar e If only the first box contains a value there is no selection e Ifall three boxes contain values a selection has been created Clear the selection by clicking anywhere in the data window For more information see Viewing selection status on page 68 Tip When Options gt Seek Cursor on Playback is selected playback will restart when you position the cursor Ifyou do not want to interrupt playback when positioning the cursor clear this command Playing in Loop Playback mode You can play an entire file or a selection in Loop Playback mode In Loop Playback mode the audio is played in a continuous loop Click the Loop Playback button on the transport bar or press Q to turn Loop Playback mode on and off Tip When Options gt Seek Cursor on Playback is selected playback will restart when you position the cursor Ifyou do not want to interrupt playback when positioning the cursor clear this command GETTING STARTED 67 Playing a selection You can play specific portions of audio data by creating selections in the waveform display 1 Dra
462. o events on the same channel Crossfading fades out one event s volume while another event s volume fades in Fade in volume line Fade out volume line Note You can show or hide the crossfade length ToolTip by selecting Event and then Show Crossfade Lengths from the Options menu or pressing Ctrl Shift T Using automatic crossfades The automatic crossfades features turns the overlapping portions of two events into a crossfade From the Options menu choose Event and then choose Automatic Crossfades or press Ctrl Shift X to turn automatic crossfades on and off Events before crossfade Events after crossfade AF i a vu i Drag one event to overlap the other aa When Automatic Crossfades is turned off overlapping events punch in and out with no fades Manually setting a crossfade An automatic crossfade is not inserted if a shorter event is placed within the same time frame of a longer event In this case the longer event begins playing then the shorter event plays punch in and then the longer event resumes playing You can manually create a crossfade to fade in or out of the shorter event This is a fast and effective method of inserting a voiceover on top of background music although the music fades out completely or to replace a bad section of audio 1 Place the mouse pointer on one of the shorter event s handles The fade
463. o files You may never play Carnegie Hall but that does not mean that your recordings can t sound like it Taking this concept even further this effect allows you to simulate the signal response of vintage musical equipment Imagine the money you ll save not having to buy those paired U 47s The acoustic signature Acoustic Mirror effects use the environments acoustic signature or impulse response These acoustic signatures are saved as impulse files and given the extension wav or sfi An extensive library of high quality impulse files are included In addition you can collect your own acoustic signatures and create custom impulse files Adding an acoustic signature to an audio file 1 Open and play the Saxriff pca file Note This file is located in the same folder as the application 2 From the Effects menu choose Acoustic Mirror The Acoustic Mirror dialog is displayed Note You must have an active file in the Sound Forge workspace to start the Acoustic Mirror tool 3 Click the Browse button located next to the Impulse field and locate the Acoustic Mirror Impulse Files folder on the Sound Forge application disc 4 Double click the folder Several impulse subfolders display 5 Double click the Large venues folder Several impulse files display 6 Double click Stadium Camp Randall 50 yrd line sfi This impulse file s acoustic signature is added to the Saxriff pca file and you are returned to the Acoustic Mirror dialog 7 C
464. o the Mix operation The audio file plays with the mixed drum track Select the Mix operation again and choose Redo from the Edit menu The drum track is remixed into the Voiceover pca waveform and the Mix operation is returned to the Undo pane Select the Trim Crop operation in the Undo pane and click the Undo button 4 Only the Mix operation is undone and moved to the Redo pane This is due to the fact that operations can only be undone or redone in the order originally performed 86 CHAPTER 4 6 Double click the Cut operation in the Undo pane The Cut and Trim Crop operations are both undone in the waveform and moved to the Redo pane Undo Redo History Undo Redo History Undo Undo H Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 a Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Redo H Redo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 Redo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 H Redo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Redo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 Tip To quickly undo and redo operations in the Undo Redo History window double click the operation Clearing the Undo Redo History for the current file Clearing the current file s Undo Redo History frees up disk space by deleting the file s temporary undo redo files However deleting these temporary files prevents you from undoing changes made to the file since it was last saved or b
465. o the start or end of an event 160 CHAPTER 11 Pasting mixing and creating CD tracks with drag and drop You can drag an audio selection and paste mix or create a CD track in another data window Pasting 1 Open the Voiceover pca and Drumhit pca files 2 Select all audio data in Drumhit pca B Drum Hit oaea Create a selection in the source window BB Wow sound editing x Silence ERB wow REM Sound editing just gets easier EIEI And easier a AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 fi Das E O NKE voe 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 997 00 00 02 997 1 256 Drag the selection into the destination window and USEE SEE La then press and hold Ctrl K bi m gt e 40 gt 00 00 00 301 1 512 3 Hold the Ctrl key and drag the selection to the Voiceover data window e A vertical line representing the leading edge of the source selection appears in the destination window e The letter P appears in the box adjacent to the pointer 4 Use the mouse to position the line in the destination window where the source data will be pasted a Wow sound editing fon Ex Silence EB wow ERB Sound editing just gets easier EEJ And easier ad amp AE 00 00 00 l 00 00 02 l 00 00 04 Drag the selection to the destination window B Wow sound editing o E EAS ERA EMEA Sound editing g ERE And E 8 AE 00 00 00 3 j00 00 02 00 00 04
466. ode Recording starts when the specified timecode is received from the MIDI input device and ends at the specified timecode For more information see Recording using MIDI timecode on page 149 e Automatic Time Recording starts at the date and time you specify and stops after the specified duration For more information see Recording using a timer on page 150 Choosing a recording mode Choose a setting from the Mode drop down list to choose what happens after you stop or pause and restart recording e Normal Click the Record or Stop button E to end recording or click the Pause button Il to suspend recording and leave the recording device armed Create regions A new region is created each time you restart or resume recording If you re recording into a time selection with Loop Playback enabled Sound Forge Pro does not create a new region for each loop e Create new windows A new window is created each time you restart or resume recording Notes e When Create new windows is selected the Arm and Record buttons on the main toolbar are enabled even when no data windows are open When Normal or Create regions is selected the Arm and Record buttons are not available until you create a data window or open a file e When Create new windows is selected punch in recording is not available For more information see Recording into an existing sound file on page 146 Setting up input monitoring
467. of countless audio professionals and s Gofware ine OORV are it just keeps getting better You ll find that the new features in this version will help simplify your life by consolidating common tasks and allowing you to customize the software to suit your needs Information pane What s new in version 11 yrs ss 4 48 Improved selection dragging you no longer need to drag up before dragging a selection Improved recording workflow Fade in and fade out curves now default to a linear curve in the Processing and Mix dialogs Added Remember last used Save As folder to the Genera tab in the Preferences dialog Improved support for metadata in Broadcast Wave Format files Added support for editing files in SpectraLayers Pro 2 0 Added plain text file option for saving and opening a file s regions list and playlist cutlist Improved Plug In Chain window now allows floating plug in windows You can now rearrange maximized data window tabs by dragging the tabs to a new location Added automatic resampling during playback for unsupported sample rates when you re using an ASIO audio device Added cnnnart far enliting swente at raninn haundaries The online help window has four tabs that you can use to find the information you need Tab Description Contents Provides a list of available help topics Click a closed book to open the pages and then click on a topic page 7 Index Provides a complete l
468. olTips The setting for each graph in a multichannel file is independent If you want to display the nearest musical note equivalent of the cursor position in a ToolTip right click the graph and choose Show Notes from the shortcut menu a 06 admetons 7 2 0 a 23 4 4 Use the cursor to display musical note equivalent 2 571 E8 72 91 119 45 dB at 86 Hz F3 Bin Right click the Spectrum Analysis window and choose Show Statistics from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the Statistics area at the bottom of the Spectrum Analysis window USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 297 Navigating a spectrum graph After a spectrum graph is displayed Grab Pan mode allows you to scroll vertically and horizontally To enable Grab Pan mode right click the Spectrum Analysis dialog and choose Grab Pan from the shortcut menu A check mark appears next to this option when Grab Pan mode is enabled The cursor appears as a hand f and you can drag horizontally or vertically to scroll through the graph When you are zoomed into a selection of the spectrum graph you can drag the horizontal and vertical sliders to scroll through the graph The thumbnail image in the lower left corner of the Spectrum Analysis window will show you which part of the graph is being displayed To turn off Grab Pan mode choose Grab Pan from the shortcut menu again Changing the graph type Click the down arrow next to the Normal Disp
469. older that will be used for temporary files and recorded data Select this check box if you want the F12 and spacebar keyboard shortcuts to toggle between Play and Pause mode In this mode the cursor will maintain its position In some very fast computers automatic scrolling while selecting is too fast to use accurately When this option is turned on drag selecting will cause a slow scroll Tip Click the right mouse button while selecting to toggle slow scrolling When this check box is selected you can hold Ctrl while dragging the cursor to scrub in data windows 1 Hover over the cursor and press Ctrl The mouse pointer changes to a pan scrub icon when you click lr error KA 2 Drag left or right to scrub playback When this check box is selected you can hold Ctrl and drag in a data window to zoom to a selection Tip When the check box is selected you can still use Ctrl drag to paste a selection press and hold the Ctrl key after you start dragging the selection Description Option Prompt for marker and region When this check box is selected an edit box is displayed so you can name markers and names Warn when Paste or Mix regions as you place them Select this check box if you want to be warned before pasting or mixing data that has formats do not match Autoupdate BWF Origination different sample rates or bit depths Pasting or mixing data of different formats may produce unintended results
470. oll post roll or a prerecord buffer click the Settings button For more information about other recording modes and methods see Recording options on page 150 Create a data window for your recording a From the File menu choose New b Choose a sample rate from the Sample rate drop down list or type a custom value in the edit box c Choose a setting from the Bit depth drop down list to specify the number of bits that should be used to store each sample Choose a setting from the Channels drop down list to specify the number of channels that will be used in the window e Click OK A new untitled sound file is created Note The maximum number of channels recorded depends on the data window where you re recording For example if you enabled six inputs on the Record tab in Audio Preferences you need to record into a six channel data window to record all six inputs Ifyou record to a stereo data window only two inputs will be recorded To choose your recording input use the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog or click a channel number in the Record Options window and choose a new input port from the menu Record Options Record status Idle Record attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit 4 Channel Time recorded 00 00 00 Time left on drive Over 2 hours Method Manual Settings Mode Normal r DC Adjust Monitor off Calibrate M Play unselected channels when recording Monitor input through Plug In
471. om a volume of Inf to a volume of 0 dB The size of the selection determines the length of the fade 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Fade and choose In from the submenu The fade is applied and volume increases over the length of the entire file D Example music bed amp E OD OD Oe mW e eli ae 00 00 00 000 Fade Fade Out The Fade Out command is used to linearly fade a selection from a volume of 0 dB to a volume of Inf The size of the selection determines the length of the fade 1 Open the Musicbed pca file and select all audio data 2 From the Process menu choose Fade and choose Out from the submenu The fade is applied and the volume decreases over the length of the entire file r Example music bed amp E OD OD Oe moe ella a 00 00 00 000 Invert Flip The Invert Flip command inverts the audio selection at its baseline in effect reversing its polarity Inverting a file while creating no audible difference is occasionally useful for matching sample transitions when executing certain pastes mixes or loops 1 Create a selection in the data window 2 From the Process menu choose Invert Flip The selection is inverted 194 CHAPTER 13 Mute The Mute command forces the selection to a volume of Inf dB silence Muting an audio selection 1 Create a selection in the data window E Example music bed 2 ali fp Hee
472. on Playbar Scrub control Selection status boxes Tip You can quickly toggle the display of portions of a data window decorations by right clicking the Next Edit Tool button and choosing a command from the shortcut menu or choosing Options gt Data Window Status Time Ruler Time Zoom Overview Video Strip Level Ruler Level Zoom Scrollbar CD Tracks Data Window Only 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Set as Default Title bar Displays the sound file s title If no title is specified on the Summary Information window the file name will be displayed Double click to maximize and restore the window 32 CHAPTER 2 Overview bar Allows for quick navigation and playback of any part of the file Visible area and selection Full waveform atl ie Inf He i laial Well TmT 0 HKH dh H E j gt Rate 0 00 lt gt 00 00 21 734 00 00 30 557 00 00 08 824 1 2 048 e The full waveform is displayed in the overview bar e The unshaded portion of the waveform display represents the portion of the waveform shown in the data window You can drag this portion to navigate the waveform e The current selection is also represented in the overview bar e Click in the overview bar to move the cursor e Double click to center the cursor in the waveform display e Right click in the overview bar to toggle playback of the file from the cursor position in the data window e
473. on see Locking loop and region lengths on page 127 326 CHAPTER 24 Chapter 25 Customizing Sound Forge Pro Software You can customize Sound Forge Pro software to suit your project needs and working preferences Many of the settings depend on your equipment or studio setup Sound Forge Pro software can be set to work with the components that you use in your studio Saving and recalling window layouts A window layout stores the sizes and positions of all windows and floating docks in the Sound Forge Pro workspace You can store any number of window layouts on your computer and up to ten window layouts are available in the View menu and via keyboard shortcuts so you can quickly recall frequently used layouts For example you could have a layout dedicated to disc at once creation and another for ADR work Note Window layouts are saved in C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 You can transfer layouts between computers by copying the ForgeWindowLayout files The AppData folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel Loading default window layouts Sound Forge software comes with three built in window layouts a default layout a layout optimized for Red Book CD authoring work and a layout optimized for 5 1 video work To load these layouts choose Window Layouts from the View menu and then choo
474. on your computer If no audio files are open in the Sound Forge workspace a new data window will be created when you drop files on the Track List window 1 Close all open data windows 2 Inthe Windows Explorer or Explorer window select the files that you want to include in your CD You can hold Shift or Ctrl to select multiple files BURNING CDS 313 3 Drag the files to the Track List When you drop the files a track is created for each file and pause time is added before each track BB Sound 3 fs fos Ex Track 1 White 00 03 40 545 le jin lt i ya E gt t Rate 0 00 gt Cei 1 61 779 Pause time Tips e When you create tracks using media files that include title and artist metadata this information will be added to the Track List window as CD Text e You can use the Default time between CD tracks control on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog to adjust the default pause time Using the Track List window to create tracks The Track List window is essentially a text representation of the markers on the CD layout bar You can use the Track List window to view track and index markers edit track position and length edit track names adjust pause time toggle protection and emphasis flags and edit ISRC data For more information see Using the Track List window on page 318 Adding bonus tracks at the end of CDs You can hide a trac
475. onds provides stereo realism without adding a distracting amount of reverb Creating special effects Processing an audio file using a non impulse WAV file can produce any number of unexpected and interesting special effects To demonstrate this concept create several short less than 12 seconds audio files using the FM Synthesis tool and save them as individual WAV files Now choose any of these files from the Impulse drop down list and preview the results We have included several short files on the Sound Forge application disc to allow you to experiment with this technique After some experimentation you should begin to notice a few general rules regarding this use of the tool e Impulse files that cover the entire frequency spectrum prevent the output from sounding too filtered e Using a frequency sweep as an impulse creates a frequency dependent delay effect e Panning within the impulse causes the stereo image of the output to flutter between channels e Using staccato sounds such as drum hits creates a variety of echo effects USING ACOUSTIC MIRROR AND WAVE HAMMER 241 Recreating spaces for foley effects and dialog replacement Frequently dialogue recorded in the field is rendered unusable by ambient noise If you are shooting in the field and realize that overdubbing will be necessary you should create an impulse in each filming location This allows you to overdub dialog during post production that is indistinguishable f
476. one field and uses the remaining field to interpolate the deleted lines This produces sharper images than Blend Fields but can introduce jagged motion or stair stepping artifacts Select this check box if you want to interpolate video frames when you render to a frame rate that is greater than the source file s frame rate Item Description External monitor device Choose a device from the drop down list to configure an IEEE 1394 device for use with an external monitor Sound Forge will send your video output to this device when you click the External Monitor button amp l in the Video Preview window More information on this device are displayed in the Details pane You can make additional preview playback adjustments near the bottom of the Video tab once you ve selected an external monitor device e If necessary you can adjust the video to display properly on your external monitor Choose the desired format from the drop down list e If audio and video do not play back in synchronization drag the Sync offset slider to specify a frame offset to restore synchronization Details Displays information about the device selected in the External monitor drop down list If project format is invalid for If your source media does not conform to DV standards choose a setting from the DV output conform to the drop down list The video is adjusted to display properly on your external monitor following Sync offset frames If your audio is
477. onfigure the compressor to automatically increase the release time for sustained notes and decrease the release time for sharp transients Setting this value higher increases the internal variability of the specified Release value Generally louder overall audio levels can be achieved with lower Release values However low Release values can also lead to an increase in pumping artifacts Configuring a Smart Release value increases the release time during sustained sounds thereby preventing release changes from occurring too rapidly The Scan mode radio buttons allow you to specify whether Peak or RMS mode is used to determine the loudness of an audio file which in turn determines the amount of compression that is applied When compressing in Peak mode the compressor applies compression where it detects audio signal peaks that surpass the threshold However when compressing using RMS mode the compressor processes the audio using the detected average RMS value of the entire file The Root Mean Square RMS of audio is a measure of its intensity over a period of time Therefore the RMS level of audio corresponds to the loudness perceived by a listener when measured over small intervals of time As a result rapid transient peaks may not be processed when compressing in RMS mode When you select the Auto gain compensate check box the compressor output is boosted by a constant amount derived from the Threshold and Ratio settings This
478. oop or marker boundary if regions loops or markers exist in the file Go to beginning of file Ctrl Left Arrow Go to the previous region loop or marker boundary if regions loops or markers exist in the file file Move one sample right left Ctrl Alt Right Arrow Left Arrow Show the Go To dialog Ctrl G Go to the first sample visible in the waveform display or beginning of selection Home Go to the first sample in the data window Ctrl Home Go to the last sample visible in the waveform display or end of selection End Go to the last sample in the data window Ctrl End Move 10 of the current view prior to the cursor position Page Up Move 100 of the current view prior to the cursor position Ctrl Page Up Move 10 of the current view past the cursor position Page Down Move 100 of the current view past the cursor position Ctrlt Page Down Center the cursor in the waveform display or Go to the next sample numeric keypad Move 10 samples past the current cursor Ctrltnumeric keypad Go to the previous sample numeric keypad Move 10 samples prior to the current cursor Ctrlt numeric keypad 352 APPENDIX A Data selection shortcuts Command Show the Set Selection dialog Select from the cursor to the next previous screen pixel or Select next previous event when the Event tool f is selected Select from the cursor to the next previous sample Select from the cursor to the next previous video frame av
479. op down list Specifying the audio destination The Destination radio buttons in the Mono To Stereo dialog allow you to specify where the mono audio data is placed in a stereo file The following table describes the available data destinations Destination Description Left Channel The mono data is placed in the left channel The right channel is set to silence Right Channel The mono data is placed in the right channel The left channel is set to silence Both Channels The mono data is copied into both channels Converting from stereo to mono 1 2 3 Open the Saxriff pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application Right click the Channels status box indicating Stereo and choose Mono from the shortcut menu The Stereo To Mono dialog appears Stereo To Mono Funky sax saa Left Channel n Cancel Right Channel Mix Channels Select the Mix Channels radio button and click OK The left and right channels combine into a mono channel For more information see Specifying the audio source on page 112 CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 111 Specifying the audio source The Source radio buttons in the Stereo To Mono dialog allow you to specify what stereo data is used to create the mono file The following table describes the available data sources Source Description Left Channel Mono data is taken only from the left channel of the stereo file Right Channel Mono data is taken only from
480. op of the Loop Start or Loop End display Click the arrow spinners to Drag the ruler to move move by one sample by large amounts 80 896 59 648 00 00 02 705 00 00 03 668 00 00 00 963 00 00 00706 000706 0077 1 mr LHI a LOOPING 281 Locking loop length The Lock Loop Length button allows you to freely move the start and end points of a loop without altering its length When the button is selected any editing that moves a loop point affects both loop points thereby keeping the loop length constant Clicking the Lock Loop Length button a second time turns this feature off and allows loop points to be edited independently with no regard for the loop s original length Tip The Lock Loop Length button has the same function as the Lock Loop Region Length command on the Options menu Crossfading loops You can use the Crossfade Loop tool to loop audio from difficult source material It allows you to crossfade the end of a loop with the beginning of the loop in order to create a smoother more natural sounding transition In addition you can configure the Crossfade Loop tool to crossfade the beginning of the audio loop with the beginning of the post loop audio on the loop s final pass This smooths the occasionally awkward transition from looped to non looped audio Tip Use the Loop Tuner before applying the Crossfade Loop command to match the loop ends as well as possible Using the Crossfade Loop tool 1 Ope
481. ope points Tip Click within a different data window if you want to paste envelope points across data windows 6 From the Edit menu choose Paste Copying an envelope to another data window 1 Select the Envelope tool Click within a data window to select it 3 From the Edit menu choose Select All 4 From the Edit menu choose Copy 5 Click within a data window to select it Tip You can paste envelope points to a different envelope type by selecting the envelope where you want to paste 6 Click Go to Start H4 if you want the envelope to appear exactly as it was in the original data window or click to position the cursor where you want the envelope to start 7 From the Edit menu choose Paste Using the Preset Manager After you have created custom presets for effects or effect chains you can use the Sound Forge Preset Manager to back up transfer or delete custom presets from any of the effects processes tools and plug ins installed in the software The Preset Manager also functions as a standalone application meaning that you can use the Preset Manager outside of Sound Forge software to manage ACID and Vegas presets as well Note f you purchased the boxed version of Sound Forge Pro software the Preset Manager is included on the Sound Forge Pro application disc If you purchased the downloadable version you can get the Preset Manager on our Web site at http www sonycreativesoftware com download utiliti
482. option prevents a loss in overall level when compressing audio Tip When using the Auto gain compensate option the Output gain fader should be used to fine tune the signal output level When you select the Use longer look ahead check box the compressor scans farther ahead in the incoming audio to determine how much compression is needed This results in compression being applied before the threshold surpassing audio actually occurs thereby allowing for a slower Attack time value However the pre compression effect fades that occur prior to attacks of this option may be distracting Selecting the Smooth saturation check box lowers the amount of distortion caused when applying heavy compression When this option is turned on the compressed audio sounds warmer and not overly bright This meter allows you to monitor the level of the incoming and outgoing signals When the Input button is displayed the meters display the incoming signal level Clicking Input toggles the button to an Output button and displays the outgoing signal level Clicking Output returns you to the incoming signal display This meter allows you to monitor the audio signal attenuation derived from the current settings Volume Maximizer tab The controls on the Volume Maximizer tab are used to limit the peak amplitude of an audio file or to boost the overall level without clipping the waveform and distorting the audio These controls are explained below Sony Wave Ham
483. or if specified by your hardware manual Lower field first For DV output To change the video s pixel aspect ratio choose an option from the Video pixel aspect ratio drop down list The pixel aspect ratio should be based on the destination and use of the final media file Note The file must be saved in a video file format to permanently attach the video For more information see Saving a video file on page 294 Detaching video from an audio file You can detach the video stream from a media file 1 2 Open the media file you want to use For more information see Getting media files on page 61 From the File menu choose Detach Video The video stream is removed and the video strip is hidden 292 CHAPTER 20 Setting video options Video file properties The video properties for a file affect how video is displayed and rendered when you save the file In most situations you can leave these settings at their default values However you can adjust the video properties of a file as needed 1 2 From the View menu choose File Properties The File Properties window appears Choose a setting from the Video field order drop down list This setting affects how the video is displayed and rendered when you save the file None progressive scan Treats video as non interlaced e Upper field first Treats video as interlaced and reads the interlaced video as upper field first e Lower field first Treats video as interlaced a
484. or more information see Data selection shortcuts on page 353 Restoring a selection If you lose a selection while editing you can step backward through the previous five time selections From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Cycle from the submenu or press Backspace From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Toggle from the submenu or press S or to switch between the last selection and the last cursor position NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 99 Using selection grid lines From the Options menu choose Selection Grid Lines to display grid lines that divide the selection into four equal parts These lines make creating loops from existing material easier 6 0 To change the number of divisions that will be used choose Options gt Set Grid Divisions and then choose a setting from the submenu For example if you re trying to create a loop in 3 4 time changing the grid divisions to 3 allows you to divide a selection into three beats Enable Snapping From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Enable from the submenu to turn automatic snapping on or off in data windows Snapping helps you position the cursor make selections and align items along the grid when you paste mix trim or work with markers and regions As you drag items in a data window snap points are highlighted If you want to modify an existing selection you can use the commands on the Edit gt Selectio
485. oring temporary files and recorded audio or click the Browse button to specify a new folder Using temporary file space allows you to edit very large files and keeps Sound Forge from using large portions of RAM on your computer Your temporary directory must have enough space to accommodate the total size of all files you plan to edit along with space for any clipboard data and undo buffers If you change the temporary storage folder you will have to restart Sound Forge for the change to take effect The Display tab allows you to specify options for adjusting the appearance of the Sound Forge window Description Default sound file window Option Drag the slider to specify the default data window height for a sound file This height Default video strip height magnification level is used when you load a sound file or create a new window Drag the slider to specify the default height of the video strip when you open a video Peak ratio default for new file Choose a ratio from the drop down list to specify the zoom ratio above which the sound files Normal zoom ratio application will use a peak file instead of the original file to draw the waveform If you notice problems with waveform scrolling try decreasing this setting so it is less than your current zoom ratio To calculate the size of the resulting peak files divide the size of the file by the peak ratio For example a 100 MB sound file will need a 0 39 MB 10
486. orkspace n a Channel Meters docked Status bar Main window components The following table describes the major components of the main window Component Menu bar Description Displays the menu headings for the available functions Standard toolbar Provides quick access to some of the most common tasks in the application For more Transport bar information see Standard toolbar on page 40 Provides quick access to basic audio transport functions For more information see Status bar Workspace Transport toolbar on page 41 Help and processing information is displayed on the left side The boxes on the right side display the playback sample rate bit depth channel configuration length of the active data window CD time remaining and total free storage space Note The CD Time Remaining box is displayed only when CD tracks exist in the active data window With the exceptions of the CD Time Remaining and Free Storage boxes you can edit these boxes by double clicking or right clicking them When no data windows are open only the Free Storage box contains a value For more information see Editing file properties on page 105 This is the area located behind the data windows Audio selections dragged to the Channel Meters workspace automatically become new data windows Windows such as the Regions List and Playlist can be docked along the edges of the workspace or in floating window docks Disp
487. orms 50 flipping 225 moving multiple points 49 moving points 49 resetting 50 selecting all points 50 understanding 49 envelope points adding 50 225 changing fade curves 49 clearing all 50 deleting 50 deleting all 50 flipping 225 moving 49 moving multiple 49 resetting 50 selecting all 50 Envelope Tool button 40 envelopes adjusting 225 adjusting effect parameters 223 bypassing effect automation 224 copying to another data window 226 creating pan envelopes 198 cutting copying and pasting points 225 enabling effect automation 224 fade curves 225 showing hiding effect automation envelopes 224 volume or panning 223 EQ 192 error messages for Acoustic Mirror 243 estimating DC offset 191 Event tool 40 171 178 events applying envelopes 177 Auto Ripple 175 copying 173 creating 171 creating CD tracks from 311 crossfade types 176 crossfading 176 cutting 173 deleting 174 fade in volume 178 fade out volume 178 fade types 178 mixing 173 pasting 173 processing 178 selecting 179 setting volume 177 slipping 175 slip trimming 175 Snapping to 101 180 splitting 174 trimming 174 zooming 180 Explorer window editing CD information 64 extracting audio from CDs 65 Favorites folder 64 getting CD Text 65 obtaining CD information 64 opening files 64 overview 30 63 previewing files 63 views 65 exporting track lists as text files 320 external monitors for video previe
488. ort CD Text Engineer Type the name of the person who mixed or edited the project Copyright Type copyright information for the project 56 CHAPTER 3 Item Description Comments Type any comments you want to associate with the project Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Sampler Loops from the submenu to view or edit loops and sampler information saved in the active file Item Sample type Sustain start Sustain end Sustain length Sustain count Release start Release end Release length Release count Manufacturer Product Sample period Unity note Description Displays the type of sample loop you re creating Click the down arrow to choose a new setting None Removes the loop from the file e One shot Causes the sound file to play normally with no loops e Sustaining Causes the file to repeat the sustaining loop region the specified number of times e Sustaining with release Causes the sound file to play the sustaining loop region the number of times you specify play the region between the sustaining and release loops and then play the release loop region the number of times you specify Displays the beginning of the sustaining loop You can double click the value to edit it Displays the end of the sustaining loop You can double click the value to edit it Editing the end will automatically update the Sustain length va
489. ortcut D or Shift D Shift Right Arrow Shift Left Arrow Shift tHome Shift End Shift Ctrl Right Arrow Shift Ctrl Left Arrow Shift Ctrl Home Shift Ctrl End S Ctrl Alt T Ctrl Shift X Ctrl Shift T Ctrl Shift R Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl P Ctrl Shift P Ctrl B Ctrl Shift B Ctrl S Ctrl T Ctrl E Ctrl Delete Down Arrow Up Arrow Ctrl D Ctrl H Shift D Shift E Ctrl A Keyboard Shortcut Spacebar Enter Delete SHORTCUTS 355 Command Create region from the current selection Replicate selected region Update region to match selection Playlist Cutlist shortcuts Command Play or stop the active playlist entry Edit the active playlist entry Delete the active playlist entry Add one to the active playlist entry play count Subtract one from the active playlist entry play count Add or remove a stop point on the active playlist entry Toggle pre roll on and off for the playlist Add selected Regions List item to Playlist Replicate selected playlist region Script Editor shortcuts Command Create a new script Open a script Run script Compile script Save script Find next instance of last searched text Find previous instance of last searched text Find next instance of the selected text Find previous instance of the selected text 356 APPENDIX A Keyboard Shortcut R Ctrl I Ctrl D Ctrl U Keyboard Shortcut Spacebar Enter Delete plus sign not numeric keypad minus sign no
490. orward radio button displays the first slice of the selection in the foreground of the spectrum graph e Selecting the Backward radio button displays the last slice of the selection in the foreground of the spectrum graph 6 Click OK 7 Use the Slice slider to add or remove slice graphs in the Spectrum Analysis dialog Spectrum Analysis 2 048 Blackman Harris gt Gx B amp lel mM 123 4 46 amp Use the Slice slider ut to add or remove slice graphs Frequency Hz Decibels dB Bin Peak Creating and comparing snapshots of the Spectrum Analysis window You can store up to four snapshots to compare multiple spectrum graphs You can take snapshots from a single data window or from different data windows Note Snapshots are not available in sonogram display or when the Slices displayed setting in the Spectrum Settings dialog is greater than 1 Taking a snapshot 1 Navigate to the portion of the graph you want to capture 2 Click the Set Snapshot button and then click a snapshot button 1 in the Spectrum Analysis toolbar Available snapshots buttons are displayed in black and buttons that are in use are displayed in blue and underlined Showing and hiding snapshots 1 Select a numbered button in the Spectrum Analysis toolbar to display a stored snapshot All selected snapshots will be displayed in the Spectrum Analysis window at the same time 2 Clicka selec
491. ou can auto complete the Chan and Note values by pressing a key on your MIDI keyboard Triggers in the Regions List function differently from triggers specified in the MIDI Triggers dialog and the Playlist When using triggers in the Playlist Regions List or MIDI Triggers dialog be aware that they can interact to create unexpected results Sound Forge software first looks at the MIDI Triggers then the Regions List and then the Playlist when determining what to do whena MIDI command is detected If you only want to use the triggers in the Regions List turn off all the triggers in the MIDI Triggers dialog and the Playlist Converting markers to regions From the Edit menu choose Regions List and then choose Markers to Regions from the submenu All existing markers will be converted to regions using the data between each consecutive marker as the region boundary For example if your file contains three markers this command will create two regions the first region will span the area between the first and second markers and the second region will span the area between the second and third markers Tip Right click the Regions List and choose Markers to Regions from the shortcut menu Creating regions automatically The Auto Region dialog allows you to automatically create regions in a sound file for the Regions List and Playlist To display this dialog choose Auto Region from the Tools menu Regions can be detected according to fast sou
492. ou have critical material where nothing but the highest quality video rendering will do From the Template drop down list select a template for rendering and compressing the file You can click Custom to customize the settings in the Custom Settings dialog For help on the different settings click the Help button or press Shift F1 Click OK to close the Custom Settings dialog and return to the Save As dialog Tip You can save the custom settings to use again by entering a template name in the Template box and clicking the Save Template button Click Save 294 CHAPTER 20 Chapter 21 Using Spectrum Analysis This chapter introduces you to the concept of frequency and describes the Sound Forge Pro Spectrum Analysis Soectrum Analysis allows you to examine audio frequencies and overtones using either spectrum graphs or sonograms Working in the frequency domain Unlike the waveform display which represents audio in the time domain amplitude vs time Soectrum Analysis allows you to examine sound by representing the sound in the frequency domain amplitude vs frequency Consider the following graphic which depicts the same audio event as a waveform and as a spectrum graph BB Example music bed r Spectrum Analysis 2 048 Bladmanharis A B s o fel M QOM123 4 e a AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 lt IE p t o K gt Eee lt gt 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 1 512
493. ound editing Ruler Format Time Level Format Decibels dB bl Cursor position Time 00 00 00 742 Sample value at curso 30 309 Minimum sample position Time 00 00 01 045 Minimum sample value dB 7 890 Maximum sample position Time 00 00 01 044 Maximum sample value dB 4 675 RMS level dB 22 895 Average value dB Inf Zero crossings Hz 2 844 85 68 CHAPTER 4 Statistical Category Ruler Format Level Format Cursor position Sample value at cursor Maximum minimum sample position and sample value RMS level Average value Zero crossings Maximum true peak sample value and position Maximum filtered true peak sample value and position The following table describes all statistical categories displayed in the Statistics window Description Choose a setting from the drop down list to determine the format you would like to use for the Cursor position Minimum sample position and Maximum sample position categories For more information see Selecting status formats on page 87 Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify how the left and right channel levels at the cursor position will appear e Values Appears as an integer The range is from 8388608 to 8388607 in 24 bit audio 32768 to 32767 in 16 bit audio and 128 and 127 in 8 bit audio e Decibels Appears as decibels A value of 0 dB corresponds to maximum absolute amplitude and negative infinity Inf cor
494. out creating ACID loops see Creating loops for ACID software on page 283 Item Time signature ACID type 54 CHAPTER 3 Description Displays the number of beats in your clip and the note that receives one beat You can double click the value to edit it Displays the clip s ACID type Click the down arrow and choose a setting from the drop down list to change the clip type One Shot Loop ACID Beatmapped Choose One Shot if you want ACID to treat your file as a one shot One shots are RAM based audio clips that do not change tempo or pitch with an ACID project and are not designed to loop Sounds such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one shots Longer files can be treated as one shots if your computer has sufficient memory Choose Loop and specify a Number of beats and Root note for transposing if you want ACID to treat your file as a loop Loops are small audio clips that are designed to create a repeating beat or pattern Loops are usually one to four measures long and are stored completely in RAM for playback Loop files change tempo and can pitch shift with an ACID project e Root note for transposing Click the down arrow and choose a note from the drop down list to set the base note for tracks that you want to conform to the project key If you do not want a track transposed to the project key a track that contains a drum sample for example choose Don t transpose
495. oved when opening 24 fps progressive scan DV video files select the Allow pulldown removal when opening 24p DV check box on the Video tab of the Preferences dialog To open your 24p DV video files as 29 97 fps interlaced video 60i clear this check box GETTING STARTED 61 Using the Open dialog 1 From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears Tip You can also click the Open button on the Standard toolbar or press Ctrl O e Open Lookin Sound Forge Pro 11 0 X Name d Script Menu J Standard Layouts J Video Hardware Drivers B Drumhit pca ka Fill pca al Loop pca bal Musicbed pca Pa SAXRIFF pca H Voiceover pca Voiceover pca 2 gt fr Date modified 5 30 2013 8 11 AM 5 30 2013 8 11 AM 5 30 2013 8 11 AM 4 11 2013 1 54 PM 4 11 2013 1 54 PM 4 11 2013 1 54 PM 4 11 2013 1 54 PM 4 11 2013 1 54 PM 4 11 2013 1 54 PM Type File folder File folder File folder Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au Perfect Clarity Au m File name Voiceover pca Files of type Sony Perfect Clarity Audio pca Recent Files of type All Known Media Files a Recent E Open as read only W Auto play Open as read only Append to current data window v Auto play Open as CD Merge L R to stereo File type Sony Perfect Clarity Audio Audio 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono Format Length
496. ow buttons to change the range of the MIDI keyboard to display higher or lower octaves Octaves Keyboard 000 Acoustic Grand Piano if 7 177 Troubleshooting the MIDI keyboard If after selecting the correct device you still can t hear anything when you play on the keyboard check the following e Set the MIDI output velocity to a high value above 100 e Set the MIDI input channel in your sound module to the same channel as the MIDI keyboard channel Also make sure the device is set to receive MIDI input e Check the device output volume level is the mixer level for your sound card or the output volume of the sampler and speakers at a high enough setting e For external devices check your MIDI cables 276 CHAPTER 18 Chapter 19 Looping Sound Forge Pro software is an excellent tool for creating loops and provides the perfect compliment to the revolutionary ACID line of loop based music creation tools Creating loop regions in files is useful only when you intend to transfer the files to a hardware sampler that supports the loop regions Loops A loop is a sample or region in an audio file that is repeated during playback Samples are finite and frequently very short in length Therefore they must be repeated or looped to create longer or sustaining sounds Note Loops can also be used to repeat entire sections of music although the Playlist is better suited to this purpose For more information s
497. p down list b Choose a setting from the Bit depth drop down list to specify the number of bits that should be used to store each sample c Choose a setting from the Channels drop down list to specify the number of channels that will be used in the window Tip f you want to bypass the New Window dialog and use the last used window settings hold Shift while choosing Transport gt New Recording Click OK A new untitled sound file is created and recording begins immediately During recording the Time Display window and the data window s selection status bar will show the current record position Note During recording playback commands the Preferences dialog and commands that affect the recording data window are unavailable Click the Record or Stop E button to end recording or click the Pause button Il to suspend recording and leave the recording device armed Setting up pre and post roll Using pre and post roll can help you when recording voiceovers or overdubs oe aS When you re performing punch and roll recording from the cursor pre roll allows you to hear the material before the cursor position When your re recording into a selection pre and post roll allow you to hear the material before and after the selection From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed From the Method drop down list choose Manual Click the Settings button in the Record Options window
498. p down list to set the number of channels stored in the file Note Use the Channel Converter to perform advanced channel mixing The duration in time and samples of the audio file Displays the format used to save the video stream Displays the frame size color depth and frame rate of the video stream Displays the length in time and frames of the video stream Item Description Video field order Displays the field order of the video stream Click the down arrow and choose a setting from the drop down list to change the field order Video pixel aspect ratio Displays the pixel aspect ratio of the video stream Click the down arrow and choose a setting from the drop down list to change the pixel aspect ratio Computers display pixels as squares or a ratio of 1 0 Televisions display pixels as rectangles ratios other than 1 0 Using the incorrect setting can result in distortion or stretching Consult your capture video output card s manual for the proper settings Editing file properties in the status bar You can quickly edit individual file properties from the status bar using either of the following methods e Right click the status value to be changed and choose a new value from the shortcut menu e Double click the status value to be changed and type a new value in the edit box Copying file properties to the clipboard If you want to copy file properties to the clipboard right click the File Properties windo
499. plate Custom Template description r Description The compression ratio of this lossless format peP depends on the audio source Audio 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono PCM Select saving metadata option 1 ____ amp 7 save metadata with file Free space g Stretch video to fill output frame size do not letterbox 61 8 Gigabytes Select video options Eat aes Save project as pain referen ce in rendered media 72 CHAPTER 4 10 Click anywhere in the data window to select it From the File menu choose Save As to display the Save As dialog If you re working with a Sound Forge project file you can use the Save As dialog to save your project to a different name or location Choose Render As to save your project as a media file Select the folder where you want to save the file From the Save in drop down list choose a drive and folder e From the Recent drop down list choose a folder where you have previously saved files Type a name in the File name box or select a file in the browse window to replace the existing file Choose a file type from the Save as type drop down list If you know that the file format is unsupported choose Raw Audio and click the Custom button to display the Custom Template dialog where you can specify format parameters For more information see Creating custom templates on page 74 Choose a setting from the Template drop down list to choose the attributes that will be used to save your f
500. plications A value of 4 results in professional quality audio but requires substantial processing Apply an anti alias filter Selecting this check box applies an anti aliasing filter during the resampling process during resample Remember that the maximum frequency that can be represented by a sample rate is one half of the sampling rate the Nyquist frequency Therefore high frequencies cannot be accurately represented when downsampling The anti aliasing filter prevents high frequencies from becoming low frequency distortion Tip It is also advisable to apply an anti aliasing low pass filter to an audio file prior to resampling to a lower sample rate Set the sample rate only do If this check box is selected the playback rate is changed without resampling the data not resample This means that the pitch of the original file is not preserved For this reason this option is only useful for quickly converting between two similar sample rates PROCESSING AUDIO 201 iZotope 64 Bit SRC You can use the iZotope 64 Bit SRC process to change the sample rate of an existing sound file 1 From the Process menu choose Resample and then choose iZotope 64 Bit SRC from the submenu The iZotope 64 Bit DSRC dialog is displayed Zotope 64 Bit SRC Example music bed Preset New sample rate 2 000 to 192 000 Hz Preview 50 00 5 Bypass Use simplified Quality setting Steepness 0 to 200 32 Max filter length 10K to 2M 500 0
501. programming interface Portions utilize Microsoft DirectX technologies Copyright 1999 2008 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Microsoft Windows Media 9 Portions utilize Microsoft Windows Media technologies Copyright 1999 2008 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved PNG file format Copyright 2008 World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology European Research Consortium for Informatics and Mathematics Keio University All rights reserved This work is distributed under the W3C Software License in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTIBILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE http www w3 org Consortium Legal 2002 copyright software 2002 1231 Steinberg Media Technologies AG VST is a registered trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG ASIO is a trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG Tagged Image File Format TIFF Adobe Tagged Image File Format is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries All rights reserved Targa file format The Targa file format is a trademark of Pinnacle Systems Inc Thomson Fraunhofer MP3 MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson Supply of this product does not convey a license nor imply any right to distribute content created with this product in revenue generating broadcast systems
502. properties on page 105 Notes Ifyou want to apply a panning envelope to a mono file use the Channel Converter to convert the file to stereo first You can use mono files in the Pan Expand dialog accessible from the Process menu by choosing Pan Expand if you choose Pan preserve stereo separation or Pan mix channels before panning from the Process mode drop down list When you click OK to apply your changes the file will be converted to stereo and your panning settings will be applied Converting a mono file to stereo or multichannel 1 Open the Voiceover pca file Notice that this is a mono file 2 From the Process menu choose Channel Converter The Channel Converter dialog appears Channel Converter Wow sound editing Preset BODEME Hx OK Cancel Output channels 2 r Cancel Invert Mix 100 0 Preview 0 0 dB Bypass Output Output 2 Start 00 00 00 000 Length 00 00 05 000 S af End 00 00 05 000 Channels 1 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 05 000 PROCESSING AUDIO 189 3 Choose a setting from the Preset drop down list or adjust the controls as needed a b C Choose a setting from the Output channels drop down list to indicate the number of channels in the converted file Click in the Output box for each output channel and type a gain value or drag the fader to adjust the amount of the original mono file that will be mixed to the new channel Select th
503. put ports in the MIDI In and MIDI Out boxes Your sampler uses SCSI SMDI transfer Select the SCSI radio button and select your sampler in the Sampler box Note The Sampler box lists all devices connected to the selected SCSI host including devices that are not samplers 5 If desired enter a value in the Sample bias box Sample bias is a user specified value that is added to the logical sample number to determine the actual sample number used for sending or receiving Additionally sample bias can be used to define unique biases for multiple projects For example when composing multiple pieces using different samples it is possible to create unique sampler configurations for each project Simply establish a unique sample bias to segregate the samples within the sampler 6 Enter a value in the MIDI channel box to specify which MIDI channel 1 16 is used when transferring samples 7 Select the Open loop check box if you want to send SDS sample data immediately upon clicking the Send Sample button This is an unconditional transfer of sample data no handshake 8 Select the Send request when retrieving samples check box if you want the Sampler Tool to send a request for the sample to the sampler when you click Get Sample Clearing the Send request check box requires that the sample transfer be initiated from the sampler even after you click Get Sample Typically pressing the appropriate button on the sampler satisfies this request 9
504. r and choose a format from the shortcut menu 100 CHAPTER 5 Automatically snap to markers When snapping is enabled you can also choose to have elements in the data windows snap to markers From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Markers from the submenu or press Shift F8 to toggle snapping for the following marker types Markers Regions e Command markers Disc at once CD tracks and indexes e Sample markers Automatically snap to events When snapping is enabled you can also choose to have elements in the data windows snap to event boundaries From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Events from the submenu or press Ctrl Shift F8 to toggle snapping to event edges Automatically snap to zero crossings When snapping is enabled you can also choose to have elements in the timeline snap to zero crossings From the Options menu choose Snapping and then choose Zero Crossings from the submenu or press Ctrl B to toggle snapping to zero crossings Turn off automatic snapping at high zoom levels When you re zoomed in you may wish to turn off snapping so you can position a selection s start and end points exactly where you choose 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and then click the Editing tab 2 Select the Disable auto snapping below 1 4 zoom ratios check box 3 Click OK Snap an existing selection to the grid or zero crossings If you ve created a selectio
505. r of the layouts in the menu 5 Click the Activate button to apply the selected layout to the Sound Forge Pro workspace 6 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Removing a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu 1 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 2 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box 3 Click the Clear button to remove the selected layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu If you want to replace the selected layout select a layout in the Available layouts in current folder box and click the Replace button 4 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Note Removing a layout from the View gt Window Layouts submenu does not remove the ForgeWindowLayout file from your computer Deleting a layout from your computer 1 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Organize Layouts from the submenu The Organize Layouts dialog is displayed 2 Select a layout in the Current layouts in menu box 328 CHAPTER 25 3 Click the Delete Layout button to remove the selected layout from your computer Note You cannot delete a layout that is included in the Current layouts in menu ist First select the layout in the Current layouts in menu ist and click the Clear button Next select the layout in the Available layouts in curren
506. r sound card s Mic In input or you can connect line level outputs from a tape deck or other source to a Line In input Basic setup with mixer preamplifier In this setup your speakers and audio source are connected to a mixer or preamplifier The mixer preampilifier is then connected to Line In and Line Out connections on your sound card Tip f you re recording from a turntable use a phono preamplifier between your turntable s output and your sound card s line input Most turntables outputs are phono level rather than line level outputs Phono level outputs are quieter than line level outputs and have special equalization applied A phono preamplifier will convert the phono level signal to a line level signal that you can record 152 CHAPTER 10 Digital input output with MIDI synchronization In this setup an audio source with digital input output is connected to a sound card with digital input and outputs Dashed lines represent a sync connection from your audio source to a MIDI timecode converter to a MIDI card Choosing an input device and adjusting levels The Record tab in the Audio Preferences page allows you to choose the audio inputs from which you want to record For more information see Audio tab on page 342 Before recording you ll need to verify that your sound card s recording inputs are active Note The maximum number of channels recorded depends on the data window where you re recording For exampl
507. r tion Chorus 3 Once you have added all of the plug ins and specified the plug in chain order click the OK button Adding a plug in from the Plug In Manager You can add a plug in to a chain quickly by dragging it from the Plug In Manager to the Plug In Chain window Drop the plug in at the position where you want to add it to the chain E Plug In Chain Chain Untited Hx lool fie i Distortion Preset Untitled ki gl amp ef Chorus Se Preset Untitled gl amp ey Reverb Preset Untitled ne gl amp Removing a plug in Click the Remove Plug In button Plug In Chain Chain Untitled ka m x land afe Chorus Preset Untitled gl amp 210 CHAPTER 14 Editing a plug in chain 1 From the View menu choose Plug In Chain Choose a preset from the Chain drop down list To bypass a plug in without removing it from the chain select the effect s Bypass button fm a To reorder the plug ins within the chain simply drag a plug in to a new location Plug In Chain Chain Untitled Hx lal lk hy Distortion Preset Untitled gl amp 5 Click the Show Plug In Window button to display the effect s parameters in a separate window For more information about using specific plug ins click the Plug In Help button in the plug in window Setting a plug in s properties Click the Show Plug In Window button to display the
508. r you need it Editing metadata You can double click values in the Broadcast Wave Information window to edit them Autopopulating metadata values If you want to populate metadata automatically right click the Broadcast Wave Information window choose Autopopulate from the shortcut menu and then choose BEXT or iXML from the submenu Sound Forge Pro will create metadata values based on file properties where possible and will create blank metadata entries for the Description Originator OriginatorRef and CodingHistory items Verifying metadata If an object s metadata is not valid the Value column is displayed in blue in the Broadcast Wave Information window and a warning is displayed in the Description column 50 Track Count 2 XML 2 should match the number of audio channels in this file 1 If you right click the row in the Broadcast Wave Information window you can choose a command from the shortcut menu Set to If Sound Forge can suggest a compliant metadata value you can choose Set to lt suggested value gt to correct the value e Hide Warnings Hides warnings for all objects You can right click again and choose Show Warnings to restore warning messages e Hide This Object s Warnings Hides warnings for the current object You can right click again and choose Show This Object s Warnings to restore warning messages for the current object or choose Stop Hiding of All Object Specific Warnings to restore warning messages
509. rag the current selection to the time ruler Drag to Track List To create a disc at once CD track drag a selection to the Track List window Drag CD Track From the Options menu choose Drag and Drop Editing and then choose CD Track from the submenu if you want to create disc at once tracks during drag and drop editing Choosing this command has the same effect as toggle clicking the right mouse button while dragging until the cursor is displayed as a mouse pointer with a CD of SHORTCUTS 357 Mouse shortcuts Command Select All Zoom Time and Level Return Control Value to Default Fine Tune Control Value Preview Main Status Bar Selection Status Bar Go to Marker Set Selection to Region Loop Play Normal Button on playbar Slow and Fast Selection Scroll Toggle Zoom in horizontally Zoom out horizontally Zoom in out vertically Scroll left right 10 of the current view prior Move cursor left or right move current selection point if selection exists 358 APPENDIX A Function Double click the waveform display to select the entire sound file Triple click when regions loops or markers are present if the Disable triple clicking to select all sound file data check box on the Editing tab in the Preferences dialog is cleared Double click the level ruler to zoom the current selection vertically and horizontally If no selection exists the entire waveform display data is Zoomed Double click again
510. ram Follow the directions in the readme txt file to update the drivers for the Adaptec SCSI card 270 CHAPTER 17 Chapter 18 MIDI synchronization The Musical Instrument Digital Interface MIDI is a set of commands that allow music software and hardware to communicate MIDI is most often used for sending commands such as Play Middle C Now but can also be used to send information such as Current Time is 00 00 01 23 SMPTE or even digital sound data For more information see Sampling on page 259 The most common way to use MIDI is to have a master device such as a MIDI sequencer to generate MIDI commands to a slave device such as a synthesizer which plays a note when instructed If both were in separate hardware devices you would run a MIDI cable from the sequencer s MIDI out port to the synthesizer s MIDI in port Generating MIDI timecode From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Generate MIDI Timecode from the submenu if you want to generate MIDI timecode MTC when you click Play amp MIDI timecode MTC is a standard timecode that most applications and some hardware devices will use to synchronize themselves Note You can specify a MIDI output port on the MIDI Sync tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see MIDI Sync tab on page 338 Triggering from MIDI timecode From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu if you want to trigg
511. ration by choosing Undo from the Edit menu or by clicking the Undo button 4 on the Standard toolbar e You can redo any undone edit operation by choosing Redo from the Edit menu or by clicking the Redo button on the Standard toolbar Important The ability to undo past save is disabled by default To enable this functionality choose Preferences from the Options menu click the General tab and select the Allow Undo past Save check box When this option is enabled your undo redo history is retained until you close the file or exit the software Using the Undo Redo History window The Undo Redo History window may seem confusing at first but you will find it invaluable once you have mastered it This window allows the audio file to be auditioned in various versions by undoing and redoing multiple operations To display the Undo Redo History window choose Undo Redo History from the View menu or press Alt 7 Note The undo redo history for an audio file is retained until you close the file or exit the software If you want to retain undo redo history indefinitely you should work with a Sound Forge project frg file GETTING STARTED 85 Undo Rede History Undo Play button H Undo Mix 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 02 997 H Undo Trim Crop 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 05 000 H Undo Cut 00 00 01 475 to 00 00 02 209 f H Undo Paste 00 00 00 000 to 00 00 00 733 Performed operations Undone operations Undoing and redoing 1
512. rd shortcuts to an ini file in C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 Note The AppData folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel You can use this file as a backup or to share your keyboard shortcuts with other Sound Forge users Deleting a keyboard mapping 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog is displayed 2 Choose a mapping from the Keyboard map drop down list and click the Delete button to remove the selected keyboard mapping Note You cannot delete the default Sound Forge keyboard mapping Importing or renaming a keyboard mapping Copy a Sound Forge keyboard mapping ini file to C Users lt user name gt AppData Roaming Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 Note The AppData folder is not visible unless the Show hidden files and folders radio button is selected on the View tab of the Windows Folder Options control panel The next time you start Sound Forge the new keyboard mapping will be available from the Keyboard map drop down list in the Customize Keyboard dialog Tip Ifyou want to edit a the name used to identify a keyboard mapping in the Customize Keyboard dialog open the ini file in a text editor and change the lt Display Name gt portion of the Name lt Display Name gt entry Save the ini file and restart Sound Forge to use the new name Resetting
513. re elaborate you may discover the need for two more sophisticated paste operations overwrite and replicate Overwriting Overwriting allows you to replace the current selection with the contents of the clipboard and has two basic guidelines If The selection is longer than the clipboard contents The selection is shorter than or equal to the clipboard contents Overwriting a selection 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing Wow B Wow sound editing oS jise i soni editing just gets easier 8 AE 00 00 00 20 00 02 y R 1 J 4 00 04 4 4 4 IW p pml OOn pW oe 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 476 00 00 00 734 1 512 Then Data is overwritten from the beginning of the selection for the length of the clipboard contents only Data is overwritten for the length of the selection only 3 Copy the selection The data is placed on the clipboard 4 Create a selection of approximately the same length containing the final and easier B Wow sound editing Brcma jise Eav EG isons editing just gets easier 8 AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 Elk 4 IW P pml GOON pW Be 00 00 03 640 00 00 05 000 00 00 01 360 1 512 EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 157 5 From the Edit menu choose Paste Special and choose Overwrite from the submenu or right click the data window and choose Overwrite from the shortcut me
514. re you want to save the file from one of the following locations From the Save in drop down list choose a drive and folder e From the Recent drop down list choose a folder where you have previously saved files 4 Inthe File name box type a name for the file or select a file in the browse window to replace the existing file 5 From the Save as type drop down list choose Sound Forge Pro Project File frg Sound Forge software creates a frg file in the folder you specified and creates a subfolder to store your sound and temporary files Note Because a Sound Forge project contains all your original sound data plus all PCM temporary files they can take some time to create GETTING STARTED 77 Warning Deleting a project s filename _frg folder will break the project Saving the project path in the rendered file 1 Save your Sound Forge project The project must be saved before you can embed the project reference in the rendered file 2 Follow the steps in Using the Save As Render As dialog on page 72 to choose the file type and location for rendering your files and then select the Save project as path reference in rendered media check box Note This check box will be unavailable if you did not save your project or if you are rendering using a third party file format plug in 3 Click Yes if you want to open the file in a new window or click No if you want to close the dialog and return to the Sound Forge window Note f yo
515. reater than the number 7 Where did we pull that 6 dB from Engineers use the equation dB 20 x log V1 V2 when comparing two instantaneous values Decibels are commonly used when dealing with sound because the ear perceives loudness in a logarithmic scale In Sound Forge software most measurements are given in decibels For example if you want to double the amplitude of a sound you apply a 6 dB gain A sample value of 32 767 maximum positive sample value for 16 bit sound can be referred to as having a value of 0 dB Likewise a sample value of 16 384 can be referred to having a value of 6 dB Device Driver A program that enables Windows to connect different hardware and software For example a sound card device driver is used by Windows software to control sound card recording and playback GLOSSARY 369 Destructive Editing Destructive editing is the type of editing whereby all cuts deletes mixes and other processes are actually processed to the sound file Any time you delete a section of a sound file in Sound Forge software the sound file on disk is actually rewritten without the deleted section See also Nondestructive Editing on page 374 Digital Rights Management DRM A system for delivering songs videos and other media over the Internet in a file format that protects copyrighted material Current proposals include some form of certificates that validate copyright ownership and restrict unauthorized redistribution D
516. rectly into the box or click Browse to locate and select a file The Test file used box allows you to select the file that was used as a test tone You can enter the path directly into the box or click Browse to locate and select a file Note You should use one of the test files included in the Acoustic Mirror Impulse Files Test Tones folder on the Sound Forge application disc The Impulse output box allows you to specify where the recovered impulse response file is saved You can enter the path directly into the box or click Browse to locate and select a folder When you select this check box very low frequencies which are typically comprised of noise are removed from the impulse response This increases the impulse response s signal to noise ratio Clicking the Recover Impulse button starts the impulse recovery process After the process is complete an impulse file is created and saved in the folder specified in the Impulse output file box Impulse recovery mode You can choose from three Impulse recovery mode options to determine the method used to recover the impulse Use the start and end of the recorded file as timing spikes Auto detect timing spikes or Do not use timing spikes Each of these modes is described below Use the start and end of the recorded file as timing spikes This option specifies that the beginning and end of the recorded file are used as timing spikes This option is recommended for the best results dur
517. rences dialog to calibrate the VU PPM meters to their associated levels on the peak meters and adjust the VU meters sensitivity For more information see Status tab on page 340 Choosing a VU or PPM scale To change the scale of the meter choose Channel Meters from the Options menu choose VU PPM Scale and then choose a setting from the submenu you can also right click the meter to set its options VU and PPM scales are most useful for displaying the average volume of the signal The meter represents the RMS average level during playback and their attack and decay are not as sensitive as the peak meter PPM scales are useful for monitoring peak levels The meters use a fixed integration time 5 or 10 ms that is sensitive to increases in volume but the meters are less sensitive to decreases in volume than the VU scales which produces less meter activity and decreased eyestrain Item Description Traditional VU The traditional VU meter is displayed with a scale of 10 dB to 2 dB 0 dB on the VU meter equals 4 dBu Extended VU The extended VU meter is displayed with a scale of 30 dB to 8 dB 0 dB on the VU meter equals 4 dBu Logarithmic VU Displays the meters in a logarithmic scale like the Sound Forge peak meters instead of the linear scales traditionally associated with VU meters UK PPM The UK peak program meter also known as a BBC meter is a Type II meter and is displayed with a scale of 1 to 7 which corresponds to a range o
518. reshold slope being detected as a glitch e A lower value forces the algorithm to verify that the slope is indeed a glitch and not simply a portion of the smooth waveform Click OK The first glitch in the file is found and its location is marked with the cursor Tip Ifyou can hear glitches that the Find tool does not locate decrease the Threshold slope and increase the Sensitivity EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 163 Locating additional glitches using the same settings Once you have configured the settings in the Find dialog you can find the next glitch in the file without viewing the Find dialog To find the next glitch using the current settings hold Shift while choosing Find from the Tools menu or hold Shift while clicking the Find button on the Tools toolbar Using the Shift key in this way is not limited to finding glitches You can hold Shift and choose any command from a menu to repeat the command with the same settings For more information see Repeating an operation on page 159 Repairing audio There are several ways to repair audio glitches Copying the other channel For glitches in a single channel of a multichannel file you can replace the glitched section of the damaged channel with the corresponding data from a good channel Note This method works only if the channels contain similar audio 1 Open the file containing the glitch 2 Create a selection in the channel containing the gl
519. responds to complete silence In 16 bit audio 90 3 dB is the lowest possible dB value sample value of 1 e Percentages Appears as a percentage ranging from 100 to 100 percent The cursor position in samples from the start of the audio file The actual number stored by a single sample The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or 0 cB The maximum and minimum sample values and the locations in samples where they occur These values may help determine if clipping will occur in the audio file These values can also be used to determine the noise level of a signal for use with the Noise Gate effect a built in XFX plug in installed with Sound Forge For example to determine the noise amplitude of a file run Statistics on a region of noisy silence The Root Mean Square of the sample values relative to the RMS value of a maximum amplitude square wave the loudest possible recording On short intervals this value relates to the volume level of the audio file If used ona large selection with large volume variation this value becomes less meaningful The sum of all sample values in the selected region divided by the number of samples If this value is not zero it usually indicates a DC offset in the recording process The number of times per second that the waveform fluctuates from a negative to a positive value This value can be used as a rough estimate of the frequency of the audio data for very simple w
520. result opening and saving compressed files will usually take longer than uncompressed files e Compressed files are not as portable as uncompressed files If you are distributing files in a compressed format you must ensure the person receiving the files can use them Also not all audio software can use compressed wav files which could make using other programs with Sound Forge software inconvenient In Sound Forge software any compressed wav file can be opened as long as a compatible ACM driver is installed and enabled If there is no compatible ACM driver available for a compressed wav file Sound Forge software will inform you of the problem when you try to open it Saving compressed wav files is as simple as choosing the compression algorithm in the Format drop down list of the Save As dialog Once a file has been saved as compressed Sound Forge software will always save changes to the file using the selected compression algorithm you do not need to reselect the compression format each time you save However you can change the compression format or revert to an uncompressed format at any time with the Save As dialog Transparent playback and recording of non hardware supported audio files The Microsoft Sound Mapper allows audio data formats that are not directly supported by your sound card to be played and recorded Sound Forge software lets you use the Sound Mapper by selecting it for playback and recording on the Audio tab of the Pr
521. revent the audio signal from being sent through the plug in This is useful for isolating certain plug ins without removing others from the chain e Select the check box for each plug in you want to apply to your signal If you want to choose a processing mode to determine how Sound Forge software handles the extra audio tail of plug ins such as reverb or delay right click the processing dialog and choose a command from the shortcut menu e Choose Ignore Tail Data to ignore the tail The effect will end abruptly at the end of the selection e Choose Mix Tail Data to mix the tail into the adjacent material This is the most natural sounding option e Choose Insert Tail Data to insert the audio tail All audio to the right of the tail will be moved over to accommodate the extra audio Adjust each plug in s properties as desired Adding removing or arranging plug ins on a chain Adding a plug in from the Plug In Chooser 1 2 Click the Add Plug Ins to Chain button t in the Apply Plug In Chain window The Plug In Chooser window appears Select each plug in you want to add and then click the Add button or browse to an effects package The plug ins appear in the Apply Plug In Chain window in the order you added them Tips You can also double click a plug in in the Plug In Chooser to add it to the chain To reorder the plug ins within the chain simply drag a plug in button to a new location or click the Shift Plug In Lef
522. rmation window and Track List window will be ignored Burning a disc at once CD After you ve created tracks in a disc at once CD project you re ready to burn your disc If you want to burn multiple copies the application will prompt you to burn another copy after each disc is completed 1 From the Tools menu choose Burn Disc at Once Audio CD The Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog is displayed Burn Disc at Once Audio CD Drive E SONY DWD Rw Diw G1204 PY S3 Speed Max ha Eject C Buffer underun protection Burn mode Bum CDs Test first then burn CDs d Test only do not burn CDs Render temporary image before burning Automatically erase rewritable discs Eject when done Write CD Text Disc status Empty CD A disc Cancel 2 From the Drive drop down list choose the CD drive that you want to use to burn your CD 3 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Max will use your drive s fastest possible speed Decrease the setting to prevent the possibility of buffer underruns 4 Select the Buffer underrun protection check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning Warning Buffer underrun protection can create a disc that can be played in CD players but may contain a bit error where burning stopped and restarted Consider clearing this check box when creating a premaster
523. rnal sampler not directly supported by the Sampler Tool you have two options e Use the MIDI SDS transfer protocol e _ Use an open loop transfer Note f you have a Windows compatible internal sampler contact the manufacturer about supporting SDS in Windows drivers SAMPLING 259 Configuring the Sampler Tool Configuring the Sampler Tool is fairly straightforward especially if the desired configuration exists in the list of presets 1 From the Tools menu choose Sampler The Sampler dialog appears Sampler Example music bed Configuration Untitled Close Send Sample Logical send receive sample number 0 to 16 383 0 re Get Sample Actual send receive sample number 0 Configure Sampler SMDI or SDS capable sampler Channel 1 Send Request Output Input MIDI unity note 5 60 Fine tune cents 0 000 2 From the Configuration drop down list choose the desired configuration If the desired configuration is not listed you must create it in the Sampler Configuration dialog For more information see Creating a sampler configuration on page 260 3 Enter a value in the Logical send receive sample number box This value determines the number that the sampler uses as its location reference when sending or receiving samples This number can be biased for specific samplers with the Sample bias option in the Sampler Configuration dialog For more information see Creating a sampler configuratio
524. ro forces the Start and End values of the selected area to the next zero crossing Snap Time Clicking Snap Time forces the Start and End values of the selected area to a whole time division as designated by the markings on the data window s time ruler Zero crossing preference When using a Snap Zero command you can configure the application to snap to positive slope negative slope or either slope zero crossings 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Editing tab 2 From the Snap to zero crossing slope drop down list choose the desired slope and click OK 98 CHAPTER 5 Selecting audio during playback You can create selections during playback using the Mark In and Mark Out commands These commands place temporary markers in the data window which are then used to create a loop region While you can place these markers by choosing Mark In and Mark Out from the Selection submenu under the Edit menu the keyboard equivalents are more useful 1 Play the audio file in the current data window 2 During playback press where the selection will begin 3 Press O where the selection will end A loop region is created using the in and out points you identified You can then right click the bar at the top of the loop region to insert a region toggle looped playback or select the loop region Tip Select the Update loop bar on Mark In Out check box on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog if you want the loop
525. rom dialog recorded on location If you intend to use the Acoustic Mirror effect as a film video post production tool there are some factors to keep in mind Distance information is determined by the distance between the source and the microphone when creating the impulse Record multiple impulses at various distances for each location to create realistic dialog effects when matching audio processing to approximate camera positioning e The frequency response of the human ear changes as the volume of a sound increases As a result impulses created from a significant distance may sound unusual at high volumes Placing a microphone off center allows you to create directional information in the recovered impulse For example placing a microphone to the left of the speaker produces an impulse that approximates a source located on the left side of the screen Panning with head related transfer functions A head related transfer function HRTF contains the frequency and phase response information required to make a sound seem to originate from a specific direction in a three dimensional space The Acoustic Mirror Impulse Files HRTF Impulses folder on the Sound Forge application disc contains a collection of impulse files that contain directional cues To achieve optimal results using these impulse files the original file should be mono and playback should be monitored using headphones To begin convert the mono file to stereo by replicating th
526. rom the File menu choose Workspace and choose Open from the submenu The Open Workspace dialog appears 2 Browse to the folder containing the desired sfw file 3 Select the desired file and click Open GETTING STARTED 75 Extracting audio from CDs You can extract data from CDs and open tracks in the Sound Forge workspace Tip Double click a cda file in the Explorer window or drag it to the workspace to extract a CD track without opening the Extract Audio from CD dialog You can also extract audio from the Open dialog by choosing CD Audio cda from the Files of type drop down list in the Open dialog Important Sound Forge software is not intended for and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using Sound Forge software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement 1 Inserta CD in the drive 2 From the File menu choose Extract Audio from CD The system s drives are identified The Extract Audio from CD dialog is displayed If the system is equipped with multiple CD ROM or DVD ROM drives you must select the desired drive from the Drive drop down list near the bottom of the dialog
527. rop operations make controlling the Sound Forge software faster and more intuitive and allow for increased editing power The major drag and drop editing operations are paste mix and create CD tracks Dragging mono selections into multichannel destinations When pasting or mixing a mono selection into a multichannel file you can mix the selection to both channels by dropping it on the destination data window s center line Otherwise the selection is mixed into the left or right channel exclusively Snapping to points in drag and drop operations A major advantage of drag and drop editing is the ability to snap to markers regions time increments or other points in the destination window All drag and drop operations can be configured to snap or align to points established within the destination file The following table describes all points that drag and drop selections snap to in the destination file Points Description Cursor Start of block snaps to cursor position Selection Start of block snaps to start or end points of a selection Start Start of block snaps to start of file End Start of block snaps to end of file Markers Start of block snaps to marker Regions Start and End Markers Start of block snaps to region start or end Time Measures etc Start of block snaps to labeled divisions on time ruler Video Frames Start of block snaps to the start of video frames appearing in the video strip Events Start of block snaps t
528. ropriate value in the Default beats per measure box 4 Type an appropriate value in the Default beats per minute box and click OK Publishing files to the Web You can share your media file with others by publishing it to the Web from within the software You can upload your file to ACIDplanet com or another publishing provider From the File menu choose Publish and follow the instructions to set up your publishing providers and upload your content Recovering files after a crash If Sound Forge software terminates improperly you can recover all open and unsaved audio files not opened in read only mode When a file is opened it automatically creates temporary files that it uses to save any changes made to the file The original file remains unchanged until it is saved If the software terminates improperly the temporary files remain on your hard drive and can be used to recover any unsaved changes made prior to the crash Tip You can specify the folder used to store temporary files by choosing Preferences from the Options menu and designating a Temporary files and record folder ocation on the General tab Recovering files Click the Recover button to restore the changes and undo history for the files listed in the Files that can be recovered list Crash Recovery Files that can be recovered musicbed wav Cancel Your last editing session terminated improperly Click Recover to restore your edits and undo history
529. rrent frame to the clipboard External Monitor Sets up previewing on an external monitor Changing the Video Preview settings The Video Preview window can be configured in a number of ways to make it more useful The Video Preview window can be used on a separate monitor if your video hardware supports this feature docked at the bottom of the workspace or floated freely on the screen You can quickly access settings for the Video Preview window using the shortcut menu Right click the Video Preview window to adjust the following options Option Copy Frame Default Background Black Background White Background Integral Stretch Simulate Device Aspect Ration External Monitor Passive Update Show Toolbar Show Status Bar Description Copies the contents of the frame to Windows Clipboard Sets the Video Preview window background color to the system default color Sets the Video Preview window background color to black Sets the Video Preview window background color to white When selected the Video Preview frame will only be stretched by integral amounts Turning this setting on usually provides faster drawing Compensates for any spatial distortion due to non square pixel aspect ratios when viewed on a computer monitor Sends the preview out to an external monitor This only functions if your hardware supports this feature If you have not configured your external monitor settings clicking this button displays t
530. rreseese gt 76 PrEVIEWING CD TACKS 2vssc5tiewiecestetceesccisdatrus ESTEE EETA 77 Refreshing the Extract Audio from CD dialog ccc cece cc ccc teen eeeeeenenees 77 Working with projects cc cece cece eee eee eee e eee eee e eee e eee eee eeeeeeeeeee 77 Savi PIO CCS concave AEE E EEA E oe AAA cess ASAA eos eens AEEA 77 Saving the project path in the rendered file 0 ccc ccc ccc eee cent eee ee ee ne eeenes 78 Editing a media file s source project ccc ccc cece nee een eee nent eee eeeen teens 78 EGIUING AUO reer erra e p rE EEEE quae eqaunesosancedasorensasaisatn 4 caaet cuca 79 ROR WING ESETE EE EEE E EE EE E E 79 Po aaaea eee e ENEA A EEEN ENA A AEAEE NAA ANEA EI AANA EAA 80 TABLE OF CONTENTS 9 COIN eco nea he oe ars AEA ee ee ea ees 81 DERIND soraan io AEEA meus teolaessneun db isacare ue A itn atenn 82 TGIAAIMAG COD ING 6 94 4003 sierra NEE AEE ys asab ee 944 oe eras ae onseosea eee 83 WUKITIG aA T E eqs seus aseoug E sae A EE E E EAT te es 83 Using Undo and R dO ccc ccc ccc ccc cee nita eee eee eee eee ai 85 Using the Undo Redo History WINdOW ccc cece cece eee e eee e eee e eee eee eeeenes 85 Selecting status TOMMA1Siw 4 6 cor sei sddssdddwsthews thaws donee stares ceded thar Miao 87 Experimenting with status formats ccc ccc cc cece eee ee ee eee eeeeeeennes 88 Configuring the Measures amp Beats format cece ccc cece eee eee eee e ee eeeeeeeeees 88 Publishin
531. rt files If you routinely perform similar processing on multiple files a batch job can combine multiple time consuming steps into a single process 1 From the Tools menu choose Batch Converter The Batch Converter window is displayed cd Batch Converter SHW o Files to Convert Process Metadata Save Status Add File Add Folder Remove File Folder Size KB Modified Musicbed pca C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 10 0 485 1 26 2009 3 04 PM Select a combination of files processes metadata and save options then click Run Job 2 Create a new batch job or open the batch job that you want to edit Click the New Batch Job button to create a new batch job Click the Open button 3 and choose a batch job bj if you want to edit an existing batch job 3 Select the Process tab to choose the processing settings that you want to apply Tip When you convert files to a compressed format such as MP3 peaks that are at or near 0 dB may be clipped by the compression process Consider normalizing first to reduce the possibility of clipped peaks normalizing to a peak level of 0 9 dB is a good starting point a Choose a plug in from the Select drop down list and click the Add Effect button to add it to the end of the list The plug in dialog is displayed b Use the plug in dialog to adjust the effect s settings For more information about an individual effect s settings click the
532. rting a region 244 c es antes cat boca etn koa er aA A A ae neoaas 121 Naming Or renaMing ArEGION cc cece cc eect eect eee e teen eee ete eeeeeeeeenes 122 Selecting a 16 pa 122 ite late ecm O a a en ne ee ee ee ee er eee 122 DelEHNG A NCCION ee oee a wan nase ete EEE oan Sim ede paar ees EET EERE 122 Deleting all markers ANd regions ccc ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eee ee ee eee ee eeeeeneeeees 122 Deleting all markers and regions within the selected area ccc ccc eee eens 122 Previewing a regio a 422cnacnenaar cence trs Skr E eas 122 Triggering a region using MIDI commands cece cece cece cece eee e eee eeeeeeees 122 Converting Markers to regions cece cece cece eee e eee e eee e tent eens eeeeenaes 123 Creating regions automatically ccc ccc cee eee teen eee ence eee eeeeenenes 123 Creating regions based on fast attacks ccc ccc cece eect eee eee e eee eeeeeees 123 Creating regions based on a musical time interval ccc ccc ccc cc cece eee eee eees 124 Extracting regions TO NEW TES 2scca1 sua ch Erenet Erne EIEEE ENEN ENTERESE EA 124 Updating marker or region positions cece eee eee ence eeeees 124 Replicating Markers OF regions ccc ccc ccc ccc cece eee eee eee eee eee eees 125 Deleting Markers or FeGiONS ccc cee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee eees 125 D LEa AIS KEQIONS EEE EE EE T EEE E EE E E veer seas 125 Saving a regions playlist file
533. s Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF file format Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Apple QuickTime Apple QuickTime application is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Boost Software License Version 1 0 August 17th 2003 Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license the Software to use reproduce display distribute execute and transmit the Software and to prepare derivative works of the Software and to permit third parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so all subject to the following The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement including the above license grant this restriction and the following disclaimer must be included in all copies of the Software in whole or in part and all derivative works of the Software unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine executable object code generated by a source language processor THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE TITLE AND NON INFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE
534. s When using the Event tool processes and effects are applied to each event individually The processed result is only the length and number of channels in the event at the time of processing not the entire length and number of channels of the underlying media You can process multiple selected events at once but Sound Forge software processes each event separately Note You cannot use format changing processes such as Bit Depth Converter and Resample when using the Event tool Processing multiple events creates a single operation in the Undo Redo History window For more information see Using the Undo Redo History window on page 85 For more information about applying effects see Applying an effect on page 205 178 CHAPTER 12 Selecting events When working with the Event tool you can select one or more events but you cannot create time selections To select an event click it Double click an event to select it and adjust the loop bar to the length of the event B Shine o on 8 i 00 00 00 Ge i renee ean lt i I p 4 K gt E gt e e Rate 0 00 lt op H 00 01 03 930 00 01 43 584 00 00 39 653 1 16 066 Selecting events using menu commands From the Edit menu choose Event and then choose Select Next Event or Select Previous Event from the submenu to select the next or previous event in the data window Choose Select First Event or Select Last Event to select the first or las
535. s such as in the Graphic Fade dialog allow you to view the audio waveform on the graph If the selection is small the waveform is automatically displayed Otherwise selecting an option from the Show wave drop down list displays the waveform Displaying multichannel waveforms The Show Wave drop down list allows you to specify how multichannel files appear in the envelope graph Multichannel files When a data window displays a multichannel file all channels are shown at the same time Working with multichannel files When playing editing or processing multichannel files you can select a single channel or all channels However certain processing tasks cannot be performed on an individual channel of a multichannel file For more information see Single channel editing on page 52 or Editing Multichannel Audio on page 115 50 CHAPTER 2 Selecting data in multichannel files When editing a multichannel file you can use the mouse to select data by clicking and dragging in a data window There are several options for data selection in multichannel files 1 Open a multichannel file 2 From the Edit menu choose Tool and then choose Edit from the submenu to select the Edit tool Tip Press Ctrl D or click the Edit Tool button 44 on the Standard toolbar 3 Select the data LZ DN T E amp Ag 00 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 8 AE 00 00 00 00 00 15 00 00 a Facer A AA E A ler peer ee RR a a ey pargar parier AE near py ary w
536. s Displays the file size date and when the file was last created or last modified All Files Displays all file types in the active folder GETTING STARTED 65 Peak files When you first open a file the entire file is scanned and a peak file is created The peak file is stored with the same name and in the same location as the audio file but it is given an sfk extension This peak file is automatically updated whenever the original file is edited Working with video files The Sound Forge application has the ability to open and save many video file formats The video files cannot be edited within the software but this functionality allows you to attach detach and edit audio for the video Once you ve edited the audio you can preview the audio and video together When you open a media file containing video the data window displays the video portion in a video strip above the audio i KayakandWhale 001 avi Video strip sr een Be a5 Ba i e ff m e tafia A OOK AH Oe 1o 00 00 00 000 00 00 40 374 1 2 438 For more information see Working with Video on page 289 Playing a file After you open a file you can play it by clicking the Play All button on the transport bar For more information see Transport toolbar on page 41 Viewing the current position As a file plays the current playback position is indicated in the data window in three ways e A cursor travels across the visible portion of the data w
537. s corresponds to the number of samples from the start of the sound file Windows Media Format Microsoft s Windows Media file format that can handle audio and video presentations and other data such as scripts URL flips images and HTML tags Zero Crossing A zero crossing is the point where a fluctuating signal crosses the baseline By making edits at zero crossings with the same slope the chance of creating glitches is minimized Zipper Noise Zipper noise occurs when you apply a changing gain to a signal such as when fading out If the gain does not change in small enough increments zipper noise can become very noticeable Fades are accomplished using 64 bit arithmetic thereby creating no audible zipper noise GLOSSARY 381 382 APPENDIX E Absolute Frames button 42 ACID Properties window 54 ACID software 78 ACID creating loops for 283 287 ACIDplanet com 89 ACM 359 Acoustic Mirror See also impulse files adding acoustic signatures to files 233 adjusting acoustic signatures 233 adjusting impulse length 235 button 45 Envelope tab 235 error messages 243 General tab 234 Head related transfer functions 242 limiting length of impulse 234 overview 233 Recover tab 236 saving the impulse with a preset 235 Summary tab 236 troubleshooting 242 active data windows vs inactive data windows 71 adding regions to the Playlist 131 adjusting envelopes 225 adjusting selections with keyboard 99 with mo
538. s for the selected command Click a tab in the middle of the dialog to choose which shortcuts you want to see Customize Keyboard Keyboard map Dew o r Save in Show commands containing Regions List Playlist Track List Script Editor Global Cursor Hide Show Cursor To Data End Data End Data Home Data Home Left By 10Samples Shortcut keys Shortcut currently assigned to Editing or creating shortcuts From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog appears 2 Click a tab in the middle of the dialog to indicate the type of command you want to assign to a keyboard shortcut 3 Selecta command in the list Tip You can type a word in the Show commands containing box to filter the list of commands to display only commands that contain the word you typed 4 Click the Shortcut keys box and press the key combination you want to assign to the selected command Tip f you type a key combination that has already been assigned to another command the Shortcut currently assigned to box displays the existing assignment To find the existing command click the Locate button 5 Click the Add button to assign the key combination in the Shortcut keys box to the selected command 346 CHAPTER 25 Saving a keyboard mapping 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog is displayed 2 Click the Save as button and type a name to save your current keyboa
539. s iwmiensseens 96 Usmo the Magny tOGl serors drst airar rE EEIN EEEIEE PERTEN 96 Selecting audio using start and end ValUeS ccc cece cece e eee e eee eenes 98 Using the Set Selection dialog 2 0 ccc ccc ccc ccc ccc eee cece eee eee eee eee e eee eeeees 98 Selecting audio during playback cece cece cece eee ee eee eee e ee eeeeeees 99 FING tUNING a SCICCIION reres ests eneren Are EREE EN A E te edaeesiaeanwceed 99 Adjusting a selection with the mouse sussussnssessnsesseeseesossorserseseessessesee 99 Adjusting a selection with the keyboard cece ccc ccc cece cence eee eeeeeeeeeneees 99 Restoring G SCICCIION esexs docu canaioaierdnt ga dawecd ob Gn ead eens nee ewan se eaee ees oNees 99 Using selection grid LINES 0 0 ccc ccc ccc eee eee eee eee e eee eeeeees 100 Enable Snapping ccc cc ccc ccc ccc cee EERE e eee eee eee eeeeeees 100 Turn snapping on or off hsesset ows daebonseons hove scdereeedenddse wane benesawaseoe ses dane nt 100 Automatically snap to the grid ccc ccc cece cece eee nee nent een eeeeeeennnees 100 Automatically snap to Markers ccc ccc cece eee e eee e eee eect ee eeeeeeennees 101 Automatically snap to events ccc ccc cee cece eee nee e ete e ee eeeeeeennees 101 Automatically snap to zero CrOSSINGS ccc cece cece cee eee eee e eee eeeeeeeannees 101 Turn off automatic snapping at high zoom levels ccc cece cece ee eee eeeeeees 101 10 TABLE O
540. s keyboard shortcuts available when using faders and sliders If you want to Then use the following shortcuts Change the value in small Up Arrow Down Arrow Left Arrow and Right Arrow increments o Hover the mouse over the fader or slider control and press Ctrl while moving the mouse wheel Change the value in larger Page Up and Page Down increments o Hover the mouse over the fader or slider control and move the mouse wheel Set the control to its maximum Home and End and minimum values respectively 48 CHAPTER 2 Envelope graphs Envelope graphs are used to configure the shape of frequency or amplitude envelopes applied to audio waveforms Envelope point Envelope Smooth gain to minimize distortion on steep slopes Time axis Show wave Mix channels ka Reset Envelope Amplitude or frequency axis Understanding the envelope graph To use the envelope graph you must first understand what it represents In the previous example the horizontal axis represents time with the leftmost point representing the start of the selection and the rightmost point representing the end of the selection The vertical axis represents either amplitude or frequency depending upon the operation Moving an envelope point 1 Drag an envelope point to a new position 2 Release the mouse button The point is repositioned and the envelope adjusts Moving multiple envelope points 1 Starting in an unused area of the envelope graph drag t
541. s not save the additional information found in BICSF EBICSF files but allows the data to be read as a NeXT Sun file 364 APPENDIX D Appendix E Glossary A Law A Law is a compounded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines A Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a nonlinear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in United States telecommunications A Law is very similar to u Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder Acoustic Signature The acoustic signature of a system is data containing all of the sound characteristics of a system This includes such things as reverb time frequency response and other timbral qualities Impulse files used by Acoustic Mirror can be thought of as acoustic signatures Activation Number This number is based on the Computer ID number of the computer on which Sound Forge software is installed Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate An activation number is created based on that number When you register the software Sony will generate an activation number for you Once the activation number is entered the software will not time out Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID it is important that you have Sound Forge software installed on the computer where you will be using it See also Computer ID on page 368 ActiveX A Microsoft technology t
542. s the cursor to the beginning of the active data window Moves the cursor to the end of the active data window Makes the next data window on the Window menu active Makes the previous data window on the Window menu active Turns looped playback mode on or off Starts playback in Normal mode e If there is no selection playback occurs from the cursor to end of file e If there is a selection playback occurs from the beginning of the selection to the end of the selection Starts playback in Sample mode e Ifthe file contains loops the loops will repeat as many times as specified on the Edit Sample dialog Use this to listen to a sound file as it would sound when played by a sampler e Ifthe file does not contain any loops the file will be played once from beginning to end Starts playback of the current cutlist Turns looped playback mode on Turns looped playback mode off Plays the data before and after the current selection This command lets you preview the result of a Cut or Clear operation without altering the file Plays the data before the cursor position for the default pre roll length specified on the Other tab in the Preferences dialog Moves the cursor through the data window in the current zoom ratio For example if the zoom ratio is 1 1024 this will move the cursor forward 1024 samples Moves the cursor through the data window 25 times faster than Forward Slow Moves the cursor through the data window 75 ti
543. se o PROCESSING AUDIO 195 Normalize The Normalize command maximizes the overall volume of a file without introducing clipping When you normalize a file the entire file is scanned and a constant gain is applied to raise the file s level to a specified value Normalizing audio 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Normalize The Normalize dialog is displayed Normalize Example music bed xm Preset Untited x Normalize using Peak level Average RMS level loudness 100 00 745 0 dB cies a a Bypass 200 an 200 S Use equal loudness contou Normalize to Deeg e ates 60 to 0 dB inn ta Od Scan Levels F clipping occurs Apply dynamic compression Peak cs ee Curent scan lewe Td not scan ze Sess ia 7 i l More 3 From the Preset drop down list choose Normalize RMS to 16 dB music and click OK The file is normalized and its overall loudness is increased E Example music bed F 8 AE fonono Normalize controls The following controls are located in the Normalize dialog Control Description Normalize using Peak level This radio button normalizes the audio file using the maximum instantaneous sample values detected A constant gain is then applied to the audio Normalize using Average RMS This radio button normalizes the audio file using the detected average RMS value of level loudness the audio file This is helpful for matchin
544. se Inverting data can help match transitions and compare the phase relationship of the two sound files Type a value in the Fade In box or use the spinner to set the length of the fade in between the source and destination audio Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the attack portion of the envelope in the data window fa Click the Fade Curves button the speed of the fade in and choose a curve type from the menu to set Select the Proportional fade lengths check box if you want to specify fade lengths as a percentage of the selection Type a value in the Fade Out box or use the spinner to set the length of the fade out between the source and destination audio Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the attack portion of the envelope in the data window ae Click the Fade Curves button the speed of the fade out and choose a curve type from the menu to set Click to display additional controls at the bottom of the dialog that you can use to change the selection you want to process 6 Click the OK button to apply the mix Mixing audio from the clipboard 1 Open and play the Drumhit pca file The file contains a snare drum and crash cymbal sound 2 Verify that the Drumhit pca window is active and choose Select All from the Edit menu or press Ctrl A The entire waveform is selected 3 From the Edit menu choose Copy or click the Copy button 4 Ac
545. se Apply dynamic compression in the If clipping occurs drop down list and click OK 110 CHAPTER 6 Converting mono stereo channels You can convert mono files to stereo or stereo files to mono To perform quick channel conversion without specifying the mix use the Audio channels box on the File Properties window or right click the Channels box in the status bar and choose 2 Stereo or 1 Mono from the shortcut menu For more information see Editing file properties on page 105 Converting from mono to stereo 1 2 Open the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application Right click the Channels box in the status bar and choose Stereo from the shortcut menu The Mono To Stereo dialog is displayed Mono To Stereo Wow sou Destination OK Left Channel Right Channel Both Channels Select the Left Channel radio button and click OK The mono data is placed in the upper half of the data window left channel and silence is placed in the right channel For more information see Specifying the audio destination on page 111 Play the file Wow sound editing just gets easier and easier plays in only the left channel Tip f your sound card supports only mono data stereo files can be played by specifying the Microsoft Sound Mapper as the playback device To do this choose Preferences from the Options menu Click the Audio tab and choose Microsoft Sound Mapper from the Audio device type dr
546. se Default Stereo Recording Red Book Authoring or 5 1 Video from the submenu You can also use the following keyboard shortcuts to load these layouts Layout Keyboard shortcut Default Alt Shift D D Stereo Recording Alt Shift D R Red Book Authoring Alt Shift D B 5 1 Video Alt Shift D V Saving a window layout Tip Press Ctrl Alt D release the keys and then press a number on your keyboard not the numeric keypad to save the layout in that space Arrange the windows and docked windows as desired 2 From the View menu choose Window Layouts and then choose Save Layout As from the submenu The Save Layout As dialog is displayed Note Choose Save Layout from the submenu if you want to update the current window layout A bullet is displayed next to the current layout 3 Inthe Name box type the name you want to use to identify the layout This name will be used in the Organize Layouts dialog 4 Choose a setting from the Shortcut drop down list to set the shortcut that will be used to load the layout For example if you choose 4 you could press Alt Shift D release the keys and then press 4 on your keyboard to load the layout CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 327 5 The Folder box displays the path to folder where the layout will be saved Window layouts are saved in the following folders by default e In Windows XP C Documents and Settings lt user name gt Application Data Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 e In Windows
547. se file should realistically recreate the reverberation characteristics of the electronic device or acoustic space Using impulse files in creative ways Now that you understand the use and creation of impulse files you may want to begin using the Acoustic Mirror tool in more interesting ways than simply applying an impulse to an audio file The following sections describe some creative and advanced uses for Acoustic Mirror technology that can contribute to the professionalism of your work Processing individual audio elements Instead of applying an impulse file to an entire song try applying an impulse to individual elements of the song Applying an impulse to specific notes chords riffs or phrases can quickly change the dynamics of a song This technique is possible because the tail of processed audio is automatically mixed with the adjacent unprocessed audio Adding realistic stereo to mono recordings You can give mono recordings realistic stereo characteristics by selecting the Convert mono to stereo check box in the General tab of the Acoustic Mirror dialog when applying the specified impulse file The stereo image produced using this method is virtually indistinguishable from an actual stereo recording If you choose to use the Acoustic Mirror effect for stereo simulation you may find the output too reverberant If this is the case decrease the Apply envelope and limit decay value Frequently setting this value to as little as 0 1 sec
548. se the speed at which you want to burn Max will use your drive s fastest possible speed decrease the setting if you have difficulty burning 308 CHAPTER 23 Click the Start button Important Clicking Cancel after the CD writing process begins renders the CD unusable After the audio is written to CD the CD Operation dialog indicates whether the writing was successful Click OK to clear the message Closing a CD Closing the CD allows you to listen to it in an audio CD player However you cannot add tracks to a CD once it is closed 1 2 3 4 From the Tools menu choose Burn Track at Once Audio CD The Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog is displayed From the Action drop down list choose Close Disc If desired select the Eject disc when done check box to eject the CD automatically when the disc has been closed Click the Start button The Sound Forge application begins closing the CD and displays a progress meter in the dialog After the CD is closed the CD Operation dialog indicates whether the closing was successful Click OK to clear the message BURNING CDS 309 Burning disc at once DAO CDs From the Tools menu choose Burn Disc at Once Audio CD to burn a disc at once CD using the current CD layout Use DAO CDs when you need to create a master disc for mass replication Tip When creating DAO CDs right click the ruler or Time Display window and choose Audio CD Time from the shortcut menu to help you arrang
549. selected Determines the lowest frequency displayed in the graphs Determines the highest frequency displayed in the graphs Determines the highest amplitude displayed in the graphs Determines the lowest amplitude displayed in the graphs Select this check box to indicate the highest value of each frequency on the spectrum graph with a small horizontal line The length of time in seconds that the peak is held is determined by the value entered in the edit box Select this check box if you want to maintain the state of the Soectrum Graph when you stop playback Clearing this check box results in the graph resetting to the cursor position when playback stops Saving spectrum graph settings After you configure the controls in the Soectrum Settings dialog you can save the settings as a custom preset by clicking Save As and entering a name for the new preset Click OK to save the new preset 304 CHAPTER 21 Chapter 22 Editing with SpectraLayers Pro From the Tools menu choose Edit in SpectraLayers Pro to open the current sound file in SpectraLayers Pro If SoectraLayers Pro 2 0 is not installed the command is not available For more information please see http www sonycreativesoftware com spectralayerspro Editing a file in SoectraLayers Pro 1 Pa Select a data window or drag the cursor in the data window or marker bar to make a time selection From the Tools menu choose Edit in SpectraLayers Pro SpectraLayers Pro st
550. shots are RAM based audio clips that are not designed to loop Things such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one shots Longer files can be treated as one shots if your computer has sufficient memory Pan To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between two or more speakers 374 APPENDIX E Pause Time Pause time is the space between CD tracks This soace may contain silence as in a standard commercially produced CD or can contain audio as in a live performance captured on CD The Red Book standard calls for two seconds of pause time but you can edit the default pause time on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog Peak Data File The file created by Sound Forge software when a file is opened for the first time This file stores the information regarding the graphic display of the waveform so that opening a file is almost instantaneous This file is stored in the directory where the audio file resides and has an sfk extension If this file is not in the same directory as the audio file or is deleted it will be recalculated the next time you open the file Pixel Aspect The pixel aspect determines whether the pixels are square 1 0 which refers to computers or rectangular settings other than 1 000 which typically refers to televisions The pixel aspect ratio is unrelated to the frame s aspect ratio Playlist The Playlist is a list of regions set to play in a specific order The Pl
551. siclD button in the Explorer window Gracenote MusiclD attempts to obtain matching CD information and displays artist album and track data e Ifthe service locates an exact match this information automatically appears No additional action is necessary e Ifthe service locates multiple possible matches the Match dialog appears Proceed to step 3 Choose a method for completing the CD information e f none of the possible matches is appropriate click the Submit New button The Gracenote MusiclD Disc Information dialog appears allowing you to complete information for the CD and submit it for inclusion in the Gracenote Media Database For help on submitting CD information click the Help Guidelines button in this dialog When you are finished typing information click the OK button to submit your data e Select the appropriate match from the list and click the Accept Match button The artist album and track information is displayed based on your selection in the right side of the PC pane Editing and submitting CD information to Gracenote Ifa CD is not currently part of the Gracenote Media Database you can submit it for inclusion 1 2 Insert a CD in your drive Browse to the CD and click the MusicID button in the Explorer window The Gracenote MusicID Disc Information dialog appears Use the Gracenote MusiclD Disc Information dialog to edit information about the CD For help on submitting CD information click the H
552. sing any of the following methods e From the Edit menu choose Tool and choose Pencil from the submenu e Click the Pencil Tool button in the Standard toolbar e Click the Edit Tool Selector in the top left corner of the data window until the Pencil tool is displayed EDITING REPAIRING AND SYNTHESIZING AUDIO 165 4 Drag to draw a new waveform section The new section is integrated into the original waveform replacing the section containing the glitch Repairing audio using Audio Restoration plug in Sound Forge software includes an DirectX plug in part of the Noise Reduction plug in called Audio Restoration that you can use to remove surface noise from old recordings For more information on this plug in see the Sound Forge online help file accessible from the Help menu by choosing Contents and Index Synthesizing audio You can generate custom tones and waveforms for use in your audio projects Generating DIMF MF tones You can generate standard dial tones used by telephone companies 1 From the Insert menu choose Synthesis and choose DTMF MF Tones from the submenu The DTMF MF Tones dialog appears Tip You can also click the DTMF MF Tones Synthesis button 7 on the Insert toolbar DTMF MF Tones Sound 3 Preset EE Hx Cancel Dial string 1234567890ABCD 123456 7890ABCD Preview 12 0 dB Tone style to generate DTMF MF 25 12 Single tone length 0 001 to 2 seconds 0 200 Break le
553. sion acd acd zip veg or frg must be registered on the editing computer e The editing computer must have the same version or later of the software as the computer where the project was created e The project file must exist on the editing computer using the same file path as on the computer where the project was created e The project s source media must exist on the editing computer If the media files do not use the same file path as on the computer where the project was created you will be prompted to choose a new folder or replacement files 3 Edit the project as necessary 4 Render the edited project using the same name as the original media file and close the editing application Note f you are editing an existing track your project will automatically be updated with the latest rendered media file 78 CHAPTER 4 Editing audio New Sound Forge users should remember that even the most complex editing is derived from a few simple operations copy paste cut delete clear trim crop and mix The following table provides a brief description of the basic editing operations Editing Operation Description Copy Copies data from the window to the clipboard Paste Inserts the contents of the clipboard into the window at the current cursor position If a selection exists in the data window the pasted data replaces the current selection Cut Deletes data from the window and copies it to the clipboard Delete Clear D
554. slices displayed When displaying multiple slices in the spectrum graph slices are displayed chronologically forward or backward based on whether you have the Forward or Backward radio button selected Set sonogram resolution The Set sonogram resolution value determines the number of FFT samplings used in a sonogram This keeps the processing time and graph resolution constant Increasing this value increases the horizontal graph resolution but requires more processing time When this check box is cleared the number of samplings is determined by the length of the selection and the FFT overlap setting Note ncreasing the samplings increases the horizontal graph resolution but requires more processing time Channel Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify which graph you want to edit USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 303 Item Sync graphs Logarithmic graphing Freq Min Frequency minimum Max Frequency maximum Ceiling Floor Hold peaks during monitoring Maintain last monitored view Description If you are analyzing a multichannel file select the Sync graphs check box to synchronize the displays so you can view the same region of the FFT in all channels Select the Logarithmic graphing check box to display the X axis in logarithmic mode rather than linear mode In logarithmic mode more of the graph is devoted to lower frequencies Note Logarithmic graphing affects the display only when Normal Display is
555. specified envelope WORKING WITH EFFECTS 227 Applying an amplitude envelope 1 From the Effects menu choose Envelope The Envelope dialog appears Envelope Example music bed Preset Bx Level Cancel 100 96 ee Preview T Bypass Smooth gain to minimize distortion on steep slopes Show wave Mono source Reset Envelope oo l More 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 2 Adjust the envelope to achieve the desired sound Drag the small envelope points up or down e Tocreate a new envelope point double click the envelope e To delete an envelope point right click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu e Tochange the fade curve between two points right click an envelope segment and choose a command from the shortcut menu Fade Type Fade In Out Envelope Linear Fade Fast Fade Slow Fade Smooth Fade Sharp Fade Hold LAA e Tomove all envelope points press Ctrl A and drag when the envelope has focus The cursor will be displayed as a hand tt Note You can create up to 16 envelope points Click the Reset Envelope button to reset the graph to a simple ADSR Attack Decay Sustain Release curve 3 Select the Smooth gain to minimize distortion on steep slopes check box to prevent the gain from changing too quickly which might result in unwanted distortion Also when this option is on the gain will always begin at 0 4 Click the OK button
556. ss and effect dialogs For more information see Applying presets on page 181 and Previewing processed audio on page 183 General tab controls The following sections describe all controls located in the General tab Control Description Impulse The Impulse drop down list allows you to specify an impulse file from a list of those Response width previously used Clicking Browse displays the Open Impulse File dialog and allows you to locate an impulse file from your local system or network You can use the Response width slider to create some simple stereo expansion and Response delay stereo collapsing effects This control s default setting of 50 represents normal stereo operation and is recommended to maintain the stereo field of the impulse response A higher setting expands the stereo field but may result in an unnatural sounding effect Lowering this setting narrows the stereo field A setting of 0 is essentially mono The Response delay slider controls the time in milliseconds that elapses between the Pan left to right dry signal and the processed output This control can be used to create interesting effects and add new dimensions to an acoustic signature Configuring this control with a positive value results in the processed output following the dry output A negative value results in the processed output preceding the dry signal or a pre delay The Pan slider controls the balance between the left and right cha
557. st 34 60 2us ee qnaenaed ae oidede kates ahaa ie kee he ante deat nan fe aea tases 131 Editing a PIAVIISt CUTIIST region 2004 cuc040 4sa0inadunnadcawia o eede eii en eaa 132 SMO LOD PONTS eair rari EAE E AEE oa anae AEEE AEAA 132 Playing krom the Playlist sorsisi sssi rtt rsa ni ITE NE ro AE KENI EAEE AE ERRATAS EN 132 Creating a new file from the Playlist ccc ccc ccc cece e eee e nee eeeeeneees 133 Configuring the Playlist as a Cutlist 20 0 ccc cece cece eee eee ene e eens e ee eeeenneeee 133 Saving a Playlist Cutlist Tile se 22220 dcsssced cicsananecdeiounsseesdeatine NEARE EN 134 Opening a Playlist Cutlist file 2 0 0 0 ccc ccc cece cece ene e ene e eee nent eeeeneneeee 134 Copying the Playlist Cutlist to the clipboard ccc cece een eee e eee eeeneees 134 Monitoring levels in digital AUdIO 1 ccc ccc cece eee een eeeeeeeeees 135 DGGIDGNS EE EEE cau heats cara wwe bea cae na tune cee eae ae E 135 Digital versus analog levels ccc cece cece ee eee eee e eee e eee eee eeeennes 135 Setting digital audio levels ccc eee eee een eee eeeeeeees 135 Channel Meters 1c ousccecctcecesaaeectersdiewsteberewskeaee bbacwctanecosweaeseeseens 135 Showing or hiding the Channel Meters window cece cece cece e een e ee nneeeees 136 SHOWING OF NIGINGINGClENS s 0000s4enest0s4eeceved cece AS TERERAA tare se cencehvouses 136 Resetting clipping indicators 1 ccc ccc cece cnet e eee e nent eeeeeeees 136 Changing the
558. st and choose Save As from the shortcut menu Use the Save Regions Playlist dialog to specify a folder and file name Click Save Opening a Playlist Cutlist file Importing a Playlist file offers the flexibility of using multiple Playlists for a file Opening a new Playlist file clears the current Playlist Make sure you have saved the current Playlist before continuing 1 From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and choose Open from the submenu or right click the Playlist Cutlist and choose Open from the shortcut menu Use the Open Regions Playlist window to browse to an existing regions file Specify the type of file you want to import from the Files of Type drop down list e Choose Playlist File sfl to import a Sound Forge Regions List Playlist file e Choose Session 8 File prm to import a file that supports both Session 8 and Sound Forge regions e Choose Windows Media Script File txt to import a file that includes Windows Media script commands e Choose Wave File wav to import markers and regions from another sound file Click Open Copying the Playlist Cutlist to the clipboard Editing a Playlist Cutlist in a text editor allows you to make an annotated list that you can print for reference From the Edit menu choose Playlist Cutlist and then choose Copy onto Clipboard or right click the Playlist Cutlist and choose Copy onto Clipboard from the shortcut menu The list is copied to the Windows clipboard for
559. st roll or a prerecord buffer click the Settings button For more information see Setting up pre and post roll on page 144 or Setting a prerecord buffer on page 145 d From the Mode drop down list ensure Normal or Create regions is selected Select the sound data you want to replace or click to position the cursor where you want to begin recording Tip Ifyou want to check your input levels before or during recording you can use the meters The peak meters represent the volume of the recording input For best results the peak level should be somewhere in the yellow range with an occasional red segment you want your input to be as loud as possible without clipping Select the Loop Playback button Click the Arm button if you want to begin recording as soon as possible after clicking the Record button The Arm button is optional but can allow for more accurate takes When you click Arm the wave device is opened and all recording buffers are loaded in order to minimize the amount of time between clicking the Record button and when recording Starts Click the Record button or press Ctril R Recording begins and the Time Display window and the data window s selection status bar will show the current record position Note During recording playback commands the Preferences dialog and commands that affect the recording data window are unavailable When recording reaches the end of the time selection the c
560. t or Shift Plug In Right buttons Once you have added all of the plug ins and specified the plug in chain order click the OK button Removing a plug in Select a plug in in the Apply Plug In Chain window and click the Remove Selected Plug In button Editing a plug in chain 1 2 From the FX Favorites menu choose Apply Plug In Chain Choose a preset from the Chain drop down list 214 CHAPTER 14 3 To bypass a plug in without removing it from the chain clear an effect s check box Reverb_ 4 To reorder the plug ins within the chain simply drag a plug in button to a new location information about using specific plug ins click the Plug In Help button 7 Setting a plug in s properties Click the plug in s button to select it and use the bottom half of the dialog box to adjust the effect s parameters For more Click the plug in s button to select it and use the bottom half of the dialog box to adjust the effect s parameters For more information about using specific plug ins click the Plug In Help button Loading an effects chain or plug in preset Loading a plug in chain preset Choose a setting from the Chain drop down list The preset chain is loaded using the saved settings for each DirectX and VST plug in in the chain Apply Plug In Chain One of These Days Chain x Empty Chain F i oj og Untitled nansl Drums a SSS c F V Vocals hs Previ
561. t Data that has positive and negative values and uses zero to represent silence Unlike the signed format twos complement is not used Instead negative values are represented by setting the highest bit of the binary number to one without complementing all other bits This is a format option when opening and saving RAW sound files Signed Data that has positive and negative twos complement values and uses zero to represent silence This is a format option when opening and saving raw sound files Signal to Noise Ratio The signal to noise ratio SNR is a measurement of the difference between a recorded signal and noise levels A high SNR is always the goal The maximum signal to noise ratio of digital audio is determined by the number of bits per sample In 16 bit audio the signal to noise ratio is 96 dB while in 8 bit audio its 48 dB However in practice this SNR is never achieved especially when using low end electronics Small Computer Systems Interface SCSI SCSI is a standard interface protocol for connecting devices to your computer The SCSI bus can accept up to seven devices at a time including CD ROM drives hard drives and samplers Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE SMPTE time code is used to synchronize time between devices The time code is calculated in hours minutes second frames where frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate Frame rates for SMPTE time code are 24 25 29 97 an
562. t Use equal loudness contour begins to drop in level Slower release times result in more data being included in RMS calculation Allows the scan to compensate for the Fletcher Munson Equal Loudness Contours Scan Levels The Fletcher Munson Equal Loudness Contours illustrate that very low and high frequency audio is less perceptible to the human ear than mid range audio Therefore selecting this option forces the scan to factor this into RMS calculation Clicking Scan Levels initiates Peak and RMS scans on the audio and displays the RMS level and the highest peak level detected When previewing a normalize effect the entire file must be scanned to preview even a small selection Clicking Scan Levels saves the current Peak and RMS values and allows you to preview different Normalize to settings without re scanning the entire file scantevels_ Current Peak and RMS levels Peak 1dB RMS 17 4dB An asterisk adjacent to a level value indicates that the value is not current This occurs when the selection is updated or the dialog is initially opened To update values click Scan Levels scanteves Noncurrent Peak and RMS levels Peak 0 1dB RMS 165 0 dB If values have never been calculated two dashes display Click Scan Levels to calculate values Scan Levels _ Nonexistent Peak and RMS levels Peak RMS oa Note f the RMS level never reaches the Ignore below threshold a value of 96 dB displays If t
563. t s settings at the playback cursor position are saved 1 Add plug ins to the chain 2 Adjust each plug in s properties 3 Typeaname in the Chain box Note You cannot modify default presets 212 CHAPTER 14 4 Click the Save Chain Preset button Plug In Chain Chain Mastering BL w lal fe Saving the settings from an individual plug in as a preset Note Effect automation envelope points are not saved with presets If you are using effect automation envelopes and save a preset during playback the effect s settings at the playback cursor position are saved Saving a preset for an individual DirectX plug in 1 Click the Show Plug In Window button to display the effect s parameters in a separate window 2 Typeaname in the Preset box 3 Click the Save Preset button oe Chorus Preset New Preset Saving a preset for an individual VST plug in 1 Click the Show Plug In Window button to display the effect s parameters in a separate window 2 Click the Save VST Preset As button E VST Plug In Preset female voice hard E ray Lp im The Save VST Preset dialog is displayed 3 Browse to the folder where you want to save the fxp file and type a name in the File name box 4 Click the Save button The current plug in settings are saved in the fxp file Saving a bank of VST plug in presets 1 Click the Show Plug In Window button to display the effect s
564. t affect the recording data window are unavailable Recording using MIDI timecode From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu 2 From the View menu choose Record Options The Record Options window is displayed 3 Use the Record Options window to set the MIDI timecode interval you want to record a From the Method drop down list choose Automatic MIDI Timecode b Choose a setting from the Mode drop down list to choose whether to create regions or record to a new window when recording is suspended and resumed For more information see Recording options on page 150 c Click the Settings button The MIDI Timecode Settings tab in the Record Settings dialog is displayed From the Input drop down list choose the trigger device Changing the setting here will also update the Input setting on the MIDI Sync tab in the Preferences dialog e Select the Timecode start check box and type a value in the edit box to indicate the timecode location when recording will begin f Select the Timecode stop check box and type a value in the edit box to indicate the timecode location when recording will end If you don t indicate a stop time recording will continue until you click the Stop button E g Select the Bound record length on timecode loss check box if you want to prevent recording beyond the specified end time This ensures that your record length is exact regardless of any inaccurat
565. t button to extract the selected regions Updating marker or region positions From the Edit menu choose Regions List and then choose Update from the submenu to move a marker or region to match the current cursor position or selection Tip To update a marker quickly right click the marker or region tag F and choose Update from the submenu 1 Ifthe Regions List isn t already visible choose View gt Metadata gt Regions List 2 Inthe Regions List window select the marker or region you want to update 3 Inthe data window indicate the new position of the marker or region e Ifyou want to update a marker s position place the cursor where you want to move the marker e Ifyou want to update a region s position select a range of data in the data window 4 From the Edit menu choose Regions List and then choose Update from the submenu e Ifyou are updating a marker the marker moves to the cursor position If you have a range of data selected the cursor will blink at one end of a selection press the Home key to move the cursor to the beginning of the selection or press End to move to the end of the selection 124 CHAPTER 8 e Ifyou are updating a region the beginning and ending points of the region are moved to match the current selection and the length of the region is modified if the selection is a different length than the original region Tip Hold Alt while dragging a region tag to move a region while preservin
566. t controls in the effect dialog click the Help button 2 WORKING WITH EFFECTS 205 4 Click the Preview button to test out the effect Adjust the settings as needed and click Stop to end the preview Tips Ifthe selection you made in the data window needs to be adjusted click the Selection button to adjust the selection e When using the Event tool click the Go to Previous Event and Go to Next Event buttons to navigate to the events you selected and preview and modify the effect for each event 5 Click OK During processing a progress meter is displayed at the bottom of the data window You can cancel the operation at any time by clicking the Cancel button to the left of the progress meter or you can press the Escape key Saving effect settings as a custom preset After you have adjusted the parameters in the effect dialog you may want to save your settings as a custom preset for later use You can select the preset from the Preset drop down list to apply the same settings at a later time 1 Adjust the parameters in the effect dialog to achieve the effect you want 2 Click the Save Preset button The Save Preset dialog is displayed 3 Enteranew preset name and click OK The new preset is added to the Preset drop down list Using the Plug In Manager You have several tools to help you manage your plug ins including the Plug In Manager FX Favorites menu and the Preset Manager The Plug In
567. t curves now default to a linear curve in the processing and Mix dialogs Added Remember last used Save As folder to the General tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see General tab on page 331 e Added plain text file option for saving and opening a file s regions list and playlist cutlist For more information see Saving a regions playlist file on page 126 and Importing a regions playlist file on page 126 e You can now rearrange maximized data window tabs by dragging the tabs to a new location e Added automatic resampling during playback for unsupported sample rates For more information see Editing file properties on page 105 e Added support for splitting events at region boundaries For more information see Splitting events at region boundaries on page 174 e Added support for moving markers regions and envelope points with events The Options gt Paste Markers Regions command is now Options gt Lock to Selection gt Markers Regions and Options gt Lock to Selection gt Envelope Points e Added support for ripple editing in event editing mode Choose Options gt Event gt Auto Ripple to toggle automatic ripple editing for downstream events For more information see Auto ripple events on page 175 e Improved audio playback and recording device routing in the Preferences gt Audio tab For more information see Audio tab on page 342 Welcome After Sound Forge Pro software is installed and you start it
568. t event in the data window Choose Extend to Next Event or Extend to Previous Event to extend the current selection to the next or previous event in the data window Choose Extend to First Event or Extend to Last Event to extend the current selection to the first or last event in the data window Selecting events using keyboard shortcuts You can use the following keyboard shortcuts to select events while using the Event tool Command Keyboard shortcut Select the next event Shift Right Arrow Select the previous event Shift Left Arrow Select the first event Shift Home Select the last event Shift End Extend the selection to the next event Shift Ctrl Right Arrow Extend the selection to the previous event Shift Ctrl Left Arrow Extend the selection to the first event Shift Ctrl Home Extend the selection to the last event Shift Ctrl End USING THE EVENT TOOL 179 Selecting multiple events You can select multiple events in your project using two methods Selecting nonadjacent events 1 Hold the Ctrl key 2 Select the events by clicking them To deselect an event click it again to toggle the event selection on or off m wi f L f i i lt nw 5 m E a m m m e ie 4 gt 1 16 066 Selected events Selecting a range of events 1 Hold the Shift key 2 Click the first event that you want to select 3 Click the last event that you want to select All events between the first and last selected
569. t folder ist and click the Delete Layout button 4 Click OK to close the Organize Layouts dialog and apply your changes Customizing the Time Display window From the Options menu choose Time Display and choose an option from the submenu to adjust the Time Display window settings To display the Time Display window choose Time Display from the View menu Tip Right click the Time Display window and choose an option from the shortcut menu Option Description Position When selected the Time Display window shows the position of the edit or play cursor The format of the display will depend on the Status Format setting For more information see Selecting status formats on page 87 Sync Trigger Status When selected the Time Display window shows incoming MIDI timecode and trigger signals Note The current MIDI Input port is set on the MIDI Sync tab of the Preferences dialog Playlist Position When selected the Time Display window shows the position of the cursor relative to the beginning of the playlist during playback from the Playlist window The format of the display will depend on the Status Format setting For more information see Selecting status formats on page 87 CD Track Position When selected the Time Display window shows disc at once CD track numbers In this mode the Time Display will show track numbers and the running time for each track Negative values indicate the pause time before a track Time Display 0
570. t multiple envelope points in the selected data window Adding envelope points To create more complex envelopes you will need to add points To add an envelope point double click the envelope You can then drag and position the point as necessary To delete a point right click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Flipping an envelope You can flip an envelope to invert the envelope around its center Volume panning and effect automation envelopes can be flipped Flipping all points 1 Right click an envelope or a point A shortcut menu is displayed 2 Choose Flip All Points from the shortcut menu Flipping selected points 1 Create atime selection with the Envelope tool s to select the points you want to flip 2 Right click an envelope in the time selection A shortcut menu is displayed 3 Choose Flip Selected Points from the shortcut menu Setting fade properties You can adjust the fade curve for each envelope segment individually To change the fade curve right click an envelope segment and choose a fade command such as Linear Fade or Fast Fade for example from the shortcut menu Cutting copying and pasting envelope points 1 Select the Envelope tool 2 Click within a data window to select it 3 Drag horizontally in a data window to select envelope points 4 From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy WORKING WITH EFFECTS 225 5 Click to position the cursor where you want to paste envel
571. t numeric keypad Ctrl E Ctrl 8 Ctrl P forward slash not numeric keypad Ctrl I Ctrl D Keyboard Shortcut Ctrl N Ctrl O Ctrl R Ctrl Shift R Ctrl S F3 Shift F3 Ctrl F3 Ctrl Shift F3 Drag and drop shortcuts Drag and drop allows you to quickly perform operations crossing between open data windows the Playlist Cutlist window the Regions List and the time ruler Command Function Drag to New To create a new file from the current selection drag the selection to an open area of the Sound Forge desktop Note You can also drag regions from the Regions List to the desktop Drag Mix To mix a selection drag the selection from the source to the place where you want to mix the selected data You can drag the selection to the same data window or another data window Drag Paste To paste a selection hold Ctrl and drag the selection from the source to the place where you want to paste the selected data You can drag the selection to the same data window or another data window Drag to Regions List To add the current selection to the Regions List drag it to the Regions List You can also drag regions from the Regions List to the Playlist Drag to Playlist To add a region from the Regions List to a playlist drag it from the waveform display or the Regions List to the Playlist Cutlist window You can also drag regions within a playlist to rearrange the playback order Drag to Time Ruler To create a region d
572. t the top of the event 2 When you see the envelope cursor drag the volume envelope to the desired level As you drag the event s decibel level is displayed in a ToolTip You can make fine adjustments by holding Ctrl or clicking the right mouse button while dragging the envelope Volume envelope i Gain is 1 00 dB Decibel level Note When you have multiple events selected the gain of all selected events is adjusted simultaneously USING THE EVENT TOOL 177 Setting an event s fade in and fade out The event handles allow you to change an event s fade in and out volume You can also change the type of curve that the event uses to control the volume s fade in or fade out 1 Place the mouse pointer on a handle upper corners of the event The pointer changes to the fade cursor 2 Click the corner of the event and drag to create a fade i 7 SPW Fade Offset 00 00 04 555 To remove a fade drag the end of the fade curve back to the edge of the event Changing an event s fade curve You can set the shape of the fade curve fast linear slow smooth or sharp that an event uses to raise or lower the volume over time To access the different fade curves right click anywhere in the event s fade in or fade out region and choose Fade Type from the shortcut menu Right click to select the fade curve type ik Fast L Linear Slow Smooth Sharp Applying processes and effects to event
573. t which you want to Start playback in the SMPTE time box MIDI SYNCHRONIZATION 271 Triggering recording with MIDI timecode You can use MIDI timecode to trigger Sound Forge recording to another device For more information see Recording audio automatically on page 148 Note f Trigger from MIDI Timecode is not selected when you open the Record dialog Sound Forge Pro software will turn it on temporarily when you choose the Automatic MIDI Timecode recording mode to allow recording and turn it off again when you close the Record dialog Pre queuing data for synchronization From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Pre Queue for MIDI Timecode from the submenu if you want to open the wave device and preload data from the next region to be played in the Playlist Pre queuing helps ensure that audio will begin playing the moment the designated SMPTE time is detected by Sound Forge software when triggering from MIDI timecode MTC Note This option is suspended when any other audio command is used such as Play Stop or Record Using MIDI triggers You can use MIDI triggers to control Sound Forge Pro functions using MIDI commands from external devices such as a MIDI keyboard or sequencer Configuring an internal or external MIDI controller 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and then click the MIDI Sync tab 2 On the MIDI Sync tab choose the trigger device from the Input drop down list and click the OK bu
574. t you have added to the toolbar by adding png files to your Script Menu folder 1 Create a png file with the icon that you want to use Note cons should be 16x16 pixels Transparency is supported 2 Save the png file in your Script Menu folder using the same name as the name of the script that you want it to represent i e to assign a custom icon to the HelloWorld js script the icon should be saved as HelloWorld js png Note The Script Menu folder can typically be found in the following location C Program Files Sony Sound Forge Pro 11 0 Script Menu 3 Customize the toolbar as needed The custom icons will display on the Scripting toolbar the next time you start the application Running a script You can run scripts using a single click if you have customized the Scripting toolbar to include buttons for scripts that you have created 1 Click in the data window where you want to apply the script to establish focus 2 Click the button of the script that you would like to run on the Scripting toolbar Tip You may need to hover a button to display a ToolTip which displays the name of the script associated with the button 254 CHAPTER 16 Using the Batch Converter You can use the Batch Converter to modify and manipulate audio files without having to process each file individually Converting files 1 From the Tools menu choose Batch Converter The Batch Converter window is displayed g Batch Conwerter anel o
575. ted snapshot button to exclude it from the display 3 Select the Hide active plot button amp to hide the current spectrum so you can concentrate on your snapshots USING SPECTRUM ANALYSIS 299 Erasing snapshots You don t need to erase individual snapshots to update or replace them Simply click the Set Snapshot button and then click a snapshot button 1 in the Spectrum Analysis toolbar to update its image If you want to erase all snapshots click the Clear all snapshots button Viewing snapshot statistics Information about each snapshot is displayed at the bottom of the Spectrum Analysis window Settings Printing the graph Click the Print button amp to print the contents of the Spectrum Analysis window including the graph and statistics data Using a sonogram The sonogram is another way of displaying spectral data variations over time In a sonogram the X horizontal axis represents time and the Y vertical axis represents frequency Spectrum Analysis Ea 2 048 Blackman Harris v 2 28 s a fal EM 123 4 4 8 4 950 3 680 2 944 2 208 1 472 73 Freg 0 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 603 00 00 04 417 00 00 05 231 i 40 do EEE 109 d Frequency Hz File Start End Settings 00 00 08 044 00 00 09 858 Position Active Example musicbed 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 2 048 Blackman Harris 75 Slice Peak The amplitude of ea
576. terrestrial satellite cable and or other distribution channels streaming applications via internet intranets and or other networks other content distribution systems pay audio or audio on demand applications and the like or on physical media compact discs digital versatile discs semiconductor chips hard drives memory cards and the like An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http mp3licensing com Sony Creative Software Inc 8215 Greenway Blvd Suite 400 Middleton WI 53562 USA The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a guarantee or commitment on behalf of Sony Creative Software Inc in any way All updates or additional information relating to the contents of this manual will be posted on the Sony Creative Software Inc web site located at http www sonycreativesoftware com The software is provided to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement and Software Privacy Policy and must be used and or copied in accordance therewith Copying or distributing the software except as expressly described in the End User License Agreement is strictly prohibited No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express written consent of Sony Creative Software Inc Copyright 2013 Sony Creative Software Inc Program Copyright 2013 Sony Creative Software Inc All rights reserved
577. tes the MIDI note that will cause a sampler to play the sound file at the pitch sample rate it was originally recorded Click the down arrow to choose a new unity note and octave METADATA WINDOWS 57 Item Description Fine tune Allows you to pitch shift the unity note up from 0 to 99 999 cents Sound Forge software does not fine tune the sound file when fine tuning is used and not all samplers support the setting This option is an informational setting that will be transmitted to a sampler via a sample transfer procedure A sampler such as the K2000 can use this information to play back the sample The K2000 should accurately display this information on the Master Sample Misc page as Pitch Adjust SMPTE format Indicates the type of SMPTE offset that has been set for the file SMPTE offset Indicates whether a SMPTE time offset has been set for the file Sound Forge software Summary Information window Ctrl Alt M 7 ignores this offset value and not all samplers can store a SMPTE offset value in the sample From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Summary Information from the submenu to display the Summary Information window where you can view and edit information saved in the active file If the data you want to edit is not displayed in the window you can right click the window choose Insert from the shortcut menu and then choose a metadata field from the submenu FourCC Code Name Description IARL Arch
578. th forward and in reverse O HKH Wry H Be fae o 00 tans 00 00 00 000 00 03 30 427 1 1 024 Note You can also drag the Normal Rate indicator which is located below the scrub control to adjust playback speed or double click Rate and type a playback rate Scrubbing on the timeline You can scrub the project by using the timeline 1 Position the cursor on the timeline hover the mouse pointer over the cursor and press Ctrl The mouse pointer changes to a speaker icon 2 Left click and drag the mouse left or right to scrub the timeline The cursor changes again to a pan scrub icon pee jena t ek Fa q V Press Ctrl over the Left click and timeline cursor drag to scrub Scrubbing with the keyboard Keyboard scrub letters Reverse Pause Forward Three letters JKL are used as a keyboard scrub control e Press J for reverse playback Press again to accelerate the playback rate Press K to pause playback e Press L for forward playback Press again to accelerate the playback rate There are several ways to adjust the playback speed e Hold K while pressing J or L to emulate a shuttle knob mode e Press K J to turn the knob to the left or K L to turn the knob to the right e Press K again or Spacebar to return to normal mode 92 CHAPTER 5 Scrubbing with the audio event locator Holding Ctrl and dragging the mouse within the overview bar initiates playback of small audio loops adjacent to the cursor posit
579. that not all sound data is being loaded from a compressed file try checking this option and reopening the file Tip Ifyou change the setting of this check box delete any proxy sfap0 files associated with compressed WAV files Select this check box if you want the software to remember the last used sample rate when you open a vox file When the check box is cleared you will be prompted to choose a sample rate each time you open a vox file Select this check box if you want the software to remember the last used settings when you open raw files When the check box is cleared you will be prompted to choose a settings each time you open a raw file Select this check box if you want to turn on the Hidden file attribute when creating new peak sfk and proxy sfap0 files In the Windows Control Panel double click Folder Options and select the View tab Select the Show hidden files and folders radio button if you want to be able to see hidden files Select this check box if you want to delete the peak sfk and proxy sfap0O files associated with a media file when you close a data window Select this check box if you want to use the last folder where you saved a file when using Save As or Render As The first time you save a file in Sound Forge the Documents folder is used When the check box is cleared files are saved to their current folder CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 331 Option Allow Wave renders up to
580. the Pencil tool will be available Choose a setting from the drop down list to set the speed that will be used for scrubbing the timeline with the JKL keys or with a multimedia controller Specify the amount of RAM you want Sound Forge Pro to reserve for media recently read from or written to disk Reserving excessive amounts of RAM may decrease overall performance To turn off the cache choose 0 Type a value in the Wet Gain box or use the spinner to set the default level of the processed signal that will be mixed into the output Type a value in the Dry Gain box or use the spinner to set the default level of the unprocessed signal that will be mixed into the output Type a value in the Fade In box or use the spinner to set the default length of the fade in between the processed and unprocessed signal Ps Click the Fade Curves button the speed of the fade in and choose a curve type from the menu to set Type a value in the Fade Out box or use the spinner to set the default length of the fade out between the processed and unprocessed signal a Click the Fade Curves button the speed of the fade out and choose a curve type from the menu to set The Labels tab allows you modify the default names that are assigned to data windows regions and markers Editing default data window names The Window labels section of the Labels tab allows you to modify the names that are assigned to new data win
581. the Preset Manager on page 226 Previewing processed audio You can preview the effect that a process has on a file by using the Preview button found in most audio processing dialogs You can use previews to fine tune effect parameters without leaving the dialog More importantly using previews reduces wasted processing time Setting custom preview parameters You can customize the preview parameters to satisfy your editing preferences You can save custom previewing settings for the current process alone or for all processes 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog is displayed 2 Click the Previews tab 3 Edit the preview parameters as desired For more information see Previews tab on page 339 4 Click OK The new preview parameters are updated and saved for all effects Bypassing a process while previewing You are also able to A B test an effect by using the Bypass check box to switch between previewing the processed and unprocessed audio file e If you select the Bypass check box the unprocessed audio file is played when you click the Preview button e Ifyou clear the Bypass check box the processed audio file is played when you click the Preview button Graphic Fade Wow sound editing Preset Sys 3 dB exponential fade out O Xx Preview button Bypass check box 6 7 3 5 dB at 00 00 01 074 Maximum Gain 100 0dB 200 4 6dB 400 12 dB
582. the current playback mode Playback for musical instrument files behaves slightly differently than playback in a normal data window e If no samples are selected click Play to play all samples from the cursor position to the end of the data window e If you have samples selected click Play to play all selected samples from the cursor position to the end of the data window Tip Select the Spacebar and F12 Play Pause instead of Play Stop check box in the General Preferences tab if you want the F12 and spacebar keyboard shortcuts to toggle between Play and Pause mode In this mode the cursor will maintain its position Pause Pauses playback and maintains the cursor at its current position Stop Stops playback and returns the cursor to its prior position pr Go to Start Moves the cursor to the start of the file Go to Previous Track Moves the cursor to the previous disc at once track or index Hold Ctrl while clicking to skip index markers or hold Shift to extend a selection Note This button is available only if disc at once tracks are present in your data window Rewind Moves the cursor backward in the current file Forward Moves the cursor forward in the current file Go to Next Track Moves the cursor to the next disc at once track or index Hold Ctrl while clicking to skip index markers or press Shift to extend a selection Note This button is available only if disc at once tracks are present in your data
583. the data window Effects and processes can be applied to individual events or multiple selected events You can select an individual sample by clicking the event in the data window hold Ctrl or Shift to select multiple samples B Funk Bass Sm a i Bank0 A cy F 0 Funk Slap Bass 8 samples Pb Funk ssp Gt IP Fe Pon ct WPF Sip at WFR Pon cz a acai Funk Pop Bass 7 samples y Funk Slap amp Pop 15 samples 00 00 00 000 Funk Split D3 10 samples ira Funk Slap NV 8 samples 2 54 FunkPop NV 7 samples Funk Slap amp Pop NV 15 samples Sa Funk Split D3 NV 10 samples Funk Slap NC 8 samples FunkPop NC 7 samples 10 Funk Slap amp Pop NC 15 samples 11 Funk Split D3 NC 10 samples ae Sample Pool 15 Funk Slap G1 4 Funk Pop G1 A Funk Slap A 1 Funk Pop C2 4 Funk Slap C2 K gt Ei of 00 00 00 000 1 128 00 00 00 500 00 00 01 000 PEE eai taiant patne p A Yo E m el Fe el A BB on Oi amp WN oO EEEEEEEEEEE He FE FE allel lt a i gt elite ae 264 CHAPTER 17 You can select all samples in a bank by clicking the bank in the left pane D 1 Funk Pop Bass 7 samples as M A Slap Bass 8 samples F gpl kegel nepal bggbegal bagga enya 2 Funk Slap amp Pop 15 samples C 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 3 Funk Split D3 10 samp
584. the default keyboard mapping 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Keyboard The Customize Keyboard dialog is displayed 2 Choose Default from the Keyboard map drop down list and click OK to restore the default configuration CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 347 348 CHAPTER 25 Appendix A Shortcuts This appendix contains information about the shortcuts you can use to make editing in Sound Forge Pro software quicker and easier Keyboard shortcuts The following shortcuts represent the default configuration Your system may differ if you ve used the Customize Keyboard window to customize your keyboard shortcuts For more information see Customizing keyboard shortcuts on page 346 The available shortcut keys are arranged in tables according to function Project file shortcuts Command Keyboard Shortcut Create a new data window Ctrl N Create a new data window without displaying the New Window dialog Ctrl Shift N Open a sound file or project Ctrl O Save modified sound data back to the file Ctrl S Display File Properties window Alt Enter Close the active data window Ctrl W Exit Sound Forge Alt F4 SHORTCUTS 349 Magnification and view shortcuts Command Keyboard Shortcut Set input focus to the waveform display in the active window Alt 0 Show set input focus to the Explorer window Alt 1 Show set input focus to the File Properties window Alt 2 or Alt Enter Show set input focus to the Video Preview
585. tichannel files You can open multichannel audio files just like any other supported media type For more information see Getting media files on page 61 When you open the file you ll notice that the data window displays the channels as stereo pairs lt m HOD e mm a OOnN WA ee m 00 00 00 000 00 01 29 908 1 7 744 You can then edit the file just as you would any mono or stereo file Click the Minimize button to reduce the height of individual channels or click the Restore button E to restore a channel s height Hold Shift while clicking a Minimize button to minimize all channels except the one you clicked Tip You can use the Display tab in the Preferences dialog to change the colors used to represent each channel For more information see Display tab on page 333 116 CHAPTER 7 Recording multichannel audio files With Sound Forge you have the ability to record multichannel audio if your hardware supports this feature For more information see Recording multichannel audio on page 154 Using the hardware meters From the View menu choose Hardware Meters to toggle the display of the Hardware Meters window You can use this window to adjust the levels of your audio device s hardware outputs for monitoring and to view a peak meter VU PPM meter phase scope and mono compatibility meter E e es i ie de 81 72 63 54 45 3 27 18 3 u 10 4 240 1 2 _ 81 72 63 54 45 35 27 18
586. timating DC Offset You can estimate the DC offset of an audio file by choosing Statistics from the Tools menu E Statistics Example music bed Ruler Format Time Level Format Decibels dB rsor positon Time 00 00 00 000 Sample value at cursor dB 52 139 Minimum sample position Time 00 00 01 096 Minimum sample value dB 0 723 Maximum sample position Time 00 00 01 101 Maximum sample value dB 2 228 RMS level dB 22 690 Average value dB 45 060 Average DC offset value Zero crossings Hz 1 141 62 Cony to Gipboard PROCESSING AUDIO 191 DC Offset controls Choose DC Offset from the Process menu to display the DC Offset dialog The following controls are located in the DC Offset dialog Control Description Automatically detect and Calculates and corrects the DC offset for each channel individually remove Adjust DC offset by Allows you to specify a DC offset value manually 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 for 32 bit data 8 388 608 to 8 388 607 for 24 bit data 32 768 to 32 767 for 16 bit data 128 to 127 for 8 bit data Compute DC offset from first 5 Selecting this check box specifies that only the first five seconds of a file are analyzed seconds only when measuring the DC offset Be aware that five seconds is not sufficient if the beginning of a file has a long fade in or mute EQ Three EQ options are available in the Process menu Graphic Paragraphic and Parametric Each of these opt
587. ting Preset 5ys 3 dB exponential fade out OX Maximum Gain 100 0dB 200 5 dB 400 12 dB Show wave a 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733 5 Click the Save Preset button The Save Preset dialog appears 6 Enter a name for the preset and click OK The new preset is saved and added to the dialog s drop down list Deleting presets To delete a preset choose it from the Preset drop down list and click the Delete Preset button x Note Built in presets cannot be deleted Resetting parameters To reset all dialog controls to their default settings right click the dialog and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu Graphic Fade Wow sound editing Preset Sys 3 dB exponential fade out HX z Reset Channel Meters 100 o 739 Pre roll Bypass Post rall 50 9 Select Original Select All Data an Reset All Sawe Current gt Or wee a Preferences 00 Maximum Gain 100 0dB 200 46dB 400 12 dB 00 00 00 000 00 00 05 000 00 00 05 000 182 CHAPTER 13 Managing presets After you have created custom presets you can use the Sound Forge Preset Manager to back up transfer or delete custom presets from any of the installed effects processes tools and plug ins You can also use the Preset Manager to manage your ACID and Vegas presets For more information see Using
588. ting events on page 179 Note When you re working with multichannel files only the selected region in the selected channel is processed Most functions can be applied to an individual channel or all channels However because the channels in a multichannel file must be equal in length functions that affect the length of the data cannot be performed on individual channels These functions include Insert Silence Resample Time Stretch Gapper Snipper Pitch Bend and Pitch Shift without preserving duration If you want to apply one of these processes in a single channel convert the file into separate mono files you can select a channel and drag it to the Sound Forge workspace to create a new file quickly apply the process and merge the files into anew multichannel file Choose a command from the Process Effects or FX Favorites menu The dialog for the selected effect is displayed Plug in online help Sony Simple Delay Shine Preset Preset Hx 9 0 dB 3 0 dB i l Delay time 0 001 to 5 0 seconds 0 Preview lt 4 Preview Stop F Bypass W Real time Effect controls V Multiple delays Feedback Decay time 0 1t0 20 0 seconds 2 0 Dry out Delay out Inf to 0 dB Inf to 0 dB ee CPU o 00 00 00 000 00 00 30 650 00 00 30 650 Go to Previous Next Event buttons Choose a preset from the Preset drop down list and adjust the parameters in the dialog to achieve the effect you want For help on the differen
589. ting will work well for most applications but you can increase the setting if very high quality output is desired for uncommon source or destination sampling rates Cutoff scaling Allows you to scale the cutoff frequency of the plug in s low pass filter from the Nyquist frequency Typical values are near 1 Higher values will offer a flatter pass band and lower values will offer better aliasing suppression Alias suppression Sets the amount of suppression in the low pass filter s stop band Frequencies in the stop band that are not fully attenuated will result in aliasing Higher settings will result in better quality and lower settings can minimize CPU load 202 CHAPTER 13 Item Description Prering Low pass filters are characterized by the amount of ringing they introduce into their output Higher Steepness settings produce increased ringing A setting of 100 produces a linear phase filter with equal pre and post ringing A setting of 0 produces a minimum phase filter that offers no preringing but has nonlinear phase distortion Intermediate settings allow a tradeoff between preringing and postringing and allows you to linearize phase in the pass band Set the sample rate only do Select this check box to change the playback rate without resampling the data This not resample means that the original pitch of the file is not preserved 3 Click OK Reverse The Reverse command reverses the audio selection 1 Open the Musicb
590. tion playback occurs from the beginning of the selection to the end of the selection Effects from the Plug In Chain are previewed in real time when you play back the file To bypass the plug in chain bypass the chain in the Plug In Chain window For more information see Previewing the effects chain on page 212 1 Play as Sample Click to set playback to Sample mode When you click the Play button while in Sample mode playback will adhere to the following rules If the file contains loops the loops will repeat as many times as specified on the Edit Sample dialog Use this to listen to a sound file as it would sound when played by a sampler If the file does not contain any loops the file will be played once from beginning to end Note This button is not displayed unless a sample loop has been defined in your file p Play as Cutlist Click to begin playback from the cursor position skipping any cutlist regions Note This button is not displayed unless you have playlist cutlist regions defined and have set your playlist cutlist to Cutlist mode To use Cutlist mode choose Playlist Cutlist from the Edit menu and then choose Treat as Cutlist from the submenu Scroll bar Within the scroll bar the box represents the portion of the waveform shown in the waveform display Drag to scroll the sound file forward and backward in time to see parts of the file not currently visible in the waveform display Tip You can drag the end o
591. tion see Repeating an operation on page 159 Edit Tool Selects the Edit tool Magnify Tool Selects the Magnify tool For more information see Using the Magnify tool on page 96 Pencil Tool Selects the Pencil tool For more information see Repairing audio glitches manually with the Pencil tool on page 165 Event Tool Selects the Event tool For more information see Using the Event Tool on page 171 Envelope Tool Selects the Envelope tool For more information see Adjusting envelopes on page 225 Interactive Tutorials Opens the Interactive Tutorials window where you can select tutorials and learn about the features in Sound Forge Transport toolbar The Transport toolbar also displays by default and contains basic audio transport buttons Record Click to display the Record dialog For more information see Recording on page 143 Loop Playback Plays the selected data in a continuous mode Note f there is no selection the entire sound file is played in an endless loop Play All Click to play the entire file from beginning to end regardless of cursor position selection or playlist Playback for musical instrument files behaves slightly differently than playback in a normal data window If no samples are selected click Play All to play all samples in the data window If you have samples selected click Play All to play all selected samples in the data window Play Click to play back the file in
592. tion about using processing dialog controls see Processing Audio on page 181 Extracting regions to new files From the Tools menu choose Extract Regions to create new files from regions in the Regions List 1 From the Tools menu choose Extract Regions The Extract Regions dialog is displayed 2 Inthe Regions to extract box select the regions you want to extract You can hold the Ctrl or Shift keys to select multiple regions 3 Inthe Destination folder box specify the folder where the extracted regions will be saved or click the Browse button to choose a new folder 4 Typeaname in the File name prefix box if you want add a prefix to extracted regions For example enter Test to extract the files Test Region 001 wav Test Region 002 wav Test Region 003 wav and so on Note Select the Use long file names for destination file names check box to allow file names of up to 128 characters including spaces The files names will consist of the value in the File name prefix box and the region name When this check box is cleared file names will conform to the 8 3 naming convention These names consist of the first 5 characters from the File name prefix and a unique three digit number starting with the number specified in the Start file counter index box For example if you have 4 regions selected for extraction and your prefix is set to PREFIX the names used will be PREFIO00 wav PREFIO01 wav PREFIOO2 wav PREFIOO3 wav 5 Click the Extrac
593. tions on page 150 Click the Settings button The Threshold Settings tab in the Record Settings dialog is displayed Drag the Threshold fader to set the audio level at which recording will begin Drag the Release slider to set the amount of time the audio level should be below the Threshold setting before recording will stop Select the Automatically rearm after record check box if you want to continue monitoring audio levels and recording until you click the Stop button E Click OK to close the Record Settings dialog 148 CHAPTER 10 3 Click the Arm button in the data window where you want to record The Record status value in the Record Options window indicates that recording is armed and the meters in the Record Options window monitor the level from your recording input Recording will begin when the audio signal meets the threshold level and will stop after the level falls below the threshold for the specified release time Recording begins at the cursor position and the Time Display window and the data window s selection status bar will show the current record position If the destination window contains a selection that is shorter than the timer duration recording will stop at the end of the selection If the destination window contains a selection that is longer than the timer duration recording will stop at the end of the timer duration Note During recording playback commands the Preferences dialog and commands tha
594. tions to hold peaks and valleys GLOSSARY 367 Chorus Chorusing is an effect created by combining a signal with a modulating delayed copy of itself This effect creates the illusion of multiple sources creating the same sound Clipboard The clipboard is where sample data is saved when you cut or copy it from a data window You can then paste mix or crossfade the sample data stored on the clipboard with another data window This sample data can also be used by other Windows applications that support Sound data on the clipboard such as Sound Recorder Clipping Occurs when the amplitude of a sound is above the maximum allowed recording level In digital systems clipping is seen as a clamping of the data to a maximum value such as 32 767 in 16 bit data Clipping causes sound to distort Codec Coder Decoder refers to any technology for compressing and decompressing data The term codec can refer to software hardware or a combination of both technologies Compression Ratio audio A compression ratio controls the ratio of input to output levels above a specific threshold This ratio determines how much a signal has to rise above the threshold for every 1 dB of increase in the output For example with a ratio of 3 1 the input level must increase by three decibels to produce a one decibel output level increase Threshold 10 dB Compression Ratio 3 1 Input 7 dB Output 9 dB Because the input is 3 dB louder than the threshol
595. tivate the Voiceover pca data window and click the Go To Start button ki on the playbar The cursor moves to the start of the file 84 CHAPTER 4 5 From the Edit menu choose Paste Special and choose Mix from the submenu or click the Mix button The Mix Replace dialog appears Mix Replace Wow sound editing Preset Untitled x Source Clipboard Destination Wow sound editing Cancel 0 00 dB 0 00 dB 100 00 100 00 TERPEN El Bypass Start 00 00 00 000 Start 00 00 00 000 End 00 00 02 997 End 00 00 02 997 M Real time Channels i Channels 1 Volume Teal ese ca Volume E nf wsd Z Invert data inf to 6 dE E Invert data Fade In 00 00 00 000 eam Proportional fade lengths Fade Out 00 00 00 000 aba Total mixlength 00 00 02 997 More CPU 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 997 00 00 02 997 6 Verify that the Source and Destination volume faders are set to 0 dB and click OK The drum hit is mixed equally with the spoken passage B Wow sound editing p X Evo Elsie Ey a 4 00 00 00 000 j00 00 01 000 l 00 00 02 000 f j00 00 03 000 lt It gt oe o COOK dp rp ae wisi 00 00 00 000 00 00 02 997 1 290 Preview the file and notice that mixing does not change the length of the file Using Undo and Redo You can easily undo and redo edit operations even prior to your last save operation e Youcan undo any edit ope
596. to the default values right click the processing dialog and choose Reset Fade Values from the shortcut menu To save default fade in and out values adjust the Fade In and Fade Out controls and then right click the processing dialog and choose Save Fade Values from the shortcut menu Learning more about a specific effect For more information about each effect see Sound Forge effects on page 226 Learning more about a specific process For more information about each process see Sound Forge processes on page 185 222 CHAPTER 14 Automating effect parameters When you add an effect that supports automation to the Plug In Chain you can click the Show Parameters button to display the effect s automatable parameters You can use these controls to show hide and enable bypass automation envelopes Plug In Chain E Chain D X m ot ele Chorus Preset Untitled m o E Modulation Rate q E Modulation Depth E Delay Feedback W Chorus Size J Invert Chorus Phase E Invert Feedback Phase E Attenuate High Frequencies F Attenuation Frequencies F Input Gain Dry Out E Chorus Out SSCS H C IS CS S EEE A A A A A A A A BA A B Runace CPU Plug in parameters can be edited using the plug in s controls or the automation envelope in the data window Note Choosing a new effect chain preset will clear the current effect automation settings Adding a volume
597. tput e When you choose Monitor Input Sound Forge will monitor the recording devices selected on the Record page of the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 342 e When you choose Monitor Output Sound Forge will monitor the playback devices selected on the Playback page of Audio tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Audio tab on page 342 Notes e When Monitor Output is selected the post processing signal is monitored when you start playback from the Plug In Chain Real time spectrum analysis can require significant processing power If the spectrum graph s refresh rate seems sluggish set the display mode to Line Graph decrease the FFT size or turn off snapshots Viewing frequency and amplitude values notes and statistics As you move the cursor through the spectrum graph the amplitude and frequency values at the current position are displayed in a ToolTip next to the cursor and in the Statistics area at the bottom of the window Spectrum Analysis fea 2 048 Bladmentins 2s a EMm 123 4 4 pet fT ft ft Tt OA A VW WEY WY wy ae 93 1 dB at 2 664 Hz Mono E o oo E a wT Ww Use the cursor to display amplitude and frequency values 123 Snapshot 1 45 dB at 86 Hz 2 Statistics area Right click the graph and choose Show Position from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of To
598. tretch from the submenu For information about using the lastique Timestretch plug in click the Help button E in the lastique Timestretch dialog or refer to the Sound Forge online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index PROCESSING AUDIO 203 Volume The Volume command alters the volume of an audio selection Volume Example music bed ne WHET x 0 00 dB Cancel 100 00 Preview El Bypass Gain i Mores 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 Increasing the volume of a selection 1 Open the Voiceover pca file 2 Create a selection containing the word Wow 3 From the Process menu choose Volume The Volume dialog is displayed 4 From the Preset drop down list choose 6 dB boost 200 and click OK The specified boost is applied to the selection 5 Play the file The Wow data clips and distorts upon playback Exercise caution when using the Volume command Unlike Normalize Volume performs no pre processing scans and offers no options for clipping audio data B wow sound editing 2 Ea p JF tence EE iow EME Sound itin ust ges esser EETA ese Create a selection AE 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 04 0 Inf 4 Volume Wow sound editing P m Preset Hax 4 0 intitled Sys 6 dB Boost 200 Cancel Sys 6 dB Cut 50 Le lt u hob le mb Sys Mute l Preview 00 00 00 742 00 00 01 475 00 00 00 733
599. ts all open data windows To change a channel s output device using the Channel Meters window click the channel number and choose a new output port from the menu Channel Meters BE Ela Left Front ek Right Front 13 Center d LFE 24 Left Rear 2 Right Rear ll i il For more information about changing channel assignments in the Preferences dialog see Audio tab on page 342 MONITORING LEVELS IN DIGITAL AUDIO 137 VU and Peak Program Meters You can display volume unit VU and peak program PPM meters in the Channel Meters and Hardware Meters windows to help you determine the perceived loudness of your audio signal peak program meters provide faster response times to volume increases than VU meters For more information about channel meters see Channel Meters on page 135 For more information about hardware meters see Using the hardware meters on page 117 VU PPM meters are especially helpful when you re mastering Comparing two audio files VU PPM readings will help take the guesswork out of matching levels Right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window and choose Show VU PPM from the shortcut menu to toggle the display of the VU PPM meters VU PPM readings should fall near the 0 or reference mark 0 VU is merely a reference level and your signal may exceed 0 VU To prevent clipping keep an eye on your peak meters Peak levels should never exceed 0 dB You can use the Status tab in the Prefe
600. tton 3 From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu to enable MIDI input 4 Use the MIDI Triggers dialog to configure the triggers you want to use For more information see Assigning Sound Forge Pro events to MIDI triggers on page 272 Assigning Sound Forge Pro events to MIDI triggers 1 From the Options menu choose MIDI In Out and then choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu to enable MIDI input 2 From the Options menu choose MIDI Triggers to display the MIDI Triggers dialog 3 Select the Sound Forge Pro function that you want to trigger in the Event list For more information see MIDI trigger events on page 273 4 Click the radio button that corresponds to the type of trigger you want to use for the selected event Item Description None Click to assign no MIDI trigger to the selected event or to remove an existing trigger Note Click if you want to trigger the selected event with a MIDI note Specify the MIDI channel to which the trigger is assigned in the Channel box and specify the musical note that will trigger the event in the Note box Controller Click if you want to trigger the selected event using a MIDI controller Specify the MIDI channel to which the controller is assigned in the Channel box Use the Controller box to specify which controller will trigger the event and specify a value in the Value box 272 CHAPTER 18 Tip You can auto
601. tton The current VST preset is replaced with the settings stored in the fxp file Loading a bank of VST plug in presets 1 Click the Show Plug In Window button to display the effect s parameters in a separate window 2 Click the Open VST Bank button fei VST Plug In Preset female voice hard Ga R E im The Open VST Preset Bank dialog is displayed 3 Browse to the fxb file that you want to use 4 Click the Open button All presets for the current VST plug in are replaced with the settings stored in the fxb file and the first preset in the bank is loaded by default Previewing the effects chain Effects from the Plug In Chain are previewed in real time when you play back a file To hear the results of your effects chain without applying it to the sound file click the Play Normal button i in the data window s playbar You can select the Bypass button i in the Plug In Chain to bypass all effects in the chain or select the Bypass button for an effect to bypass individual effects Applying the effects chain Effects from the Plug In Chain are applied when you save the file Saving the plug in chain as a preset When you save a plug in chain the order of the effects in the chain and the settings for each plug in are saved with the chain Note Effect automation envelope points are not saved with presets If you are using effect automation envelopes and save a preset during playback the effec
602. u modify the project file after rendering the project data will no longer match the rendered file To edit a project using a path reference the project file and all media must be available on your computer Editing a media file s source project When your Sound Forge project uses source media files that are rendered with an embedded project path reference you can easily open the source project in the associated application if you need to edit the media By saving your project path reference when you render files in ACID Sound Forge or Vegas you can quickly access the media from Sound Forge via the Edit Source Project shortcut menu Note The project information in the rendered file is only a reference to a project file If you modify the source project file after rendering the project data will no longer match the rendered file To edit a project using a path reference the project file and all media must be available on your computer 1 Right click one of the following items e The waveform in a data window e A media file in the Explorer window 2 From the shortcut menu choose Edit Source Project An ACID Vegas or Sound Forge window will open with the source project If you are editing a source project using a computer other than the computer where the project was created then the editing computer must meet the following requirements e The software that was used to create the project must be installed and the project file exten
603. u to store text fields of summary information in addition to the audio and video data File types offering this feature include WAV AVI and ASF file formats You can view and edit these text fields FourCC Attribute Value lz Funky saxophone riff Enginee John Feith Copyright 1996 Sonic Foundry Inc Tutorial sound file for Sound Forge un bw Ne aleltanin Viewing and editing summary information The Summary window is used to view and edit the summary information stored in the file 1 From the View menu choose Metadata and then choose Summary Information from the submenu The Summary window appears 112 CHAPTER 6 2 Edit the summary information as needed You can insert additional summary information by right clicking in the Summary window and choosing additional summary fields from the Insert submenu Attribute Value ior T Wame Tit Funky saxophone riff ngineer John Feith 1996 Sonic Foundry Inc Tutorial sound file for Sound Forge Insert Archival Location Delete Commissioned Edit Creation date Clear All pares Dimensions Copy to Clipboard Dots Per inch Custom Copy to Clipboard oe Keywords Lightness Saving summary information You can save files containing summary information that have been edited in Sound Forge software with or without summary information 1 From the File menu choose Save As The Save As dialog appears 2 Select the Save metadata with file check box and cli
604. u want to delete the iXML chunk select all iXML objects right click a selected row and choose Delete e ForiXML and BEXT metadata objects that support multiline data press Ctrl Enter to add a line break Ifyou copy data from a BWF file to a file that does not contain BWF metadata the source metadata is updated as necessary and added to the destination file Ifyou copy data from a BWF file to a file that contains BWF metadata the metadata in the destination file is not overwritten The time stamp and date will be updated if sound data is inserted or removed before other data in the file You can use the Autoupdate BWF Origination Time Reference setting on the General Preferences tab to choose whether the OriginationTimeRef metadata is updated when adding or deleting sound data at the beginning of a Broadcast Wave Format file For more information see General tab on page 331 Ifyou want to copy metadata to the clipboard right click the window and choose Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu Ifyou want to customize the format for copying metadata to the clipboard right click the window and choose Custom Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu The Copy Metadata dialog is displayed to let you choose whether you want to copy the data as formatted text or delimited text set a delimiter and choose whether you want to include a header row Click OK to copy the metadata to the clipboard and you can then paste the information whereve
605. ubmenu or press Shift Z to force the active edge of a selection to the next zero crossing of the waveform The active edge of a selection is defined by the blinking cursor Press Home or End to change the active edge Before snapping After snapping the active right edge of the selection snaps to the nearest location where the waveform crosses the baseline Note The Editing tab in the Preferences dialog allows you to choose whether this is a negative positive or any zero crossing For more information see Editing tab on page 335 Extend to Next Zero Performing edits at zero crossings reduces the possibility of introducing glitches in your sound file From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Extend to Next Zero from the submenu or press Z to force both edges of a selection to the next zero crossing of the waveform Note The Editing tab in the Preferences dialog allows you to choose whether this is a negative positive or any zero crossing For more information see Editing tab on page 335 Extend Edge to Next Zero Performing edits at zero crossings reduces the possibility of introducing glitches in your sound file From the Edit menu choose Selection and then choose Extend Edge to Next Zero from the submenu or press Shift Z to force the active edge of a selection to the next zero crossing of the waveform NAVIGATING ZOOMING AND SELECTING 103 The active edge of a selection is defined by the blink
606. uired to store digital sound sample dumps may take a very long time when using the MIDI Sample Dump Standard SDS However when using the faster SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI protocol sample dumps can be performed many times faster GLOSSARY 377 Sample Dump Standard SDS The MIDI Sample Dump Standard is a way to transfer samples between music equipment Samples transferred with SDS are sent across MIDI cables at the MIDI data rate of 31 250 Hz baud SMDI is a much faster sample transfer method for musicians Sample Rate The Sample Rate also referred to as the Sampling Rate or Sampling Frequency is the number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates such as 44 100 Hz provide higher fidelity than lower sample rates such as 11 025 Hz However more storage space is required when using higher sample rates In the following example each red dot represents one sample Because the lower waveform is represented by twice as many samples as the top waveform the samples are able to better approximate the original waveform Sample Size See Bit Depth on page 367 Sample Value The Sample Value also referred to as sample amplitude is the number stored by a single sample The number stored by a single sample e In 32 bit audio these values range from 2147483648 to 2147483647 e In 24 bit audio they range from 8388608 to 8388607 e n 16 bit audio they range from 32768 to 32767 e In 8 bit audio the
607. uler Level The level ruler is the area on a data window to the left of the waveform display It shows the vertical axis units as a percentage or in decibels Ruler Time The time ruler is the area on a data window above the waveform display It shows the horizontal axis units as well as marker region and loop tags Ruler Tags Ruler tags are the small tab shaped controls on the time ruler that represent the location of markers regions and loop points in the waveform display Sample The word sample is used in many different and often confusing ways when talking about digital sound Here are some of the different meanings e Adiscrete point in time which a sound signal is divided into when digitizing For example an audio CD ROM contains 44 100 samples per second Each sample is really only a number that contains the amplitude value of a waveform measured over time e Asound that has been recorded in a digital format used by musicians who make short recordings of musical instruments to be used for composition and performance of music or sound effects These recordings are called samples In this Help system we try to use sound file instead of sample whenever referring to a digital recording e The act of recording sound digitally i e to sample an instrument means to digitize and store it Sample Dump A sample dump is the process of transferring sample data between music equipment Because of the large amounts of data req
608. und file This command offers the flexibility of using multiple playlists for the same sound file 1 From the Edit menu choose Regions List or Playlist Cutlist and then choose Open from the submenu Tip Right click the Regions List or Playlist Cutlist window and choose Open from the shortcut menu 2 Use the Open Regions Playlist dialog to locate an existing regions playlist file 3 Specify the type of regions you want to import from the Files of type drop down list e Choose Playlist File sfl to import a Sound Forge regions playlist file e Choose Session 8 File prm to import a file that supports both Session 8 and Sound Forge regions e Choose Windows Media Script File txt to import a file that includes Windows Media script commands e Choose Text File Tab delimited txt to import a plain text file e Choose Wave File wav to import markers and regions from another sound file 4 Click the Open button Note Opening a new regions playlist file will clear the current regions and playlist entries Make sure you have saved the current regions playlist before continuing Copying regions to the clipboard From the Edit menu choose Regions List and choose Copy onto Clipboard to copy the text of the Regions List onto the clipboard for use with a text editor Editing a regions list in a text editor allows you to make an annotated list that you can print for reference Tip Right click the Regions List and choose Copy onto Clip
609. und file at a decreased bit depth results in audible distortion referred to as quantization error 1 Open a 16 bit file 2 From the Process menu choose Bit Depth and then choose Bit Depth Converter from the submenu The Bit Depth Converter dialog appears From the Bit depth drop down list choose 8 bit If desired choose an option from the Dither drop down list For more information see Dither on page 109 If desired choose a Noise shaping type For more information see Noise shaping on page 109 Click OK oa E Note There are no rules regarding maintaining audio quality when decreasing bit depth Experiment with the Dither and Noise shaping controls to determine the optimum settings for each audio file 108 CHAPTER 6 Understanding dither and noise shaping You can adjust Dither and Noise shaping settings when decreasing a file s bit depth Dither The Dither value determines the randomness of the dither generated noise used to mask quantization distortion resulting from conversion to a lower bit depth This drop down list requires you to select from several shapes each of which roughly describes the pattern that would be produced if you plotted a graph with the dither amplitude on the X axis and the probability of the dither values on the Y axis As is frequently the case when working with audio you should experiment with dither values to yield the best results However keep the following information in mind Sett
610. ursor returns to the beginning of the selection and a new take is recorded Each take is added to the Undo Redo History window Click the Record or Stop E button to end recording Clicking Pause Il suspends recording clearing the selection and moving the cursor to the end of the recorded data When you pause recording the recording device remains armed You can click the Play button j in the Undo Redo History window to preview individual takes or you can use the Undo and Redo commands to cycle through your recorded takes while previewing in the data window Reviewing recorded takes Click the Play button to review your recording Click the Stop button E to end playback If you ve recorded multiple takes you can click the Play button in the Undo Redo History window to preview individual takes or you can use the Undo and Redo commands to cycle through your recorded takes while previewing in the data window RECORDING 147 Recording audio automatically You can set up recording to begin automatically from the selected input device using a timer by detecting when audio exceeds a set threshold or when MIDI timecode is detected When your re using threshold triggered recording you can choose to record continuously set a buffer size and the recorded audio will fill the buffer discarding the oldest data as new data is recorded If you want to save data from the buffer you can save it to disk Note The
611. us Ind wv Time Ruler k x Time Zoom m vo Overview In w Video Strip e Ww Level Ruler y Level Zoom S Serollbar e Lol Lema Ww CD Tracks iq Data Window Only gt Set as Default Editing pause time for a disc at once CD Pause time is the space between CD tracks This space may contain silence as in a standard commercially produced CD or can contain audio as in a live performance captured on CD The Red Book standard calls for two seconds of pause time but you can edit the default pause time on the CD Settings tab of the Preferences dialog When you hover in the pause time between two tracks Sound Forge displays the pause time You can edit the pause time in several ways e Hover your mouse between two tracks in the CD layout bar The pause time is displayed in a ToolTip Double click the ToolTip and the display changes to an edit box where you can type a new value i D0 00 02 000 e Right click between two tracks and choose a command from the shortcut menu Command Description Select Pause Time Creates a time selection equal to the pause time between tracks Set to Default Pause Time Moves all tracks upstream so the default pause time exists between the tracks where you clicked Edit Pause Time Changes the pause time display to an edit box where you can type a new value 316 CHAPTER 23 Drag either end of the track to adjust the
612. use 99 Allow Undo past Save preference 61 85 Always open dropped files in new window preference 80 83 331 Amplitude Modulation effect 45 226 analog vs digital levels 135 animating video strip 290 Apply Plug In Chain window 214 applying effects automation 224 arguments 251 Arm button 35 attaching video to audio files 292 audio increasing volume 204 locking to CD tracks 315 mixing from the clipboard 84 normalizing 196 198 processing 181 204 repairing 163 166 reversing 203 setting volume 204 synthesizing 166 169 Audio CD Time button 42 Index audio editing copying 79 cutting selections 81 82 deleting selections 82 drag and drop 160 163 mixing 83 85 overwriting 157 pasting 80 81 repeating an operation 159 replicating 158 trimming cropping 83 audio event locator configuring 93 scrubbing with 93 Audio Restoration plug in 46 166 audio synthesis DTMF MF tones 166 FM synthesis 167 168 simple 169 Auto Preview button 63 Auto Region tool button 46 musical time intervals 124 rapid sound attacks 123 Auto Ripple 175 Auto Trim Crop process 44 185 186 Auto crossfade Mix with selection preference 83 Automatic Crossfades command 176 automatically labeling markers 337 automating effect parameters 223 automation effects 224 auto scrolling 67 auto snapping disabling at high magnifications 101 Batch Converter button 46 47 converting files 255 creating or editing batch jobs
613. use to monitor your audio levels You can also choose to display VU PPM peak program meters a phase scope and a mono compatibility meter The peak meters display instantaneous levels during playback to help you determine the loudest level in your audio signal and whether the signal is clipping To prevent clipping keep an eye on your peak meters Peak levels should never exceed 0 dB You can use the Status tab in the Preferences dialog to calibrate the VU PPM meters to their associated levels on the peak meters and adjust the VU meters sensitivity MONITORING LEVELS IN DIGITAL AUDIO 135 Channel E Mono compatibility meter Phase scope Peak meter VU PPM Meters Showing or hiding the Channel Meters window From the View menu choose Channel Meters to open or close the channel meters window You can dock the Channel Meters window on any edge of the Sound Forge workspace Showing or hiding meters You can display a peak meter VU PPM a phase scope and mono compatibility meter for each channel To toggle the display of each meter right click the Channel Meters or Hardware Meters window and choose a command from the shortcut menu A check mark appears to indicate which meters are currently visible e Formore information about VU PPM meters see VU and Peak Program Meters on page 138 e Formore information about phase scopes see Phase Scope on page 139 e Formore information about mono compatibility meters
614. ustomizing 329 window 30 329 time ruler optimizing scaling 96 overview 93 restoring default level 96 zooming with Magnify tool 97 Time Stretch process 44 203 See also lastique Timestretch process timecode SMPTE 361 Times amp Frames button 42 Toggle Selection command 99 396 INDEX toolbars See also entries of specific toolbars customizing 39 341 displaying 39 340 docking 40 floating 40 Tools toolbar 46 tools See entries of specific tools ToolTips showing hiding 47 340 using 47 total buffer size 325 track lists adjusting track lengths 318 adjusting track position 318 CD Text 318 321 322 copying to clipboard 320 displaying 318 Emph check box 319 exporting as text files 320 ISRC codes 319 overview 54 pause time 318 printing 321 Prot check box 319 reordering tracks 318 track at once CD burning burning CDs 308 309 closing CDs 309 defined 307 mono tracks 307 sample rate correction 307 Transport toolbar 41 Triangular dither 187 Trigger from MIDI Timecode button 43 triggering markers with MIDI commands 120 triggering playback from MIDI timecode 271 triggering regions with MIDI commands 122 Trim Crop button 40 trimming CD tracks 315 318 events 174 selections 83 185 186 troubleshooting Acoustic Mirror 242 MIDI keyboard 267 SCSI SMDI 269 system performance 325 326 tuning sonograms 302 tutorials 26 Undo button 40 Undo Re
615. ut initiating a new scan This is useful when applying scan levels from a different selection or file to the current selection thereby allowing identical gains to be applied to multiple files This option can also be used to scan a selection of an audio file containing the loudest or most constant levels and then apply that scan to normalize the entire file Pan Expand Pan Expand allows you to create panning effects and stereo compression expansion in selections Creating a pan A pan is used to control the apparent position of a sound between the left and right channels of a stereo file 1 2 3 4 Open the Musicbed pca file From the Process menu choose Pan Expand The Pan Expand dialog is displayed From the Preset drop down list choose Left to right linear The pan envelope is displayed on the graph Pan Expand Example music bed Preset Gx Cancel Bypass Process mode Pan preserve stereo separation 0 0 dB est TT Abeba Th Thy Hard left at start of audio Center T T NI Output gain Right Hard right at end of audio 60 to 20 dB 0 25 4p 50 Fo 75 0 100 4 Show wave Mi O Sour Reset Envel C Mono source _ Reset Envelope The pan envelope is More displayed on the graph 00 00 00 000 00 00 09 858 00 00 09 858 Click OK The file is converted to stereo and a left to right pan is added 198 CHAPTER 13 5 Play the file The audio source seems to mo
616. ve from the left channel to the right channel during playback Note A pan by nature cannot be created ina mono file Creating a custom pan You can create complex custom panning effects using up to 16 envelope points 1 Open the Musicbed pca file 2 From the Process menu choose Pan Expand The Pan Expand dialog is displayed 3 Configure the pan envelope using the following controls e Click the envelope to create a new point Drag a point to move it to a new position e Double click or right click a point to delete it e Right click an envelope segment and choose a new fade type from the shortcut menu For more information see Envelope graphs on page 49 4 Click OK The custom pan is applied to the file Pan Expand controls The following controls are located in the Pan Expand dialog Control Description Process mode The Process mode drop down list contains the following options Pan preserve stereo separation Applies the pan effect without mixing the channels thereby simulating the spectral positioning of stereo recordings e Pan mix channels before panning Mixes the left and right channels prior to applying panning effects e Stereo expand Allows you to contract or expand the image of stereo audio from dead center mono to completely panned wide no center channel e Mix mid side MS recording to left and right channels Simulates a recording technique in which one microphone is pointed directly at the sourc
617. vorites MENU ec e eee ec ceeeee ee eee ee eeees 208 Using the Plug In Chain 0 ccc ccc ccc cece eee e reece renee erreeseereeees 209 Creating a plugin ehaile ouauon dese tanr er tenre eE neous EE e win aee 209 Adding removing or arranging plug ins ON a chain ssssesessssessssessrsrsrseseese 210 Setting a plug in s properties ssessessessessssessessersersesecseeseessesseseesee 211 Loading an effects chain or plug in preset 0 ccc cece cece eee nee e tenet eee eeennes 211 Previewing the effects chain sux nddds tc edandadyuns desihadeesaedsdawiekueadowaktadaemavews 212 Applying NS CMeCts chai eessen roer arenen e ert one AA E EI 212 Saving the plug in chain as a Preset ccc ccc cece teen eee eee eeeeeees 212 Saving the settings from an individual plug in as a preset cece cece cette eee eens 213 Pie th C hain S OMCUNS 5 s0y cusweredorean ew hones cane EEEE ENEE EEEE EERE EERE 213 Applying a plug in chain wx s 00050 so 0ve seeder nunlns ov ba bare ca bees nade bad wasees enews 214 Creating a DIUG IN CHAIN i420 seencesnciteeesccce eu tibusa desta EONAR ERTEAN abs 214 Adding removing or arranging plug ins ON a chain cece eee eee eee teenies 214 Setting a plug in s properties 2 ccc cece eee eee e eee eee ee eeeeeees 215 16 TABLE OF CONTENTS Loading an effects chain or plug in preset ccc ccc cece cece eee e eee e ee eennees 215 Previewing tie effects Chain visecc
618. w and choose Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu File Properties Edit Oram Flies Sony sound Forge Pro 10 0 a n eee eee an iam eh 734 Copy to Clipboard NS Custom Copy to Clipboard J Tr oo Audio format sony If you want to customize the format for copying file properties to the clipboard right click the File Properties window and choose Custom Copy to Clipboard from the shortcut menu The Copy Metadata dialog is displayed to let you choose whether you want to copy the data as formatted text or delimited text set a delimiter and choose whether you want to include a header row Copy Metadata Copy formatted text Copy delimited text V Indude tite row Indude header row Indude header underscores OK Cancel Click OK to copy the file s properties to the clipboard and you can then paste the information wherever you need it Changing the sample rate The sample rate is the number of samples per second measured in hertz Hz used to record audio You can specify sample rates from 2 000 Hz to 192 000 Hz Typical sample rates are stored as presets in the Sample rate drop down list In addition you can increase or decrease the sample rate of an existing audio file 1 Open and play the Voiceover pca file This file is located in the same folder as the application Right click the Sample Rate status box and choose 48 000 from the shortcut menu
619. want to use 1 or 2 dither bits 1 works well for most applications When MBIT is selected in the Dither mode drop down list you can choose a setting from the Dither amount drop down list to control the amount of dithering applied Normal works well for most applications The None and Low settings can leave some nonlinear quantization distortion or dither noise modulation behind The High setting can eliminate nonlinear quantization distortion at the expense of a higher noise floor Auto blank Select this check box if you want the plug in to suppress dithering noise during silent portions of your audio Minimize peaks Select this check box if you want to suppress peaks in the dither noise signal Silence harmonics Select this check box if dithering distorts the timbre of your audio When the check box is selected harmonic quantization distortion is moved away from the overtones of audible frequencies 3 Click OK Channel Converter The Channel Converter is used to change the number of channels in an audio file The Channel Converter dialog can also be used to reverse the channels of a stereo file or intermix the channels of a multichannel file to create interesting panning effects Tip To perform quick channel conversion without specifying the mix use the Audio channels box on the File Properties window or right click the Channels box in the status bar and choose a setting from the shortcut menu For more information see Editing file
620. ware should automatically detect CD lengths or to set a default CD length For more information see CD Settings tab on page 341 Ifthe active data window s sample rate is not supported by your audio hardware the output will be resampled to a supported rate for playback when you re using an ASIO audio device During playback the Sample Rate box in the Status Bar is displayed in italics to indicate that the output has been resampled p 44 100 Hz 24bit Mono 00 00 05 477 843 899 7 MB Hardware Sample Rate Resampled Double click the Sample Rate Bit Depth Channels or Total Length box in the status bar to edit properties quickly Note You cannot modify file properties for musical instrument files Editing file properties in the File Properties window You can edit file properties in the File Properties window 1 From the View menu choose File Properties The File Properties window appears Tip You can also access the File Properties window by performing either of the following actions e Right click the waveform display and choose Properties Press Alt Enter CHANGING FILE PROPERTIES AND FORMATS 105 2 Edit the file properties as needed File Properties Attribute video pixel aspect Item File name Location File size File attributes Last saved File type Audio format Audio sample rate Audio bit rate Audio bit depth Audio channels Audio length Video format Video attributes Video
621. waveform the carrier is modulated by the output of another waveform the modulator to create a new waveform If the frequency of the modulator is low the carrier will be slowly detuned over time However if the frequency of the modulator is high the carrier will be modulated so quickly that many additional frequencies or sidebands are created In Sound Forge software up to four waveforms operators can be used in a variety of configurations Depending on the configuration an operator can be a carrier a modulator or a simple unmodulated waveform Frequency Spectrum The frequency spectrum of a signal refers to its range of frequencies In audio the audible frequency range is between 20 Hz and 20 000 Hz The frequency spectrum sometimes refers to the distribution of these frequencies For example bass heavy sounds have a large frequency content in the low end 20 Hz 200 Hz of the spectrum Head Related Transfer Function HRTF Sounds are perceived differently depending on the direction the sound comes from This occurs because of the echoes bouncing from your shoulders and nose and the shape of your ears A head related transfer function contains the frequency and phase response information required to make a sound appear to originate from a certain direction in 3 dimensional space Hertz Hz The unit of measurement for frequency or cycles per second CPS GLOSSARY 371 High Pass Filter A high pass filter attenuates all
622. while dragging to toggle mix paste and CD track drag and drop modes Tip f you want the Fade In and Fade Out curves to pay attention to the destination selection and file length when mixing between files select the Auto crossfade Mix with selection check box on the Editing tab of the Preferences dialog GETTING STARTED 83 5 When you release the mouse button to drop the selection the Mix Replace dialog appears If you want to bypass the Mix Replace dialog hold Shift when you release the mouse button To customize your mix settings choose a setting from the Preset drop down list in the Mix Replace dialog or adjust the controls as needed Item Source Destination Fade In Proportional Fade Lengths Fade Out More Description Drag the Source fader to adjust the volume of the selection you want to mix Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the sustain portion of the wet gain envelope in the data window Select the Invert Data check box to invert the source audio at the baseline reverse the phase Inverting data can help match transitions and compare the phase relationship of the two sound files Drag the Destination fader to adjust the volume of the selection you want to mix over Changing this setting has the same effect as dragging the sustain portion of the dry gain envelope in the data window Select the Invert Data check box to invert the destination audio at the baseline reverse the pha
623. window Go to End Moves the cursor to the end of the file LEARNING THE SOUND FORGE PRO WORKSPACE 41 Navigation toolbar The Navigation toolbar contains buttons used to navigate within the current data window a p gt 13 Go To Displays the Go To dialog and allows you to quickly Zoom In Full Magnifies the selected area to a 24 1 ratio Zoom Normal Resets the audio data to its original magnification Zoom Selection Maximizes the selection vertically and horizontally Custom Zoom 1 Sets the audio data to a custom time magnification level Custom Zoom 2 Sets the audio data to a custom time magnification level Mark In Marks the in point of a new selection For more information see Selecting audio during playback on page 99 Mark Out Marks the out point of a new selection For more information see Selecting audio during playback on page 99 move the cursor to a specific point in a file For more information see Setting the cursor position on page 91 Cursor Center Centers the display with the cursor displayed in the center of the data window Cursor to Selection Start Moves the cursor to the beginning of the selection Tempo box F F F Cursor to Selection End Moves the cursor to the end of the selection Center Sustaining Start Moves the cursor to the beginning of the sustaining loop Center Sustaining End Moves the cursor to the end of the sustaining loop Center Releas
624. window Alt 3 Show set input focus to the Time Display window Alt 4 Show set input focus to the Channel Meters window Alt 5 Show set input focus to the Loudness Meters window Alt 6 Show set input focus to the Hardware Meters window Alt 7 Show set input focus to the Undo Redo History window Alt 8 Show set input focus to the Spectrum Analysis window Alt 9 Show set input focus to the Plug In Chain window Ctrl Alt 0 Show set input focus to the Plug In Manager window Ctrl Alt 1 Show set input focus to the Keyboard window Ctrl Alt 2 Show set input focus to the Script Editor window Ctrl Alt 3 Show set input focus to the Loop Tuner window Ctrl Alt 4 Show set input focus to the Record Options window Ctrl Alt 5 Show set input focus to the Regions List Ctrl Alt M O Show set input focus to the Playlist Cutlist window Ctrl Alt M 1 Show set input focus to the Track List window Ctrl Alt M 2 Show set input focus to the ACID Properties window Ctrl Alt M 3 Show set input focus to the Broadcast Wave window Ctrl Alt M 4 Show set input focus to the CD Information window Ctrl Alt M 5 Show set input focus to the Sampler Loops window Ctrl Alt M 6 Show set input focus to the Summary Information window Ctrl Alt M 7 Tile the data windows vertically Shift F4 Restore the Sound Forge application window Alt F5 Recall window layout Alt Shift D then press 0 9 Save window layout Ctrl Alt D then press 0 9 Load default window layout Alt Shift D then press D Load stereo record
625. window to select all data Select this check box if you do not want selections to snap to time or zero crossings when the data window zoom ratio is less than 1 4 This is useful if you commonly zoom in fully to adjust selection points manually yet still want to use automatic snapping when zoomed out Select this check box if you want the loop region to always match the current time selection Clicking to position the cursor in a data window will clear the loop region When no loop region exists and looped playback is enabled the entire data window will play looped When the check box is selected the behavior is similar to Sound Forge 8 0 Clear the check box if you want to be able to position the cursor without clearing the loop region Select this check box if you want the loop bar in a data window to be updated when you mark the beginning or end of a selection When the check box is cleared the loop bar isn t updated until after you ve marked both ends of the selection This check box is not available when Force loop bar to match selection is selected When this check box is selected the Fade In and Fade Out settings for the Mix tool will pay attention to the destination selection and file length when mixing between files This setting has no effect in the following situations e When the material you are mixing does not overlap either end of the destination selection or the end of the destination file e When no selection e
626. wing 292 samplers 259 extracting audio from CDs button 46 creating markers for each index change 76 creating regions for each track 76 from dialog 76 77 from Explorer window 65 previewing CD tracks 77 refreshing dialog 77 extracting regions to new files 46 124 fade curves 225 fade envelopes See also crossfading events 176 INDEX 387 fade in 194 fade out 194 graphic fade 192 193 Fade In button 44 Fade Out button 44 fade types 178 faders resetting 48 shortcuts 48 using 48 Fast Fourier Transform FFT 295 Favorites folder in Explorer window 64 file formats converting 112 file properties copying to clipboard 107 editing 105 112 editing extended summary information 113 editing in File Properties window 105 editing in status bar 107 editing summary information 112 viewing extended summary information 113 viewing summary information 112 window 30 files automatically previewing 63 channels 111 copying data to new files 71 creating CD tracks from 312 314 creating from Cutlist 133 creating from Playlist 133 creating from regions 124 deleting recovered files 89 detaching video 292 editing source project 78 embedding additional information 113 Explorer window 63 65 opening 61 63 playing 66 previewing 63 publishing to Web 89 recovering after crash 89 saving 72 saving all 75 saving metadata with 113 Statistics 68 video 66 Find tool 46 163 finding and repairing aud
627. xists in the destination e When you mix data within a single data window When the check box is cleared Fade In and Fade Out setting are not affected by the selection in the Mix destination Drag this slider to specify the time before a window underneath the cursor becomes active during drag and drop operations CUSTOMIZING SOUND FORGE PRO SOFTWARE 335 Option Snap to zero crossing slope Zero cross scan time Zero cross level threshold Pencil tool maximum zoom ratio JKL shuttle speed Global media cache Wet Gain dB Dry Gain dB Fade In Fade Out Labels tab Description Use this drop down list to specify how zero crossings are detected when you choose Snap to Zero e Negative Slope Zero crossings are detected only on a negative slope Any Crossing Zero crossings are detected on both positive and negative slopes e Positive Slope Zero crossings are detected only on a positive slope Tip t is usually best to use either Positive Slope or Negative Slope so that noticeable pops and clicks are not generated by cutting data Specify the maximum time in samples that will be used to search for the next zero crossing Specify the sample value below which data will be considered a zero crossing Note Setting this value above zero can compensate for DC offset However if possible you should remove DC offset first Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the maximum zoom ratio at which
628. y range from 128 to 127 The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or 0 cB Sampler A sampler is a device that records sounds digitally Although in theory your sound card is a sampler the term usually refers to a device used to trigger and play back samples while changing the sample pitch Secure Digital Music Initiative SDMI The Secure Digital Music Initiative SDMI is a consortium of recording industry and technology companies organized to develop standards for the secure distribution of digital music The SDMI specification will answer consumer demand for convenient accessibility to quality digital music enable copyright protection for artists work and enable technology and music companies to build successful businesses SCSI MIDI Device Interface SMDI SMDI is a standardized protocol for music equipment communication Instead of using the slower standard MIDI serial protocol it uses a SCSI bus for transferring information Because of its soeed SMDI is often used for sample dumps 378 APPENDIX E Shortcut Menu A context sensitive menu that appears when you click on certain areas of the screen The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being clicked on as well as the state of the program As with any menu you can select an item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation Shortcut menus are used frequently in Sound Forge software for quick access to many commands Sign Bi

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Equipos GC, MSD y ALS de Agilent  Design und Entwicklung eines Testframeworks für JLiPSD  IAN 104473 - Lidl Service Website  RUE-111 manual_v1.00_8-8  EMC Documentum Dynamic Delivery Services  Bedienungshandbuch  Product Information  urano - Kälte Berlin  Trane YCZ035F1 User's Manual    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file